Technical reference manual

Line distance protection IED

REL 670

Innovation from ABB

 Document ID: 1MRK506275-UEN
Issued: December 2007
Revision: B
IED product version: 1.1

© Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved

COPYRIGHT
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT
THAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL
PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN
PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD
PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED.

THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN

CASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY
REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESS
BELOW.

THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR

THE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE
DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN
THE INTEREST OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO
ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST
TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT
THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SW
PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT.

Manufacturer:

ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås
Sweden
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00
Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
www.abb.com/substationautomation
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................27
Introduction to the technical reference manual.................................27
About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................27
About the technical reference manual.........................................28
Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM).......................29
Introduction.............................................................................29
Principle of operation..............................................................29
Input and output signals.........................................................32
Function block........................................................................32
Setting parameters.................................................................32
Technical data........................................................................32
Intended audience.......................................................................33
Related documents......................................................................33
Revision notes.............................................................................34

Section 2 Local human-machine interface.....................................35

Human machine interface.................................................................35
Small size graphic HMI.....................................................................37
Introduction..................................................................................37
Design.........................................................................................37
Medium size graphic HMI.................................................................38
Introduction..................................................................................38
Design.........................................................................................38
Keypad.............................................................................................39
LED...................................................................................................41
Introduction..................................................................................41
Status indication LEDs................................................................41
Indication LEDs...........................................................................41
LHMI related functions......................................................................42
Introduction..................................................................................42
General setting parameters.........................................................42
Status indication LEDs................................................................43
Design....................................................................................43
Function block........................................................................43
Input and output signals.........................................................43
Indication LEDs...........................................................................44
Introduction.............................................................................44
Design....................................................................................44
Function block........................................................................51

REL 670 Technical reference manual 1

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Input and output signals.........................................................51

Setting parameters.................................................................51

Section 3 Basic IED functions........................................................55

Analog inputs....................................................................................55
Introduction..................................................................................55
Principle of operation...................................................................55
Function block.............................................................................56
Setting parameters......................................................................56
Authorization.....................................................................................62
Authorization handling in the tool................................................63
Authorization handling in the IED................................................68
Self supervision with internal event list.............................................68
Introduction..................................................................................68
Principle of operation...................................................................68
Internal signals.......................................................................70
Run-time model......................................................................72
Function block.............................................................................73
Output signals..............................................................................73
Setting parameters......................................................................73
Technical data.............................................................................74
Time synchronization........................................................................74
Introduction..................................................................................74
Principle of operation...................................................................74
General concepts...................................................................74
Real Time Clock (RTC) operation..........................................75
Synchronization alternatives..................................................76
Function block.............................................................................80
Output signals..............................................................................80
Setting parameters......................................................................80
Technical data.............................................................................83
Parameter setting groups.................................................................84
Introduction..................................................................................84
Principle of operation...................................................................84
Function block.............................................................................85
Input and output signals..............................................................85
Setting parameters......................................................................86
Test mode functionality.....................................................................87
Introduction..................................................................................87
Principle of operation...................................................................87
Function block.............................................................................88
Input and output signals..............................................................88
Setting parameters......................................................................89
IED identifiers...................................................................................89

2 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Table of contents

Introduction..................................................................................89
Setting parameters......................................................................90
Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)..............................................90
Introduction..................................................................................90
Principle of operation...................................................................90
Function block.............................................................................91
Input and output signals..............................................................91
Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)..........................................91
Introduction..................................................................................91
Principle of operation...................................................................92
Function block.............................................................................92
Input and output signals..............................................................92
Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)..................................................93
Introduction..................................................................................93
Principle of operation...................................................................93
Function block.............................................................................93
Input and output signals..............................................................93
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI).............................................94
Introduction..................................................................................94
Principle of operation...................................................................94
Function block.............................................................................94
Input and output signals..............................................................95
Setting parameters......................................................................95
Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)..............................................97
Introduction..................................................................................97
Principle of operation...................................................................97
Function block.............................................................................98
Input and output signals..............................................................98
Setting parameters......................................................................98
Authority status (AUTS)....................................................................99
Introduction..................................................................................99
Principle of operation...................................................................99
Function block...........................................................................100
Output signals............................................................................100
Setting parameters....................................................................100
Goose binary receive......................................................................101
Function block...........................................................................101
Input and output signals............................................................101
Setting parameters....................................................................103

Section 4 Differential protection...................................................105

High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)..........................105
Introduction................................................................................105
Principle of operation.................................................................105

REL 670 Technical reference manual 3

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Logic diagram.......................................................................106
Function block...........................................................................106
Input and output signals............................................................106
Setting parameters....................................................................107
Technical data...........................................................................107

Section 5 Impedance protection ..................................................109

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS,
21) .................................................................................................109
Introduction................................................................................109
Principle of operation.................................................................110
Full scheme measurement...................................................110
Impedance characteristic.....................................................111
Minimum operating current...................................................115
Measuring principles............................................................116
Directional lines....................................................................118
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................119
Function block...........................................................................123
Input and output signals............................................................123
Setting parameters....................................................................124
Technical data...........................................................................127
Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines (PDIS) .............................................................128
Introduction................................................................................128
Principle of operation.................................................................129
Full scheme measurement...................................................129
Impedance characteristic.....................................................129
Minimum operating current...................................................133
Measuring principles............................................................133
Directionality for series compensation..................................135
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................137
Function block...........................................................................141
Input and output signals............................................................141
Setting parameters....................................................................142
Technical data...........................................................................147
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21.....148
Introduction................................................................................148
Principle of operation.................................................................149
Full scheme measurement...................................................149
Impedance characteristic.....................................................149
Basic operation characteristics.............................................150
Theory for operation.............................................................152
Function block...........................................................................163
Input and output signals............................................................163

4 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Table of contents

Setting parameters....................................................................164
Technical data...........................................................................166
Mho impedance supervision logic..................................................167
Introduction................................................................................167
Principle of operation.................................................................168
Fault inception detection......................................................168
Function block...........................................................................169
Input and output signals............................................................169
Setting parameters....................................................................170
Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21).....................171
Introduction................................................................................171
Principle of operation.................................................................172
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................173
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................175
Three phase faults................................................................176
Load encroachment..............................................................177
Minimum operate currents....................................................180
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................181
Function block...........................................................................185
Input and output signals............................................................185
Setting parameters....................................................................186
Technical data...........................................................................187
Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho..................187
Introduction................................................................................188
Principle of operation.................................................................188
Full scheme measurement...................................................188
Impedance characteristic.....................................................189
Minimum operating current...................................................190
Measuring principles............................................................191
Directional lines....................................................................192
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................194
Function block...........................................................................197
Input and output signals............................................................197
Setting parameters....................................................................197
Technical data...........................................................................198
Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS,
21)..................................................................................................199
Introduction................................................................................199
Principle of operation.................................................................200
The phase selection function................................................200
Function block...........................................................................210
Input and output signals............................................................210
Setting parameters....................................................................211

REL 670 Technical reference manual 5

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................212
Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)................................................212
Introduction................................................................................213
Principle of operation.................................................................213
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic,
ZDM......................................................................................213
Additional distance protection directional function for
earth faults, ZDA .................................................................215
Function block...........................................................................217
Input and output signals............................................................218
Setting parameters....................................................................219
Phase preference logic...................................................................220
Introduction................................................................................220
Principle of operation.................................................................220
Function block...........................................................................223
Input and output signals............................................................223
Setting parameters....................................................................223
Technical data...........................................................................224
Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)................................................225
Introduction................................................................................225
Principle of operation.................................................................225
Resistive reach in forward direction.....................................226
Resistive reach in reverse direction.....................................227
Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction..................228
Basic detection logic.............................................................228
Operating and inhibit conditions...........................................230
Function block...........................................................................231
Input and output signals............................................................231
Setting parameters....................................................................232
Technical data...........................................................................233
Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)........................................................234
Introduction................................................................................234
Principle of operation.................................................................234
Communication and tripping logic........................................234
Blocking logic.......................................................................235
Function block...........................................................................237
Input and output signals............................................................237
Setting parameters....................................................................238
Technical data...........................................................................238
Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)......................................................238
Introduction................................................................................238
Principle of operation.................................................................239
Function block...........................................................................242
Input and output signals............................................................242

6 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Table of contents

Setting parameters....................................................................243
Technical data...........................................................................244
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based
(SFCV) ...........................................................................................244
Introduction................................................................................244
Principle of operation.................................................................244
Function block...........................................................................247
Input and output signals............................................................247
Setting parameters....................................................................247
Technical data...........................................................................248

Section 6 Current protection.........................................................249

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)................249
Introduction................................................................................249
Principle of operation.................................................................249
Function block...........................................................................250
Input and output signals............................................................250
Setting parameters....................................................................250
Technical data...........................................................................251
Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)................251
Introduction................................................................................252
Principle of operation.................................................................252
Function block...........................................................................256
Input and output signals............................................................256
Setting parameters....................................................................258
Technical data...........................................................................264
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)...........265
Introduction................................................................................265
Principle of operation.................................................................266
Function block...........................................................................266
Input and output signals............................................................266
Setting parameters....................................................................267
Technical data...........................................................................267
Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N).........267
Introduction................................................................................268
Principle of operation.................................................................268
Operating quantity within the function..................................268
Internal polarizing facility of the function..............................269
External polarizing facility for EFGround Fault function.......271
Base quantities within the function.......................................272
Internal EFGround Fault function structure..........................272
Four residual overcurrent stages..........................................272
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparision stage ..............................................273

REL 670 Technical reference manual 7

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Second harmonic blocking element.....................................276

Switch on to fault feature......................................................278
Function block...........................................................................281
Input and output signals............................................................281
Setting parameters....................................................................282
Technical data...........................................................................289
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
(PSDE, 67N) ..................................................................................290
Introduction................................................................................290
Principle of operation.................................................................291
Introduction...........................................................................291
Function block...........................................................................297
Input and output signals............................................................298
Setting parameters....................................................................300
Technical data...........................................................................303
Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)..........304
Introduction................................................................................304
Principle of operation.................................................................305
Function block...........................................................................308
Input and output signals............................................................308
Setting parameters....................................................................308
Technical data...........................................................................309
Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)........................................310
Introduction................................................................................310
Principle of operation.................................................................310
Function block...........................................................................314
Input and output signals............................................................314
Setting parameters....................................................................315
Technical data...........................................................................316
Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB).....................................................316
Introduction................................................................................317
Principle of operation.................................................................317
Function block...........................................................................318
Input and output signals............................................................318
Setting parameters....................................................................319
Technical data...........................................................................319
Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)...................................319
Introduction................................................................................320
Principle of operation.................................................................320
Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker..................323
Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................323
Function block...........................................................................324
Input and output signals............................................................324

8 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Table of contents

Setting parameters....................................................................324
Technical data...........................................................................325
Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)..............................325
Introduction................................................................................325
Principle of operation.................................................................326
Low pass filtering..................................................................328
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................329
Function block...........................................................................330
Input and output signals............................................................330
Setting parameters....................................................................331
Technical data...........................................................................332
Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)................................333
Introduction................................................................................333
Principle of operation.................................................................334
Low pass filtering..................................................................336
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................336
Function block...........................................................................337
Input and output signals............................................................338
Setting parameters....................................................................338
Technical data...........................................................................340
Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)..............................................340
Introduction................................................................................340
Principle of operation.................................................................340
Function block...........................................................................342
Input and output signals............................................................342
Setting parameters....................................................................343
Technical data...........................................................................343

Section 7 Voltage protection........................................................345

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)...............................345
Introduction................................................................................345
Principle of operation.................................................................345
Measurement principle.........................................................346
Time delay............................................................................346
Blocking................................................................................349
Design..................................................................................351
Function block...........................................................................352
Input and output signals............................................................352
Setting parameters....................................................................353
Technical data...........................................................................356
Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59).................................356
Introduction................................................................................357
Principle of operation.................................................................357
Measurement principle.........................................................358

REL 670 Technical reference manual 9

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Time delay............................................................................358
Blocking................................................................................360
Design..................................................................................360
Function block...........................................................................362
Input and output signals............................................................362
Setting parameters....................................................................363
Technical data...........................................................................365
Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N).................366
Introduction................................................................................366
Principle of operation.................................................................366
Measurement principle.........................................................367
Time delay............................................................................367
Blocking................................................................................370
Design..................................................................................371
Function block...........................................................................372
Input and output signals............................................................372
Setting parameters....................................................................372
Technical data...........................................................................375
Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24).............................................375
Introduction................................................................................376
Principle of operation.................................................................376
Measured voltage.................................................................378
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................379
Cooling.................................................................................382
OEX protection function measurands...................................382
Overexcitation alarm............................................................383
Logic diagram.......................................................................384
Function block...........................................................................384
Input and output signals............................................................384
Setting parameters....................................................................385
Technical data...........................................................................386
Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)......................................387
Introduction................................................................................387
Principle of operation.................................................................387
Function block...........................................................................388
Input and output signals............................................................389
Setting parameters....................................................................389
Technical data...........................................................................390
Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)..................................................390
Introduction................................................................................390
Principle of operation.................................................................391
Function block...........................................................................392
Input and output signals............................................................392

10 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Table of contents

Setting parameters....................................................................393
Technical data...........................................................................393

Section 8 Frequency protection....................................................395

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)..........................................395
Introduction................................................................................395
Principle of operation.................................................................395
Measurement principle.........................................................396
Time delay............................................................................396
Voltage dependent time delay..............................................396
Blocking................................................................................397
Design..................................................................................398
Function block...........................................................................399
Input and output signals............................................................399
Setting parameters....................................................................399
Technical data...........................................................................400
Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)............................................400
Introduction................................................................................401
Principle of operation.................................................................401
Measurement principle.........................................................401
Time delay............................................................................401
Blocking................................................................................402
Design..................................................................................402
Function block...........................................................................403
Input and output signals............................................................403
Setting parameters....................................................................404
Technical data...........................................................................404
Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)..........................404
Introduction................................................................................405
Principle of operation.................................................................405
Measurement principle.........................................................405
Time delay............................................................................406
Blocking................................................................................406
Design..................................................................................406
Function block...........................................................................407
Input and output signals............................................................407
Setting parameters....................................................................408
Technical data...........................................................................408

Section 9 Multipurpose protection................................................411

General current and voltage protection (GAPC).............................411
Introduction................................................................................411
Inadvertent generator energization......................................411
Principle of operation.................................................................412

REL 670 Technical reference manual 11

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Measured quantities within the function...............................412

Base quantities for GF function............................................414
Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................415
Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................420
Built-in overvoltage protection steps....................................420
Built-in undervoltage protection steps..................................421
Inadvertent generator energization......................................421
Logic diagram.......................................................................423
Function block...........................................................................428
Input and output signals............................................................428
Setting parameters....................................................................430
Technical data...........................................................................440

Section 10 Secondary system supervision.....................................443

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)..................................................443
Introduction................................................................................443
Principle of operation.................................................................443
Function block...........................................................................445
Input and output signals............................................................445
Setting parameters....................................................................445
Technical data...........................................................................446
Fuse failure supervision (RFUF).....................................................446
Introduction................................................................................446
Principle of operation.................................................................447
Zero sequence ....................................................................447
Negative sequence...............................................................450
du/dt and di/dt.......................................................................450
Operation modes..................................................................451
Dead line detection...............................................................452
Function block...........................................................................452
Input and output signals............................................................452
Setting parameters....................................................................453
Technical data...........................................................................454

Section 11 Control..........................................................................455
Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN,
25)..................................................................................................455
Introduction................................................................................455
Principle of operation.................................................................456
Basic functionality.................................................................456
Logic diagrams.....................................................................456
Function block...........................................................................464
Input and output signals............................................................465
Setting parameters....................................................................467

12 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................469
Autorecloser (RREC, 79)................................................................470
Introduction................................................................................470
Principle of operation.................................................................471
Logic Diagrams....................................................................471
Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................471
Auto-reclosing mode selection.............................................471
Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing
cycle ....................................................................................472
Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1...............473
Long trip signal.....................................................................474
Time sequence diagrams.....................................................480
Function block...........................................................................483
Input and output signals............................................................483
Setting parameters....................................................................485
Technical data...........................................................................487
Apparatus control (APC).................................................................488
Introduction................................................................................488
Principle of operation.................................................................488
Bay control (QCBAY).................................................................489
Introduction...........................................................................489
Principle of operation............................................................489
Function block......................................................................490
Input and output signals.......................................................491
Setting parameters...............................................................491
Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)..............491
Introduction...........................................................................491
Principle of operation............................................................491
Function block......................................................................492
Input and output signals.......................................................493
Setting parameters...............................................................494
Switch controller (SCSWI).........................................................495
Introduction...........................................................................495
Principle of operation............................................................495
Function block......................................................................500
Input and output signals.......................................................500
Setting parameters...............................................................501
Circuit breaker (SXCBR)...........................................................502
Introduction...........................................................................502
Principle of operation............................................................502
Function block......................................................................507
Input and output signals.......................................................507
Setting parameters...............................................................508

REL 670 Technical reference manual 13

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Circuit switch (SXSWI)..............................................................508

Introduction...........................................................................508
Principle of operation............................................................508
Function block......................................................................513
Input and output signals.......................................................513
Setting parameters...............................................................514
Bay reserve (QCRSV)...............................................................514
Introduction...........................................................................514
Principle of operation............................................................514
Function block......................................................................517
Input and output signals.......................................................517
Setting parameters...............................................................518
Reservation input (RESIN)........................................................519
Introduction...........................................................................519
Principle of operation............................................................519
Function block......................................................................520
Input and output signals.......................................................520
Setting parameters...............................................................521
Interlocking.....................................................................................521
Introduction................................................................................521
Principle of operation.................................................................521
Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)........................................524
Introduction...........................................................................524
Principle of operation............................................................524
Function block......................................................................525
Input and output signals.......................................................525
Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE).........................................526
Introduction...........................................................................526
Function block......................................................................527
Logic diagram.......................................................................528
Input and output signals.......................................................533
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)...............................535
Introduction...........................................................................535
Function block......................................................................536
Logic diagram.......................................................................537
Input and output signals.......................................................541
Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)...........................544
Introduction...........................................................................544
Function block......................................................................545
Logic diagram.......................................................................546
Input and output signals.......................................................549
Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)........................551
Introduction...........................................................................551

14 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Table of contents

Function block......................................................................551
Logic diagram.......................................................................552
Input and output signals.......................................................553
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)...............555
Introduction...........................................................................555
Function block......................................................................555
Logic diagram.......................................................................556
Input and output signals.......................................................558
Interlocking for busbar earthinggrounding switch (BB_ES).......559
Introduction...........................................................................559
Function block......................................................................559
Logic diagram.......................................................................560
Input and output signals.......................................................560
Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)..........................................560
Introduction...........................................................................560
Function block......................................................................561
Logic diagrams.....................................................................562
Input and output signals ......................................................569
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB (BH)....................................................572
Introduction...........................................................................572
Function blocks....................................................................573
Logic diagrams.....................................................................575
Input and output signals.......................................................582
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking.............588
Function block......................................................................588
Input and output signals.......................................................588
Setting parameters...............................................................590
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation (SLGGIO)...................................................................590
Introduction................................................................................590
Principle of operation.................................................................591
Functionality and behaviour ................................................592
Graphical display..................................................................592
Function block...........................................................................594
Input and output signals............................................................595
Setting parameters....................................................................596
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)......................................................596
Introduction................................................................................596
Principle of operation.................................................................597
Function block...........................................................................597
Input and output signals............................................................597
Setting parameters....................................................................598
Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)..............................598

REL 670 Technical reference manual 15

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Introduction................................................................................599
Principle of operation.................................................................599
Function block...........................................................................599
Input and output signals............................................................599
Setting parameters....................................................................599
Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO).......................600
Introduction................................................................................600
Principle of operation.................................................................600
Function block...........................................................................600
Input and output signals............................................................600
Setting parameters....................................................................601

Section 12 Scheme communication...............................................603

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH,
85) .................................................................................................603
Introduction................................................................................603
Principle of operation.................................................................604
Blocking scheme..................................................................604
Permissive underreach scheme...........................................604
Permissive overreach scheme.............................................605
Unblocking scheme..............................................................605
Intertrip scheme....................................................................606
Simplified logic diagram.......................................................606
Function block...........................................................................608
Input and output signals............................................................608
Setting parameters....................................................................608
Technical data...........................................................................609
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance
protection (PSCH, 85) ...................................................................609
Introduction................................................................................610
Principle of operation.................................................................610
Blocking scheme..................................................................611
Permissive underreach scheme...........................................611
Permissive overreach scheme.............................................612
Unblocking scheme..............................................................612
Intertrip scheme....................................................................612
Simplified logic diagram.......................................................612
Function block...........................................................................614
Input and output signals............................................................614
Setting parameters....................................................................615
Technical data...........................................................................616
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance
protection (PSCH, 85)....................................................................616
Introduction................................................................................616

16 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Table of contents

Principle of operation.................................................................617
Current reversal logic...........................................................617
Weak end infeed logic..........................................................617
Function block...........................................................................619
Input and output signals............................................................619
Setting parameters....................................................................619
Technical data...........................................................................620
Local acceleration logic (PLAL)......................................................620
Introduction................................................................................621
Principle of operation.................................................................621
Zone extension.....................................................................621
Loss-of-load acceleration.....................................................622
Function block...........................................................................622
Input and output signals............................................................622
Setting parameters....................................................................623
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection
(PSCH, 85).....................................................................................624
Introduction................................................................................624
Principle of operation.................................................................624
Blocking scheme..................................................................625
Permissive under/overreach scheme...................................626
Unblocking scheme..............................................................627
Function block...........................................................................628
Input and output signals............................................................628
Setting parameters....................................................................629
Technical data...........................................................................629
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85).................................................630
Introduction................................................................................630
Principle of operation.................................................................630
Directional comparison logic function...................................630
Fault current reversal logic...................................................631
Weak and infeed logic..........................................................631
Function block...........................................................................633
Input and output signals............................................................633
Setting parameters....................................................................633
Technical data...........................................................................634
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase
segregated communication (PSCH) ..............................................634
Introduction................................................................................635
Principle of operation.................................................................635
Current reversal logic ..........................................................635
Function block...........................................................................637
Input and output signals............................................................637

REL 670 Technical reference manual 17

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Setting parameters....................................................................639
Technical data...........................................................................639

Section 13 Logic.............................................................................641
Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)...............................................................641
Introduction................................................................................641
Principle of operation.................................................................641
Logic diagram.......................................................................643
Function block...........................................................................646
Input and output signals............................................................646
Setting parameters....................................................................647
Technical data...........................................................................648
Trip matrix logic (GGIO).................................................................648
Application.................................................................................648
Principle of operation.................................................................648
Function block...........................................................................650
Input and output signals............................................................650
Setting parameters....................................................................651
Configurable logic blocks (LLD)......................................................652
Introduction................................................................................652
Inverter function block (INV)......................................................652
OR function block (OR).............................................................652
AND function block (AND).........................................................653
Timer function block (Timer)......................................................654
Pulse timer function block (PULSE)..........................................655
Exclusive OR function block (XOR)...........................................655
Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)............................656
Controllable gate function block (GT)........................................657
Settable timer function block (TS).............................................657
Technical data...........................................................................658
Fixed signal function block (FIXD)..................................................659
Introduction................................................................................659
Principle of operation.................................................................659
Function block...........................................................................659
Input and output signals............................................................659
Setting parameters....................................................................660
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I..........................................660
Introduction................................................................................660
Principle of operation............................................................660
Function block......................................................................661
Input and output signals.......................................................661
Setting parameters...............................................................662
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation
(B16IGGIO)....................................................................................662

18 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Table of contents

Introduction................................................................................662
Principle of operation.................................................................662
Function block...........................................................................663
Input and output signals............................................................663
Setting parameters....................................................................664
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)........................................664
Introduction................................................................................664
Principle of operation.................................................................664
Function block...........................................................................665
Input and output signals............................................................665
Setting parameters....................................................................666
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
(IB16GGIO)....................................................................................666
Introduction................................................................................666
Principle of operation.................................................................666
Function block...........................................................................667
Input and output signals............................................................667
Setting parameters....................................................................668

Section 14 Monitoring.....................................................................669
Measurements (MMXU).................................................................669
Introduction................................................................................670
Principle of operation.................................................................671
Measurement supervision....................................................671
Service values (MMXU, SVR)..............................................676
Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)..............................................680
Voltage phasors (MMXU, VN and VP).................................681
Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ).......................681
Function block...........................................................................681
Input and output signals............................................................683
Setting parameters....................................................................685
Technical data...........................................................................699
Event counter (GGIO).....................................................................700
Introduction................................................................................700
Principle of operation.................................................................700
Reporting..............................................................................701
Design..................................................................................701
Function block...........................................................................701
Input signals..............................................................................701
Setting parameters....................................................................702
Technical data...........................................................................702
Event function (EV).........................................................................702
Introduction................................................................................702
Principle of operation.................................................................702

REL 670 Technical reference manual 19

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................704
Input and output signals............................................................704
Setting parameters....................................................................705
Fault locator (RFLO).......................................................................707
Introduction................................................................................707
Principle of operation.................................................................708
Measuring Principle..............................................................709
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault.....709
The non-compensated impedance model............................712
IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................713
Function block...........................................................................713
Input and output signals............................................................713
Setting parameters....................................................................714
Technical data...........................................................................715
Measured value expander block.....................................................715
Introduction................................................................................715
Principle of operation.................................................................716
Function block...........................................................................716
Input and output signals............................................................716
Disturbance report (RDRE)............................................................717
Introduction................................................................................717
Principle of operation.................................................................718
Function block...........................................................................725
Input and output signals............................................................726
Setting parameters....................................................................728
Technical data...........................................................................739
Event list (RDRE)...........................................................................740
Introduction................................................................................740
Principle of operation.................................................................740
Function block...........................................................................741
Input signals..............................................................................741
Technical data...........................................................................741
Indications (RDRE).........................................................................741
Introduction................................................................................741
Principle of operation.................................................................742
Function block...........................................................................743
Input signals..............................................................................743
Technical data...........................................................................743
Event recorder (RDRE)..................................................................743
Introduction................................................................................743
Principle of operation.................................................................744
Function block...........................................................................744
Input signals..............................................................................744

20 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................744
Trip value recorder (RDRE)............................................................745
Introduction................................................................................745
Principle of operation.................................................................745
Function block...........................................................................746
Input signals..............................................................................746
Technical data...........................................................................746
Disturbance recorder (RDRE)........................................................746
Introduction................................................................................746
Principle of operation.................................................................747
Memory and storage............................................................747
IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................749
Function block...........................................................................749
Input and output signals............................................................749
Setting parameters....................................................................749
Technical data...........................................................................749

Section 15 Metering.......................................................................751
Pulse counter logic (GGIO)............................................................751
Introduction................................................................................751
Principle of operation.................................................................751
Function block...........................................................................753
Input and output signals............................................................753
Setting parameters....................................................................754
Technical data...........................................................................754
Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)...........................755
Introduction................................................................................755
Principle of operation.................................................................755
Function block...........................................................................756
Input and output signals............................................................756
Setting parameters....................................................................757

Section 16 Station communication.................................................759

Overview.........................................................................................759
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................759
Introduction................................................................................759
Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)..........................760
Introduction...........................................................................760
Principle of operation............................................................760
Function block......................................................................760
Input and output signals.......................................................761
Setting parameters...............................................................761
Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)................761
Introduction...........................................................................761

REL 670 Technical reference manual 21

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Principle of operation............................................................762
Function block......................................................................762
Input and output signals.......................................................762
Setting parameters...............................................................762
Setting parameters....................................................................763
Technical data...........................................................................763
LON communication protocol.........................................................764
Introduction................................................................................764
Principle of operation.................................................................764
Setting parameters....................................................................782
Technical data...........................................................................783
SPA communication protocol.........................................................783
Introduction................................................................................783
Principle of operation.................................................................783
Communication ports...........................................................791
Design.......................................................................................792
Setting parameters....................................................................792
Technical data...........................................................................793
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................793
Introduction................................................................................793
Principle of operation.................................................................793
General.................................................................................793
Communication ports...........................................................803
Function block...........................................................................803
Input and output signals............................................................805
Setting parameters....................................................................810
Technical data...........................................................................814
Automation bits (AUBI)...................................................................814
Introduction................................................................................814
Principle of operation.................................................................814
Function block...........................................................................815
Input and output signals............................................................815
Setting parameters....................................................................816
Single command, 16 signals (CD)..................................................831
Introduction................................................................................831
Principle of operation.................................................................832
Function block...........................................................................832
Input and output signals............................................................832
Setting parameters....................................................................833
Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT).......................833
Introduction................................................................................833
Principle of operation.................................................................834
Design.......................................................................................834

22 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Table of contents

General.................................................................................834
Function block...........................................................................834
Input and output signals............................................................835
Setting parameters....................................................................837

Section 17 Remote communication................................................839

Binary signal transfer to remote end...............................................839
Introduction................................................................................839
Principle of operation.................................................................840
Function block...........................................................................840
Input and output signals............................................................841
Setting parameters....................................................................843

Section 18 Hardware......................................................................847
Overview.........................................................................................847
Variants of case- and HMI display size.....................................847
Case from the rear side.............................................................849
Hardware modules.........................................................................854
Overview....................................................................................854
Combined backplane module (CBM).........................................855
Introduction...........................................................................855
Functionality.........................................................................855
Design..................................................................................856
Universal backplane module (UBM)..........................................858
Introduction...........................................................................858
Functionality.........................................................................858
Design..................................................................................858
Power supply module (PSM).....................................................860
Introduction...........................................................................860
Design..................................................................................860
Technical data......................................................................861
Numeric processing module (NUM)..........................................861
Introduction...........................................................................861
Functionality.........................................................................862
Block diagram.......................................................................863
Local human-machine interface (LHMI)....................................863
Transformer input module (TRM)..............................................863
Introduction...........................................................................863
Design..................................................................................864
Technical data......................................................................864
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
(ADM) .......................................................................................865
Introduction...........................................................................865
Design..................................................................................865

REL 670 Technical reference manual 23

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Binary input module (BIM).........................................................867

Introduction...........................................................................867
Design..................................................................................867
Technical data......................................................................870
Binary output modules (BOM)...................................................871
Introduction...........................................................................871
Design..................................................................................871
Technical data......................................................................873
Static binary output module (SOM)...........................................874
Introduction...........................................................................874
Design..................................................................................874
Technical data......................................................................876
Binary input/output module (IOM)..............................................877
Introduction...........................................................................877
Design..................................................................................877
Technical data......................................................................879
Line data communication module (LDCM)................................880
Introduction...........................................................................880
Design..................................................................................881
Technical data......................................................................881
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)..............882
Introduction...........................................................................882
Design..................................................................................882
Functionality.........................................................................884
Technical data......................................................................885
Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication
module (SLM) ...........................................................................885
Introduction...........................................................................885
Design..................................................................................885
Technical data......................................................................886
Galvanic RS485 communication module...................................887
Introduction...........................................................................887
Design..................................................................................887
Technical data......................................................................888
Optical ethernet module (OEM).................................................889
Introduction...........................................................................889
Functionality.........................................................................889
Design..................................................................................889
Technical data......................................................................890
mA input module (MIM).............................................................890
Introduction...........................................................................890
Design..................................................................................890
Technical data......................................................................891

24 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Table of contents

GPS time synchronization module (GSM).................................892

Introduction...........................................................................892
Design..................................................................................892
Technical data......................................................................894
GPS antenna.............................................................................894
Introduction...........................................................................894
Design..................................................................................894
Technical data......................................................................896
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B.............................897
Introduction...........................................................................897
Design..................................................................................897
Technical data......................................................................898
Dimensions.....................................................................................898
Case without rear cover.............................................................898
Case with rear cover..................................................................899
Flush mounting dimensions.......................................................901
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions...................................902
Wall mounting dimensions.........................................................903
External resistor unit for high impedance differential
protection...................................................................................903
Mounting alternatives.....................................................................904
Flush mounting..........................................................................904
Overview..............................................................................904
Mounting procedure for flush mounting................................905
19” panel rack mounting............................................................906
Overview..............................................................................906
Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting.................907
Wall mounting............................................................................907
Overview..............................................................................907
Mounting procedure for wall mounting.................................908
How to reach the rear side of the IED..................................908
Side-by-side 19” rack mounting.................................................909
Overview..............................................................................909
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting............910
IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case.................................910
Side-by-side flush mounting......................................................911
Overview..............................................................................911
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting...........912
Technical data................................................................................912
Enclosure...................................................................................912
Connection system....................................................................913
Influencing factors.....................................................................913
Type tests according to standard..............................................914

REL 670 Technical reference manual 25

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Table of contents

Section 19 Labels...........................................................................917
Different labels................................................................................917

Section 20 Connection diagrams...................................................921

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics.........................................937

Application......................................................................................937
Principle of operation......................................................................939
Mode of operation......................................................................939
Inverse characteristics....................................................................945

Section 22 Glossary.......................................................................959
Glossary.........................................................................................959

26 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

About this chapter

This chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and provides
information necessary to understand the contents of the manual.

1.1 Introduction to the technical reference manual

1.1.1 About the complete set of manuals for an IED

The user’s manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:

Application Technical Installation and Operator´s Engineering

manual reference commissioning manual guide
manual manual

en06000097.vsd

The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines

and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to
find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The
manual should also be used when calculating settings.

The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality

descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals,
setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference
manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how

to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a
reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and
electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and
configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The
chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section
numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned.

The Operator’s Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection
IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operator’s manual

REL 670 Technical reference manual 27

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 1
Introduction

can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and
measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault.

The IED 670 Engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer the
IED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED
670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to read
disturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The third
part is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670
products and the PCM 600 tool.

The IEC 61850 Station Engineering guide contains descriptions of IEC 61850
station engineering and process signal routing. The manual presents the PCM 600
and CCT tool used for station engineering. It describes the IEC 61850 attribute editor
and how to set up projects and communication.

1.1.2 About the technical reference manual

The technical reference manual contains the following chapters:

• The chapter “Local human-machine interface” describes the control panel on

the IED. Display characteristics, control keys and various local human-machine
interface features are explained.
• The chapter “Basic IED functions” presents functions that are included in all
IEDs regardless of the type of protection they are designed for. These are
functions like Time synchronization, Self supervision with event list, Test mode
and other functions of a general nature.
• The chapter “Distance protection” describes the functions for distance zones
with their quadrilateral characteristics, phase selection with load encroachment,
power swing detection and similar.
• The chapter “Current protection” describes functions such as overcurrent
protection, breaker failure protection and pole discordance.
• The chapter “Voltage protection” describes functions like undervoltage and
overvoltage protection as well as residual overvoltage protection.
• The chapter “Frequency protection” describes functions for overfrequency,
underfrequency and rate of change of frequency.
• The chapter “Multipurpose protection” describes the general protection function
for current and voltage.
• The chapter “Secondary system supervision” includes descriptions of functions
like current based Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure supervision.
• The chapter “Control” describes the control functions. These are functions like
the Synchronization and energizing check as well as several others which are
product specific.
• The chapter “Scheme communication” describes among others functions related
to current reversal and weak end infeed logic.
• The chapter “Logic” describes trip logic and related functions.
• The chapter “Monitoring” describes measurement related functions used to
provide data regarding relevant quantities, events, faults and the like.
• The chapter “Metering” describes primarily Pulse counter logic.

28 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 1
Introduction

• The chapter “Station communication” describes Ethernet based communication

in general including the use of IEC61850, and horizontal communication via
GOOSE.
• The chapter “Remote communication” describes binary and analog signal
transfer, and the associated hardware.
• The chapter “Hardware” provides descriptions of the IED and its components.
• The chapter “Connection diagrams” provides terminal wiring diagrams and
information regarding connections to and from the IED.
• The chapter “Time inverse characteristics” describes and explains inverse time
delay, inverse time curves and their effects.
• The chapter “Glossary” is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in
ABB technical documentation.

1.1.3 Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM)

The description of each IED related function follows the same structure (where
applicable). The different sections are outlined below.

1.1.3.1 Introduction

Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function.

1.1.3.2 Principle of operation

Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms and
measurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.

Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered
by dashed lines.

Signal names
Input and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes.
The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name for
the corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of the
particular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR in
figure 4 is as follows:

• BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command from
the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).

Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand
side. Settings are not displayed.

Input and output signals

In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch the
outer border of the diagram.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 29

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 1
Introduction

Input and output signals can be configured using the CAP531 tool. They can be
connected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs.
Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signals
are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3.

Setting parameters
Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting
parameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their
values are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the
symbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes.
Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value.

Internal signals
Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately. 2 mm from the
frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the
suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues,
see figure 3.

BLKTR

TEST

TEST
&
Block TUV=Yes BLOCK-int.
>1

BLOCK

VTSU
BLOCK-int.
&
STUL1N
BLOCK-int.
& >1 & TRIP
t
STUL2N
BLOCK-int.
START
&
STUL3N
STL1

STL2

STL3

xx04000375.vsd

Figure 1: Logic diagram example with -int signals

External signals
Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram
have the suffix “-cont.”, see figure 2 and figure 3.

30 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 1
Introduction

STZMPP-cont.
>1
STCND

& STNDL1L2-cont.
1L1L2
STNDL2L3-cont.
&
1L2L3

& STNDL3L1-cont.
1L3L1

& STNDL1N-cont.
1L1N

& STNDL2N-cont.
1L2N
STNDL3N-cont.
&
1L3N

>1 STNDPE-cont.

>1
1--VTSZ 1--STND
>1 &
1--BLOCK
BLK-cont.

xx04000376.vsd

Figure 2: Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal

STNDL1N-cont.
>1
STNDL2N-cont. 15 ms
& t STL1
STNDL3N-cont.
STNDL1L2-cont. >1 15 ms
& t STL2
STNDL2L3-cont.
15 ms
STNDL3L1-cont. & t STL3
>1
15 ms
& t START
>1

BLK-cont.

xx04000377.vsd

Figure 3: Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal

REL 670 Technical reference manual 31

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 1
Introduction

1.1.3.3 Input and output signals

Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists of
two columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second column
contains the description of the signal.

1.1.3.4 Function block

Each function block is illustrated graphically.

Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand
side. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available.
These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme, and are
therefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but described
in the settings table.

IEC 61850 - 8 -1
CAP531 Name Logical Node

Inputs TUV1-
PH2PUVM
U3P TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
Outputs
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2 Diagram
ST2L1 Number
ST2L2
ST2L3

en05000330.vsd

Figure 4: Example of a function block

1.1.3.5 Setting parameters

These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the function
in question.

1.1.3.6 Technical data

The technical data section provides specific technical information about the function
or hardware described.

32 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 1
Introduction

1.1.4 Intended audience

General
This manual addresses system engineers, installation and commissioning personnel,
who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in
normal service.

Requirements
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,
protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in
the protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a
basic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.

1.1.5 Related documents

Documents related to REL 670 Identity number
Operator’s manual 1MRK 506 276-UEN
Installation and commissioning manual 1MRK 506 277-UEN
Technical reference manual 1MRK 506 275-UEN
Application manual 1MRK 506 278-UEN
Buyer’s guide 1MRK 506 280-BEN
Connection diagram, Single breaker arr. Three phase tripping arr. 1MRK 002 801-BA
Connection diagram, Single breaker arr. Single phase tripping arr. 1MRK 002 801-CA
Connection diagram, Multi breaker arr. Three phase tripping arr. 1MRK 002 801-DA
Connection diagram, Multi breaker arr. Single phase tripping arr. 1MRK 002 801-EA
Configuration diagram A, Single breaker with single or double busbar, 3 pole 1MRK 004 500-86
tripping (A31)
Configuration diagram B, Single breaker with single or double busbar, 1/3 pole 1MRK 004 500-87
tripping (A32)
Configuration diagram C, Multi breaker such as 1 1/2 or ring busbar arr. 3 pole 1MRK 004 500-88
tripping (B31)
Configuration diagram D, Multi breaker such as 1 1/2 or ring busbar arr. 1/3 pole 1MRK 004 500-89
tripping (B32)
Setting example 1, 400 kV Long overhead power line with 1 1/2 CB arr. 1MRK 506 267-WEN
Quadrilaterial characteristic.
Setting example 2, Setting example 1, 400 kV Long overhead power line with 1MRK 506 291-WEN
1 1/2 CB arr. Mho characteristic.
Setting example 3, 230 kV Extremely long overhead power line, double bus, 1MRK 506 268-WEN
single CB arr. Quadrilaterial characteristic.
Setting example 4, 230 kV Extremely long overhead power line, double bus, 1MRK 506 292-WEN
single CB arr. Mho characteristic.
Setting example 5, 132 kV Short overhead power line, double bus, single CB 1MRK 506 269-WEN
arr. Quadrilaterial characteristic.
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 33

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 1
Introduction

Documents related to REL 670 Identity number

Setting example 6, 132 kV Short overhead power line, double bus, single CB 1MRK 506 290-WEN
arr. Mho characteristic.
Setting example 7, 70 kV power line on a resonance earth system. Double bus, 1MRK 506 293-WEN
single breaker arrangement.
Setting example 8, 400 kV long series compensated line. 1 1/2 breaker 1MRK 506 294-WEN
arrangement.

Connection and Installation components 1MRK 013 003-BEN

Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
Accessories for IED 670 1MRK 514 012-BEN
Getting started guide IED 670 1MRK 500 080-UEN
SPA and LON signal list for IED 670, ver. 1.1 1MRK 500 083-WEN
IEC 61850 Data objects list for IED 670, ver. 1.1 1MRK 500 084-WEN
Generic IEC 61850 IED Connectivity package 1KHA001027-UEN
Protection and Control IED Manager PCM 600 Installation sheet 1MRS755552
Engineering guide IED 670 products 1MRK 511 179-UEN

Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation

1.1.6 Revision notes

Revision Description
B No functionality added. Minor changes made in content due to problem reports.

34 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 2
Local human-machine interface

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

About this chapter

This chapter describes the structure and use of the Local human machine interface
(LHMI) or in other words, the control panel on the IED.

2.1 Human machine interface

The local human machine interface is available in a small, and a medium sized
model. The principle difference between the two is the size of the LCD. The small
size LCD can display seven line of text and the medium size LCD can display the
single line diagram with up to 15 objects on each page.

Up to 12 SLD pages can be defined, depending on the product capability.

The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that can display the
single line diagram with up to 15 objects.

The local human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand – the whole front
plate is divided into zones, each of them with a well-defined functionality:

• Status indication LEDs

• Alarm indication LEDs which consists of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with
user printable label. All LEDs are configurable from the PCM 600 tool
• Liquid crystal display (LCD)
• Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for
selection between local and remote control and reset
• An isolated RJ45 communication port

REL 670 Technical reference manual 35

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 2
Local human-machine interface

Figure 5: Small graphic HMI

Figure 6: Medium graphic HMI, 15 controllable objects

36 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 2
Local human-machine interface

2.2 Small size graphic HMI

2.2.1 Introduction
The small sized HMI is available for 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 x 19” case. The LCD on the
small HMI measures 32 x 90 mm and displays 7 lines with up to 40 characters per
line. The first line displays the product name and the last line displays date and time.
The remaining 5 lines are dynamic. This LCD has no graphic display potential.

2.2.2 Design
The LHMI is identical for both the 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 cases. The different parts of the
small LHMI is shown in figure 7

1 2 3

en05000055.eps
8 7

Figure 7: Small graphic HMI

1 Status indication LEDs

2 LCD

REL 670 Technical reference manual 37

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 2
Local human-machine interface

3 Indication LEDs
4 Label
5 Local/Remote LEDs
6 RJ 45 port
7 Communication indication LED
8 Keypad

2.3 Medium size graphic HMI

2.3.1 Introduction
The 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 x 19” cases can be equipped with the medium size LCD. This is
a fully graphical monochrome LCD which measures 120 x 90 mm. It has 28 lines
with up to 40 characters per line. To display the single line diagram, this LCD is
required.

2.3.2 Design
The different parts of the medium size LHMI is shown in figure 8The LHMI, exists
in an IEC version and in an ANSI version. The difference is on the keypad operation
buttons and the yellow LED designation.

38 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 2
Local human-machine interface

1 2 3

en05000056.eps
8 7

Figure 8: Medium size graphic HMI

1 Status indication LEDs

2 LCD
3 Indication LEDs
4 Label
5 Local/Remote LEDs
6 RJ45 port
7 Communication indication LED
8 Keypad

2.4 Keypad

REL 670 Technical reference manual 39

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 2
Local human-machine interface

The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same look
and feel in all IEDs in the IED 670 series. LCD screens and other details may differ
but the way the keys function is identical. The keypad is illustrated in figure 9.

Figure 9: The HMI keypad.

The keys used to operate the IED are described below in table 1.

Table 1: HMI keys on the front of the IED

Key Function

This key closes (energizes) a breaker or disconnector.

This key opens a breaker or disconnector.

The help key brings up two submenus. Key operation and IED information.

This key is used to clear entries, It cancels commands and edits.

Opens the main menu, and used to move to the default screen.

The Local/Remote key is used to set the IED in local or remote control mode.

This key opens the reset screen.

The E key starts editing mode and confirms setting changes when in editing mode.

The right arrow key navigates forward between screens and moves right in editing mode.

Table continued on next page

40 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 2
Local human-machine interface

Key Function

The left arrow key navigates backwards between screens and moves left in editing mode.

The up arrow key is used to move up in the single line diagram and in menu tree.

The down arrow key is used to move down in the single line diagram and in menu tree.

2.5 LED

2.5.1 Introduction
The LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that events
may occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to something
that has occurred and needs some sort of action.

2.5.2 Status indication LEDs

There are three LEDs above the LCD. The information they communicate is described
in the table below.
LED Indication Information
Green:
Steady In service
Flashing Internal failure
Dark No power supply
Yellow:
Steady Dist. rep. triggered
Flashing Terminal in test mode
Red:
Steady Trip command issued

2.5.3 Indication LEDs

The LED indication module comprising 15 LEDs is standard in IED 670s. Its main
purpose is to present an immediate visual information for protection indications or
alarm signals.

There are alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs on the right hand
side of the front panel. The alarm LEDs are found to the right of the LCD screen.
They can show steady or flashing light. Flashing would normally indicate an alarm.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 41

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 2
Local human-machine interface

The alarm LEDs are configurable using the PCM 600 tool. This is because they are
dependent on the binary input logic and can therefore not be configured locally on
the HMI. Some typical alarm examples follow:

• Bay controller failure

• CB close blocked
• Interlocking bypassed
• SF6 Gas refill
• Position error
• CB spring charge alarm
• Oil temperature alarm
• Thermal overload trip

The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been established
between the IED and a computer.

The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local or
remote control of the IED is active.

2.6 LHMI related functions

2.6.1 Introduction
The adaptation of the LHMI to the application and user preferences is made with:

• function block LHMI (LocalHMI)

• function block HLED (LEDMonitor)
• setting parameters

2.6.2 General setting parameters

Table 2: Basic general settings for the localHMI (LHM1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Language English - English - Local HMI language
OptionalLanguage
DisplayTimeout 10 - 120 10 60 Min Local HMI display
timeout
AutoRepeat Off - On - Activation of auto-
On repeat (On) or not
(Off)
ContrastLevel -10 - 20 1 0 % Contrast level for
display
Table continued on next page

42 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 2
Local human-machine interface

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

DefaultScreen 0-0 1 0 - Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - Latest on top - Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
SymbolFont IEC - IEC - Symbol font for Single
ANSI Line Diagram

2.6.3 Status indication LEDs

2.6.3.1 Design

The function block LHMI (LocalHMI) controls and supplies information about the
status of the status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LHMI are
configured with the PCM 600 tool.

The function block can be used if any of the signals are required in a configuration
logic.

See section "Status indication LEDs" for information about the LEDs.

2.6.3.2 Function block

LHMI-
LocalHMI
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD

en05000773.vsd

Figure 10: LHMI function block

2.6.3.3 Input and output signals

Table 3: Input signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block

Signal Description
CLRLEDS Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

Table 4: Output signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block

Signal Description
HMI-ON Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 43

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 2
Local human-machine interface

Signal Description
YELLOW-F Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are
cleared
LEDSCLRD Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active

2.6.4 Indication LEDs

2.6.4.1 Introduction

The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information about
the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED are
configured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selected
individually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 1–6) for
trip indications are red and LEDs (number 7–15) for start indications are yellow.

Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or
restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as
signalling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality.
The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F). For details, refer to
Technical reference manual.

2.6.4.2 Design

The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED in
some of the modes of the HLED. The latest LED picture appears immediately after
the IED is successfully restarted.

Operating modes
• Collecting mode
• LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated
continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is
suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

• Re-starting mode
• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active
LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only
LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6
(LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A

44 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 2
Local human-machine interface

disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated
input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset
• From local HMI
• The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a
common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is
positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is
performed via the Reset-button and menus on the LHMI. For details, refer
to the “Operators manual”.

• From function input

• The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input,
RESET, to the function. This input can for example be configured to a
binary input operated from an external push button. The function is positive
edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is
continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications
active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

• Automatic reset
• The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When
the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting
indications will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequences
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow
the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function
is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only
working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and
collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-
starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady
and F = Flash.

At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selected
sequence diagrams below.

In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics shown in figure 11.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 45

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 2
Local human-machine interface

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

en05000506.vsd

Figure 11: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input
signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of
the other LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

en01000228.vsd

Figure 12: Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead
of showing steady light.

Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the
signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it
gets a steady light.

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd

Figure 13: Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light
have been alternated.

46 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 2
Local human-machine interface

Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation
of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to
sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the
reset i.e. immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new
reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the
other LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

Reset
en01000235.vsd

Figure 14: Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)

Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S)
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, i.e. immediately after the positive edge
of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals
is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of
LEDs set for other sequences.

Definition of a disturbance
A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated
until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs
set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and
some signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does
not restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when all
signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shown
in figure 15.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 47

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 2
Local human-machine interface

From
disturbance
length control ³1 New
per LED ³1 disturbance
set to
sequence 6
tRestart
& t

&
³1

³1
&

en01000237.vsd

Figure 15: Activation of new disturbance

In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each
LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition
of a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i
diagram in figure 16.

Activating signal
To LED

To disturbance
AND
tMax length control
t
en05000507.vsd

Figure 16: Length control of activating signals

Timing diagram for sequence 6

Figure 17 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

48 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 2
Local human-machine interface

Disturbance

t Restart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
en01000239.vsd

Figure 17: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance

Figure 18 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.

Disturbance Disturbance
t Restart t Restart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
en01000240.vsd

Figure 18: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

REL 670 Technical reference manual 49

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 2
Local human-machine interface

Figure 19 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one
has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

Disturbance

t Restart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
en01000241.vsd

Figure 19: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 20 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

Disturbance

t Restart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
en01000242.vsd

Figure 20: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

50 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 2
Local human-machine interface

2.6.4.3 Function block

HLED-
LEDMonitor
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK
LEDTEST

en05000508.vsd

Figure 21: HLED function block

2.6.4.4 Input and output signals

Table 5: Input signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block

Signal Description
BLOCK Input to block the operation of the LED-unit
RESET Input to acknowledge/reset the indications of the LED-unit
LEDTEST Input for external LED test

Table 6: Output signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block

Signal Description
NEWIND A new signal on any of the indication inputs occurs
ACK A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged

2.6.4.5 Setting parameters

Table 7: Basic general settings for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode for
On the LED function
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.0 s Defines the
disturbance length
tMax 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.0 s Maximum time for the
definition of a
disturbance
SeqTypeLED1 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 51

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 2
Local human-machine interface

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

SeqTypeLED2 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 2
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
SeqTypeLED3 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 3
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
SeqTypeLED4 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 4
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
SeqTypeLED5 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 5
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
SeqTypeLED6 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 6
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
SeqTypeLED7 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 7
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
SeqTypeLED8 Follow-S - Follow-S - sequence type for
Follow-F LED 8
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
SeqTypeLED9 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 9
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
SeqTypeLED10 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 10
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Table continued on next page

52 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 2
Local human-machine interface

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

SeqTypeLED11 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 11
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
SeqTypeLED12 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 12
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
SeqTypeLED13 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 13
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
SeqTypeLED14 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 14
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
SeqTypeLED15 Follow-S - Follow-S - Sequence type for
Follow-F LED 15
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

REL 670 Technical reference manual 53

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
54
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Section 3 Basic IED functions

About this chapter

This chapter presents functions that are basic to all REx670 IEDs. Typical functions
in this category are time synchronization, self supervision and test mode.

3.1 Analog inputs

3.1.1 Introduction
In order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operations
the analog input channels must be configured and properly set. For power measuring
and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must
be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED 670 are using
primary system quantities and the set values are done in primary quantities as well.
Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data about the connected current
and voltage transformers.

In order to make Service Values reading easier it is possible to define a reference

PhaseAngleRef. Then this analog channels phase angle will be always fixed to zero
degree and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input.
During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be freely
change in order to facilitate testing and service values reading.

VT inputs are sometimes not available depending on ordered type of

Transformer Input Module (TRM).

3.1.2 Principle of operation

The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. The
main CTs are typically star connected and can be connected with the star point to the
object or from the object. This information must be set to the IED. The convention
of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current, power etc.
means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negative value means
direction out from the object. For directional functions the direction into the object
is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object is defined as Reverse, see
figure 22

REL 670 Technical reference manual 55

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456.vsd

Figure 22: Internal convention of the directionality in IED 670

With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject or

ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a direction
defined as Forward always is looking towards the object. To be able to use primary
system quantities for settings and calculation in the IED the ratios of the main CTs
and VTs must be known. This information is given to the IED by setting of the rated
secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs.

The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under General
settings/Analog module in the parameter settings tool PST.

3.1.3 Function block

The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The
signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in the
configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can
be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED670 and used
internally in the configuration.

3.1.4 Setting parameters

Dependent on ordered IED 670 type.

Table 8: General settings for the AISERVAL (AISV-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
PhaseAngleRef 1 - 24 1 1 Ch Reference channel
for phase angle
presentation

56 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Table 9: Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN12I (TA40-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 57

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

CTStarPoint7 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint10 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec10 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim10 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint11 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec11 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim11 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint12 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec12 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim12 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current

58 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Table 10: Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN9I3U (TC40-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 59

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

CTStarPoint7 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primary
voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primary
voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primary
voltage

Table 11: Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN6I6U (TD40-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
Table continued on next page

60 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

CTStarPoint2 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim7 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primary
voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primary
voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primary
voltage
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 61

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primary
voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primary
voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondary
voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primary
voltage

3.2 Authorization

To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED 670 and the tools that are
accessing the IED 670 are protected, subject of authorization handling. The concept
of authorization, as it is implemented in the IED 670 and the associated tools is based
on the following facts:

• There are two types of points of access to the IED 670:

• local, through the local HMI
• remote, through the communication ports
• There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different
areas of the IED and tools functionality; the pre-defined user types are defined
as follows:

User type Access rights

Guest Read only
SuperUser Full access
SPAGuest Read only + control
SystemOperator Control from LHMI, no bypass
ProtectionEngineer All settings
DesignEngineer Application configuration (including SMT, GDE and CMT)
UserAdministrator User and password administration for the IED

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the User Management
Tool (UMT) within PCM 600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the LHMI of
the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on the IED LHMI.

62 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

3.2.1 Authorization handling in the tool

Upon the creation of an IED in the Plant Structure, the User Management Tool is
immediately accessible, by right – clicking with the mouse on that specific IED name:

Figure 23: Right-clicking to get the User Management Tool – “IED Users”.

By left-clicking on the “IED Users” submenu, the tool will open in the right-side
panel:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 63

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Figure 24: User Manager Tool opened in the right-side panel.

By default, the IEDs are delivered so that users are not required to log on to operate
the IED. The default user is the SuperUser. Before doing any changes to the User
Management in the IED it is recommendable that the administrator uploads the Users
and Groups existent in the IED.

If situation requires so, one can restore the factory settings, overwriting all existing
settings in the User Management Tool database.

Even if the administrator empties the tool database, the users

previously defined are still in the IED. They cannot be erased by
downloading the empty list into the IED (the tool won’t download an
empty list), so it is strongly recommended that before you create any
user you create one that belongs to the SuperUser group.

If the administrator marks the check box “User must logon to this IED”, then the
fields under the “User Management” tab are becoming accessible and one can add,
delete and edit users.

To add a new user, the administrator will press the button that is marked with a black
arrow, see figure 25 on the “User” subtab:

64 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Figure 25: User subtab and creation of a new user.

Upon pressing this button, a window will appear, enabling the administrator to enter
details about the user, assign an access password and (after pressing “Next” and
advancing to the next window) assign the user to a group:

Figure 26: Enter details about the user.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 65

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Figure 27: Assign the user to a group.

Once the new user is created, it will appear in the list of users. Once in the list, there
are several operations that can be performed on the users, shown in figure 28

Figure 28: Operations on users in the users list.

No. Description
1 Delete selected user
2 Change password
3 Add another group to the user permissions

The “Group” subtab is displaying all the pre-defined groups and gives short details
of the permissions allowed to the members of a particular group:

66 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Figure 29: The “Groups” subtab.

It also allows the administrator to add another (already created) user to a group, in
the same way it could assign one more group to an user, on the “Users” subtab.

The “Functions” subtab is a descriptional area, showing in detail what Read/Write

permissions has each user group, in respect to various tools and components.

Finally, after the desired users are created and permissions assigned to them by means
of user groups, the whole list must be downloaded in the IED, in the same way as
from the other tools:

No. Description
1 Upload from IED
2 Download to IED

REL 670 Technical reference manual 67

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

3.2.2 Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the superuser. No LogOn is required to operate the IED
until a user has been created with the UMT(User Management Tool). See Application
manual for more details.

Once a user is created and downloaded into the IED, that user can perform a LogOn,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.

If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will cause the display to show a message
box saying: “No user defined!”

If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Settings
\General Settings\HMI\Screen\ Display Timeout ) elapses, the IED will return to a
Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes
at delivery.

If there are one or more users created with the UMT and downloaded into the IED,
then, when a user intentionally attempts a LogOn or when the user attempts to perform
an operation that is password protected, the LogOn window will appear

The cursor is focused on the “User identity” field, so upon pressing the “E” key, one
can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down”
arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the “E” key again.
When it comes to password, upon pressing the “E” key, the following character will
show up: “$”. The user must scroll for every letter in the pasword. After all the letters
are introduced (passwords are case sensitive!) choose OK and press “E” key again.

If everything is O.K. at a voluntary LogOn the LHMI returns to the Authorization

screen. If the LogOn is OK, when required to change for example a password
protected setting, the LHMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the LogOn has
failed, then the LogOn window will pop-up again, until either the user makes it right
or presses “Cancel”.

3.3 Self supervision with internal event list

3.3.1 Introduction
The self-supervision function listens and reacts to internal system events, generated
by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in
an internal event list.

3.3.2 Principle of operation

The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

68 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

• Checking of digitized measuring signals.
• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The self-supervision status can be monitored from the local HMI or a SMS/SCS
system.

Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-
supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under
Diagnostics\Internal Events or Diagnostics\IED Status\General. Refer to the
“Installation and Commissioning manual” for a detailed list of supervision signals
that can be generated and displayed in the local HMI.

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm

contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of
this output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 31 and
a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 30

Figure 30: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 69

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Figure 31: Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block.

Some signals are available from the IES (IntErrorSign) function block. The signals
from this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system.
The signals from the IES function block can also be connected to binary outputs for
signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions
if required/desired.

Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module
in the Signal Matrix Tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained
from the time synchronization block TIME.

3.3.2.1 Internal signals

Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the
IED. As they provide information about the internal life of the IED, they are also
called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups. One group
handles signals that are always present in the IED; standard signals. Another group
handles signals that are collected depending on the hardware configuration. The
standard signals are listed in table 12. The hardware dependent internal signals are
listed in table 13. Explanations of internal signals are listed in table 14.

70 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Table 12: Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Name of signal Description
FAIL Internal Fail status
WARNING Internal Warning status
NUMFAIL CPU module Fail status
NUMWARNING CPU module Warning status
RTCERROR Real Time Clock status
TIMESYNCHERROR Time Synchronization status
RTEERROR Runtime Execution Error status
IEC61850ERROR IEC 61850 Error status
WATCHDOG SW Watchdog Error status
LMDERROR LON/Mip Device Error status
APPERROR Runtime Application Error status
SETCHGD Settings changed
SETGRPCHGD Setting groups changed
FTFERROR Fault Tolerant Filesystem status

Table 13: Self-supervision's HW dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description
ADxx ADxx Analog In Module Error status
BIM BIM-Error Binary In Module Error status
BOM BOM-Error Binary Out Module Error status
IOM IOM-Error In/Out Module Error status
MIM MIM-Error Millampere Input Module Error status
LDCM LDCM-Error Line Differential Communication Error status

Table 14: Explanations of internal signals

Name of signal Reasons for activation
FAIL This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; INT--NUMFAIL, INT--LMDERROR, INT--
WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--RTEERROR, INT--
FTFERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals
WARNING This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR,
INT--TIMESYNCHERROR
NUMFAIL This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; INT--WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--
RTEERROR, INT--FTFERROR
NUMWARNING This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR
RTCERROR This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the
real time clock.
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 71

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Name of signal Reasons for activation

TIMESYNCHERROR This signal will be active when the source of the time
synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a time
reset.
RTEERROR This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some
actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading of
settings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups,
loading or unloading of application threads.
IEC61850ERROR This signal will be active if the IEC61850 stack did not succeed in
some actions like reading IEC61850 configuration, startup etc.
WATCHDOG This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under too
heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems
background task is used for the measurements.
LMDERROR LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error
state.
APPERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads
are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can
be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, etc.
SETCHGD This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list
if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list
if any setting groups are changed.
FTFERROR This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup file
are corrupted and can not be recovered.

3.3.2.2 Run-time model

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see figure
32.

Figure 32: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the 600 platform.

The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converters with different
amplification makes it possible to supervise the incoming signals under normal

72 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

conditions where the signals from the two converters should be identical. An alarm
is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves
the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.

The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller

function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input
signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the
validation part, i.e. checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected.
Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU,
i.e. the signal that has the most suitable level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times
higherADx_HI.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison
of the two channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed
and an alarm will be given.

The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

3.3.3 Function block

IS---
InternalSignal
FAIL
WARNING
CPUFAIL
CPUWARN
T SYNCERR
RT CERR

en04000392.vsd

Figure 33: IS function block

3.3.4 Output signals

Table 15: Output signals for the InternalSignal (IS---) function block
Signal Description
FAIL Internal fail
WARNING Internal warning
CPUFAIL CPU fail
CPUWARN CPU warning
TSYNCERR Time synchronization status
RTCERR Real time clock status

3.3.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 73

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

3.3.6 Technical data

Table 16: Self supervision with internal event list

Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 1000 events, first in-first out

3.4 Time synchronization

3.4.1 Introduction
Use the time synchronization source selector to select a common source of absolute
time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes comparison of
events and disturbance data between all IEDs in a SA system possible.

3.4.2 Principle of operation

3.4.2.1 General concepts

Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the
time the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is normally called the
clock accuracy and means how much the error increases, i.e. how much the clock
gains or loses time. A disciplined clock is a clock that “knows” its own faults and
tries to compensate for them, i.e. a trained clock.

Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure.
A module is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower
levels.

74 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Syncronization from
a higher level

Module

Optional syncronization of
modules at a lower level

en05000206.vsd

Figure 34: Synchronization principle

A module is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the
synchronization decreases as well. A module can have several potential sources of
synchronization, with different maximum errors, which gives the module the
possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock
after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as a function of:

• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

• The time since the last used synchronization message
• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the module.

3.4.2.2 Real Time Clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) with a resolution of one nanosecond.
The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2098.

RTC at power off

During power off, the time in the IED time is kept by a capacitor backed RTC that
will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time
in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the
time will be lost completely.

RTC at startup
At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last
up time, the time in the IED will be quite accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC
power has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will
start at 1970-01-01. For more information, please refer to section "Time
synchronization startup procedure" and section "Example, binary synchronization".

Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains full time (as for instance LON, SNTP, GPS etc.) will
give an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time is

REL 670 Technical reference manual 75

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

thereafter set to the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three
things will happen with each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as
“fine”:

• If the synchronization message, that is similar to the other messages from its
origin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used
directly for synchronization, that is for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero
offset at the next coming time message.
• If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other
messages, a “spike-filter” in the IED will remove this time-message.
• If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following
message also has a large offset, the spike filter will not act and the offset in the
synchronization message will be compared to a threshold that defaults to 100
milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a
safe state and the clock is thereafter set to the correct time. If the offset is lower
than the threshold, the clock will be adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is
removed. With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it will take 100 seconds or 1.7
minutes to remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse will only be used for initial setting
of the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal
time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds will reset the time.

Rate accuracy
In the REx670 IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is about 100 ppm, but if the IED
is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy will be approximately 1 ppm if the
surrounding temperature is constant. Normally it will take 20 minutes to reach full
accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out, and a configured interface must receive
time-messages regularly, in order not to give a TSYNCERR. Normally, the time-out
is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than
one message is lost, a TSYNCERR will be given.

3.4.2.3 Synchronization alternatives

Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. Either the
synchronization message is applied via any of the communication ports of the IED
as a telegram message including date and time or as a minute pulse, connected to a
binary input, or via GPS. The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time
in the IEDs.

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a “Ping-Pong” method of synchronization. A message is sent from
an IED to an SNTP-server, and the SNTP-server returns the message after filling in
a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet
network that connects IEDs together in an IEC61850 network. For SNTP to operate

76 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

properly, there must be a SNTP-server present, preferably in the same station. The
SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that will give 1 ms accuracy for binary
inputs. The IED itself can be set as a SNTP-time server.

SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used shall be connected to the local network, i.e. not more
than 4-5 switches/routers away from the IED. The SNTP server shall be dedicated
for its task, or at least equipped with at real-time operating system, i.e. not a PC with
SNTP server software. The SNTP server shall be stable, i.e. either synchronized from
a stable source like GPS, or local i.e. without synchronization. Using a local SNTP
server i.e. without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant
configuration is not recommended.

Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are
sent.

• Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, i.e.
year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
• Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

IEC60870-5-103 is not used to synchronize the relay, but instead the offset between
the local time in the relay and the time received from 103 is added to all times (in
events and so on) sent via 103. In this way the relay acts as it is synchronized from
various 103 sessions at the same time. Actually, there is a “local” time for each 103
session.

The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).

Synchronization via Built-in-GPS

The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the
global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization
Module (GSM).

Synchronization via binary input

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be
generated from e.g. station master clock. If the station master clock is not
synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the
substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal
is also considered as a fine signal.

The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED.
The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.

If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation

and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute
pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute
pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the
IED.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 77

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As
only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after
the last flank.

Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.

Pulse data:

• Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

• Pulse length (b):
• Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.
• Maximum pulse length is optional.
• Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

en05000251.vsd

Figure 35: Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute
pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.

If contact bounces occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The
next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.

If the minute pulses are perfect, e.g. it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses,
contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting
the system. If contact bounces occurs more than 50 ms, e.g. it is less than 59950 ms
between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will
not be accepted.

Example, binary synchronization

A IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied to a
binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and the minute
pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a minute pulse is
that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the first minute pulse is
not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike
filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that the

78 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the
time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTC
backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed for
instance for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the
internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected.
The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will
either synchronize the time, if the time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time,
if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to
a safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its
destination within 1.7 minutes.

Synchronization via IRIG

Synchronization with DNP3.0

The DNP3.0 communication can be the source for the course time synchronization,
while the fine time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy.

The IRIG interface to the IED supplies two possible synchronization methods, IRIG-
B and PPS.

IRIG-B

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are
transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there is a number of
figures stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.

To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG module, one galvanic BNC
connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via
the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the
galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a figure in
the range 1-7.

“00” means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B
module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. “12” means that a 1 kHz modulation
is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector.

If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains

information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information only contains the time
within the year, and year information has to come from the tool or HMI.

The IRIG Module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by many IRIG-
B clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of time-zone.

It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG
module. In this case, also send the local time in the messages, as this local time plus
the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times.

PPS

REL 670 Technical reference manual 79

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG module.

The PPS signal is a transition from dark to light, that occurs 1 second +- 2 us after
another PPS signal. The allowed jitter of 2 us is settable.

3.4.3 Function block

TIME-
TIME
TSYNCERR
RTCERR

en05000425.vsd

Figure 36: TIME function block

3.4.4 Output signals

Table 17: Output signals for the TIME (TIME-) function block
Signal Description
TSYNCERR Time synchronization error
RTCERR Real time clock error

3.4.5 Setting parameters

Path in local HMI: Setting/Time

Path in PCM 600: Settings/Time/Synchronization

Table 18: Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CoarseSyncSrc Off - Off - Coarse time
SPA synchronization
LON source
SNTP
FineSyncSource Off - Off - Fine time
SPA synchronization
LON source
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
SyncMaster Off - Off - Activate IEDas
SNTP-Server synchronization
master
TimeAdjustRate Slow - Fast - Adjust rate for time
Fast synchronization

80 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Table 19: Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CoarseSyncSrc Off - Off - Coarse time
SPA synchronization
LON source
SNTP
DNP
FineSyncSource Off - Off - Fine time
SPA synchronization
LON source
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
SyncMaster Off - Off - Activate IEDas
SNTP-Server synchronization
master
TimeAdjustRate Slow - Slow - Adjust rate for time
Fast synchronization

Table 20: General settings for the TimeSynchBIN (TBIN-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ModulePosition 3 - 16 1 3 - Hardware position of
IO module for time
synchronization
BinaryInput 1 - 16 1 1 - Binary input number
for time
synchronization
BinDetection PositiveEdge - PositiveEdge - Positive or negative
NegativeEdge edge detection

Table 21: General settings for the TimeSynchSNTP (TSNT-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ServerIP-Add 0 - 18 1 0.0.0.0 - Server IP-address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 18 1 0.0.0.0 - Redundant server IP-
address

REL 670 Technical reference manual 81

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Table 22: General settings for the DaySumDSTBegin (TSTB-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
MonthInYear January - March - Month in year when
February daylight time starts
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - Sunday - Day in week when
Monday daylight time starts
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - Last - Week in month when
First daylight time starts
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay 0 - 86400 1 3600 s UTC Time of day in
seconds when
daylight time starts

82 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Table 23: General settings for the DaySumTimeEnd (TSTE-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
MonthInYear January - October - Month in year when
February daylight time ends
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - Sunday - Day in week when
Monday daylight time ends
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - Last - Week in month when
First daylight time ends
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay 0 - 86400 1 3600 s UTC Time of day in
seconds when
daylight time ends

Table 24: General settings for the TimeZone (TZON-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
NoHalfHourUTC -24 - 24 1 0 - Number of half-hours
from UTC

Table 25: Basic general settings for the TimeSynchIRIGB (TIRI-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SynchType BNC - Opto - Type of
Opto synchronization
TimeDomain LocalTime - LocalTime - Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - IRIG-B - Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - PlusTZ - Time zone as in 1344
PlusTZ standard

3.4.6 Technical data

REL 670 Technical reference manual 83

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Table 26: Time synchronization, time tagging

Function Value
Time tagging resolution, Events and Sampled 1 ms
Measurement Values
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min ± 1.0 ms typically
(minute pulse synchronization), Events and
Sampled Measurement Values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, ± 1.0 ms typically
Sampled Measurement Values

3.5 Parameter setting groups

3.5.1 Introduction
Use the six sets of settings to optimize IED operation for different system conditions.
By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the human-
machine interface or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED
that can cope with a variety of system scenarios.

3.5.2 Principle of operation

The ACGR function block has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one of the
setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active
setting group. Seven functional output signals are available for configuration
purposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is always available.

A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ACGR function block.

Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this the PCM 600 configuration tool must be used.

The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.

More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group
two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated.

Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a
pulse.

The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between.

84 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Figure 37: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which
group that is active.

The SGC function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is
defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of
setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will
be shown on the PST setting tool.

3.5.3 Function block

ACGR-
ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
ACTGRP5 GRP5
ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD

en05000433.vsd

Figure 38: ACGR function block

SGC--
NoOfSetGrp
MAXSETGR

en05000716.vsd

3.5.4 Input and output signals

REL 670 Technical reference manual 85

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Table 27: Input signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block
Signal Description
ACTGRP1 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 Selects setting group 4 as active
ACTGRP5 Selects setting group 5 as active
ACTGRP6 Selects setting group 6 as active

Table 28: Output signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block
Signal Description
GRP1 Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 Setting group 4 is active
GRP5 Setting group 5 is active
GRP6 Setting group 6 is active
SETCHGD Pulse when setting changed

3.5.5 Setting parameters

Table 29: General settings for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
t 0.0 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 s Pulse length of pulse
when setting changed

Table 30: General settings for the NoOfSetGrp (SGC--) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - SettingGroup1 - ActiveSettingGroup
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
NoOfSetGrp 1-6 1 1 No Number of possible
setting groups to
switch between

86 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

3.6 Test mode functionality

3.6.1 Introduction
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings
from the local HMI or PST. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test
mode. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are
disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with
actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus
mistakes are avoided.

3.6.2 Principle of operation

To be able to test the functions in the IED, you must set the terminal in the TEST
mode. There are two ways of setting the terminal in the TEST mode:

• By configuration, activating the input of the function block TEST.

• By setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under the menu: TEST/IED test
mode.

While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE output of the function block TEST is
activated. The other two outputs of the function block TEST are showing which is
the generator of the “Test mode: On” state — input from configuration (OUTPUT
output activated) or setting from LHMI (SETTING output activated).

While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions
are blocked. Any function can be de-blocked individually regarding functionality and
event signalling.

Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings
from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (the
output ACTIVE in function block TEST is set to true), see example in figure 39.
When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled
and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set
and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes
are possible.

The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.

The TEST function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test
handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30)
can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TEST function block.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 87

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Each of the protection functions includes the blocking from TEST function block. A
typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 39.

The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus
to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events e.g. during a
maintenance test.

U Disconnection

Normal voltage

U1<

U2<

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2

Time

Block step 1

Block step 2
en05000466.vsd

Figure 39: Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection

function.

3.6.3 Function block

TEST-
Test
INPUT ACTIVE
OUTPUT
SETTING

en05000443.vsd

Figure 40: TEST function block

3.6.4 Input and output signals

88 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Table 31: Input signals for the Test (TEST-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT Sets terminal in test mode when active

Table 32: Output signals for the Test (TEST-) function block
Signal Description
ACTIVE Terminal in test mode when active
OUTPUT Test input is active
SETTING Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off)
NOEVENT Event disabled during testmode

3.6.5 Setting parameters

Table 33: Basic general settings for the Test (TEST-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
TestMode Off - Off - Test mode in
On operation (On) or not
(Off)
EventDisable Off - Off - Event disable during
On testmode
CmdTestBit Off - Off - Command bit for test
On required or not during
testmode

3.7 IED identifiers

3.7.1 Introduction
There are two functions that allow you to identify each IED individually:
ProductInformation function has seven pre-set, settings that are unchangeable but
nevertheless very important:

• IED Type
• ProductDef
• FirmwareVer
• IEDMainFunType
• SerialNo.
• Ordering No.
• ProductionDate.

The settings are visable on the local HMI, under:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 89

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Diagnostics/IED Status/ProductIdentifiers
They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).
TerminalID function is allowing you to identify the individual IED in your system,
not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

3.7.2 Setting parameters

Table 34: General settings for the TerminalID (TEID-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
StationName 0 - 18 1 Station name - Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 1 0 - Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 1 Object name - Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 1 0 - Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 1 Unit name - Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 1 0 - Unit number

3.8 Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)

3.8.1 Introduction
The SMBI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal
Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the
“Application manual”, chapter “Engineering of the IED”). It represents the way
binary inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.

3.8.2 Principle of operation

The SMBI function block, see figure 41, receives its inputs from the real (hardware)
binary inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration
via its outputs, named BI1 to BI10. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be
tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT as information which signals shall
be connected between physical IO and the SMBI function block.

90 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

3.8.3 Function block

SI01-
SMBI
INSTNAME BI1
BI1NAME BI2
BI2NAME BI3
BI3NAME BI4
BI4NAME BI5
BI5NAME BI6
BI6NAME BI7
BI7NAME BI8
BI8NAME BI9
BI9NAME BI10
BI10NAME

en05000434.vsd

Figure 41: SI function block

3.8.4 Input and output signals

Table 35: Output signals for the SMBI (SI01-) function block
Signal Description
BI1 Binary input 1
BI2 Binary input 2
BI3 Binary input 3
BI4 Binary input 4
BI5 Binary input 5
BI6 Binary input 6
BI7 Binary input 7
BI8 Binary input 8
BI9 Binary input 9
BI10 Binary input 10

3.9 Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)

3.9.1 Introduction
The SMBO function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the
Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the
“Application manual”, chapter “Engineering of the IED”). It represents the way
binary outputs are sent from one IED 670 configuration.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 91

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

3.9.2 Principle of operation

The SMBO function block, see figure 42, receives logical signal from the IED
configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the SMT. The
inputs in the SMBO are named BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function
block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as information which
signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO.

3.9.3 Function block

SO01-
SMBO
BO1 INSTNAME
BO2 BO1NAME
BO3 BO2NAME
BO4 BO3NAME
BO5 BO4NAME
BO6 BO5NAME
BO7 BO6NAME
BO8 BO7NAME
BO9 BO8NAME
BO10 BO9NAME
BO10NAME

en05000439.vsd

Figure 42: SO function block

3.9.4 Input and output signals

Table 36: Input signals for the SMBO (SO01-) function block
Signal Description
BO1 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO2 Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO3 Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO4 Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO5 Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO6 Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO7 Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO8 Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO9 Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO10 Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool

92 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

3.10 Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)

3.10.1 Introduction
The SMMI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the
Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the
“Application manual”, chapter “Engineering of the IED”). It represents the way
milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED670 configuration.

3.10.2 Principle of operation

The SMMI function block, see figure 43, receives its inputs from the real (hardware)
mA inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via
its analog outputs, named AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be
tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT.

The outputs on the SMMI are normally connected to the MVGGIO function block
for further use of the mA signals.

3.10.3 Function block

SMI1-
SMMI
INSTNAME AI1
AI1NAME AI2
AI2NAME AI3
AI3NAME AI4
AI4NAME AI5
AI5NAME AI6
AI6NAME

en05000440.vsd

Figure 43: SMI function block

3.10.4 Input and output signals

Table 37: Output signals for the SMMI (SMI1-) function block
Signal Description
AI1 Analog milliampere input 1
AI2 Analog milliampere input 2
AI3 Analog milliampere input 3
AI4 Analog milliampere input 4
AI5 Analog milliampere input 5
AI6 Analog milliampere input 6

REL 670 Technical reference manual 93

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

3.11 Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)

3.11.1 Introduction
The SMAI function block (or the pre-processing function block, as it is also known)
is used within the PCM 600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please
see the overview of the engineering process in the “Application manual”, chapter
“Engineering of the IED”). It represents the way analog inputs are brought in for one
IED 670 configuration.

3.11.2 Principle of operation

Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one
neutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 44 and figure 45. The outputs of
the SMAI are giving information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals
acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. – 244
values in total). The BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the outputs of the function block.

The output singal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the in SMT connected input to AI1
to AI4. AIN is always the neutral current, calculated residual sum or the signal
connected to AI4. Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of
current/voltage if the input is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few
exceptions (HEDIF, BBDIF) shall always be connected to AI3P.

3.11.3 Function block

PR01-
SMAI
BLOCK SYNCOUT
DFTSPFC SPFCOUT
GRPNAME AI3P
AI1NAME AI1
AI2NAME AI2
AI3NAME AI3
AI4NAME AI4
TYPE AIN
NOSMPLCY

en05000705.vsd

Figure 44: PR01 function block

PR02-
SMAI
BLOCK AI3P
GRPNAME AI1
AI1NAME AI2
AI2NAME AI3
AI3NAME AI4
AI4NAME AIN
TYPE
en07000130.vsd

Figure 45: PR02–12 function block

94 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

3.11.4 Input and output signals

Table 38: Input signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block group 1
DFTSYNC Synchronisation of DFT calculation
DFTSPFC Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT
calculation

Table 39: Output signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block
Signal Description
SYNCOUT Synchronisation signal from internal DFT reference function
SPFCOUT Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT
reference function
AI3P Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
AI1 Group 1 analog input 1
AI2 Group 1 analog input 2
AI3 Group 1 analog input 3
AI4 Group 1 analog input 4
AIN Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance recorder

Table 40: Input signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block group 2

Table 41: Output signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block
Signal Description
AI3P Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
AI1 Group 2 analog input 1
AI2 Group 2 analog input 2
AI3 Group 2 analog input 3
AI4 Group 2 analog input 4
AIN Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance recorder

3.11.5 Setting parameters

REL 670 Technical reference manual 95

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal
frequency DFT reference is then the reference.

Table 42: Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - InternalDFTRef - DFT reference for
AdDFTRefCh1 external output
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - InternalDFTRef - DFT reference
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - Ph-N - Input connection type
Ph-Ph
TYPE 1-2 1 1 Ch 1=Voltage,2=Current

Table 43: Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Negation Off - Off - Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 1 10 % Limit for frequency
calculation in % of
UBase
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base Voltage

96 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Table 44: Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - InternalDFTRef - DFT reference
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - Ph-N - Input connection type
Ph-Ph
TYPE 1-2 1 1 Ch 1=Voltage,2=Current

Table 45: Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Negation Off - Off - Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 1 10 % Limit for frequency
calculation in % of
UBase
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base Voltage

3.12 Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)

3.12.1 Introduction
The SUM3Ph function block is used in order to get the sum of two sets of 3 ph analog
signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

3.12.2 Principle of operation

The summation block receives the 3ph signals from the SMAI blocks, see
figure 46. In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the outputs of the
function block.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 97

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

3.12.3 Function block

SU01-
Sum3Ph
BLOCK AI3P
DFTSYNC AI1
DFTSPFC AI2
G1AI3P AI3
G2AI3P AI4

en05000441.vsd

Figure 46: SU function block

3.12.4 Input and output signals

Table 46: Input signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block
DFTSYNC Synchronisation of DFT calculation
DFTSPFC Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT
calculation
G1AI3P Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G2AI3P Group 2 analog input 3-phase group

Table 47: Output signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block
Signal Description
AI3P Group analog input 3-phase group
AI1 Group 1 analog input
AI2 Group 2 analog input
AI3 Group 3 analog input
AI4 Group 4 analog input

3.12.5 Setting parameters

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

98 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Table 48: Basic general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SummationType Group1+Group2 - Group1+Group2 - Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-
(Group1+Group2)
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - InternalDFTRef - DFT reference
AdDFTRefCh1
External DFT ref

Table 49: Advanced general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 1 10 % Amplitude limit for
frequency calculation
in % of Ubase
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage

3.13 Authority status (AUTS)

3.13.1 Introduction
The AUTS function block (or the authority status function block) is an indication
function block, which informs about two events related to the IED and the user
authorization:

• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)

• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

3.13.2 Principle of operation

Whenever on of the two events described above happens, the specific output
(USRBLKED or LOGGEDON) will be activated. The output can e.g. be connected
on Event function block for LON/SPA. The signals are also available on IEC 61850
station bus.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 99

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

3.13.3 Function block

AUTS-
AuthStatus
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON

en06000503.vsd

Figure 47: AUTS function block

3.13.4 Output signals

Table 50: Output signals for the AuthStatus (AUTS-) function block
Signal Description
USRBLKED At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON At least one user is logged on

3.13.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

100 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

3.14 Goose binary receive

3.14.1 Function block

GB01-
GooseBinRcv
BLOCK OUT1
INSTNAME OUT1VAL
OUT2
OUT2VAL
OUT3
OUT3VAL
OUT4
OUT4VAL
OUT5
OUT5VAL
OUT6
OUT6VAL
OUT7
OUT7VAL
OUT8
OUT8VAL
OUT9
OUT9VAL
OUT10
OUT10VAL
OUT11
OUT11VAL
OUT12
OUT12VAL
OUT13
OUT13VAL
OUT14
OUT14VAL
OUT15
OUT15VAL
OUT16
OUT16VAL
OUT1NAM
OUT2NAM
OUT3NAM
OUT4NAM
OUT5NAM
OUT6NAM
OUT7NAM
OUT8NAM
OUT9NAM
OUT10NAM
OUT11NAM
OUT12NAM
OUT13NAM
OUT14NAM
OUT15NAM
OUT16NAM

en07000047.vsd

Figure 48: GB function block

3.14.2 Input and output signals

REL 670 Technical reference manual 101

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 3
Basic IED functions

Table 51: Input signals for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of output signals
INSTNAME Instance name in Signal Matrix Tool

Table 52: Output signals for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT1 Binary output 1
OUT1VAL Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 Binary output 2
OUT2VAL Valid data on binary output 2
OUT3 Binary output 3
OUT3VAL Valid data on binary output 3
OUT4 Binary output 4
OUT4VAL Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 Binary output 5
OUT5VAL Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 Binary output 6
OUT6VAL Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 Binary output 7
OUT7VAL Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 Binary output 8
OUT8VAL Valid data on binary output 8
OUT9 Binary output 9
OUT9VAL Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 Binary output 10
OUT10VAL Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 Binary output 11
OUT11VAL Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 Binary output 12
OUT12VAL Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 Binary output 13
OUT13VAL Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 Binary output 14
OUT14VAL Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 Binary output 15
OUT15VAL Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 Binary output 16
OUT16VAL Valid data on binary output 16
Table continued on next page

102 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 3
Basic IED functions

Signal Description
OUT1NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT2NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT3NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT4NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT5NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT6NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT7NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT8NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT9NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT10NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT11NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT12NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT13NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT14NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT15NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT16NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool

3.14.3 Setting parameters

Table 53: Basic general settings for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On

REL 670 Technical reference manual 103

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
104
 Section 4
Differential protection

Section 4 Differential protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used in
differential protection.

4.1 High impedance differential protection (PDIF,

87)

Function block name: HZDx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 87
IEC 61850 logical node name:
HZPDIF IdN

4.1.1 Introduction
The high impedance differential protection can be used when the involved CT cores
have the same turn ratio and similar magnetizing characteristic. It utilizes an external
summation of the phases and neutral current and a series resistor and a voltage
dependent resistor externally to the relay.

4.1.2 Principle of operation

The high impedance differential function is based on one current input with external
stabilizing resistors and voltage dependent resistors. Three functions can be used to
provide a three phase differential protection function. The stabilizing resistor value
is calculated from the relay operating value UR calculated to achieve through fault
stability. The supplied stabilizing resistor has a link to allow setting of the correct
resistance value.

Refer to “Application manual” for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 105

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 4
Differential protection

4.1.2.1 Logic diagram

The logic diagram see figure 49 shows the operation principles for the high impedance
differential protection function. It is a basically a simple one step relay with an
additional lower alarm level. The function can be totally blocked totally or only
tripping, can be blocked, by activating inputs from external signals.

Figure 49: Logic diagram for High impedance differential protection.

4.1.3 Function block

HZD1-
HZPDIF_87
ISI TRIP
BLOCK ALARM
BLKTR MEASVOLT

en05000363.vsd

Figure 50: HZD function block

4.1.4 Input and output signals

Table 54: Input signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block
Signal Description
ISI Group signal for current input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Block of trip

106 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 4
Differential protection

Table 55: Output signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip signal
ALARM Alarm signal
MEASVOLT Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

4.1.5 Setting parameters

Table 56: Basic parameter group settings for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
U>Alarm 2 - 500 1 10 V Alarm voltage level in
volts on CT
secondary side
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Time delay to activate
alarm
U>Trip 5 - 900 1 100 V Operate voltage level
in volts on CT
secondary side
SeriesResistor 10 - 20000 1 250 ohm Value of series
resistor in Ohms

4.1.6 Technical data

Table 57: High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (20-400) V ± 1.0% of Ur for U < Ur
± 1.0% of U for U > Ur

Reset ratio >95% -

Maximum continuous voltage U>TripPickup2/series resistor -
≤200 W
Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -

Reset time 90 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Ud -

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -

REL 670 Technical reference manual 107

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
108
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Section 5 Impedance protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes distance protection and associated functions. It includes
function blocks, logic diagrams and data tables with information about distance
protection, automatic switch onto fault, weak end in-feed and other associated
functions. Quadrilateral characteristics are also covered.

5.1 Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral

characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Function block name: ZMQ- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 21
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZMQPDIS

5.1.1 Introduction
The line distance protection is a five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to earth fault for each of the
independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach
gives flexibility for use onoverhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.

Mho alternative Quad characteristic is available.

The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility
to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines(see figure 51).

REL 670 Technical reference manual 109

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Forward
operation

Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd

Figure 51: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load

encroachment function activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at load

exporting end at phase to earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.

5.1.2 Principle of operation

5.1.2.1 Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED670 are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 52 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones l.

110 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

en05000458.vsd

Figure 52: The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase
fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection relay with six measuring elements.

5.1.2.2 Impedance characteristic

The distance measuring zone include six impedance measuring loops; three intended
for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as three-phase
faults.

The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 53 and figure 54. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 111

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

RFPE R1+Rn RFPE

X0 - X1
Xn =
3
X1+Xn R0 - R1
Rn =
3
f N f N
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1+Xn

RFPE R1+Rn RFPE

en05000661.vsd

Figure 53: Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain.

112 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFPP 2·R1 RFPP

2·X1

R (Ohm/phase)

RFPP RFPP

2·X1

RFPP 2·R1 RFPP

en05000662.vsd

Figure 54: Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 55. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive
reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 113

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

ILn R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5´RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault
IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5´RFPP
en05000181.vsd

Figure 55: Fault loop model

where:
n designates anyone of the three phases (1, 2 or 3) and
m represents the phase that is leading phase n with 120 degrees (i.e. 3, 1 or 2).

The R1 and jX1 in figure 55 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault
resistance in the fault place.

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 55, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.

The theoretical parameters p and q outline the area of operation in quadrant 1 when
varied from 0 to 1.0. That is, for any combination of p and q, where both are between
0 and 1.0, the corresponding impedance is within the reach of the characteristic.

114 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 56. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is
symmetric, in the sense that it is conform for forward and reverse direction. Therefore,
all reach settings apply to both directions.

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

en05000182.vsd

Figure 56: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

5.1.2.3 Minimum operating current

The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLnAB (BC or CA)< IMinOpPP.

ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.

All three current limits IminOpPE, IminOpIN and IMinOpPP are

automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, i.e. OperationDir=Reverse.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 115

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

5.1.2.4 Measuring principles

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 1 (example
for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).

UL1 – UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 – IL2
(Equation 1)

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults

(example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 3.

U L1
Z app = ------------------------------
I L1 + I N × KN
(Equation 2)

Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:

X0 - X1
KN =
3X1

where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point
to the fault on the protected line.

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

The formula given in equation 3 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications.
When load is considered in the case of single line to earth fault, conventional distance
protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670
has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought
from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

116 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to
the loop impedance according to equation 4,

X Di
U = R × i + ------ × -----
w 0 Dt
(Equation 4)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R × Re ( I ) + ------ × ------------------
w0 Dt
(Equation 5)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R × Im ( I ) + ------ × -----------------
w0 Dt
(Equation 6)

with

w0 = 2 × p × f 0
(Equation 7)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation
for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:

Im ( U ) × DRe ( I ) – Re ( U ) × D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – D Im ( I ) × Re ( I )
(Equation 8)

Re ( U ) × Im ( I ) – Im ( U ) × Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 × Dt × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – DIm ( I ) × Re ( I )
(Equation 9)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 117

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

5.1.2.5 Directional lines

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZD.
Equation 10 and equation 11 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction
for line-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault.

0.8 × U1L1 + 0.2 × U1L1M

-ArgDir < arg ------------------------------------------------------------ < ArgNegRes
IL1 (Equation 10)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

0.8 × U1L1L2 + 0.2 × U1L1L2M

-ArgDir < arg ----------------------------------------------------------------------- < ArgNegRes
I L1L2 (Equation 11)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 57.
U1L1 is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

U1L1M is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 is phase current in phase L1

U1L1L2 is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

U1L1L2M is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

IL1L2 is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively.(see figure 57) and it should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.

The ZD gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the evaluation
where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4 etc.

118 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd

Figure 57: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds

4% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms, the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals
in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

5.1.2.6 Simplified logic diagrams

REL 670 Technical reference manual 119

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Distance protection zones

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring loops: phase-
to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the

corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E). The phase-to-phase signals are
designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers
(L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1).

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

• Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
• Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 58.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone
measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition
separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCDZ.

The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant
signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of the parameter
OperationDir. It shall be configured to the STDIR output on the ZD block.

120 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Figure 58: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 59.

Figure 59: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

REL 670 Technical reference manual 121

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 60.

STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
OR STZMPE.
&
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
& t
DIRL3N AND

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
& t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 & t
DIRL3L1 AND

OR STZMPP
&
BLK

15 ms
OR START
& t

en05000778.vsd

Figure 60: Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 61.

122 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Figure 61: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

5.1.3 Function block

ZM01-
ZMQPDIS_21
I3P TRIP
U3P TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

en06000256.vsd

Figure 62: ZM function block

ZD01-
ZDRDIR
I3P STDIR
U3P

en05000681.vsd

Figure 63: ZD function block

5.1.4 Input and output signals

REL 670 Technical reference manual 123

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 58: Input signals for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
VTSZ Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR Blocks all trip outputs
STCND External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND External directional condition

Table 59: Output signals for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3
START General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 Start signal from phase L1
STL2 Start signal from phase L2
STL3 Start signal from phase L3
STND Non-directional start, issued from any phase or loop

Table 60: Input signals for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group connection
U3P Group connection

Table 61: Output signals for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function block
Signal Description
STDIR All start signals binary coded

5.1.5 Setting parameters

124 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 62: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current, i.e.
rated current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage, i.e.
rated voltage
OperationDir Off - Forward - Operation mode of
Non-directional directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach
R1 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.10 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach
R0 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 15.00 ohm/p Zero seq. resistance
for zone characteristic
angle
RFPP 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-Ph
RFPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-E
OperationPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Phase
loops
Timer tPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
Ph
OperationPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Earth
loops
Timer tPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
E
IMinOpPP 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 30 1 5 %IB Minimum operate
residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

REL 670 Technical reference manual 125

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 63: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMQAPDIS_21 (ZM02-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current, i.e.
rated current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage, i.e.
rated voltage
OperationDir Off - Forward - Operation mode of
Non-directional directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 40.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach
R1 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 0.01 120.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach
R0 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 15.00 ohm/p Zero seq. resistance
for zone characteristic
angle
RFPP 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-Ph
RFPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-E
OperationPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Phase
loops
Timer tPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
Ph
OperationPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Earth
loops
Timer tPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
E
IMinOpPP 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

126 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 64: Parameter group settings for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 1 115 Deg Angle to blinder in
second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 1 15 Deg Angle to blinder in
fourth quadrant for
forward direction
IMinOp 1 - 99999 1 10 %IB Minimum operate
current in % of IBase
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base Current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base Voltage

5.1.6 Technical data

Table 65: Distance measuring zone, Quad (PDIS, 21)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate residual (5-30)% of Ibase -
current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (10-30)% of Ibase -
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance, (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy
zone 1 ± 2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Positive sequence resistance, (0.50-3000.00) Ω/phase Conditions:
zone 2-5 Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) Ω/phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
Zero sequence reactance, zone 1 (0.10-9000.00) Ω/phase degrees
Zero sequence resistance, (0.50-9000.00) Ω/phase
zone 2-5
Zero sequence resistance (0.50-3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, Ph-E (1.00-9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph (1.00-3000.00) Ω/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured with -
CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Impedance zone timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Operate time 24 ms typically -
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time 30 ms typically -

REL 670 Technical reference manual 127

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

5.2 Distance protection zones, quadrilateral

characteristic for series compensated lines
(PDIS)

Function block name: ZMC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 21
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZMCPDIS

5.2.1 Introduction
The line distance protection is a five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to earth fault for each of the
independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach gives
flexibility for use onoverhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.

Quad characteristic is available.

The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility
to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded linessee figure 51.

Forward
operation

Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd

Figure 64: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load

encroachment function activated

128 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the quadrilateral function prevents
overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to earth faults on heavily loaded
power lines.

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.

5.2.2 Principle of operation

5.2.2.1 Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED670 are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 65 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

en05000458.vsd

Figure 65: The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase
fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection relay with six measuring elements.

5.2.2.2 Impedance characteristic

The distance measuring zone include six impedance measuring loops; three intended
for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as three-phase
faults.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 129

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 66 and figure 67. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.

X (Ohm/loop)

RFRVE R1+Rn RFFWPE

X 0PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE --
PG X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
3 3
XX
X00
PE
0 PE
-X
PG --1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW =
XNFW==
XNFW
X1FWPE+XNFW 3 33

jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFRVE RFFWPE

X1RVPE+XNRV

RFRVE R1+Rn RFFWPE

en07000060.vsd

Figure 66: Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain.

130 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFVPP R1PP RFFWPP

2 2
X 0PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE --
PG X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV ==
XNRV
33
XX
X00
PE
0 PE
-X
PG --1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW==
XNFW =
X1FWPP 3
3 3

j j
R (Ohm/phase)

RFRVPP RFFWPP
2 2

X1RVPP

RFVPP R1PP RFFWPP

2 2
en07000062.vsd

Figure 67: Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 68. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive
reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 131

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

ILn R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5´RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault
IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5´RFPP
en05000181.vsd

Figure 68: Fault loop model

where:
n designates anyone of the three phases (1, 2 or 3) and
m represents the phase that is leading phase n with 120 degrees (i.e. 3, 1 or 2).

The R1 and jX1 in figure 68 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault
resistance in the fault place.

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 68, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.

The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 69. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is
symmetric, forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both
directions.

132 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

en05000182.vsd

Figure 69: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

5.2.2.3 Minimum operating current

The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLnAB (BC or CA)< IMinOpPP.

ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.

All three current limits IminOpPE, IminOpIN and IMinOpPP are

automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, i.e. OperationDir=Reverse.

5.2.2.4 Measuring principles

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 12 (example
for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).

REL 670 Technical reference manual 133

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

UL1 – UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 – IL2
(Equation 12)

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase.

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults

(example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 14.

U L1
Z app = ------------------------------
I L1 + I N × KN
(Equation 13)

Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:

X0 - X1
KN =
3X1

where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point
to the fault on the protected line.

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current at the relay point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

The formula given in equation 14 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications.
When load is considered in the case of single line to earth fault, conventional distance
protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670
has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought
from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to
the loop impedance according to equation 15,

X Di
U = R × i + ------ × -----
w 0 Dt
(Equation 15)

in complex notation, or:

134 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R × Re ( I ) + ------ × ------------------
w0 Dt
(Equation 16)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R × Im ( I ) + ------ × -----------------
w0 Dt
(Equation 17)

with

w0 = 2 × p × f 0
(Equation 18)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation
for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:

Im ( U ) × DRe ( I ) – Re ( U ) × D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – D Im ( I ) × Re ( I )
(Equation 19)

Re ( U ) × Im ( I ) – Im ( U ) × Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 × Dt × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – DIm ( I ) × Re ( I )
(Equation 20)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point.

5.2.2.5 Directionality for series compensation

In the basic distance protection function, the control of the memory for polarizing
voltage is performed by an under voltage control. In case of series compensated line,
a voltage reversal can occur with a relatively high voltage also when the memory
must be locked. Thus, a simple undervoltage type of voltage memory control can not
be used in case of voltage reversal. In the option for series compensated network the

REL 670 Technical reference manual 135

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

polarizing quantity and memory are controlled by an impedance measurement

criterion.

The polarizing voltage is a memorized positive sequence voltage. The memory is

continuously synchronized via a positive sequence filter. The memory is starting to
run freely instantaneously when a voltage change is detected in any phase. A non-
directional impedance measurement is used to detect a fault and identify the faulty
phase or phases.

At a three phase fault when no positive sequence voltage remains (all three phases
are disconnected) the memory is used for direction polarization during 100 ms.

The memory predicts the phase of the positive sequence voltage with the pre-fault
frequency. This extrapolation is made with a high accuracy and it is not the accuracy
of the memory that limits the time the memory can be used. The network is at a three
phase fault under way to a new equilibrium and the post-fault condition can only be
predicted accurately for a limited time from the pre-fault condition.

In case of a three phase fault after 100 ms the phase of the memorized voltage can
not be relied upon and the directional measurement has to be blocked. The achieved
direction criteria are sealed-in when the directional measurement is blocked and kept
until the impedance fault criteria is reset (the direction is stored until the fault is
cleared).

This memory control allows in the time domain unlimited correct directional
measurement for all unsymmetrical faults also at voltage reversal. Only at three phase
fault within the range of the set impedance reach of the criteria for control of the
polarization voltage the memory has to be used and the measurement is limited to
100 ms and thereafter the direction is sealed-in. The special impedance measurement
to control the polarization voltage is set separately and has only to cover (with some
margin) the impedance to fault that can cause the voltage reversal.

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDS.
Equation 21 and equation 22 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction
for line-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault.

U 1L1M
- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
(Equation 21)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

U 1L1L 2 M
- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
(Equation 22)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 70.

136 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

U1L1M is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 is phase current in phase L1

U1L1L2M is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

IL1L2 is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively.(see figure 70) and it should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.

The ZDS gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the
evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4
etc.

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd

Figure 70: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.

5.2.2.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring loops: phase-
to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 137

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the

corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E). The phase-to-phase signals are
designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers
(L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1).

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

• Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
• Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 71.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone
measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition
separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCDZ.

The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant
signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of the parameter
OperationDir. It shall be configured to the STDIR output on the ZDS block.

138 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Figure 71: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 72.

Figure 72: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

REL 670 Technical reference manual 139

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 73.

STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
OR STZMPE.
&
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
& t
DIRL3N AND

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
& t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 & t
DIRL3L1 AND

OR STZMPP
&
BLK

15 ms
OR START
& t

en05000778.vsd

Figure 73: Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 74.

140 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Figure 74: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

5.2.3 Function block

ZMC1-
ZMCPDIS_21
I3P TRIP
U3P TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

en07000036.vsd

Figure 75: ZMC function block

ZDS1-
ZDSRDIR
I3P STFW
U3P STRV
STDIRCND

en07000035.vsd

Figure 76: ZDS function block

5.2.4 Input and output signals

REL 670 Technical reference manual 141

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 66: Input signals for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
VTSZ Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR Blocks all trip outputs
STCND External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND External directional condition

Table 67: Output signals for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3
START General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 Start signal from phase L1
STL2 Start signal from phase L2
STL3 Start signal from phase L3
STND Non-directional start, issued from any phase or loop

Table 68: Input signals for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group connection for current
U3P Group connection for voltage

Table 69: Output signals for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function block
Signal Description
STFW Start in forward direction
STRV Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND Binary coded directional information per measuring loop

5.2.5 Setting parameters

142 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 70: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current, i.e.
rated current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage, i.e.
rated voltage
OperationDir Off - Forward - Operation mode of
Non-directional directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
OperationPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Phase
loops
X1FwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for
characteristic angle,
Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
Timer tPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
Ph
OperationPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Earth
loops
X1FwPE 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for
characteristic angle,
Ph-E
X0PE 0.50 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
E
R0PE 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 47.00 ohm/p Zero seq. resistance
for zone characteristic
angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-E, forward
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 143

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

X1RvPE 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-E, reverse
Timer tPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
E
IMinOpPP 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 30 1 5 %IB Minimum operate
residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 71: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMCAPDIS_21 (ZMC2-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current, i.e.
rated current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage, i.e.
rated voltage
OperationDir Off - Forward - Operation mode of
Non-directional directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
OperationPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Phase
loops
X1FwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for
characteristic angle,
Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
Table continued on next page

144 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Timer tPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
Ph
OperationPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Earth
loops
X1FwPE 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for
characteristic angle,
Ph-E
X0PE 0.50 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
E
R0PE 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 47.00 ohm/p Zero seq. resistance
for zone characteristic
angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-E, forward
X1RvPE 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-E, reverse
Timer tPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
E
IMinOpPP 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 72: Basic parameter group settings for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
OperationSC NoSeriesComp - SeriesComp - Special directional
SeriesComp criteria for voltage
reversal
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting for
current level
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
voltage level
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 145

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

IMinOpPE 5 - 30 1 5 %IB Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 1 10 %IB Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 1 130 Deg Angle of blinder in
second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 1 15 Deg Angle of blinder in
fourth quadrant for
forward direction
INReleasePE 10 - 100 1 20 %IPh 3I0 limit for releasing
phase-to-earth
measuring loops
INBlockPP 10 - 100 1 40 %IPh 3I0 limit for blocking
phase-to-phase
measuring loops
OperationLdCh Off - On - Operation of load
On discrimination
characteristic
RLdFw 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 80.00 ohm/p Forward resistive
reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 80.00 ohm/p Reverse resistive
reach within the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 1 30 Deg Load angle
determining the load
impedance area
X1FwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 40.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 7.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for
characteristic angle,
Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 40.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
X1FwPE 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 40.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 7.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for
characteristic angle,
Ph-E
Table continued on next page

146 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

X0FwPE 0.50 - 9000.00 0.01 120.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R0PE 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 20.00 ohm/p Zero seq. resistance
for zone characteristic
angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-E, forward
X1RvPE 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 40.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
X0RvPE 0.50 - 9000.00 0.01 120.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-E, reverse

5.2.6 Technical data

Table 73: Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines
(PDIS, 21)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate residual (5-30)% of Ibase -
current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (10-30)% of Ibase -
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance, (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy
zone 1 ± 2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Positive sequence resistance, (0.50-3000.00) Ω/phase Conditions:
zone 2-5 Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) Ω/phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
Zero sequence reactance, zone 1 (0.10-9000.00) Ω/phase degrees
Zero sequence resistance, (0.50-9000.00) Ω/phase
zone 2-5
Zero sequence resistance (0.50-3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, Ph-E (1.00-9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph (1.00-3000.00) Ω/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured with -
CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Impedance zone timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Operate time 24 ms typically -
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time 30 ms typically -

REL 670 Technical reference manual 147

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

5.3 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho

characteristic, PDIS 21

Function block name: ZMHx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 21
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZMHPDIS

5.3.1 Introduction
The numerical mho line distance protection is a five zone full scheme protection for
back-up detection of short circuit and earth faults. The full scheme technique provides
back-up protection of power lines with high sensitivity and low requirement on
remote end communication. The fivezones have fully independent measuring and
settings which gives high flexibility for all types of lines.

The modern technical solution offers fast operating time down to ¾ cycles.

The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is suitable for the protection
of heavily loaded lines and multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping is
one, two- and/or three pole.

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching at phase-to-

earth faults on heavily loaded power lines, see figure 77.

148 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

jX

Operation area Operation area

Operation area

No operation area No operation area

en07000117.vsd

Figure 77: Load encroachment influence on the offset mho characteristic

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.

The possibility to use the phase-to-earth quadrilateral impedance characteristic

together with the mho characteristic increases the possibility to overcome eventual
lack of sensitivity of the mho element due to the shaping of the curve at remote end
faults.

The integrated control and monitoring functions offers effective solutions for
operating and monitoring all types of transmission and sub transmission lines.

5.3.2 Principle of operation

5.3.2.1 Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the REx 6xx are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults
are executed in parallel.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compare to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements.

5.3.2.2 Impedance characteristic

The distance function consists of five instances. Each instance can be selected to be
either forward or reverse with cross polarized mho characteristic alternatively self
polarized offset Mho characteristics with reverse offset. The operating characteristic
is in accordance to figure 78 below where zone5 is selected offset Mho.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 149

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

jX X
Mho, zone4

Mho, zone3
Zs=0
Mho, zone2
R
Mho, zone1

Zs=Z1

Zs=2Z1

Offset mho, zone5

en06000400.vsd

Figure 78: Mho, offset Mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the Mho characteristic

The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead
of crossing the origin as for the offset mho in the left figure 78, which is only valid
where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates
of the negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown in the right
figure 78.

The polarisation quantities used for the mho circle is 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho
circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion
of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much with high loading
and mild power swing conditions.

The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cut off a section
of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the setting
parameter LoadEnchMode to On. Enabling of the load encroachment function
increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the
load impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the PHSM
function, where also the relevant settings can be found. Information about the load
encroachment from the PHS to the zone measurement is given in binary format to the
input signal LDCND.

5.3.2.3 Basic operation characteristics

Each impedance zone can be switched On and Off by the setting parameter
Operation.

Each zone can also be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the
parameter DirMode .

The operation for phase to earth and phase to phase fault can be individually switched
On and Off by the setting parameter OpModePE and OpModePP.

150 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is possible
to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to Underreach. In this
mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by 20% and the filtering
is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring. If the ReachMode is set
to Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced.
The latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3
elements and reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either
because of less likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these
elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally.

The offset mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by

the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a
directional line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from the
directional element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal to the
input DIRCND.

The zone reach for phase to earth fault and phase to phase fault is set individually in
polar coordinates. The impedance is set by the parameters ZPE and ZPP and the
corresponding arguments by the parameters ZAngPE and ZAngPP.

Compensation for earth return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the
parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the earth return
path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPE. KNMag and
KNAng are defined according to equation 23 and equation 24.

Z0-Z1
KNMag =
3 × Z1
(Equation 23)

æ Z0-Z1 ö
KNAng = ( ZAngPE ) - arg ç ÷
è 3 × Z1 ø (Equation 24)

Where:
Z0 is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in ohm/phase
Z1 is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in ohm/phase
ZAngP line angle of the positive line impedance
E

The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed

individually by setting the parameter tPE and tPP respectively. To release the time
delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPE and OpModetPP, has to be set
to On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation.

The function can be blocked in the following ways:

• activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function

• activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals
• activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based algorithm

REL 670 Technical reference manual 151

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

• activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the instantaneous part of the algorithm
for high SIR values
• activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals
• activating the input BLKPE blocks the phase-to-earth fault loop outputs
• activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs

The activation of signal BLKZ can either be by external fuse failure function or from
the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In both cases
the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the input BLKZ
in the Mho distance function block (ZMHODIS 21).

The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been detected
by the Mho supervision logic to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall
be connected to the BLKZMTD output signal at the Mho supervision function.

At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built
in resonance circuit in the CVT which reduce the secondary voltage for a while. The
input BLKHSIR shall be connected to the output signal HSIR on the Mho supervision
logic for increasing of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when
permissive underreach scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.

5.3.2.4 Theory for operation

The Mho algorithm is based on phase comparison of a operating phasor and a

polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference phasor by more than
90 degrees, the function will operate and give a trip output.

Phase-to-phase fault

Mho
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as figure 79The condition for deriving the
angle β is according to equation 25.

b = arg(U L1 L 2 - I L1 L 2 × ZPP ) - arg(U pol )

(Equation 25)

where:
the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2
U L1 L 2

the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2

I L1 L 2

ZPP the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault
Upol is the polarizing voltage

152 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage

(UL1L2 for phase L1 to L2 fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of
the Mho circle for close in faults.

Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270

IL1L2·X
Ucomp = UL1L2 - IL1L2 • ZPP

IL1L2 • ZPP
ß
Upol
UL1L2

IL1L2·R

en07000109.vsd

Figure 79: Simplified mho characteristic and vectordiagram for phase L1 to L2

fault.

Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the
setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has the
settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180°.

The condition for operation at phase to phase fault is that the angle β between the two
compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90° figure 80. The
angle will be 90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

The angle β for L1 to L2 fault can be defined according to equation 29.

æ U -IL1L2 × ZPP ö
b = arg ç ÷
è U-(-IL1L2 × ZRevPP) ø (Equation 28)

where:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 153

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

= is the UL1L2 voltage

U
ZRevPP = is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault in
reverse direction

IL1L2jX

Ucomp1 = UL1L2 - IL1L2 • ZPP

IL1L2 • ZPP

U
Ucomp2 = U = IF•ZF=UL1L2
IL1L2R

- IL1L2 • Z RevPP
en07000110.vsd

Figure 80: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase
L1 to L2 fault.

For operation the angle β should be 90<β<270.

Offset Mho, forward direction

When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria beside
the one for offset mho equation 30 is introdced, that is the angle φ between the voltage
and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and fourth quadrant.
See figure 81 below. So the condition for operation will be

90 < b < 270

(Equation 30)

and

ArgDir < j < ArgNegR e s

(Equation 31)

154 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant
β is calculated according to equation 29

The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the
mho directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See
chapter Mho directional element for information about the mho directionalety
element.

IL1L2jX

ZPP

UL1L2

ArgNegRes f

IL1L2
ArgDir

en07000111.vsd

Figure 81: Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase
L1 to L2 fault.

Offset Mho, reverse direction

The operation area for offset Mho in reverse direction is according to figure 82. The
operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180°.

The conditions for operation are

90 < b < 270

(Equation 32)

and

180° - ArgDir < j < ArgNeg Re s + 180°

(Equation 33)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 155

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

The β is derived according to equation 29 for the mho circle and φ is the angle between
the voltage and current.

ZPP

ArgNegRes
ϕ

IL1L2

ArgDir R

UL1L2

ZRevPP

en06000469.eps

Figure 82: Operation characteristice for reverse phase L1–phase L2 fault.

Phase-to-earth fault

Mho
The measuring of earth faults uses earth return compensation applied in a
conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence
from the earth return path.

For a earth fault in phase L1A, we can derive the compensation voltage Ucomp see
figure 83 as

Ucomp = U pol - I L1 × Z loop

(Equation 34)

where
Upol is the polarizing voltage (memorized UL1 for Phase L1 to earth fault)

Zloop is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as

(
Z1+ZN = Z 1 × 1 + KN )
Table continued on next page

156 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

where
Z1 positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase)
KN zero sequence compensator factor

The angle β between the Ucomp and the polarize voltage Upol for a L1 to earth fault
is

ë ( )
b = arg é U L1 - I L1 + IN × KN × ZPE ù - arg(Upol)
û (Equation 36)

where:
UL1 = phase voltage in faulty phase L1

VA = phase voltage in faulty phase A

IL1 = phase current in faulty phase L1

IA = phase current in faulty phase A

IN = zero sequence current in faulty phase L1

KN Z0-Z1
= the setting parameter for the
3 × Z1 zero sequence
compensation consisting of
the magnitude KN and the
angle KNAng.
Upol = 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage UL1

Vpol = 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage VA

It is to be noted that the angle KNAng is the difference angle between the positive
sequence impedance ZPE and the impedance ZN for the earth return path see figure
83

REL 670 Technical reference manual 157

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

IL1·X KNAng

IL1·ZN
Ucomp

IL1• Zloop
IL1·ZPE
Upol

f
IL1 (Ref) IL1·R

en06000472.vsd

Figure 83: Simplified offset mho characteristic and vectordiagram for phase
L1 to earth fault.

Operation occurs if

90 £ b £ 270
(Equation 39)

Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho at earth fault is a circle containing the two vectors
from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the settting reach for
the positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The vector
ZPE in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for ZRevPP
is AngZPE+180°

The condition for operation at phase to earth fault is that the angle β between the two
compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90° see figure
84. The angle will be 90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

The angle β for L1 to earth fault can be defined as

æ UL1- IL1L × ZPE ö

b = arg ç ÷
è UL1-(- IL1 × Z Re vPE ) ø
æ UL1- IL1L × ZPE ö
b = arg ç ÷
è UL1-(- IL1 × Z Re vPE ) ø (Equation 40)

where
is the phase L1 phase voltage

U L1

158 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

IL1L 2 • jX

U comp1 = UL1 - I L1• ZPE

IL1 • ZPE

UL1
U comp2 = UL1 - (-IL1 • ZRevPE)
IL1L2 • R

- I L1 • Z Re vPe

en 06000465.vsd

IAB•jX

V comp1 = VA - IA • ZPE
IA • ZPE

VA
V comp2 = VA - (-IA • ZRevPE)
I AB • R

- IA • Z RevPe

en 06000465_ansi. vsd

Figure 84: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1
to L2 fault.

Operation occurs if

90 £ b £ 270
(Equation 42)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 159

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Offset Mho, forward direction

In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset
mho will introduce an extra criteria for operation. Beside the basic criteria for offset
mho according to equations 40 and 42, also the criteria that the angle φ between the
voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant.
See figure 85. The condition for operation will hereby be 90<β<270 and
ArgDir<φ<ArgNegRes.

where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant.
β is calculated according to equation 40

IL1 jX

UL1

ArgNegRes f

IL1 IL1·R

ArgDir

en 06000466.vsd

Figure 85: Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for L1 to
earth fault.

Offset mho, reverse direction

In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in
reverse direction will introduce an extra criteria for operation compare to the normal
offset Mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the fault current
shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The operation area in
second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180° -ArgDir and in fourth
quadrant ArgNegRes+180°, see figure 86

The conditions for operation of offset Mho in reverse direction for L1 to earth fault
will be 90<β<270 and 180°-Argdir<φ<ArgNegRes+180°.

160 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

The β is derived according to equation 40 for the offset Mho circle and φ is the angle
between the voltage and current.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 161

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

ZPE

ArgNegRes
ϕ

IL1
ArgDir R

UL1
ZRevPE

en06000470.eps

ZPE

ArgNegRes
ϕ

IA
ArgDir R

VA
ZRevPE

en06000470_ansi.eps

162 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Figure 86: Simplified characteristic for offset Mho in reverse direction for L1 to
earth fault.

5.3.3 Function block

ZMH1-
ZMHPDIS_21
I3P TRIP
U3P TRL1
CURR_INP TRL2
VOLT_INP TRL3
POL_VOLT TRPE
BLOCK TRPP
BLKZ START
BLKZMTD STL1
BLKHSIR STL2
BLKTRIP STL3
BLKPE STPE
BLKPP STPP
DIRCND
STCND
LDCND

en06000423.vsd

Figure 87: ZMH function block

5.3.4 Input and output signals

Table 74: Input signals for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Connection for current sample signals
U3P Connection for voltage sample signals
CURR_INP Connection for current signals
VOLT_INP Connection for voltage signals
POL_VOLT Connection for polarizing voltage
BLOCK Block of function
BLKZ Block due to fuse failure
BLKZMTD Block signal for blocking of time domaine function
BLKHSIR Blocks time domain function at high SIR
BLKTRIP Blocks all operate output signals
BLKPE Blocks phase-to-earth operation
BLKPP Blocks phase-to-phase operation
DIRCND External directional condition
STCND External start condition (loop enabler)
LDCND External load condition (loop enabler)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 163

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 75: Output signals for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip General
TRL1 Trip phase L1
TRL2 Trip phase L2
TRL3 Trip phase L3
TRPE Trip phase-to-earth
TRPP Trip phase-to-phase
START Start General
STL1 Start phase L1
STL2 Start phase L2
STL3 Start phase L3
STPE Start phase-to-earth
STPP Start phase-to-phase

5.3.5 Setting parameters

Table 76: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - ON - Operation Off/On
ON
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
DirMode Off - Forward - Direction mode
Offset
Forward
Reverse
LoadEnchMode Off - Off - Load enchroachment
ON mode Off/On
ReachMode OverReach - OverReach - Reach mode Over/
Underreach Underreach
OpModePE Off - ON - Operation mode Off /
ON On of Phase-Earth
loops
ZPE 0.005 - 3000.000 0.001 30.000 ohm/p Positive sequence
impedance setting for
Phase-Earth loop
ZAngPE 10 - 90 1 80 Deg Angle for positive
sequence line
impedance for Phase-
Earth loop
KN 0.00 - 3.00 0.01 0.80 - Magnitud of earth
return compensation
factor KN
Table continued on next page

164 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

KNAng -180 - 180 1 -15 Deg Angle for earth return
compensation factor
KN
ZRevPE 0.005 - 3000.000 0.001 30.000 ohm/p Reverse reach of the
phase to earth
loop(magnitude)
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Delay time for
operation of phase to
earth elements
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operation
phase to earth current
OpModePP Off - ON - Operation mode Off /
ON On of Phase-Phase
loops
ZPP 0.005 - 3000.000 0.001 30.000 ohm/p Impedance setting
reach for phase to
phase elements
ZAngPP 10 - 90 1 85 Deg Angle for positive
sequence line
impedance for Phase-
Phase elements
ZRevPP 0.005 - 3000.000 0.001 30.000 ohm/p Reverse reach of the
phase to phase
loop(magnitude)
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Delay time for
operation of phase to
phase
IMinOpPP 10 - 30 1 20 %UB Minimum operation
phase to phase
current

Table 77: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
OffsetMhoDir Non-directional - Non-directional - Direction mode for
Forward offset mho
Reverse
OpModetPE Off - ON - Operation mode Off /
ON On of Zone timer, Ph-
E
OpModetPP Off - ON - Operation mode Off /
ON On of Zone timer, Ph-
ph

REL 670 Technical reference manual 165

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 78: Basic parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base value for current
measurement
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base value for voltage
measurement
PilotMode Off - Off - Pilot mode Off/On
On
Zreach 0.1 - 3000.0 0.1 38.0 ohm Line impedance
IMinOp 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operating
current for SIR
measurement

Table 79: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DeltaI 0 - 200 1 10 %IB Current change level
in %IB for fault
inception detection
Delta3I0 0 - 200 1 10 %IB Zero seq current
change level in % of
IB
DeltaU 0 - 100 1 5 %UB Voltage change level
in %UB for fault
inception detection
Delta3U0 0 - 100 1 5 %UB Zero seq voltage
change level in % of
UB
SIRLevel 5 - 15 1 10 - Settable level for
source impedance
ratio

5.3.6 Technical data

166 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 80: Full-scheme distance protection, Mho characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones with selectable 5 with selectable direction -
directions
Minimum operate current (10–30)% of IBase -

Positive sequence impedance, (0.005–3000.000) W/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy

phase–earth loop Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Positive sequence impedance (10–90) degrees
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
angle, phase–earth loop
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
Reverse reach, phase–earth loop (0.005–3000.000) Ω/phase degrees
(Magnitude)
Impedance reach for phase– (0.005–3000.000) Ω/phase
phase elements
Angle for positive sequence (10–90) degrees
impedance, phase–phase
elements
Reverse reach of phase–phase (0.005–3000.000) Ω/phase
loop
Magnitude of earth return (0.00–3.00)
compensation factor KN
Angle for earth compensation (-180–180) degrees
factor KN
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured with -
CVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Operate time 15 ms typically (with static -
outputs)
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time 30 ms typically -

5.4 Mho impedance supervision logic

5.4.1 Introduction
The Mho impedance supervision logic includes features for fault inception detection
and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss of potential logic as
well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.

The Mho Impedance Supervision logic can mainly be decomposed in two different
parts:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 167

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

1. A fault inception detection logic

2. High SIR detection logic

5.4.2 Principle of operation

5.4.2.1 Fault inception detection

The aim for the fault inception detector is to very fast detect that a fault has occurred
on the system.

The fault inception detection detects instantaneous changes in any phase currents or
zero sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding phase
voltage or zero sequence voltage. If the change of any phase current and
corresponding phase voltage or 3U0 and 3I0 exceeds the setting parameters DeltaI
and DeltaU respectively Delta3U0 and Delta3I0 and the input signal BLOCK is not
activated, the ouput signal FLTDET is activated indicating that a system fault has
occoured.

If the setting pilotMode is set to On in Blocking scheme and the fault inception
function has detected a system fault, a block signal BLKCHST will be issued and
send to remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to
be fulfilled for sending the BLKCHST signal:

1. The setting parameter pilotMode has to be set to On

2. The breaker has to be closed, i.e. the input signal CBOPEN has to be deactivated
3. A reverse fault should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not
blocked, i.e. input signal REVSTART is activated and input signal BLOCKCS
is not activated

OR

A fault inception is detected

If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the
BLKCHST signal, the function will issue a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote
end. The criteria that have to be fulfilled for this are:

1. The function has to be in pilot mode, i.e. the setting parameter pilotMode has to
be set to On
2. The carrier send signal should be blocked, i.e. input signal BLOCKCS is On and,
3. A reverse fault should not have been detected while the carrier send signal was
not blocked, i.e.input signals REVSTART and BLOCKCS is not activated.

The function has a built in loss of voltage detection based on the evaluation of the
change in phase voltage or the change in zero sequence voltage (3U0). It operates if
the change in phase voltages exceeds the setting dULevel or 3U0 exceeds the setting
dU0Level.

168 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

If loss of voltage is detected, but not a fault inception, the distance protection function
will be blocked. This is also the case if a fuse failure is detected by the external fuse
failure function and activate the input FUSEFAIL. Those blocks are generated by
activating the output BLKZ, which shall be connected to the input BLKZ on the
distance Mho function block.

During fault inception a lot of transients will be developed which in turn might cause
the distance function to overreach. The Mho supervision logic will increase the
filtering during the most transient period of the fault. This is done by activating the
output BLKZMD, which shall be connected to the input BLKZMTD on mho distance
function block.

High SIR detection

High SIR values increases the likelihood that CVT will introduce a prolonged and
distorted transient, increasing the risk for overreach of the distance function.

The SIR function calculates the SIR value as the source impedance divided by the
setting Zreach and activates the output signal HSIR if the calculated value for any of
the six basic shunt faults exceed the setting parameter SIRLevel.The HSIR signal is
intended to block the delta based mho impedance function.

5.4.3 Function block

ZSM1-
ZSMGAPC
I3P BLKZMTD
U3P BLKCHST
BLOCK CHSTOP
REVSTART HSIR
BLOCKCS
CBOPEN

en06000426.vsd

ZSM1-
ZSMGAPC
I3P BLKZMTD
V3P BLKCHST
BLOCK CHSTOP
REVSTART HSIR
BLOCKCS
CBOPEN

en06000426_ansi.vsd

Figure 88: ZSM1 function block

5.4.4 Input and output signals

REL 670 Technical reference manual 169

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 81: Input signals for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Three phase current samples and DFT magnitude
U3P Three phase phase-neutral voltage samples and DFT
magnitude
BLOCK Block of the function
REVSTART Indication of reverse start
BLOCKCS Blocks the blocking carrier signal to remote end
CBOPEN Indicates that the breaker is open

Table 82: Output signals for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function block
Signal Description
BLKZMTD Block signal for blocking of time domained mho
BLKCHST Blocking signal to remote end to block overreaching zone
CHSTOP Stops the blocking signal to remote end
HSIR Indication of source impedance ratio above set limit

5.4.5 Setting parameters

Table 83: Basic parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base value for current
measurement
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base value for voltage
measurement
PilotMode Off - Off - Pilot mode Off/On
On
Zreach 0.1 - 3000.0 0.1 38.0 ohm Line impedance
IMinOp 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operating
current for SIR
measurement

170 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 84: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DeltaI 0 - 200 1 10 %IB Current change level
in %IB for fault
inception detection
Delta3I0 0 - 200 1 10 %IB Zero seq current
change level in % of
IB
DeltaU 0 - 100 1 5 %UB Voltage change level
in %UB for fault
inception detection
Delta3U0 0 - 100 1 5 %UB Zero seq voltage
change level in % of
UB
SIRLevel 5 - 15 1 10 - Settable level for
source impedance
ratio

5.5 Phase selection with load encroachment

(PDIS, 21)

Function block name: PHS- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 21
IEC 61850 logical node name:
FDPSPDIS Z<phs

5.5.1 Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement
of the power system is reduced e.g. difficulties to get permission to build new power
lines. The ability to accurately and reliable classify the different types of fault so that
single pole tripping and auto-reclosing can be used plays an important roll in this
matter. The phase selection function is designed to accurately select the proper fault
loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore the function has a built in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive
setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with
the load.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 171

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.

5.5.2 Principle of operation

The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase-selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance-measuring function (see section "Distance
measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)"). The "phase selection"
includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and
three intended for phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults.

The difference, compared to the zone measuring elements, is in the combination of

the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of faults.

The characteristic is basically non-directional, but the PHS function uses information
from the directional function block to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or
reverse. The directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line" in the figures below.

The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria:

1. Residual current criteria, i.e. separation of faults with and without earth
connection
2. Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
3. Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The current start condition STCNDI is based on the following criteria:

1. Residual current criteria

2. No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load
area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by
the minimum operating current limits.
3. Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The STCNDI-output described above is non-directional. The directionality is

determined by the distance zones direction function block. There are still output from
the function that indicate whether a start is in forward or reverse direction, or in
between those (e.g. STFWL1 and STRVL1, and NDIR_A). These directional
indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional function and the
impedance setting of the phase selection function. Their operate characteristics are
illustrated in figure 89.

172 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

X X X

60°
60° R
R R

60° 60°

Non-directional (ND) Forward (FW) Reverse (RV)

en05000668.vsd

Figure 89: Characteristic for non-directional, forward and reverse operation of

PHS

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment").

The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming
from the directionality block. It shall be connected to the STDIR output on the ZD
block. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the distance
measuring zones, i.e. the ZM block. The code built up for the directionality is as
follows:

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in forward
direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 5 then we have start in forward direction
in phase L1 and L2 etc.

The STCND (Z or I) output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary coded

information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct fault
loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND input on
the ZM blocks. The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:

STCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

5.5.2.1 Phase-to-earth fault

For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by PHS function will be according
to equation 43.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 173

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

ULn
ZPHSn =
ILn
(Equation 43)

where:
n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

The characteristic for the PHS function at phase to earth fault is according to
figure 90. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first
quadrant of 60°.

The resistance RN and reactance XN is the impedance in the earth return path defined
according to equation 44 and equation 45.

R0 - R1
RN =
3
(Equation 44)

X 0 - X1
XN =
3
(Equation 45)

X (ohm/loop)
Kr·(X1+XN)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1+XN

60 deg
RFFwPE

RFRvPE R (Ohm/loop)
60 deg

X1
1
Kr =
tan(60 deg)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

Kr·(X1+XN)
en06000396.vsd

Figure 90: Characteristic of PHS for phase to earth fault (setting parameters in
italic), ohm/loop domain

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 46 and equation 47.

174 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

3 × I 0 ³ 0.5 × IM in O p
(Equation 46)

3 × I0 ³ INReleasePE
------------------------------------ × Iphmax
100 (Equation 47)

where:
IMinOp is the minimum operation current for forward zones,
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the ph-E
fault loops (in %) and
Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

5.5.2.2 Phase-to-phase fault

For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured by the PHS function will be according to
equation 48.

ULm - ULn
ZPHS =
-2 × ILn
(Equation 48)

ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the phase
current in the lagging phase n.

The operation characteristic is shown in figure 91.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 175

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

X (ohm/phase)
0.5·FRvPP 0.5·RFFwPP

Kr·X1

X1
0.5·RFFwPP
60 deg

R (ohm/phase)
60 deg
0.5·RFRvPP
X1
1
Kr =
tan(60 deg)

Kr·X1

0.5·RFRvPP 0.5·RFFwPP
en05000670.vsd

Figure 91: The operation characteristic for PHS at phase-to-phase fault (setting
parameters in Italic), ohm/phase domain

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current conditions
that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are
according to equation 49 or equation 50.

3I 0 < IN Re leasePE
(Equation 49)

3I 0 < INBlockPP × Iph max

(Equation 50)

where:
INRelease is 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth measuring loops,
INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and
Iphmax is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

5.5.2.3 Three phase faults

The operation condition for three phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase fault
i.e. equation 48, equation 49 and equation 50 are used to release the operation of the
function.

176 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/√3 (approximately 1.1547) in all

directions. At the same time the apparent impedance is rotated 30 degrees, counter-
clockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 92.

X (ohm/phase)

4 × X1
3

90 deg

0.5·RFFwPP·K3

X1·K3 4 × RFFwPP
6

R (ohm/phase)

0.5·RFRvPP·K3

K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)
30 deg

en05000671.vsd

Figure 92: The characteristic of PHS for three phase fault (setting parameters
in italic)

5.5.2.4 Load encroachment

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 93. As illustrated, the resistive
blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the
sector is the same in all four quadrants.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 177

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

RLdFw
ARGLd ARGLd
R

ARGLd ARGLd
RLdRv

en05000196.vsd

Figure 93: Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function depending on the operation

characteristic is dependent on the chosen operation mode of the PHS function. When
selection mode is STCNDZ, the characteristic for the PHS (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic (see figure 94, left illustration).

When STCNDI is selected the operation characteristic will be as the right illustration
in figure 94. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current
and the distance measuring zones.

178 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

X X

R R

STCNDZ STCNDI

en05000197.vsd

Figure 94: Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode

when load encroachment is activated

When the "phase selection" is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone
the resultant operate characteristic could look something like in figure 95. The figure
shows a distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operate
area is highlighted in black.

"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone

Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic

Directional line

en05000673.vsd

Figure 95: Operation characteristic in forward direction when load

encroachment is enabled

REL 670 Technical reference manual 179

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Figure 95 is valid for phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase faults. During a three-

phase fault, or load, when the "quadrilateral" phase-to-phase characteristic is subject
to enlargement and rotation the operate area is transformed according to figure 96.
Notice in particular what happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection"
"quadrilateral" characteristic. Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder
in quadrant one is now 90 degrees instead of the original 60 degrees. The blinder that
is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase
the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary
to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load
impedance.

X (ohm/phase)

Phase selection
”Quadrilateral” zone

Distance measuring zone

R (ohm/phase)

en05000674.vsd

Figure 96: Operation characteristic for PHS in forward direction for three-phase
fault, ohm/phase domain

5.5.2.5 Minimum operate currents

The operation of the PHS function is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls
below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS value
of the current in phase Ln.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2·ILn<IMinOpPP).

180 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

5.5.2.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Figure 97 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-

earth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and
logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is available
within the terminal.

Figure 97: Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A STCNDI

output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and
current criteria, refer to figure 97. This signal can be configured to STCND functional
input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of
the ph-ph and ph-E zone measuring elements and their phase related starting and
tripping signals.

Figure 98 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective

signals PHS--STNDLn. Signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n change between
one and three according to the phase number) represent the fulfilled operating criteria
for each separate loop measuring element (i.e. within the "quadrilateral"
characteristic.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 181

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Figure 98: Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 100 and figure 99. The directional criteria appears
as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity
for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network
configurations. Signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding
directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW
(figure 100) represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV
(figure 99) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals are derived within
the corresponding digital signal processor.

Figure 99 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which is

created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured
to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the ph-ph and ph-E zone measuring elements and their
phase related starting and tripping signals.

182 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Figure 99: Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

REL 670 Technical reference manual 183

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Figure 100: Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

184 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

5.5.3 Function block

PHS1-
FDPSPDIS_21
I3P TRIP
U3P START
BLOCK STFWL1
DIRCND STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
STCNDZ
STCNDI

en06000258.vsd

Figure 101: PHS function block

5.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 85: Input signals for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
DIRCND External directional condition

Table 86: Output signals for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function block
Signal Description
STFWL1 Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE Earth fault detected in forward direction
STRVL1 Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE Earth fault detected in reverse direction
STNDL1 Non directional start in L1
STNDL2 Non directional start in L2
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 185

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Signal Description
STNDL3 Non directional start in L3
STNDPE Non directional start, phase-earth
STFW1PH Start in forward direction for single-phase fault
STFW2PH Start in forward direction for two- phase fault
STFW3PH Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault
STPE Current conditions release of phase-earth measuring
elements
STPP Current conditions release of phase-phase measuring
elements
STCNDZ Start condition (PHS,LE and I based)
STCNDI Start condition (LE and I based)

5.5.5 Setting parameters

Table 87: Basic parameter group settings for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current for
current settings
INBlockPP 10 - 100 1 40 %IPh 3I0 limit for blocking
phase-to-phase
measuring loops
INReleasePE 10 - 100 1 20 %IPh 3I0 limit for releasing
phase-to-earth
measuring loops
RLdFw 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 80.00 ohm/p Forward resistive
reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 80.00 ohm/p Reverse resistive
reach within the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 1 30 Deg Load angle
determining the load
impedance area
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 40.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 0.01 120.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach
RFFwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, forward
RFRvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-E, forward
Table continued on next page

186 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-E, reverse
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 1 10 %IB Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 1 5 %IB Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

5.5.6 Technical data

Table 88: Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (5-30)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir

Reactive reach, positive (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy

sequence, forward and reverse
Resistive reach, positive
sequence
Reactive reach, zero sequence,
forward and reverse
Resistive reach, zero sequence
Fault resistance, phase-earth
faults, forward and reverse
Fault resistance, phase-phase
faults, forward and reverse
Load encroachment criteria:
Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle
Reset ratio
(0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase
(0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase
(0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase
(1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop
(0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop
(1.00–3000.00) Ω/phase
(5-70) degrees
105% typically
± 2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
-

5.6 Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral

for Mho

Function block name: ZMMx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 21
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZMMPDIS

REL 670 Technical reference manual 187

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

5.6.1 Introduction
The line distance protection is a five zone protection with three fault loops for phase
to earth fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone
resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of
different types and lengths.

The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility
to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines (see figure 51).

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at load

exporting end at phase to earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.

5.6.2 Principle of operation

5.6.2.1 Full scheme measurement

The different fault loops within the IED 670 are operating in parallel in the same
principle as a full scheme measurement..

Figure 102 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones l.

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 5

en07000080.vsd

Figure 102: The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase
fault.

188 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

5.6.2.2 Impedance characteristic

The distance measuring zone include three impedance measuring loops; one fault
loop for each phase.

The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 103. The characteristic is illustrated
with the full loop reach.

RFPE R1+Rn RFPE

X0 - X1
Xn =
3
X1+Xn R0 - R1
Rn =
3
f N f N
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1+Xn

RFPE R1+Rn RFPE

en05000661.vsd

Figure 103: Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain.

The fault loop reach may also be presented as in figure 104.

ILn R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 ) en06000412.vsd

Figure 104: Fault loop model

REL 670 Technical reference manual 189

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

The R1 and jX1 in figure 104 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE is presented in order to “convey” the
fault resistance reach.

The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 105. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach
is symmetric, in the sense that it is conform for forward and reverse direction.
Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

en05000182.vsd

Figure 105: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

5.6.2.3 Minimum operating current

The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0.

Both current limits IminOpPE and IminOpIN are automatically

reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in
reverse direction, i.e. OperationDir=Reverse.

190 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

5.6.2.4 Measuring principles

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits.

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3).

The calculation of the apparant impedances at phase-to-earth fault follow equation

52

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner.

U L1
Z app = ------------------------------
I L1 + I N × KN
(Equation 51)

Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:

X0 - X1
KN =
3X1

where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point
to the fault on the protected line.

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

The formula given in equation 52 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications.
When load is considered in the case of single line to earth fault, conventional distance
protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670
has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought
from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to
the loop impedance according to equation 53,

X Di
U = R × i + ------ × -----
w 0 Dt
(Equation 53)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 191

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R × Re ( I ) + ------ × ------------------
w0 Dt
(Equation 54)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R × Im ( I ) + ------ × -----------------
w0 Dt
(Equation 55)

with

w0 = 2 × p × f 0
(Equation 56)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation
for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:

Im ( U ) × DRe ( I ) – Re ( U ) × D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – D Im ( I ) × Re ( I )
(Equation 57)

Re ( U ) × Im ( I ) – Im ( U ) × Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 × Dt × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – DIm ( I ) × Re ( I )
(Equation 58)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point.

5.6.2.5 Directional lines

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDM.
Equation 59 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-
earth fault.

192 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

0.85 × U1L1 + 0.15 × U1L1M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
(Equation 59)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 106.
U1L1 is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

U1L1M is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 is phase current in phase L1

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 106) and it should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.

The ZDM gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIRCND depending on the
evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4
etc.

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd

Figure 106: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

REL 670 Technical reference manual 193

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds

5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms, the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals
in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

5.6.2.6 Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring: phase-to-
earth loops.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the

corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E).

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

• Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
• Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 107.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone
measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition
separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCNDZ.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on

194 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

the DIRCND input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall
be configured to the DIRCND output on the ZDM block.

STCND

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STNDPE

OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLK

en06000408.vsd

Figure 107: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 108.

STNDL1N 15 ms
AND t STL1

STNDL2N 15 ms
AND t STL2

STNDL3N 15 ms
AND t STL3

15 ms
AND t START
OR

BLK

en06000409.vsd

Figure 108: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 109.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 195

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

STNDL1N
DIRL1N AND
OR STZMPE.
&
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
STL1
& t
DIRL3N AND

15 ms
STL2
& t

15 ms
STL3
& t

BLK

15 ms
OR START
& t

en07000081.vsd

Figure 109: Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 110.

Timer tPE=On tPE

AND t
STZMPE
15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

en07000082.vsd

Figure 110: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

196 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

5.6.3 Function block

ZMM1-
ZMMPDIS_21
I3P TRIP
U3P TR_A
BLOCK TR_B
BLKZ TR_C
BLKTR PICKUP
STCND PU_A
DIRCND PU_B
PU_C
PHPUND

en06000454.vsd

Figure 111: ZMM function block

5.6.4 Input and output signals

Table 89: Input signals for the ZMMPDIS_21 (ZMM1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKZ Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR Blocks all trip outputs
STCND External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND External directional condition

Table 90: Output signals for the ZMMPDIS_21 (ZMM1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3
START General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 Start signal from phase L1
STL2 Start signal from phase L2
STL3 Start signal from phase L3
STND Non-directional start, issued from any phase or loop

5.6.5 Setting parameters

REL 670 Technical reference manual 197

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 91: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMMPDIS_21 (ZMM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current, i.e.
rated current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage, i.e.
rated voltage
OperationDir Off - Forward - Operation mode of
Non-directional directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach
R1 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach
R0 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 15.00 ohm/p Zero seq. resistance
for zone characteristic
angle
RFPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-E
Timer tPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
E
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 30 1 5 %IB Minimum operate
residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

5.6.6 Technical data

198 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 92: Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for mho

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate current (10-30)% of Ibase -

Positive sequence reactance (0.50-3000.00) W/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy

± 2.0 degrees static angular
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) Ω/phase accuracy
Zero sequence reactance (0.50-9000.00) Ω/phase Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Zero sequence resistance (0.50-3000.00) Ω/phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Fault resistance, Ph-E (1.00-9000.00) W/loop Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured with -
CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Impedance zone timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Operate time 24 ms typically -
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time 30 ms typically -

5.7 Faulty phase identification with load

enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Function block name: PHMx IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 21
IEC 61850 logical node name:
FMPSPDIS

5.7.1 Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement
of the power system is reduced e.g. difficulties to get permission to build new power
lines. The ability to accurate and reliable classifying the different types of fault so
that single pole tripping and auto-reclosing can be used plays an important roll in this
matter. The phase selection function is design to accurate select the proper fault loop
in the distance function dependent on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some
cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted operation.
Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives

REL 670 Technical reference manual 199

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the measuring zones without
interfering with the load.

The output signals from the phase selection function produce important information
about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis as well.

5.7.2 Principle of operation

5.7.2.1 The phase selection function

The phase selection function can be decomposed into four different parts:

1. A high speed delta based current phase selector

2. A high speed delta based voltage phase selector
3. A symmetrical components based phase selector
4. Fault evaluation and selection logic
5. A load enchroachment logic
6. A blinder logic

The function can be de-activated and activated by setting the parameter Operation
Off/On The total function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

Figure 1 (kommer senare)

Delta based current and voltages

The delta based fault detection function uses adaptive technique and is based on patent
US4409636. It is a well proven technique that goes back to the beginning of 1980,
used with very good experience in highly proven ABB distance relay RALZA.

The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase
selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho element and as well as is
essential to Directional Comparison Blocking scheme (DCB), which uses Power Line
Carrier (PLC) communication system across the protected line.

The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that
filters out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when
no fault is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault occurs,
currents and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the current and voltages
resulting in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line. At this point
the notch filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output is processed
by the delta function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship between phases to
determine if a fault has occurred, and determines the faulty phases.

The current and voltage delta phase selector gives a real output signal if the following
criteria is fulfilled (only phase L1 shown):

Max(ΔUL1,ΔUL2,ΔUL3)>DeltaUMinOp

Max(ΔIL1,ΔIL2,ΔIL3)>DeltaIMinOp

200 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

where:
ΔUL1, ΔUL2 and ΔUL3
DeltaUMinOp and DeltaIMinOp
are the voltage change between sample t and sample t-1
are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current filters
to decide that a fault has occured indeed. A slow evolving fault may not
produce sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a case
speed is no longer the issue and the sequence components phase
selector will operate.

The delta voltages ΔULn and delta current ΔILn (n prefix for phase order) are the
voltage and current between sample t and sample t-1.

The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type. The
logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing by the
largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The condition
for fault type classification for the voltage and currents can be expressed as

S( DUL1, DUL2, DUL3)

Fa ulType =
Ma x( DIL1, DIL2, DUL3)
(Equation 60)

S( DIL1, DIL2, DIL3)

Fa ultType =
Ma x( DIL1, DIL2, DIL3)
(Equation 61)

The value of FaultType for different shunt faults are as follows:

Under ideal conditions: (Patent pending)

Single line ground fault; FaultType=1
Phase to phase fault FaultType=2
3-phase fault; FaultType=3

The output signal is 1 for single line to earth fault, 2 for phase to phase fault and 3
for three phase fault. At this point the filer does not know if ground was involved or
not.

Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the
result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType
over its entire range.

When a single fault has been detected, the logic determines the largest quantity, and
asserts that phase. If phase to phase fault is detected, the two largest phase quantities
will be detected and asserted as outputs.

The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate
block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to
differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the waveshape. The output is forcet
to wait a certain time. If the timer expires, if no other fault detection on the other

REL 670 Technical reference manual 201

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

phases is not detected, the fault is deemed as phase-to-ground. This way a premature
single phase to earth fault detection is not released for a phase-phase fault. If, however,
ground current is detected before the timer expires, the phase to ground fault is
released sooner.

If another phase picks up during the delay, the wait time is reduced by a certain
amount. Each detection of either ground or additional phases further reduce the initial
wait time and allow the delta phase selector output to be asserted sooner. There is not
wait time, if for example, all three phases are faulty.

The delta function is released if the input DELTAREL is activated at the same time
as input DELTABLK is not activated. Activating the DELTABLK input will block
the delta function. The release signal has an internal pulse timer of 100 ms. When the
DELTAREL signal has disappeared the delta logic is reset. In order not to get too
abrupt change, the reset is decayed in pre-defined steps.

Symmetrical component based phase selector

The sequence component phase selector uses preprocessed calculated sequence
voltages and currents as inputs. It also uses sampled values of the phase currents. All
the sequence quantities mentioned further in this section are with reference to phase
L1.

The function is made up of four main parts:

A Detection of the presence of earth fault

B A phase to phase logic block based on V2/V1 angle relationship
C A phase to earth component based on patent US5390067 where the angle relationships between
V2/I0 and V2/V1 is evaluated to determine earth fault or phase to phase to earth fault
D Logic for detection of three phase fault

A. Presence of earthground detection

The detection of earth fault is done in two ways, one by evaluation of the magnitude
of zero sequence current and secondly by the evaluation of the zero and negative
sequence voltage. The evaluation of the zero sequence current is done both with a
separate complementary function outside the main sequence based evaluation
function.

The complementary based zero sequence current function evaluates the presence of
earth fault by calculating the 3I0 and comparing the result with the setting parameter
INtoMaxI. The output signal is used to release the earth fault loop. It is a complement
to the earth fault signal built-in in the sequence based phase selector. The condition
for releasing the phase to earth loop are as follows:

|3I0|>maxIph · INto Im ax ·

202 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

where:
|3I0| is the magnitude of the zero sequence current 3I0
maxIph is the maximum magnitude of the phase currents
INtoImax is a setting parameter for the relation between the magnitude of 3I0 and the maximum
phase current

The earth fault loop is also released if the evaluation of the zero sequence current by
the main sequence function meets the following conditions:

|3I0|>IMinOp · k1

|3I0|>maxIph · IN RelPE

where:
IMinOp is the settings of the minimum operate phase current
INRelPE is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth measuring loop in % of IBase
k1 is a design parameter
IBase is the setting of the base current (A)

In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of zero
sequence current may not be secure. In those cases the sequence based phase selector
will automatically change from evaluation of zero sequence current to evaluation of
zero and negative sequence voltage. So the release of earth fault loop can also be done
if the following conditions are fulfilled:

|3U0|>U2*k2

|3U0|>U1*k3

|U1|>k

and

3I0<IMinOp*k5

OR

3I0<ILmax · INRelPE

where:
3U0 is the magnitude of the zero sequence voltage
U2 is the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage at the relay measuring point of phase
L1
k2, k3, k4 and k5 are design parameters
ILmax is the maximal phase current
IMinOp is the setting of minimum operate phase current in % of IBase

REL 670 Technical reference manual 203

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

B Phase to phase fault detection

The detection of phase to phase fault is performed by evaluation of the angle
difference between the sequence voltages U2 and U1.

VC 60°

C-A sector

VB 0°
180° B-C sector

A-B sector

VA

300°
en06000383_ansi.vsd

Figure 112: Definition of fault sectors for phase to phase fault

The phase to phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle between
the sequence voltages U2 and U1 lies within the sector defined according to figure
112 and the following conditions are fulfilled:

|U2|>U2MinOp

|U1|>U1MinOP

where:
U1MinOP and U2MinOp are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltage

The positive sequence voltage U1L1 in figure 112 above is reference.

If there is a three phase fault, there will not be any release of the individual phase
signals, even if the general conditions for U2 and U1 are fulfilled.

C. Phase to earthground and phase to phase to earthground detection

The detection of phase to earth and phase to phase to earth fault (US patent 5390067)
is based on two conditions:

1. Angle relationship between V2 and I0

2. Angle relationship between V2 and V1

The first condition determines faulty phase at single line to earth fault by determine
the argument between V2 and I0.

204 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

80°

L2-N sector L3-N sector

U2L1
(Ref)

200°
L1-N sector
320°

en06000384.vsd

Figure 113: Definition of faulty phase sector as angle between V2 and I0

The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in radians
as input to the V2I0 function block. The input angle is released only if the fault is in
forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault is classified as
forward direction if the angle between U0 and I0 lies between 20 to 200 degrees see
figure 114.

Forward 20°

200° Reverse

en06000385.vsd

Figure 114: Directional element used to release the measured angle between
U2 and I0

The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If the
angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that sector
will be active see figure 113. Only one sector signal is allowed to be activated at the
same time.

The sector function for condition1 has an internal release signal which is active if the
main sequence function has classified the angle between U0 and I0 as valid. The
following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals:

|U2|>U2MinOp

REL 670 Technical reference manual 205

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

|3I0|>IMinOp · 0.5

|3I0|>ILmax · INRelPE

where:
U2 and IN are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zero sequence current (3I0)
U2MinOp is the setting parameter for minimum operate negative sequence voltage
IMinOp is the setting parameter for minimum operate phase current
INRelPE is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for releasing phase to earth loop

The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse direction.

The condition2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence voltage
U2 and the positive sequence voltage U1. Since this is a phase to phase voltage
relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse direction. A
phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same angle boarders
as for condition1. If the calculated angle between U2 and U1 lies within one sector,
the corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The condition2 is released
if both the following conditions are fulfilled:

· |U2|>U2MinOp

· |U1|>U1MinOP

where:
|U1| and |U2| are the magnitude of the positive and negative sequence voltage
U1MinOP and are the setting parameter for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltage.

140°
L3-N sector
20°

U1L1
(Ref)
L1-N sector
L2-N sector

260° en06000413.vsd

Figure 115: Condition 2: U2 and U1 angle relationship

206 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single
phase to ground. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be
the complement of the second condition, i.e. a phase to phase to ground fault.

E.g.
Condition 1 Condition 2 Fault type
L3-G L3-G L3-G
L2-G L1-G L2-L3-G

The sequence phase selector is blocked when earthis not involved or if a three phase
fault is detected.

D. Three phase fault detection

The function classify the fault as three phase fault if the following conditions are
fulfilled:

|U1|>U1Level

|I1|>I1Level

or

|I1|>IMaxLoad

where:
U1 and I1 are the positive sequence voltage and current magnitude
U1Level and I1Level are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current

The output signal for detection of three phase fault is only released if not earth fault
and phase to phase fault in the main sequence function is detected.

The conditions for not detecting earth fault are the inverse of equation 5 to10.

The condition for not detecting phase to phase faults is determined by three
conditions. Each of them gives condition for not detecting phase to phase fault. Those
are:

Condition1:
earth fault is detected
or
|IN|>IMinOP*k2
and
|IN|>ILmax*INRelPE
Condition2:
Condition2 for phase to earth and phase to phase faults are not fulfilled
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 207

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

and
ILmax<IMinOp
and
|I2|<ILmax*I2ILmax
Condition3:
|IN|>maxIL*INBlockPP
or
|I2|<maxIL*I2maxIL

where:
ILmax is the maximum of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3
INRelPE is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for release of phase to earthfault loops
|I2| is the magnitude of the negative sequence current
I2ILmax is the setting parameter for the relation between negative sequence current to the maximum
phase current in percent of IBase
INBlockP is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for blocking phase to phase measuring loops
P

Fault evaluation and selection logic

The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified according
to figure 116. Only phase L1 is shown in the figure. If the internal signal 3Phase fault
is activated, all three outputs STL1, STL2 and STL3will be activated.

a a>b FaultPriority
DeltaIL1 then c=a c Adaptive release
b else c=a dependent on result
from Delta logic
DeltaUL1

Sequence based
function a<b
a
L1L2 fault
then c=b c
OR b else c=a OR
L1N fault

3 Phase fault

STL1
IL1Valid &

BLOCK

en06000386.vsd

Figure 116: Simplified diagram for fault evaluation, phase L1

208 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Load encroachment logic

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
activated in the PHSM function but the influence on the zone measurement can be
switched on/off in the respective Zm function.

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 117. As illustrated, the resistive
reach are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector
is the same in all four quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by
the load encroachment function, see right figure 117.
X jX

Operation area Operation area

RLd
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd R
ArgLd
RLd

Operation area

No operation area No operation area

en06000414.vsd

Figure 117: Influence on the characteristic by load encroachment logic.

Outputs
The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic phase
selector activates the output signal(s) STL1, STL2 and STL3PU_A, PU_B and
PU_C. If the phase to earth loop have been released, then the signal STE will be
activated as well.

The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone
measuring element for opening the correct measuring loop(s). This is done by the
signal STCNDPHS. If only one phase is enable (L1, L2 or L3), the corresponding
phase to ground element is enabled as well. Earth is expected to be made available
for two and three phase faults for the correct output to be asserted. The fault loop is
indicated by one of the decimal numbers below:

0= no faulted phases
1= L1N
2= L2N
3= L3N
4= -L1L2N
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 209

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

5= -L2L3N
6= -L3L1N-CAG
7= -L1L2L3N
8= -L1L2
9= -L2L3
10= -L3L1
11= L1L2L3

An additional logic is applied to handle the cases when phase to earthoutputs are to
be asserted when the ground input G is not asserted.

The output signal STCNDPLE is activated when the load encroachment is operating.
STCNDPLE shall be connected to the input STCND for selected quadrilateral
impedance measuring zones (ZM0x) to be blocked. The signal STCNDLE shall be
connected to the input LDCND for selected Mho impedans measuring zones (ZMMx)

The load encroachment at the measuring zone must be activated to

release the blocking from the load encroachment function.

5.7.3 Function block

PHM-
FMPSPDIS
I3P STL1
U3P STL2
BLOCK STL3
ZSTART STPE
TR3PH STCNDPHS
1POLEAR STCNDPLE
STCNDLE
START

en06000429.vsd

Figure 118: PHM function block

5.7.4 Input and output signals

Table 93: Input signals for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current
U3P Group signal for voltage
BLOCK Block of function
ZSTART Start from underimpdeance function
TR3PH Three phase tripping initiated
1POLEAR Single pole autoreclosing in progress

210 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 94: Output signals for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function block
Signal Description
STL1 Fault detected in phase L1
STL2 Fault detected in phase L2
STL3 Fault detected in phase L3
STPE Earth fault detected
STCNDPHS Binary coded starts from phase selection
STCNDPLE Binary coded starts from ph sel with load encroachment
STCNDLE Binary coded starts from load encroachment only
START Indicates that something has started

5.7.5 Setting parameters

Table 95: Basic parameter group settings for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
IMaxLoad 10 - 5000 1 200 %IB Maximum load for
identification of three
phase fault in % of
IBase
RLd 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 80.00 ohm/p Load encroachment
resistive reach in
ohm/phase
ArgLd 5 - 70 1 20 Deg Load encroachment
inclination of load
angular sector

Table 96: Advanced parameter group settings for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DeltaIMinOp 5 - 100 1 10 %IB Delta current level in
% of IBase
DeltaUMinOp 5 - 100 1 20 %UB Delta voltage level in
% of UBase
U1Level 5 - 100 1 80 %UB Pos seq voltage limit
for identification of 3-
ph fault
I1LowLevel 5 - 200 1 10 %IB Pos seq current level
for identification of 3-
ph fault in % of IBase
U1MinOp 5 - 100 1 20 %UB Minimum operate
positive sequence
voltage for ph sel
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 211

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

U2MinOp 1 - 100 1 5 %UB Minimum operate
negative sequence
voltage for ph sel
INRelPE 10 - 100 1 20 %IB 3I0 limit for release
ph-e measuring loops
in % of max phase
current
INBlockPP 10 - 100 1 40 %IB 3I0 limit for blocking
phase-to-phase
measuring loops in %
of max phase current

5.7.6 Technical data

Table 97: Faulty phase identification with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (5-30)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir

Load encroachment criteria: Load (0.5–3000) W/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy

resistance, forward and reverse
(5–70) degrees Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1–1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5–30) x In
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees

5.8 Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Function block name: ZDM- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZDMRDIR

Function block name: ZDA- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZDARDIR

212 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

5.8.1 Introduction
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be optionally supervised by a phase
unselective directional function (phase unselective, because it is based on
symmetrical components).

5.8.2 Principle of operation

5.8.2.1 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic, ZDM

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDM. Equation
62 and equation 63 are used to classify that the fault is in the forward direction for
phase-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault respectively.

0.85 × U1L1 + 0.15 × U1L1M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
(Equation 62)

0.85 × U1L1L 2 + 0.15 × U1L1L 2 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
(Equation 63)

Where:
ArgDir Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees)
ArgNegRes Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 119
U1L1 Positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

U1L1M Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 Phase current in phase L1

U1L1L2 Voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

U1L1L2M Memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

IL1L2 Current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The default settings for ArgDir and ArgNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 119) and they should not be changed unless system studies
show the necessity.

The directional lines are computed by means of a comparator-type calculation,

meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of infinite radius).

REL 670 Technical reference manual 213

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

X
Zset reach point

ArgNegRes

-ArgDir R

-Zs
en06000416.vsd

Figure 119: Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds

5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored. After 100ms, the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the
condition seals in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, no directional
indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its
rated value.

The directional function block ZDM has the following output signals:

The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation and
is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:

214 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6

(2048) (1024) (512) (256) (128) (64)
STRVL3L1=1 STRVL2L3=1 STRVL1L2=1 STRVL3N=1 STRVL2N=1 STRVL1N=1
bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
(32) (16) (8) (4) (2) (1)
STFWL3L1= STFWL2L3= STFWL1L2= STFWL3N=1 STFWL2N=1 STFWL1N=1
1 1 1

The STFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an OR-function

of all the forward starting conditions, i.e. STFWL1N, STFWL2N, STFWL3N,
STFWL1L2, STFWL2L3 and STFWL3L1. The STRV output is similar to the
STFW output, the only difference being that it is made up as an OR-function of all
the reverse starting conditions, i.e. STRVL1N, STRVL2N, STRVL3N, STRVL1L2,
STRVL2L3 and STRVL3L1.

Values for the following parameters are calculated, and may be viewed as service
values:

• resistance phase L1
• reactance phase L1
• resistance phase L2
• reactance phase L2
• resistance phase L3
• reactance phase L3
• direction phase L1
• direction phase L2
• direction phase L3

5.8.2.2 Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults, ZDA

A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage for its operation. The positive-sequence
memory-polarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include:

• The greatest amount of expansion for improved resistive coverage. These

elements always expand back to the source.
• Memory action for all fault types. This is very important for close-in 3-phase
faults.
• A common polarizing reference for all six distance-measuring loops. This is
important for single-pole tripping, during a pole-open period.

There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse phase
to phase faults and double phase to earth faults during high load periods. To solve
these, additional directional element is used.

For phase to earth faults, directional elements using sequence components are very
reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one
of following types of polarization:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 215

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

• Zero-sequence voltage
• Negative-sequence voltage
• Zero-sequence current

These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the function block ZDA.

Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero-
sequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection. The
measurement principle is illustrated in figure 120.

- 3U 0

AngleOp
AngleRCA

3I 0

en06000417.vsd

Figure 120: Principle for zero-sequence voltage polarized additional directional

element

Negative-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the

negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current at the location of the
protection.

Zero-sequence current polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero-
sequence current at the location of the protection and some reference zero-sequence
current, for example the current in the neutral of a power transformer.

The principle of zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current

compensation is described in figure 121. The same also applies for the negative-
sequence function.

216 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Z0 SA I0 I0
Z0 Line Z0 SB
Charac te ris tic
ang le
U0 U0
K*I0

U0 + K*I0
IF
en06000418.vsd

Figure 121: Principle for zero sequence compensation

Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase
information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the normal
directional element that works on a per phase base. The release signals are per phase
and to have a release of a measuring element in a specific phase both the additional
directional element, and the normal directional element, for that phase must indicate
correct direction.

Normal
directional Release of distance
element measuring element
L1N, L2N, L3N L1N, L2N, L3N
AND

Additional
directional AND per
element phase

en06000419.vsd

Figure 122: Earth distance element directional supervision

5.8.3 Function block

ZDM1-
ZDMRDIR
I3P DIR_CURR
U3P DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL
STFW
STRV
STDIRCND

en06000422.vsd

Figure 123: ZDM function block

REL 670 Technical reference manual 217

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

ZDA1-
ZDARDIR
I3P STFWPE
U3P STRVPE
I3PPOL DIREFCND
DIRCND

en06000425.vsd

Figure 124: ZDA function block

5.8.4 Input and output signals

Table 98: Input signals for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P group connection for current abs 1
U3P group connection for voltage abs 1

Table 99: Output signals for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function block
Signal Description
DIR_CURR Group connection
DIR_VOLT Group connection
DIR_POL Group connection
STFW Start in forward direction
STRV Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND Binary coded directional information per measuring loop

Table 100: Input signals for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current signals
U3P Voltage signals
I3PPOL Polarisation current signals
DIRCND Binary coded directional signal

Table 101: Output signals for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function block
Signal Description
STFWPE Forward start signal from phase-to-ground directional
element
STRVPE Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground directional
element
DIREFCND Start direction Binary coded

218 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

5.8.5 Setting parameters

Table 102: Basic parameter group settings for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 - Base setting for
current level
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 - Base setting for
voltage level
DirEvalType Impedance - Comparator - Directional evaluation
Comparator mode Impedance /
Imp/Comp Comparator
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 1 115 Deg Angle of blinder in
second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 1 15 Deg Angle of blinder in
fourth quadrant for
forward direction
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 1 5 %IB Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 1 10 %IB Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops

Table 103: Basic parameter group settings for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting for
current values
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
voltage level in kV
PolMode -3U0 - -3U0 - Polarization quantity
-U2 for opt dir function for
IPol P-E faults
Dual
-3U0Comp
-U2comp
AngleRCA -90 - 90 1 75 Deg Characteristic relay
angle (= MTA or base
angle)
I> 1 - 200 1 5 %IB Minimum operation
current in % of IBase
UPol> 1 - 100 1 1 %UB Minimum polarizing
voltage in % of UBase
IPol> 5 - 100 1 10 %IB Minimum polarizing
current in % of IBase

REL 670 Technical reference manual 219

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 104: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
AngleOp 90 - 180 1 160 Deg Operation sector
angle
Kmag 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 40.00 ohm Boost-factor in -
U0comp and -
U2comp polarization

5.9 Phase preference logic

Function block name: PPL IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
PPLPHIZ

5.9.1 Introduction
Phase Preference Logic (PPL) is intended to be used in isolated or high impedance
earthed networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the faulty lines at
cross-country fault.

The phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single-phase-to-earth faults in isolated
and high impedance-earthed networks, where such faults are not to be cleared by
distance protection. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or
the lagging phase-earth loop for measurement and initiates tripping of the preferred
fault based on the selected phase preference. A number of different phase preference
combinations are available for selection.

5.9.2 Principle of operation

The phase preference logic can be activated or deactivated by setting the parameter
Operation to On or Off.

The function has 10 operation modes which can be set by the parameter Mode. The
different modes and their explanation are shown in table 105 below.

Table 105: Operation modes for phase preference logic

Operation Mode Description
0 No filter, phase-to-phase measuring loops are not blocked during single phase-to-
ground faults. Tripping is allowed without any particular phase preference at cross-
country faults
1 No preference, trip is blocked during single phase-to-ground faults, trip is allowed
without any particular phase preference at cross-country fault
2 Cyclic 1231c; L1 before L2 before L3 before L1
Table continued on next page

220 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Operation Mode Description

3 Cyclic 1321c; L1 before L3 before L2 before L1
4 Acyclic 123a; L1 before L2before L3
5 Acyclic 132a; L1 before L3 before L2
6 Acyclic 213a; L2 before L1 before L3
7 Acyclic 231a; L2 before L3 before L1
8 Acyclic 312a; L3 before L2 before L1
9 Acyclic 321a; L3 before L2 before L1

The function can be divided into two parts; one labeled Voltage and Current
Discrimination and the second one labeled Phase Preference Evaluation, see
figure 125.

The aim with the voltage and current discrimination part is to discriminate faulty
phases and to determine if there is a cross country fault. If cross country fault is
detected, an internal signal “Detected cross country fault” is created and sent to the
phase preference part to be used in the evaluation process for determining the
condition for trip.

The voltage discrimination part gives phase segregated start signals STUL1,
STUL2 or STUL3 if the respective measured phase voltage is below the setting
parameter UPN< at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the setting
parameter 3U0>, see figure 125.

The internal signal for detection of cross country fault, DetectCrossContry, that come
from the voltage and current discrimination part of the function can be achieved in
three different ways:

1. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN for a time longer
than the setting of pick-up timer tIN
2. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN at the same time
as the magnitude of 3U0 has been above the setting parameter 3U0> during a
time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tUN
3. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN at the same time
as one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
• the measured phase-to phase voltage in at least one of the phase
combinations has been below the setting parameter UPP< for more than
20 ms.
• At least one of the phase voltages are below the setting parameter UPN<
for more than 20 ms

The second part, Phase preference evaluation, uses the internal signal
DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the input
signal STCND and the information from the setting parameter OperMode to
determine the condition for trip. To release the phase preference logic at least two out
of three phases must be faulty. The fault classification whether it is a single line to

REL 670 Technical reference manual 221

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

earth or cross country fault and which phase to be tripped at cross country fault is
converted into a binary coded signal and sent to the distance protection measuring
zone to release the correct measuring zone according to the setting of OperMode.
This is done by activating the output ZREL and it shall be connected to the input
STCND on the distance zone measuring element.

The input signal STCNDC consist of binary information of fault type and is connected
to the Phase selector output STCND. The fault must be activated in at least two phases
to be classified as a cross country fault in the phase preference part of the logic.

The input signals RELLx are additional fault release signals that can be connected to
external protection functions through binary input.

The trip output can be blocked by setting the parameter Blk1PhTr to On.

The output start and trip signals can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK

UL1
STUL1
UL2 AND
UL3
UL1UL2 STUL2
AND
UL2UL3
UL3UL1
IN Voltage and STUL3
AND
UN Current
Discrimination
UPN< OR START
AND
UPP<

IN>
Detect Cross-
UN> Country fault

AND
TRL1
AND
OperatingMode
RELL1N TRL2
Phase Preference AND
RELL2N Evaluation
TRL3
RELL3N AND
STCND

AND

AND OR
AND
AND

Blk1PhTr

BLOCK

en06000323.vsd

Figure 125: Simplified block diagram for phase preference logic

222 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

5.9.3 Function block

PPL1-
PPLPHIZ
I3P START
U3P ZREL
BLOCK
RELL1N
RELL2N
RELL3N
STCND

en07000029.vsd

Figure 126: PPL function block

5.9.4 Input and output signals

Table 106: Input signals for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
RELL1N Release condition for the L1 to earth loop
RELL2N Release condition for the L2 to earth loop
RELL3N Release condition for the L3 to earth loop
STCND Integer coded external release signals

Table 107: Output signals for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function block
Signal Description
START Indicates start for earth fault(s), regardless of direction
ZREL Integer coded output release signal

5.9.5 Setting parameters

REL 670 Technical reference manual 223

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 108: Basic parameter group settings for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.01 400.00 kV Base voltage
OperMode No Filter - No Filter - Operating mode
NoPref (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)
1231c
1321c
123a
132a
213a
231a
312a
321a
UPN< 10.0 - 100.0 1.0 70.0 %UB Operate value of
phase undervoltage
(% of UBase)
UPP< 10.0 - 100.0 1.0 50.0 %UB Operate value of line
to line undervoltage
(% of UBase)
3U0> 5.0 - 70.0 1.0 20.0 %UB Operate value of
residual voltage (% of
UBase)
IN> 10 - 200 1 20 %IB Operate value of
residual current (% of
IBase)
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Pickup-delay for
residual voltage
tOffUN 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Dropoff-delay for
residual voltage
tIN 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Pickup-delay for
residual current

5.9.6 Technical data

Table 109: Phase preference logic (PHIZ)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, phase to phase (10.0 - 100.0)% of Ubase ± 0,5% of Ur
and phase to neutral undervoltage
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Operate value, residual voltage (5.0 - 70.0)% of Ubase ± 0,5% of Ur
Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -
Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of Ibase ± 1,0% of Ir for I < Ir
± 1,0% of I for I > Ir
Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -
Timers (0.000 - 60.000) s ± 0,5% ± 10ms
Operating mode No Filter, NoPref
Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a,
312a, 321a

224 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

5.10 Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Function block name: PSD-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 78
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZMRPSB Zpsb

5.10.1 Introduction
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big generation
plants.

Power swing detection function is used to detect power swings and initiate block of
selected distance protection zones. Occurrence of earth fault currents during a power
swing can block the power swing detection function to allow fault clearance.

5.10.2 Principle of operation

The PSD function comprises an inner and an outer quadrilateral measurement
characteristic with load encroachment, see figure 127

Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a power
swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the outer and
the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times longer than
a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance measuring principle is
the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The impedance and the
characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases separately. One-out-of-
three or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to the specific
system operating conditions.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 225

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

X1OutFw jX ZL R1LIn
X1InFw DFw

j
DRv
R1FInRv R1FInFw
DFw
ARGLd j

ARGLd
DRv
DFw

DFw

R
DFw
DRv

DFw
RLdInRv RLdInFw

DRv
RLdOutRv RLdOutFw

j DRv X1InRv
X1OutRv

en05000175.vsd

Figure 127: Operating characteristic for the PSD function

The impedance measurement within the PSD function is performed by solving

equation 64 and equation 65 (n = 1, 2, 3 for each corresponding phase L1, L2 and
L3).

æ U L1 ö
Reçç ÷÷ £ Rset
è IL1 ø (Equation 64)

æ U L1 ö
Imçç ÷÷ £ Xset
è I L1 ø (Equation 65)

The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries which are more explained in the following
sections.

5.10.2.1 Resistive reach in forward direction

To avoid load encroachment the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by

setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive load boundary value
while the inner resistive boundary is calculated according to equation 66.

226 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

RLdInFw = kLdRFw × RLdOutFw (Equation 66)

where:
kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting
the parameter ARGLd.

The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first
quadrant (same ARGLd and RLdOutFw and calculated RLdInFw).

The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better adaptation
to the distance zones. The angle is the same as the line angle and derived from the
setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance for the
inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is set by
the parameter R1FInFw.

From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance
between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is valid for R
direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and second quadrant.

5.10.2.2 Resistive reach in reverse direction

To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction the resistive reach is limited by

setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment
cone. The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by
using the setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 67.

RLdInRv = kLdRRv × RLdOutRv (Equation 67)

From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv a distance
between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is valid for R
direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and fourth quadrant.

The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load
encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner
boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv.

The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load encroachment
zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line resistance R1LIn. The
argument of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted
lines in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and outer boundary is the
same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction i.e. DRv.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 227

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

5.10.2.3 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + DFw,

where:
DFw = RLdOutFw - KLdRFw · RLdOutFw

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined
as X1InRv + DRv.

where:
DRv = RLdOutRv - KLdRRv · RLdOutRv

5.10.2.4 Basic detection logic

The operation of the function is only released if the magnitude of the current is above
the setting of the min operating current, IMinOpPE.

The PSD function can operate in two operating modes:

• The "1-of-3" operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of the
three phases. Figure 128 presents a composition of a detection signal PSD-DET-
L1 in this particular phase.
• The "2-of-3" operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least two
out of three phases. Figure 129 presents a composition of the detection signals
DET1of3 and DET2of3.

Signals ZOUTL1ZOUT_A (external boundary) and ZINL1 (internal boundary) in

figure 128 are related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each
phase separately (Ln represents the corresponding phase L1, L2, and L3). They are
internal signals, calculated by the PSD-function.

The tP1 timer in figure 128 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are
usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the
detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate area
and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part of
figure 128 (input signal ZOUTL1, ZINL1, AND-gates and tP-timers etc.) are
duplicated for phase L2 and L3. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the same
settings.

228 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Figure 128: Detection of power-swing in phase L1

Figure 129: Detection of power-swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode

REL 670 Technical reference manual 229

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

ZOUTL1 ZOUT
OR
ZOUTL2 ZINL1
ZIN
ZOUTL3 AND ZINL2 OR

ZINL3
tEF
TRSP
t AND

I0CHECK

10 ms
AND t
BLKI02 OR

tR1
AND t INHIBIT
OR
-loop
tR2
BLKI01 AND t
BLOCK
-loop
DET1of3 - int.
REL1PH
AND
BLK1PH
tH
DET2of3 - int. OR t
REL2PH
AND
BLK2PH OR START
AND
EXTERNAL

en05000114.vsd

Figure 130: PSD function-simplified block diagram

5.10.2.5 Operating and inhibit conditions

Figure 130 presents a simplified logic diagram for the PSD function. The internal
signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic diagrams in figure 128 and
figure 129 respectively.

Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the

functional input signals REL1PH, BLK1PH, REL2PH, and BLK2PH.

The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter
OperationLdCh = Off, but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated. The
characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral.

There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:

230 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

• Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output START signal

instantaneously.
• The INHIBIT internal signal is activated, if the power swing has been detected
and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the
time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable
this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI01 functional input.
• The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer,
if an earth fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and
the power swing has been detected before the earth fault (activation of the signal
I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1
signal to the BLKI02 functional input.
• The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input I0CHECK
appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the impedance has been seen
within the outer characteristic of the PSD operate characteristic in all three
phases. This function prevents the operation of the PSD function in cases, when
the circuit breaker closes onto persistent single-phase fault after single-pole auto-
reclosing dead time, if the initial single-phase fault and single-pole opening of
the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phases.

5.10.3 Function block

PSD1-
ZMRPSB_78
I3P START
U3P ZOUT
BLOCK ZIN
BLKI01
BLKI02
BLK1PH
REL1PH
BLK2PH
REL2PH
I0CHECK
TRSP
EXTERNAL

en06000264.vsd

Figure 131: PSD function block

5.10.4 Input and output signals

Table 110: Input signals for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKI01 Block inhibit of start output for slow swing condition
BLKI02 Block inhibit of start output for subsequent residual current
detection
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 231

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Signal Description
BLK1PH Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL1PH Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
BLK2PH Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL2PH Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
I0CHECK Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit start output
TRSP Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping function
EXTERNAL Input for external detection of power swing

Table 111: Output signals for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function block
Signal Description
START Power swing detected
ZOUT Measured impedance within outer impedance boundary
ZIN Measured impedance within inner impedance boundary

5.10.5 Setting parameters

Table 112: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Mode On /
On Off
X1InFw 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Inner reactive
boundary, forward
R1LIn 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Line resistance for
inner characteristic
angle
R1FInFw 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Fault resistance
coverage to inner
resistive line, forward
X1InRv 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Inner reactive
boundary, reverse
R1FInRv 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Fault resistance line
to inner resistive
boundary, reverse
OperationLdCh Off - On - Operation of load
On discrimination
characteristic
RLdOutFw 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Outer resistive load
boundary, forward
ArgLd 5 - 70 1 25 Deg Load angle
determining load
impedance area
RLdOutRv 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Outer resistive load
boundary, reverse
Table continued on next page

232 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

kLdRFw 0.50 - 0.90 0.01 0.75 Mult Multiplication factor
for inner resistive load
boundary, forward
kLdRRv 0.50 - 0.90 0.01 0.75 Mult Multiplication factor
for inner resistive load
boundary, reverse
tEF 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 3.000 s Timer for overcoming
single-pole reclosing
dead time
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 1 10 %IB Minimum operate
current in % of IBase
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting for
current level settings

Table 113: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tP1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.045 s Timer for detection of
initial power swing
tP2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.015 s Timer for detection of
subsequent power
swings
tW 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.250 s Waiting timer for
activation of tP2 timer
tH 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.500 s Timer for holding
power swing START
output
tR1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.300 s Timer giving delay to
inhibit by the residual
current
tR2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Timer giving delay to
inhibit at very slow
swing

5.10.6 Technical data

Table 114: Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Reactive reach (0.10-3000.00) W/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Resistive reach (0.10–1000.00)W /loop Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

REL 670 Technical reference manual 233

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

5.11 Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)

Function block name: PSL-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZMRPSL

5.11.1 Introduction
Power Swing Logic (RPSL) is a complementary function to Power Swing Detection
(PSD) function. It provides possibility for selective tripping of faults on power lines
during system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when the distance protection
function should normally be blocked. The complete logic consists of two different
parts:

• Communication and tripping part. It provides selective tripping on the basis of

special distance protection zones and a scheme communication logic, which are
not blocked during the system oscillations.
• Blocking part. It blocks unwanted operation of instantaneous distance protection
zone 1 for oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the
adjacent power lines and other primary elements.

5.11.2 Principle of operation

5.11.2.1 Communication and tripping logic

Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection
zones is schematically presented in figure 132.

234 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

STDEF
AR1P1 &

STPSD tCS
CS
BLOCK & t &

CSUR
BLKZMPS
tBlkTr &
tTrip t
t

CACC TRIP
>1
CR &

en06000236.vsd

Figure 132: Simplified logic diagram – power swing communication and tripping
logic

The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one on the BLOCK
functional input signal. Presence of the logical one on the STDEF functional input
signal also blocks the logic as long as this block is not released by the logical one on
the AR1P1 functional input signal. The functional output signal BLKZMPS remains
logical one as long as the function is not blocked externally (BLOCK is logical zero)
and the earth-fault is detected on protected line (STDEF is logical one), which is
connected in three-phase mode (AR1P1 is logical zero). Timer tBlkTr prolongs the
duration of this blocking condition, if the measured impedance remains within the
operate area of the PSD function (STPSD input active). The BLKZMPS can be used
to block the operation of the power-swing zones.

Logical one on functional input CSUR, which is normally connected to the TRIP
functional output of a power swing carrier sending zone, activates functional output
CS, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions. It also activates the
TRIP functional output.

Initiation of the CS functional output is possible only, if the STPSD input has been
active longer than the time delay set on the security timer tCS.

Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals PLTR_CRD and CR (local trip
condition) also activates the TRIP functional output, if the function is not blocked by
one of the above conditions and the STPSD signal has been present longer then the
time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.

5.11.2.2 Blocking logic

Figure 133 presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of the
underreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their clearance
on the remote power lines.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 235

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

&

BLKZMH
&
STZML tZL
STZMLL
BLOCK & t >1
&
STMZH tDZ
STZMPSD & t
>1
STPSD

&
-loop

en06000237.vsd

Figure 133: Control of underreaching distance protection (Zone 1) at power

swings caused by the faults and their clearance on adjacent lines
and other system elements

The logic is disabled by a logical one on functional inputBLOCK. It can start only if
the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

• STPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that the PSD
function must not detect power swinging over the protected power line.
• STZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the impedance
must be detected within the external boundary of the PSD function.
• STZMOR functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault must
be detected by the overreaching distance protection zone, for example zone 2.

The STZMURPS functional output, which can be used in complete terminal logic
instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes active under the following
conditions:

• If the STZMUR signal appears at the same time as the STZMOR or if it appears
with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer tDZ.
• If the STZMUR signal appears after the STZMOR signal with a time delay longer
than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the time delay
set on the tZL timer.

The BLKZMOR functional output signal can be used to block the operation of the
higher distance protection zone, if the fault has moved into the zone 1 operate area
after tDZ time delay.

236 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

5.11.3 Function block

PSL1-
ZMRPSL
BLOCK TRIP
STZMUR STZMURPS
STZMOR BLKZMUR
STPSD BLKZMOR
STDEF CS
STZMPSD
CACC
AR1P1
CSUR
CR

en07000026.vsd

Figure 134: PSL function block

5.11.4 Input and output signals

Table 115: Input signals for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
STZMUR Start of the underreaching zone
STZMOR Start of the overreaching zone
STPSD Power swing detected
STDEF Start from Earth Fault Protection in forward or reverse
direction
STZMPSD Operation of Power Swing Detection external characteristic
CACC Overreaching ZM zone to be accelerated
AR1P1 Single pole auto-reclosing in progress
CSUR Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing zone
CR Carrier receive signal during power swing detection operation

Table 116: Output signals for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip through Power Swing Logic
STZMURPS Start of Underreaching zone controlled by PSL to be used in
configuration
BLKZMUR Block trip of underreaching impedance zone
BLKZMOR Block trip of overreaching distance protection zones
CS Carrier send signal controlled by the power swing

REL 670 Technical reference manual 237

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

5.11.5 Setting parameters

Table 117: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
tDZ 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.050 s Permitted max oper
time diff between
higher and lower zone
tDZMUR 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Delay for oper of
underreach zone with
detected diff in oper
time
tCS 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Conditional timer for
sending the CS at
power swings
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Conditional timer for
tripping at power
swings
tBlkTr 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.300 s Timer for blocking the
overreaching zones
trip

5.11.6 Technical data

5.12 Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Function block name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 78
IEC 61850 logical node name:
<

5.12.1 Introduction
Sudden events in an electrical power system such as large changes in load, fault
occurrence or fault clearance, can cause power oscillations referred to as power
swings. In a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the
synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of the
pole slip protection is to detect, evaluate, and take the required action for pole slipping
occurrences in the power system. The electrical system parts swinging to each other
can be separated with the line/s closest to the centre of the power swing allowing the
two systems to be stable as separated islands.

238 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

5.12.2 Principle of operation

If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the impedance
and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signalled. If the generator
is slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring
is signalled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor).

The movements in the impedance plain can be seen in figure 135. The transient
behaviour is described by the transient e.m.f's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the
transient system impedance ZS.

Zone 1 Zone 2

EB X’d XT XS EA

REG 670
B A

jX

XS

Pole slip
impedance XT
d Apparent generator
movement impedance R

X’d

en06000437.vsd

Figure 135: Movements in the impedance plain

where:
X'd = transient reactance of the generator

XT = short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer

ZS = impedance of the power system A

REL 670 Technical reference manual 239

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

The detection of rotor angle is enabled when:

• the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general
setting).
• the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 UBase
• the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an angular
velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
• the corresponding direction is not blocked.

en07000004.vsd

Figure 136: Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the
equivalent generators

An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds
the angle set for 'WarnAngle'.

Slipping is detected when:

• a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized

• the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.

When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in
zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone
1 when 'EnableZone1' is enabled (external device detects the direction of the centre
of slipping).

After the first slip, the signals 'Zone1' or 'Zone2' and – depending on the direction of
slip - either 'Generator' or 'Motor' are issued.

240 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line
is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.

Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of rotor
movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in
the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite direction within
ZA-ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.

The 'Trip1' tripping command and signal are generated after n1 slips in zone 1,
providing the rotor angle is less than 'TripAngle'. The 'Trip2' signal is generated after
n2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than 'TripAngle'.

All signals are reset if:

• the direction of movement reverses

• the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or
• no rotor relative movement was detected during the time 't-Reset'.

Imin > 0.10 IBase

Ucosj < 0.92 UBase AND

START
AND
0.2 £ Slip.Freq. £ 8 Hz

d ³ startAngle

ZONE1
AND
Z cross line ZA - ZC

ZONE2
AND
Z cross line ZC - ZB

Counter
a
a³b
N1Limit b TRIP1
AND

d £ tripAngle TRIP
OR

Counter
a
N2Limit b a³b TRIP2
AND

en07000005.vsd

Figure 137: Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection

REL 670 Technical reference manual 241

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

5.12.3 Function block

PSP1-
PSPPPAM_78
I3P TRIP
U3P TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLKGEN START
BLKMOTOR ZONE1
EXTZONE1 ZONE2
GEN
MOTOR
SFREQ
SLIPZOHM
SLIPZPER
UCOSKV
UCOSPER

en07000030.vsd

Figure 138: PSP function block

5.12.4 Input and output signals

Table 118: Input signals for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current group connection
U3P Voltage group connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLKGEN Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOTOR Block operation in motor direction
EXTZONE1 Extension of zone1 with zone2 region

Table 119: Output signals for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Common trip signal
TRIP1 Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1
TRIP2 Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2
START Common start signal
ZONE1 First slip in zone1 region
ZONE2 First slip in zone2 region
GEN Generator is faster then the system
MOTOR Generator is slower then the system
SFREQ Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM Slip impedance in ohms
Table continued on next page

242 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

Signal Description
SLIPZPER Slip impedance in percent of ZBase
UCOSKV UCosPhi voltage in kV
UCOSPER UCosPhi voltage in percent of UBase

5.12.5 Setting parameters

Table 120: Basic general settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 0.1 - 99999.9 0.1 3000.0 A Base Current
(primary phase
current in Amperes)
UBase 0.1 - 9999.9 0.1 20.0 kV Base Voltage
(primary phase-to-
phase voltage in kV)
MeasureMode PosSeq - PosSeq - Measuring mode
L1L2 (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3,
L2L3 L3L1)
L3L1
InvertCTcurr No - No - Invert current
Yes direction

Table 121: Basic parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation On / Off
On
OperationZ1 Off - On - Operation Zone1 On /
On Off
OperationZ2 Off - On - Operation Zone2 On /
On Off
ImpedanceZA 0.00 - 1000.00 0.01 10.00 % Forward impedance
in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZB 0.00 - 1000.00 0.01 10.00 % Reverse impedance
in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZC 0.00 - 1000.00 0.01 10.00 % Impedance of zone1
limit in % of Zbase
AnglePhi 72.00 - 90.00 0.01 85.00 Deg Angle of the slip
impedance line
StartAngle 0.0 - 180.0 0.1 110.0 Deg Rotor angle for the
start signal
TripAngle 0.0 - 180.0 0.1 90.0 Deg Rotor angle for the
trip1 and trip2 signals
N1Limit 1 - 20 1 1 - Count limit for the
trip1 signal
N2Limit 1 - 20 1 3 - Count limit for the
trip2 signal

REL 670 Technical reference manual 243

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Table 122: Advanced parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ResetTime 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Time without slip to
reset all signals

5.12.6 Technical data

Table 123: Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Impedance reach (0.00–1000.00)% of Zbase ± 2.0% of Ur/Ir

Characteristic angle (72.00–90.00) degrees ± 5.0 degrees

Start and trip angles (0.0–180.0) degrees ± 5.0 degrees
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1-20) -

5.13 Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and

current based (SFCV)

Function block name: SFV-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZCVPSOF

5.13.1 Introduction
Automatic switch onto fault logic is a function that gives an instantaneous trip at
closing of breaker onto a fault. A dead line detection check is provided to activate the
function when the line is dead.

Mho distance protections can not operate for switch on to fault condition when the
phase voltages are close to zero. An additional logic based on UI Level is used for
this purpose.

5.13.2 Principle of operation

The switch-onto-fault function (SFV) can be activated externally by Breaker Closed
Input or internally (automatically) by using UI Level Based Logic see figure 139.

The activation from the DLD function is released if the internal signal DeadLine from
the UILevel function is activated at the same time as the input ZACC is not activated
during at least for a duration tDLD and the setting parameter AutoInit is set to On.

244 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

When the setting AutoInit is Off the function is activated by an external binary input
BC. To get a trip also one of the following operation modes must be selected by the
parameter Mode:

Mode = Impedance; trip is released if the input ZACC is activated (normal connected
to non directional distance protection zone)

Mode = UILevel; trip is released if UILevel detector is activated

Mode = Both; trip is initiated based on impedance measured criteria or UILevel

detection

The internal signal DeadLine from the UILevel detector is activated if all three phase
currents and voltages are below the setting IPh< and UPh<.

UI Level based measurement detects the switch onto fault condition even though the
voltage is very low. The logic is based on current change for activation, current level
and voltage level. The internal signal SOTFLevel is activated if the phase voltage and
corresponding phase current is below the setting IPh< and UPh< in any phase.

First of all AutoInit= On is not needed (or in some cases not even wanted) for external
activation and secondly the information is already present in the first sentence of
"Principle of operation"

The function is released during a settable time tSOTF.

The function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 245

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

BLOCK 15
t TRIP
AND

BC

AutiInit=On

200 1000
OR t
ZACC AND t

IL1
deadLine
IL2
IL3
UL1 UILevel detector
UL2
UL3

Iph<
SOTFU ILevel
Uph<

AND
Mode = Impedance

AND OR
Mode = UILevel

OR
AND
Mode = UILvl&Imp

en07000084.vsd

Figure 139: Simplified logic diagram for current and voltage based switch onto fault logic.

246 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 5
Impedance protection

5.13.3 Function block

SFV1-
ZCVPSOF
I3P TRIP
U3P
BLOCK
BC
ZACC

en06000459.vsd

Figure 140: SFV1 function block

5.13.4 Input and output signals

Table 124: Input signals for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current DFT
U3P Voltage DFT
BLOCK Block of function
BC External enabling of SOTF
ZACC Distance zone to be accelerated by SOTF

Table 125: Output signals for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip output

5.13.5 Setting parameters

Table 126: Basic parameter group settings for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current (A)
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage L-L (kV)
Mode Impedance - UILevel - Mode of operation of
UILevel SOTF Function
UILvl&Imp
AutoInit Off - Off - Automatic switchonto
On fault initialization
IPh< 1 - 100 1 20 %IB Current level for
detection of dead line
in % of IBase
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 247

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 5
Impedance protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

UPh< 1 - 100 1 70 %UB Voltage level for
detection of dead line
in % of UBase
tDuration 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Time delay for UI
detection (s)
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Drop off delay time of
switch onto fault
function
tDLD 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Delay time for
activation of dead line
detection

5.13.6 Technical data

Table 127: Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (PSOF)
Parameter Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, detection of dead line (1–100)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur

Operate current, detection of dead line (1–100)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir

Delay following dead line detection input before SOTF (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
function is automatically enabled
Time period after circuit breaker closure in which (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
SOTF function is active

248 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Section 6 Current protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions like
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection,
Pole discordance protection and Residual overcurrent protection.

6.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection

(PIOC, 50)

Function block name: IOCx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 50
IEC 61850 logical node name:
PHPIOC 3I>>

6.1.1 Introduction
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and
short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function, with
the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the fault current line at minimum
source impedance.

6.1.2 Principle of operation

The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the
RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to
the IOC function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation
current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation
current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will,
without delay, activate the output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP
signal that is common for all three phases.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 249

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: “1 out of 3” or “2 out of 3”. If the

parameter is set to “1 out of 3” any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter
is set to “2 out of 3” at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
(StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.

The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

6.1.3 Function block

IOC1-
PHPIOC_50
I3P TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
ENMULT TRL2
TRL3

en04000391.vsd

Figure 141: IOC function block

6.1.4 Input and output signals

Table 128: Input signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Three phase current
BLOCK Block of function
ENMULT Enable current start value multiplier

Table 129: Output signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip signal from any phase
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3

6.1.5 Setting parameters

250 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Table 130: Basic parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
OpMode 2 out of 3 - 1 out of 3 - Select operation
1 out of 3 mode 2-out of 3 / 1-
out of 3
IP>> 1 - 2500 1 200 %IB Operate phase
current level in % of
IBase

Table 131: Advanced parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 0.1 1.0 - Multiplier for operate
current level

6.1.6 Technical data

Table 132: Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Reset time 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

6.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC,

51_67)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 251

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Function block name: TOCx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 51/67
IEC 61850 logical node name:
3I>
OC4PTOC
4
alt
4

6.2.1 Introduction
The four step phase overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delay
independent for each step separately.

All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined time characteristic.

The function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of

the steps.

6.2.2 Principle of operation

The function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each
step x an operation mode is set (DirModex): Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.

The protection design can be decomposed in four parts:

• The direction element, indicates the over current fault direction

• The harmonic Restraint Blocking function
• The 4 step over current function
• The Mode Selection

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, func parameter

DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

252 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

4 step over current

Direction dirPh1Flt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPh2Flt step
I3P dirPh3Flt START

U3P

TRIP

Harmonic harmRestrBlock
I3P Restraint
Element

enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740.vsd

Figure 142: Functional overview of TOC.

A common setting for all steps, StPhaseSel, is used to specify the number of phase
currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3.

The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a pre-processing function

blocks. By a parameter setting within the general settings for the TOC function it is
then possible to select type of measurement which shall be used by TOC function for
all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or
true RMS filer (RMS). If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the
fundamental frequency components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC
current component and higher harmonic current components are almost completely
suppressed. If RMS option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true
RMS value in addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the
contribution from the current DC component as well as from higher current harmonic.
The selected current values are fed to the TOC function. In a comparator, for each
phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value
of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation
current a signal from the comparator for this phase and step is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the output signal Start for this phase/step, the Start signal

REL 670 Technical reference manual 253

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

common for all three phases for this step and a common Start signal. It shall be noted
that the selection of measured value (i.e. DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation
of directional part of TOC function. Service value for individually measured phase
currents are available from the TOC function. This feature simplifies testing,
commissioning and in service operational checking of the function.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from
the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain
current level.

The function can use a directional option. The direction of the fault current is given
as current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage
for the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional
measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization
voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%).
The following combinations are used.

Phase-phase short circuit:

U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2

U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3

U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1

Phase-earth short circuit:

U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1

U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2

U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function
and an angle window AngleROA.

254 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Reverse

Uref

RCA
ROA

ROA Forward

Idir

en05000745.vsd

Figure 143: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is –65°. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle
sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.

A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set:
IminOpPhSel.

If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type of
inverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics
is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The
possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter "Time inverse
characteristics".

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter "Time inverse
characteristics".

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult, x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the

set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the
operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching
state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from
the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 255

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

6.2.3 Function block

TOC1-
OC4PTOC_51_67
I3P TRIP
U3P TR1
BLOCK TR2
BLKTR TR3
BLKST1 TR4
BLKST2 TRL1
BLKST3 TRL2
BLKST4 TRL3
ENMULT1 TR1L1
ENMULT2 TR1L2
ENMULT3 TR1L3
ENMULT4 TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
2NDHARM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3

en06000187.vsd

Figure 144: TOC function block

6.2.4 Input and output signals

Table 133: Input signals for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Block of trip
BLKST1 Block of Step1
Table continued on next page

256 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Signal Description
BLKST2 Block of Step2
BLKST3 Block of Step3
BLKST4 Block of Step4
ENMULT1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
ENMULT2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2
ENMULT3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3
ENMULT4 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4

Table 134: Output signals for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
TR1 Common trip signal from step1
TR2 Common trip signal from step2
TR3 Common trip signal from step3
TR4 Common trip signal from step4
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3
TR1L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 Trip signal from step2 phase L3
TR3L1 Trip signal from step3 phase L1
TR3L2 Trip signal from step3 phase L2
TR3L3 Trip signal from step3 phase L3
TR4L1 Trip signal from step4 phase L1
TR4L2 Trip signal from step4 phase L2
TR4L3 Trip signal from step4 phase L3
START General start signal
ST1 Common start signal from step1
ST2 Common start signal from step2
ST3 Common start signal from step3
ST4 Common start signal from step4
STL1 Start signal from phase L1
STL2 Start signal from phase L2
STL3 Start signal from phase L3
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 257

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Signal Description
ST1L1 Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2L1 Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 Start signal from step2 phase L3
ST3L1 Start signal from step3 phase L1
ST3L2 Start signal from step3 phase L2
ST3L3 Start signal from step3 phase L3
ST4L1 Start signal from step4 phase L1
ST4L2 Start signal from step4 phase L2
ST4L3 Start signal from step4 phase L3
2NDHARM Block from second harmonic detection
DIRL1 Direction for phase1
DIRL2 Direction for phase2
DIRL3 Direction for phase3

6.2.5 Setting parameters

Table 135: Basic general settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
MeasType DFT - DFT - Selection between
RMS DFT and RMS
measurement

Table 136: Basic parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
AngleRCA 40 - 65 1 55 Deg Relay characteristic
angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 1 80 Deg Relay operation angle
(ROA)
StartPhSel Not Used - 1 out of 3 - Number of phases
1 out of 3 required for op (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
Table continued on next page

258 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

DirMode1 Off - Non-directional - Directional mode of
Non-directional step 1 (off, nodir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - ANSI Def. Time - Selection of time
ANSI Very inv. delay curve type for
ANSI Norm. inv. step 1
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I1> 1 - 2500 1 1000 %IB Phase current
operate level for step1
in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Definitive time delay
of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for current
operate level for step
1
DirMode2 Off - Non-directional - Directional mode of
Non-directional step 2 (off, nodir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 259

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - ANSI Def. Time - Selection of time
ANSI Very inv. delay curve type for
ANSI Norm. inv. step 2
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2> 1 - 2500 1 500 %IB Phase current
operate level for step2
in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Definitive time delay
of step 2
k2 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for current
operate level for step
2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 2
DirMode3 Off - Non-directional - Directional mode of
Non-directional step 3 (off, nodir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - ANSI Def. Time - Selection of time
ANSI Very inv. delay curve type for
ANSI Norm. inv. step 3
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I3> 1 - 2500 1 250 %IB Phase current
operate level for step3
in % of IBase
Table continued on next page

260 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

t3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.800 s Definitive time delay
of step 3
k3 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 3
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for current
operate level for step
3
DirMode4 Off - Non-directional - Directional mode of
Non-directional step 4 (off, nodir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - ANSI Def. Time - Selection of time
ANSI Very inv. delay curve type for
ANSI Norm. inv. step 4
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I4> 1 - 2500 1 175 %IB Phase current
operate level for step4
in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Definitive time delay
of step 4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 4
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for current
operate level for step
4

REL 670 Technical reference manual 261

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Table 137: Advanced parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 1 7 %IB Minimum current for
phase selection in %
of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 1 20 %IB Operate level of 2nd
harm restrain op in %
of Fundamental
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
IEC Reset curve type for step 1
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
HarmRestrain1 Off - Off - Enable block of step 1
On from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
IEC Reset curve type for step 2
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
Table continued on next page

262 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
HarmRestrain2 Off - Off - Enable block of step 2
On from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
IEC Reset curve type for step 3
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 263

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
HarmRestrain3 Off - Off - Enable block of step3
On from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
IEC Reset curve type for step 4
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
HarmRestrain4 Off - Off - Enable block of step 4
On from harmonic
restrain

6.2.6 Technical data

264 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Table 138: Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51/67)

Function Setting range Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Min. operating current (1-100)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (-70.0– -50.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees

Maximum forward angle (40.0–70.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Minimum forward angle (75.0–90.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ± 2.0% of Ir

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Inverse characteristics, see 19 curve types See table 588 and table 589
table 588 and table 589
Operate time, start function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time, start function 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

6.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection

(PIOC, 50N)

Function block name: IEFx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 50N
IEC 61850 logical node name:
EFPIOC IN>>

6.3.1 Introduction
The single input overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping
times to allow use for instantaneous earth fault protection, with the reach limited to
less than typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance. The
function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase
current inputs or the current from a separate current input.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 265

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

6.3.2 Principle of operation

The sampled analogue residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current
the RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the IEF function. In a comparator
the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function
(IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from
the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal
TRIP.

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via
a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.

The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the
function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during
single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.

6.3.3 Function block

IEF1-
EFPIOC_50N
I3P TRIP
BLOCK
BLKAR
MULTEN

en06000269.vsd

Figure 145: IEF function block

6.3.4 Input and output signals

Table 139: Input signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Three phase currents
BLOCK Block of function
BLKAR Block input for auto reclose
MULTEN Enable current multiplier

Table 140: Output signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip signal

266 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

6.3.5 Setting parameters

Table 141: Basic parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
IN>> 1 - 2500 1 200 %IB Operate residual
current level in % of
IBase

Table 142: Advanced parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 0.1 1.0 - Multiplier for operate
current level

6.3.6 Technical data

Table 143: Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Reset time 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

6.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection

(PTOC, 51N/67N)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 267

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Function block name: TEFx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:51N/ 67N
IN
IEC 61850 logical node name:
EF4PTOC
4
alt
4

6.4.1 Introduction
The four step residual single input overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time
delay independent for each step separately.

All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined characteristic.

A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.

The function can be used as main protection for phase to earth faults.

The function can be used to provide a system back-up e.g. in the case of the primary
protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit
failure.

Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication

blocks into permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-
end infeed functionality are available as well.

The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase
current inputs or the current from a separate current input.

6.4.2 Principle of operation

This function has the following three “Analog Inputs” on its function block in the
configuration tool:

1. I3P, input for the function “Operating Quantity”.

2. U3P, input for the function “Voltage Polarizing Quantity”.
3. IP3P, input for the function “Current Polarizing Quantity”.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM.

6.4.2.1 Operating quantity within the function

The function always uses Residual Current (i.e. 3Io) for its operating quantity. The
residual current can be:

268 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT

tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF
function input I3P). This dedicated IED 670 CT input can be for example
connected to:
• parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases
(well known Holm-Green connection).
• one single core balance, current instrument transformer (i.e. cable CT).
• one single current instrument transformer located between power system
star point and ground (i.e. current transformer located in the star point of
a star connected transformer winding).
• one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (i.e. current transformer located between two star points
of double star shunt capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three phase current input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analog Input I3P
is not connected to a dedicated CT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case
the pre-processing block will calculate 3Io from the first three inputs into the
pre-processing block by using the following formula:

I op = 3 × Io = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the TEF function to compare it with the set operation current
value of the four stages (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the residual
current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional
mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without
delay, activate the output signal START for this step and a common START signal.

6.4.2.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function

A polarizing quantity is used within the function in order to determine the direction
of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse).

The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.

When Voltage Polarizing is selected the function will use the Residual Voltage (i.e.
3Uo) as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT

tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF

REL 670 Technical reference manual 269

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

function input U3P). This dedicated IED 670 VT input shall be then connected
to open delta winding of a three phase main VT.
2. calculated from three phase voltage input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analogue Input
U3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such
case the pre-processing block will calculate 3Uo from the first three inputs into
the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

U VPol = 3 × Uo = UL1 + UL 2 + UL3

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
Note! In order to use this all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED 670 VT
inputs.

The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived. This phasor
is used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the
direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage
polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level
defined by setting parameter UpolMin.

It shall be noted that –3Uo is used to determine the location of the earth fault.Thus
the setting parameter ROT3U0, located under General Settings for Earth Fault
function, has default value of “ROT3U0=180 deg”. This insures the required
inversion of the polarizing voltage within the earth fault function.

When Current Polarizing is selected the function will use the Residual Current (i.e.
3Io) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT

tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF
function input IP3P). This dedicated IED 670 CT input is then typically
connected to one single current instrument transformer located between power
system star point and ground (i.e. current transformer located in the star point of
a star connected transformer winding).
• For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED 670 CT
input can be connected to parallel connection of current instrument
transformers in all three phases (well known Holm-Green connection)
2. calculated from three phase current input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analog Input IP3P
is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case

270 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

the pre-processing block will calculate 3Io from the first three inputs into the
pre-processing block by using the following formula:

I Pol = 3 × Io = IL1 + IL 2 + IL 3
(Equation 76)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents. However this
option can be as well only used for some special line protection applications as
explained in the Application Manual.

The residual polarizing current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the
phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived.
This phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent Zero Sequence Source
Impedance in order to calculate equivalent Polarizing Voltage UIPol in accordance
with the following formula:

U IPol = ZoS × I Pol = (RNPol+j × XNPol) × I Pol

(Equation 77)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order
to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). In order to enable
current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a minimum
level defined by setting parameter IPollMin.

When Dual Polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:

U TotPol = U UPol + U IPol = 3Uo + ZoS × I Pol = 3Uo + (RNPol+j × XNPol) × I Pol
(Equation 78)

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e.
Forward/Reverse).

6.4.2.3 External polarizing facility for EFGround Fault function

The individual stages within the function can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x
indicates the relevant step within the function) to provide external directional control
(i.e. torque control) by for example using one of the following functions available in
IED 670:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 271

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

1. Distance protection directional unit.

2. Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose
protection function.

6.4.2.4 Base quantities within the function

The base quantities shall be entered as setting parameters for every EF function. Base
current shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary
amperes. Base voltage shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the
protected object in primary kV.

6.4.2.5 Internal EFGround Fault function structure

The function is internally divided into the following parts:

1. Four residual overcurrent stages.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent stages with integrated
Directional Comparison stage for communication based earth fault protection
schemes (i.e. permissive or blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking
during switching of parallel transformers.
4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of
breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.

Each part is described separately in the following paragraphs.

6.4.2.6 Four residual overcurrent stages

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity IOp (i.e. Residual Current) as
measuring quantity. Every of the four residual overcurrent stage has the following
built-in facilities:

• Operating mode (i.e. Off / Non-directional / Forward / Reverse). By this

parameter setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. It shall be noted
that the directional decision (i.e. Forward/Reverse) is not made within residual
overcurrent stage itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common
“Directional Supervision Element” described in the next paragraph.
• Residual current pickup value.
• Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for earth fault function.
Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the
complete list of available inverse curves please refer to Chapter "Time inverse
characteristics"
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI Rest). By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For
the complete list of available reset curves please refer to Chapter "Time inverse
characteristics"

272 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay
and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (i.e. On/Off). By this
parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the stage if the second
harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the pre-set level.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary
signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup
value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent stage is shown in the following
figure:

BLKTR

Characteristx=DefTime tx TRINx
|IOP| AND
a OR
a>b
b
ENMULTx
STINx
INxMult AND
X T
INx> F
Inverse
BLKSTx

BLOCK Characteristx=Inverse

2ndH_BLOCK_Int
OR
HarmRestrain1=Disabled

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int

DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

en07000064.vsd

Figure 146: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2 ,3 or 4

The function can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start
signals from the function for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.

6.4.2.7 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparision

stage

It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent stages
shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the

REL 670 Technical reference manual 273

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

directional supervision element and the integrated directional

comparison stage.

The function has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current
IOp is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting
polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the
following three ways:

1. When polMethod=Voltage, UVPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod=Current, UIPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. When polMethod=Dual, UTotPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in the following figure, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

Reverse
Area

0.4*IN>Dir

Upol=-3Uo
AngleRCA
0.4*IN>Dir

Forward
Area
Iop=3Io

en07000066.vsd

Figure 147: Operating characteristic for earth fault directional element

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

274 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

• Operating Current Pickup IN>Dir. However it shall be noted that the directional
element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as IOp cos(φ - AngleRCA)
is bigger then 40% of IN>Dir.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of Forward &
Reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional Comparison stage, built-in within directional supervision element, will

set EF function output binary signal:

1. STFW=1 when Operating Quantity magnitude is bigger than setting parameter

IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in forward direction.
2. STRV=1 when Operating Quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse
direction.

These signals shall be used for communication based earth fault teleprotection
schemes (i.e. permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison stage is shown in the following figure:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 275

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

|IOP|
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b STFW
IN>Dir b AND
FORWARD_Int

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA

Characteristic
PolMethod=Voltage
OR

Directional
PolMethod=Current UPolMin

PolMethod=Dual UPol IPolMin

OR
T
IOP
0.0 F
UTotPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
RVS

UIPol
RNPol X T
COMPLEX
NUMBER
XNPol 0.0 F STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
OR
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

en07000067.vsd

Figure 148: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
stage

6.4.2.8 Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic
component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual current
exceeds the pre-set level (defined by parameter setting 2ndHarmStab) any of the four
residual overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by a parameter setting
HarmRestrainx. When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active the EF function output
signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value one.

In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can
be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be
required to stabilize the EF function during switching of parallel transformers in the
station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current.
If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in,
the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial

276 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation.

The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers will be in phase
opposition. The summation of the two currents will thus give a small 2nd harmonic
current. The residual fundamental current will however be significant. The inrush
current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, will
be a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we will have high
2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short period this current will
however be small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking will reset. If the
BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal will be latched as
long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current
level.

This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-
in feature will be activated when all of the following three conditions are
simultaneously fulfilled:

1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf=On.

2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70 ms.
3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible
to select which one of the four start values that will be used (i.e. IN1> or IN2>
or IN3> or IN4>).

Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking
signal will be sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined
by parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).

Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in the following
figure:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 277

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

BLOCK

2ndHarmStab
X
Extract second
IOP 2NDHARMD
harmonic current a OR
a>b
component
b

Extract
fundamental
q-1
current component

t=70ms OR
t AN OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int
D

BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a
a>b
b
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>

en07000068.vsd

Figure 149: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature

6.4.2.9 Switch on to fault feature

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic
(SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either
SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk
to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The
SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during
which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the
setting parameter t4U.

The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected
by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The
setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position open
change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current
start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set
delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 100 ms).

The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The Under-Time
logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function.
The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This
enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker
closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately

278 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command
pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a start
from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is
normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time
logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is only active
immediately after breaker switching. The Under-Time logic can only be used in
solidly or low impedance grounded systems.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 279

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 280
Section 6
Current protection

activationSOTF
Setting

tpulse
cbPosition
SOTF
posClsPls
Exec AND
PwrMode

Figure 150:
tpulse
cbClosed
NOT SOTFActive

tpulse operationMode
posOpnPls Setting PwrMode
AND
False start Exec
AND

in the following Figure 1:

closeCB closeCBPls
Exec

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
OR
TON

Technical reference manual

Exec step2Or3in AND AND IN Q AND
Exec block PT ET
NOT
switchOntoFaultDelayTime
Setting
PwrMode
activationUnderTime
Setting
operate
Exec
PwrMode
Under Time
onOrOffPos
OR tpulse
UTimeActive
opnOrClsCBPls
OR
Exec

OR
AND

step4in AND
Setting TON
harmonic2ndRestraint AND IN Q AND
Exec NOT PT ET

cbSwitchingFaultDelayTime
Exec

en06000643.vsd

Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features

EF Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF function is shown

REL 670
 Section 6
Current protection

signal to
communication
scheme
Directional Check
Element

4 step over current

INPol Direction
operatingCurrent element TRIP
Element
3U0 One element for each
earthFaultDirection step
3I0 angleValid

DirMode
enableDir

harmRestrBlock
3I0 Harmonic
Restraint ³1
Element

start step 2, 3 and

4
Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault
TRIP

CB
DirMode pos
or cmd
enableDir
Mode
Selection enableStep1-4

DirectionalMode1-4

en06000376.vsd

Figure 151: Functional overview of TEF

6.4.3 Function block

TEF1-
EF4PTOC_51N67N
I3P TRIP
U3P TRIN1
I3PPOL TRIN2
BLOCK TRIN3
BLKTR TRIN4
BLKST1 TRSOTF
BLKST2 START
BLKST3 STIN1
BLKST4 STIN2
ENMULT1 STIN3
ENMULT2 STIN4
ENMULT3 STSOTF
ENMULT4 STFW
CBPOS STRV
CLOSECB 2NDHARMD
OPENCB

en06000424.vsd

Figure 152: TEF1 function block

6.4.4 Input and output signals

REL 670 Technical reference manual 281

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Table 144: Input signals for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current connection
U3P Polarizing voltage connection
I3PPOL Polarizing current connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Block of trip
BLKST1 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
ENMULT2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2
ENMULT3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3
ENMULT4 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4
CBPOS Breaker position
CLOSECB Breaker close command
OPENCB Breaker open command

Table 145: Output signals for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
TRIN1 Trip signal from step 1
TRIN2 Trip signal from step 2
TRIN3 Trip signal from step 3
TRIN4 Trip signal from step 4
TRSOTF Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
START General start signal
STIN1 Start signal step 1
STIN2 Start signal step 2
STIN3 Start signal step 3
STIN4 Start signal step 4
STSOTF Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
STFW Forward directional start signal
STRV Reverse directional start signal
2NDHARMD 2nd harmonic block signal

6.4.5 Setting parameters

282 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Table 146: Basic parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base value for current
settings
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base value for voltage
settings
AngleRCA -180 - 180 1 65 Deg Relay characteristic
angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - Voltage - Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 1 1 %UB Minimum voltage
level for polarization
in % of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 1 5 %IB Minimum current level
for polarization in % of
IBase
RNPol 0.50 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm Real part of source Z
to be used for current
polarisation
XNPol 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 40.00 ohm Imaginary part of
source Z to be used
for current
polarisation
IN>Dir 1 - 100 1 10 %IB Residual current level
for Direction release
in % of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 1 20 % Second harmonic
restrain operation in
% of IN amplitude
BlkParTransf Off - Off - Enable blocking at
On parallel transformers
UseStartValue IN1> - IN4> - Current level blk at
IN2> parallel transf (step1,
IN3> 2, 3 or 4)
IN4>
SOTF Off - Off - SOTF operation
SOTF mode (Off/SOTF/
UnderTime Undertime/SOTF
SOTF +undertime)
+UnderTime
ActivationSOTF Open - Open - Select signal that
Closed shall activate SOTF
CloseCommand
StepForSOTF Step 2 - Step 2 - Selection of step used
Step 3 for SOTF
HarmResSOTF Off - Off - Enable harmonic
On restrain function in
SOTF
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Time delay for SOTF
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 283

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

t4U 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Switch-onto-fault
active time
DirMode1 Off - Non-directional - Directional mode of
Non-directional step 1 (off, nodir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - ANSI Def. Time - Time delay curve type
ANSI Very inv. for step 1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN1> 1 - 2500 1 100 %IB Operate residual
current level for step 1
in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Independent
(defenite) time delay
of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
dependent time delay
for step 1
IN1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for scaling
the current setting
value for step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
HarmRestrain1 Off - On - Enable block of step 1
On from harmonic
restrain
DirMode2 Off - Non-directional - Directional mode of
Non-directional step 2 (off, nodir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
Table continued on next page

284 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - ANSI Def. Time - Time delay curve type
ANSI Very inv. for step 2
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN2> 1 - 2500 1 50 %IB Operate residual
current level for step 2
in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Independent
(definitive) time delay
of step 2
k2 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
dependent time delay
for step 2
IN2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for scaling
the current setting
value for step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves step 2
HarmRestrain2 Off - On - Enable block of step 2
On from harmonic
restrain
DirMode3 Off - Non-directional - Directional mode of
Non-directional step 3 (off, nodir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - ANSI Def. Time - Time delay curve type
ANSI Very inv. for step 3
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 285

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

IN3> 1 - 2500 1 33 %IB Operate residual
current level for step 3
in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.800 s Independent time
delay of step 3
k3 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
dependent time delay
for step 3
IN3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for scaling
the current setting
value for step 3
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 3
HarmRestrain3 Off - On - Enable block of step 3
On from harmonic
restrain
DirMode4 Off - Non-directional - Directional mode of
Non-directional step 4 (off, nodir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - ANSI Def. Time - Time delay curve type
ANSI Very inv. for step 4
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN4> 1 - 2500 1 17 %IB Operate residual
current level for step 4
in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.200 s Independent
(definitive) time delay
of step 4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
dependent time delay
for step 4
IN4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for scaling
the current setting
value for step 4
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operate
time in inverse curves
step 4
HarmRestrain4 Off - On - Enable block of step 4
On from harmonic
restrain

286 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Table 147: Advanced parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ActUnderTime CB position - CB position - Select signal to
CB command activate under time
(CB Pos/
CBCommand)
tUnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.300 s Time delay for under
time
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Reset curve type for
IEC Reset step 1
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset curve type for
step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Reset curve type for
IEC Reset step 2
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset curve type for
step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 287

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Reset curve type for
IEC Reset step 3
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset curve type for
step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
Table continued on next page

288 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Reset curve type for
IEC Reset step 4
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset curve type for
step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
step 4

6.4.6 Technical data

Table 148: Four step residual overcurrent protection (PEFM, 51N/67N)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate current for directional (1–100)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir
comparison
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Inverse characteristics, see table 19 curve types See table 588 and table 589
588 and table 589
Second harmonic restrain (5–100)% of fundamental ± 2.0% of Ir
operation
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 289

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of Ubase ± 0.5% of Ur

Minimum polarizing current (1–30)% of Ibase ± 0.25% of Ir

RNS, XNS (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -

Operate time, start function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time, start function 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

6.5 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and

power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Function block name: SDEx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 67N
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SDEPSDE

6.5.1 Introduction
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase to earth fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth fault
protection is that the magnitude of the phase to earth fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.

Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to
earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current and
the residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively the
function can be set to strict 3I0 level with an check of angle 3I0 and cos φ.

Directional residual power can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to
earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
power component 3I03U0 cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current
and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.

A normal undirectional residual current function can also be used and be with definite
or inverse time delay.

A back-up neutral point voltage function is also available for undirectional sensitive
back-up protection.

290 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

In an isolated network, i.e. the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances
between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90º phase
shift compared to the reference residual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen
to -90º in such a network.

In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil, with a parallel resistor, the active
residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for
the earth fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0º.

As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the
selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.

When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and
when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? We have
the following facts to consider:

• Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity

• Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse

time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks,
with large capacitive earth fault current

• In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used. Such a
resistor will give a resistive earth fault current component of about 200 - 400 A
at a zero resistive phase to earth fault. In such a system the directional residual
power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time
power characteristics.

6.5.2 Principle of operation

6.5.2.1 Introduction

The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from pre-
processor blocks.

The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 cos φ

φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (φ=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) ).
Uref = -3U0 ejRCADir. RCAdir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance
earthed network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is
appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCAdir is set equal to -90° in an isolated

REL 670 Technical reference manual 291

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0 cos φ
gets larger than the set value.

Uref RCA = 0°, ROA = 90°

3I0

= ang(3I0) - ang(3Uref)
-3U0=Uref
3I0 cos

en06000648.vsd

Figure 153: RCADir set to 0°

Uref
RCA = -90°, ROA = 90°

3I0
3I0 cos

= ang(3I0) – ang(Uref)

-3U0

en06000649.vsd

Figure 154: RCADir set to -90°

For trip, both the residual current 3I0 cos φand the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger
than the set levels: INCosPhi> and UNRel>.

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

292 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time
delay.

There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle φ is
larger than a set value as shown in the figure below. This is equivalent to blocking of
the function if φ > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument
transformers.

3I0 Operate area

-3U0=Uref RCA = 0°
3I0 cos
ROA

en06000650.vsd

Figure 155: Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function will indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is
defined as 3I0 cos (φ + 180°) ≥ the set value.

It shall also be possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer
angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure below:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 293

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Operate area

-3U0=Uref RCA = 0°

Instrument
transformer a
RCAcomp
angle error
Characteristic after
angle compensation

3I0 (to prot)

3I0 (prim)

en06000651.vsd

Figure 156: Explanation of RCAcomp.

Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3U0 cos φ

φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (φ=ang(3I0)—ang(Uref) ).
Uref = -3U0 ejRCA. The function operates when 3I0 3U0 cos φ gets larger than the set
value.

For trip, both the residual power 3I03U0 cos φ, the residual current 3I0 and the release
voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse time
delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.

The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction
is defined as 3I0 3U0 cos (φ + 180°) ³ the set value.

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay.

The inverse time delay is defined as:

294 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

kSN × (3I 0 × 3U 0 × cos f (reference))

t inv =
3I 0 × 3U 0 cos f (measured)
(Equation 79)

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and φ

The function will operate if the residual current is larger that the set value and the
angle φ = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) is within the sector RCADir ± ROADir

RCA = 0°

ROA = 80°

Operate area

3I0

80 -3U0

en06000652.vsd

Figure 157: Example of characteristic

For trip, both the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than
the set levels (INDir> and UNREL>) and the angle φ shall be in the set sector (ROADir
and RCADir).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.

The function indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as φ is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180° ± ROADir

This variant shall have definite time delay.

Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in the
forward direction, and STRV: start in the reverse direction. Even if the directional

REL 670 Technical reference manual 295

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse
direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is set to
operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will give the
start signal STFW.

Non-directional earthground fault current protection

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The
function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as
alternative or back-up to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure
selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional earth fault current
function via the input BLKNDN.

If available the non-directional function is using the calculated residual current,

derived as sum of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-
country faults with high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for
the sensitive earth fault protection will saturate.

This variant shall have the possibility of choice between definite time delay and
inverse time delay. The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3.

For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set levels (INNonDir>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.

When the function is activated binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the
activation is active after the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the
binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN are activated.

Residual overvoltage release and protection

The directional function shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than
a set level.

There shall also be a separate trip, with its own definite time delay, from this set
voltage level.

For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set levels (UN>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.

When the function is activated binary output signal STUN is activated. If the
activation is active after the set delay tUNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A
simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 158.

296 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

INNonDir> STNDIN
t TRNDIN

UN> STUN
t TRUN

OpMODE=INcosPhi

IN>
&

INcosPhi>

OpMODE=INUNcosPhi

& ³1 & STARTDIRIN

INUNcosPhi> t

SN
& TRDIRIN
Phi in RCA +- ROA
TimeChar = InvTime
&
OpMODE=IN and Phi

&
TimeChar = DefTime

DirMode = Forw
& ³1
Forw STFW

DirMode = Rev
&
Rev STRV

en06000653.vsd

Figure 158: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection

6.5.3 Function block

SDE1-
SDEPSDE_67N
I3P TRIP
U3P TRDIRIN
BLOCK TRNDIN
BLKTR TRUN
BLKTRDIR START
BLKNDN STDIRIN
BLKUN STNDIN
STUN
STFW
STRV
STDIR
UNREL

en07000032.vsd

Figure 159: SDE function block

REL 670 Technical reference manual 297

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

6.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 149: Input signals for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current
U3P Group signal for voltage
BLOCK Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR Blocks the operate outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR Blocks the directional operate outputs of the function
BLKNDN Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKUN Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs

Table 150: Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 100 A Base Current, in A
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 63.50 kV Base Voltage, in kV
Phase to Neutral
SBase 0.05 - 0.05 6350.00 kVA Base Power, in kVA.
200000000.00 IBase*UBase

Table 151: Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - 3I0Cosfi - Selection of operation
3I03U0Cosfi mode for protection
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - Forward - Direction of operation
Reverse forward or reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 1 -90 Deg Relay characteristic
angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Relay characteristic
angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 1 90 Deg Relay open angle
ROA used as release
in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 1.00 %IB Set level for 3I0cosFi,
directional res over
current, in %Ib
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 10.00 %SB Set level for
3I03U0cosFi, starting
inv time count, in %Sb
Table continued on next page

298 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 5.00 %IB Set level for
directional residual
over current prot, in
%Ib
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Definite time delay
directional residual
overcurrent, in sec
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 0.01 10.00 %SB Reference value of
res power for inverse
time count, in %Sb
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 0.01 0.10 - Time multiplier setting
for directional residual
power mode
OpINNonDir> Off - Off - Operation of non-
On directional residual
overcurrent
protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 0.01 10.00 %IB Set level for non
directional residual
over current, in %Ib
tINNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Time delay for non-
directional residual
over current, in sec
TimeChar ANSI Ext. inv. - IEC Norm. inv. - Operation curve
ANSI Very inv. selection for IDMT
ANSI Norm. inv. operation
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.040 s Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves, in sec
kIN 0.00 - 2.00 0.01 1.00 - IDMT time mult for
non-dir res over
current protection
OpUN> Off - Off - Operation of non-
On directional residual
overvoltage
protection
UN> 1.00 - 200.00 0.01 20.00 %UB Set level for non-
directional residual
over voltage, in %Ub
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 299

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tUNNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Time delay for non-
directional residual
over voltage, in sec
INRel> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 1.00 %IB Residual release
current for all
directional modes, in
%Ib
UNRel> 0.01 - 200.00 0.01 3.00 %UB Residual release
voltage for all
direction modes, in
%Ub

Table 152: Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
RotResU 0 deg - 180 deg - Setting for rotating
180 deg polarizing quantity if
necessary

Table 153: Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.040 s Time delay used for
reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Setting P for customer
programmable curve
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Setting A for customer
programmable curve
tBCrv 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Setting B for customer
programmable curve
tCCrv 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Setting C for
customer
programmable curve
ResetTypeCrv Immediate - IEC Reset - Reset mode when
IEC Reset current drops off.
ANSI reset
tPRCrv 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Setting PR for
customer
programmable curve
tTRCrv 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Setting TR for
customer
programmable curve
tCRCrv 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Setting CR for
customer
programmable curve

6.5.5 Setting parameters

300 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Table 154: Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 100 A Base Current, in A
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 63.50 kV Base Voltage, in kV
Phase to Neutral
SBase 0.05 - 0.05 6350.00 kVA Base Power, in kVA.
200000000.00 IBase*Ubase

Table 155: Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - 3I0Cosfi - Selection of operation
3I03U0Cosfi mode for protection
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - Forward - Direction of operation
Reverse forward or reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 1 -90 Deg Relay characteristic
angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Relay characteristic
angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 1 90 Deg Relay open angle
ROA used as release
in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 1.00 %IB Set level for 3I0cosFi,
directional res over
current, in %Ib
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 10.00 %SB Set level for
3I03U0cosFi, starting
inv time count, in %Sb
INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 5.00 %IB Set level for
directional residual
over current prot, in
%Ib
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Definite time delay
directional residual
overcurrent, in sec
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 0.01 10.00 %SB Reference value of
res power for inverse
time count, in %Sb
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 0.01 0.10 - Time multiplier setting
for directional residual
power mode
OpINNonDir> Off - Off - Operation of non-
On directional residual
overcurrent
protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 0.01 10.00 %IB Set level for non
directional residual
over current, in %Ib
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 301

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tINNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Time delay for non-
directional residual
over current, in sec
TimeChar ANSI Ext. inv. - IEC Norm. inv. - Operation curve
ANSI Very inv. selection for IDMT
ANSI Norm. inv. operation
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.040 s Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves, in sec
kIN 0.00 - 2.00 0.01 1.00 - IDMT time mult for
non-dir res over
current protection
OpUN> Off - Off - Operation of non-
On directional residual
overvoltage
protection
UN> 1.00 - 200.00 0.01 20.00 %UB Set level for non-
directional residual
over voltage, in %Ub
tUNNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Time delay for non-
directional residual
over voltage, in sec
INRel> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 1.00 %IB Residual release
current for all
directional modes, in
%Ib
UNRel> 0.01 - 200.00 0.01 3.00 %UB Residual release
voltage for all
direction modes, in
%Ub

Table 156: Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
RotResU 0 deg - 180 deg - Setting for rotating
180 deg polarizing quantity if
necessary

302 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Table 157: Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.040 s Time delay used for
reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Setting P for customer
programmable curve
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Setting A for customer
programmable curve
tBCrv 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Setting B for customer
programmable curve
tCCrv 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Setting C for
customer
programmable curve
ResetTypeCrv Immediate - IEC Reset - Reset mode when
IEC Reset current drops off.
ANSI reset
tPRCrv 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Setting PR for
customer
programmable curve
tTRCrv 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Setting TR for
customer
programmable curve
tCRCrv 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Setting CR for
customer
programmable curve

6.5.6 Technical data

Table 158: Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)
Function Range or value
Operate level for 3I0 cosj (0.25-200.00)% of lbase
directional residual overcurrent
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA
(10-50) mA
Operate level for 3I03U0 cosj (0.25-200.00)% of Sbase
directional residual power
At low setting:
(0.25-5.00)% of Sbase
Operate level for 3I0 and j (0.25-200.00)% of Ibase
residual overcurrent
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA
(10-50) mA
Operate level for non directional (1.00-400.00)% of Ibase
overcurrent
At low setting:
(10-50) mA
Table continued on next page
Accuracy
± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
± 1.0 mA
± 0.5 mA
± 1.0% of Sr at S £ Sr
± 1.0% of S at S > Sr
± 10% of set value
± 1.0% of Ir at £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
± 1.0 mA
± 0.5 mA
± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
± 1.0 mA

REL 670 Technical reference manual 303

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate level for non directional (1.00-200.00)% of Ubase ± 0.5% of Ur at U£Ur
residual overvoltage ± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Residual release current for all (0.25-200.00)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

directional modes ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA ± 1.0 mA
(10-50) mA ± 0.5 mA
Residual release voltage for all (0.01-200.00)% of Ubase ± 0.5% of Ur at U£Ur
directional modes ± 0.5% of U at > Ur

Reset ratio > 95% -

Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Inverse characteristics, see table 19 curve types See table 588 and table 589
588 and table 589
Relay characteristic angle RCA (-179 to 180) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Relay open angle ROA (0-90) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Operate time, non directional 60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
residual over current
Reset time, non directinal residual 60 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -
over current
Operate time, start function 150 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time, start function 50 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

6.6 Thermal overload protection, one time constant

(PTTR, 26)

Function block name: THLx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 49
IEC 61850 logical node name:
LPTTR

6.6.1 Introduction
The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits have
generated a need of a thermal overload function also for power lines.

A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload function can allow the protected circuit to operate
closer to the thermal limits.

304 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

The three phase current measuring function has an I2t characteristic with settable time
constant and a thermal memory.

An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line will be tripped.

6.6.2 Principle of operation

The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current
the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed
to the THL function.

From the largest of the three phase currents a final temperature is calculated according
to the expression:

2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷ × Tref
ç I ref
è ø (Equation 80)

where:
I is the largest phase current,
Iref is a given reference current and

Tref is steady state temperature corresponding to Iref

The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this

temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level a start output signal
START is activated.

The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-

è ø (Equation 81)

where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature,

Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,

Qfinal is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,

Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and

t is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 305

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by

adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The
ambient temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant
value.The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from
the function as a real figure.

When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output
signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level
TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.

There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current.
This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above
the operation temperature:

æQ - Qoperate ö
toperate = -t × ln ç final
ç Q final - Q n ÷÷
è ø (Equation 82)

The calculated time to trip can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a
real figure TTRIP.

After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection function, there can be a lockout
to reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated
when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting
ReclTemp.

The time to lockout release is calculated, i.e. a calculation of the cooling time to a set
value. The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.

æQ - Qlockout _ release ö
tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç final ÷÷
ç Q - Q
è final n ø (Equation 83)

Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature. The
calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the
function as a real figure.

In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines.
This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By
setting the parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current
on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option the input
ENMULT must be activated.

The function has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated “false” temperature level.

306 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Final Temp start signal

> TripTemp

actual temperature
Calculation
of actual
temperature

IL1, IL2, IL3 Calculation

of final
temperature

Actual Temp >

alarm signal
AlarmTemp

trip signal
Actual Temp
> TripTemp initiate lockout

Actual Temp Reset of lockout after trip

< Recl Temp

Calculation time to trip

of time to
trip

Calculation
of time to time to reset of lockout
reset of
lockout

en05000736.vsd

Figure 160: Functional overview of THL

REL 670 Technical reference manual 307

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

6.6.3 Function block

THL1-
LPTTR_26
I3P TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET

en04000396.vsd

Figure 161: THL function block

6.6.4 Input and output signals

Table 159: Input signals for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Block of trip
ENMULT Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines
AMBTEMP Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor
SENSFLT Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET Reset of internal thermal load counter

Table 160: Output signals for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
START Start Signal
ALARM Alarm signal
LOCKOUT Lockout signal

6.6.5 Setting parameters

308 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Table 161: Basic parameter group settings for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 0 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current in A
TRef 0 - 600 1 90 Deg End temperature rise
above ambient of the
line when loaded with
IRef
IRef 0 - 400 1 100 %IB The load current (in
%of IBase) leading to
TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 1 1 - Current multiplier
when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 0 - 1000 1 45 Min Time constant of the
line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 200 1 80 Deg Temperature level for
start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 600 1 90 Deg Temperature level for
trip
ReclTemp 0 - 600 1 75 Deg Temperature for reset
of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 0.01 0.1 s Operate pulse length.
Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - Off - External temperature
On sensor availiable
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 250 1 20 Deg Ambient temperature
used when AmbiSens
is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 600 1 50 Deg Temperature raise
above ambient
temperature at
startup

6.6.6 Technical data

Table 162: Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Reference current (0-400)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir

Start temperature reference (0-400)°C ± 1.0°C

Operate time: Ip = load current before overload IEC 60255-8, class 5 + 200 ms
occurs
æ I 2 - I p2 ö Time constant t = (0–1000)
t = t × ln ç 2 ÷ minutes
ç I - Ib 2 ÷
è ø

I = Imeasured

Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 309

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Alarm temperature (0-200)°C ± 2.0% of heat content trip
Trip temperature (0-400)°C ± 2.0% of heat content trip
Reset level temperature (0-400)°C ± 2.0% of heat content trip

6.7 Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Function block name: BFPx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 50BF
IEC 61850 logical node name:
CCRBRF 3I>BF

6.7.1 Introduction
The circuit breaker failure function ensures fast back-up tripping of surrounding
breakers. The breaker failure protection operation can be current based, contact based
or adaptive combination between these two principles.

A current check with extremely short reset time is used as a check criteria to achieve
a high security against unnecessary operation.

The breaker failure protection can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with
single phase tripping applications. For the three-phase version of the breaker failure
protection the current criteria can be set to operate only if two out of four e.g. two
phases or one phase plus the residual current starts. This gives a higher security to
the back-up trip command.

The function can be programmed to give a single- or three phase re-trip of the own
breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect
initiation due to mistakes during testing.

6.7.2 Principle of operation

The breaker failure protection function is initiated from protection trip command,
either from protection functions within the protection terminal or from external
protection devices.

The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective
start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to
open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. For
transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip function

310 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The re-
trip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the
re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the
operate current level.

The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. If this start signal
gets high at the same time as current is detected through the circuit breaker, the back-
up trip timer is started. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by
the function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adapted
algorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker
opening, i.e. fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection has
not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip
is initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activated
after an added settable time after the first back-up trip.

Further the following possibilities are available:

• The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up
trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-
up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed
breaker.
• In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of
4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high
residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or
residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
• The current detection for the residual current can be set different from the setting
of phase current detection.
• It is possible to have different re-trip time delays for single phase faults and for
multi-phase faults.
• The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this
option activated for small load currents only.
• It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the
circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 311

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Current
AND
BLOCK

Current & t1 tp
STIL1
Contact t TRRETL1
AND AND
START
OR
STL1
OR

TRRET
OR
AND AND
CBCLDL1
Contact

L2 L3

en05000832.vsd

Figure 162: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip function

312 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Figure 163: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function

Internal logical signals STIL1, STIL2, STIL3 have logical value 1 when current in
respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter IP>.

Internal logical signal STN has logical value 1 when neutral current has magnitude
larger than setting parameter IN>.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 313

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

More than 1 current high t2MPh

AND t
1 of 3
tp
TRBU
OR

t2
1 of 4 t
OR
t3 tp
t TRBU2

2 of 3
AND

CBALARM
CBFLT CBALARM
t

en06000223.vsd

Figure 164: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function

6.7.3 Function block

BFP1-
CCRBRF_50BF
I3P TRBU
BLOCK TRBU2
START TRRET
STL1 TRRETL1
STL2 TRRETL2
STL3 TRRETL3
CBCLDL1 CBALARM
CBCLDL2
CBCLDL3
CBFLT

en06000188.vsd

Figure 165: BFP function block

6.7.4 Input and output signals

Table 163: Input signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current connection
BLOCK Block of function
START Three phase start of breaker failure protection function
STL1 Start signal of phase L1
Table continued on next page

314 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Signal Description
STL2 Start signal of phase L2
STL3 Start signal of phase L3
CBCLDL1 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBCLDL2 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2
CBCLDL3 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3
CBFLT CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantanously.

Table 164: Output signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block
Signal Description
TRBU Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1
TRRETL2 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L2
TRRETL3 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L3
CBALARM Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

6.7.5 Setting parameters

Table 165: Basic parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
FunctionMode Current - Current - Detection principle for
Contact back-up trip
Current&Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - 1 out of 3 - Back-up trip mode
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - Retrip Off - Operation mode of re-
CB Pos Check trip logic
No CBPos Check
IP> 5 - 200 1 10 %IB Operate phase
current level in % of
IBase
IN> 2 - 200 1 10 %IB Operate residual
current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of re-trip
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 315

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

t2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Time delay of back-up
trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Time delay of back-up
trip at multi-phase
start
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Trip pulse duration

Table 166: Advanced parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
I>BlkCont 5 - 200 1 20 %IB Current for blocking of
CB contact operation
in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.030 s Additional time delay
to t2 for a second
back-up trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Time delay for CB
faulty signal

6.7.6 Technical data

Table 167: Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate phase current (5-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Operate residual current (2-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Phase current level for blocking of (5-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
contact function ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -
Reset time for current detection 15 ms maximum -

6.8 Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)

316 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Function block name: STB-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 50STB
IEC 61850 logical node name:
STBPTOC 3I>STUB

6.8.1 Introduction
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector
is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be
outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will thus not
be able to operate and must be blocked.

The stub protection covers the zone between the current transformers and the open
disconnector. The three phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a
NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.

6.8.2 Principle of operation

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS
value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the STB
function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current
value of the function I>. If a phase current is larger than the set operation current the
signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, in combination
with the release signal from line disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer
of this function. The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input. If
the fault current remains during the set timer delayt the function gives a trip signal.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 317

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

BLOCK

TRIP
STIL1 AND

STIL2 OR

STIL3

RELEASE

en05000731.vsd

Figure 166: Simplified logic diagram for the stub protection

6.8.3 Function block

STB1-
STBPTOC_50STB
I3P TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR
RELEASE

en05000678.vsd

Figure 167: STB function block

6.8.4 Input and output signals

Table 168: Input signals for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Block of trip
RELEASE Release of stub protection

Table 169: Output signals for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
START General start

318 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

6.8.5 Setting parameters

Table 170: Basic parameter group settings for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
ReleaseMode Release - Release - Release of stub
Continuous protection
I> 1 - 2500 1 200 %IB Operate current level
in % of IBase

Table 171: Advanced parameter group settings for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
t 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay

6.8.6 Technical data

Table 172: Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Definite time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Operate time, start function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time, start function 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

6.9 Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Function block name: PDx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 50PD
IEC 61850 logical node name:
CCRPLD PD

REL 670 Technical reference manual 319

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

6.9.1 Introduction
Single pole operated circuit breakers can due to electrical or mechanical failures end
up with the different poles in different positions (close-open). This can cause negative
and zero sequence currents which gives thermal stress on rotating machines and can
cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current functions.

Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct the positions. If the situation
consists the remote end can be intertripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.

The pole discordance function operates based on information from auxiliary contacts
of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from unsymmetrical
phase current when required.

6.9.2 Principle of operation

The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated. This is shown
in figure 168

C.B.

poleDiscordance Signal from C.B.

en05000287.vsd

Figure 168: Pole discordance external detection logic

This single binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance
of this signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set delay.

There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase
contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED. This is shown in
figure 169

320 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

C.B.

poleOneClosed from C.B.

poleTwoClosed from C.B.

poleThreeClosed from C.B.

+
poleOneOpened from C.B.

poleTwoOpened from C.B.

poleThreeOpened from C.B.

en05000288.vsd

Figure 169: Pole discordance signals for internal logic

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set
delay.

Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current

measurement. The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each
phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current
values are fed to the PD (RPLD) function. The difference between the smallest and
the largest phase current is derived. If this difference is larger than a set ratio the trip
timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. The current based
pole discordance function can be set to be active either continuously or only directly
in connection to breaker open or close command.

The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with
a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.

The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based pole discordance
function is shown in figure 170.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 321

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR

PolPosAuxCont

AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
Discordance
POLE2CL
detection
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL t 150 ms
t TRIP
AND
OR

PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND

CLOSECMD t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD

AND

Unsymmetry current
detection

en05000747.vsd

Figure 170: Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function - contact and
current based

The pole discordance function is blocked if:

• The terminal is in TEST mode (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has
been blocked from the HMI (BlockPD=Yes)
• The input signal BLOCK is high
• The input signal BLKDBYAR is high

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance
function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs.

The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase
autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal AR01-1PT1
if the autoreclosing function is integrated in the terminal; if the autoreclosing function
is an external device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input of the
terminal and this binary input is connected to a signalization “1phase autoreclosing
in progress” from the external autoreclosing device.

If the pole discordance function is enabled, then two different criteria will generate
a trip signal TRIP:

322 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

• Pole discordance signalling from the circuit breaker.

• Unsymmetrical current detection.

6.9.2.1 Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close (pole
discordance status), then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact
for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase
connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval t (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse
command TRIP is generated by the pole discordance function.

6.9.2.2 Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current detection is based on checking that:

• any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the
remaining two phases
• the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevelof the rated current

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal
signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time
delay t (0-60 s) if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has
received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms
limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions.

The pole discordance function is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can
be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field
(i.e. from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software
connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (i.e. close command from a
control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

REL 670 Technical reference manual 323

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

6.9.3 Function block

PD01-
CCRPLD_52PD
I3P TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL

en06000275.vsd

Figure 171: PD function block

6.9.4 Input and output signals

Table 173: Input signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKDBYAR Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing cycle
CLOSECMD Close order to CB
OPENCMD Open order to CB
EXTPDIND Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN Pole one opened indication from CB
POLE1CL Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL Pole three closed indication from CB

Table 174: Output signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip signal to CB
START Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

6.9.5 Setting parameters

324 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Table 175: Basic parameter group settings for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 - Base current
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.300 s Time delay between
trip condition and trip
signal
ContSel Off - Off - Contact function
PD signal from CB selection
Pole pos aux cont.
CurrSel Off - Off - Current function
CB oper monitor selection
Continuous
monitor
CurrUnsymLevel 0 - 100 1 80 % Unsym magn of
lowest phase current
compared to the
highest.
CurrRelLevel 0 - 100 1 10 %IB Current magnitude for
release of the function
in % of IBase

6.9.6 Technical data

Table 176: Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (0–100)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir

Time delay (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

6.10 Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Function block name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 32
IEC 61850 logical node name: P><

6.10.1 Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as
a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 325

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate
as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration
is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect
it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect
the generator itself.

Figure 172 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with
overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide
better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately
after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if
the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the
overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher
than 1% depending on the type of turbine.

Underpower Relay Overpower Relay

Q Q
Operate Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

en06000315.vsd

Figure 172: Protection with underpower relay and overpower relay

6.10.2 Principle of operation

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 173. The function has two stages with individual settings.

326 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) < t Trip1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
Start1

S(angle) < t Trip2

Power2
Start2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

en06000438.vsd

Figure 173: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 177.

Table 177: Complex power calculation

Set value: measureMode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*

Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*

PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq *

L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )

L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )

L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )

L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*

Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 327

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Set value: measureMode Formula used for complex power calculation

L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*

L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*

NegSeq
S = 3 × U NegSeq × I NegSeq *

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90° the reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component
is smaller than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2)
signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of the two
stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages
also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)).
For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally
down to 0.02 pu of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to
a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 *
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant
that the timer of the stage will reset.

6.10.2.1 Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

328 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
(Equation 95)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When
k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.14.

6.10.2.2 Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation
at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and
above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 174.

Amplitude
% of Ir compensation

-10
IAmpComp5 Measured
IAmpComp30 current

IAmpComp100
5 30 100 % of Ir
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant

Degrees Angle
compensation

-10
IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of Ir

-10

en05000652.vsd

Figure 174: Calibration curves

REL 670 Technical reference manual 329

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance
report. The active power is provided as a MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as a Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base
power: QPERCENT.

6.10.3 Function block

GUP1-
GUPPDUP_37
I3P TRIP
U3P TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

en07000027.vsd

Figure 175: GUP function block

6.10.4 Input and output signals

Table 178: Input signals for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current group connection
U3P Voltage group connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLOCK1 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 Block of stage 2

Table 179: Output signals for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Common trip signal
TRIP1 Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 Trip of stage 2
START Common start
START1 Start of stage 1
START2 Start of stage 2
P Active Power in MW
Table continued on next page

330 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Signal Description
PPERCENT Active power in % of SBASE
Q Reactive power in Mvar
QPERCENT Reactive power in % of SBASE

6.10.5 Setting parameters

Table 180: Basic general settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Current-Reference
(primary current A)
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Voltage-Reference
(primary voltage kV)
Mode L1, L2, L3 - Pos Seq - Selection of
Arone measured current and
Pos Seq voltage
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

Table 181: Basic parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - UnderPower - Operation mode 1
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 0.1 1.0 %SB Power setting for
stage 1 in % of Sbase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Angle for stage 1
TripDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 1.000 s Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 0.060 s Drop delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - UnderPower - Operation mode 2
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 0.1 1.0 %SB Power setting for
stage 2 in % of Sbase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Angle for stage 2
TripDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 1.000 s Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 0.060 s Drop delay for stage 2

REL 670 Technical reference manual 331

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Table 182: Advanced parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
k 0.00 - 0.99 0.01 0.00 - Low pass filter
coefficient for power
measurement, P and
Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 pu Absolute hysteresis of
stage 1
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 pu Absolute hysteresis of
stage 2
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 100% of Ir

6.10.6 Technical data

Table 183: Directional underpower protection (PDUP)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of Sbase ± 1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
± 1.0% of S at S > Sr
At low setting:
(0.5-2.0)% of Sbase < ±50% of set value
(2.0-10)% of Sbase < ± 20% of set value

Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees 2 degrees

Timers (0.00-6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

332 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

6.11 Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Function block name: GOPx IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 32
IEC 61850 logical node name: P><
GOPPDOP

6.11.1 Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as
a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate
as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration
is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect
it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect
the generator itself.

Figure 176 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with
overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide
better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately
after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if
the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the
overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher
than 1%.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 333

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Underpower Relay Overpower Relay

Q Q
Operate Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

en06000315.vsd

Figure 176: Reverse power protection with underpower relay and overpower
relay

6.11.2 Principle of operation

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 177. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) > t Trip1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
Start1

S(angle) > t Trip2

Power2
Start2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

en06000567.vsd

Figure 177: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 184.

334 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Table 184: Complex power calculation

Set value: measureMode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*

Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*

PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq *

L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )

L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )

L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )

L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*

L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*

L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90° the reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component
is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2)
signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of the two
stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages
also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) – drop-power1(2)). For
generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to
0.02 pu of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller
value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) – Hysteresis1(2)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 335

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 *
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant
that the timer of the stage will reset.

6.11.2.1 Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
(Equation 105)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When
k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.14.

6.11.2.2 Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation
at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and
above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 178.

336 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Amplitude
% of Ir compensation

-10
IAmpComp5 Measured
IAmpComp30 current

IAmpComp100
5 30 100 % of Ir
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant

Degrees Angle
compensation

-10
IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of Ir

-10

en05000652.vsd

Figure 178: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance
report. The active power is provided as a MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as a Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base
power: QPERCENT.

6.11.3 Function block

GOP1-
GOPPDOP_32
I3P TRIP
U3P TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

en07000028.vsd

Figure 179: GOP function block

REL 670 Technical reference manual 337

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

6.11.4 Input and output signals

Table 185: Input signals for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current group connection
U3P Voltage group connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLOCK1 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 Block of stage 2

Table 186: Output signals for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Common trip signal
TRIP1 Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 Trip of stage 2
START Common start
START1 Start of stage 1
START2 Start of stage 2
P Active Power in MW
PPERCENT Active power in % of SBASE
Q Reactive power in Mvar
QPERCENT Reactive power in % of SBASE

6.11.5 Setting parameters

Table 187: Basic general settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Current-Reference
(primary current A)
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Voltage-Reference
(primary voltage kV)
Mode L1, L2, L3 - Pos Seq - Selection of
Arone measured current and
Pos Seq voltage
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

338 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Table 188: Basic parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - OverPower - Operation mode 1
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 0.1 120.0 %SB Power setting for
stage 1 in % of Sbase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Angle for stage 1
TripDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 1.000 s Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 0.060 s Drop delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - OverPower - Operation mode 2
OverPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 0.1 120.0 %SB Power setting for
stage 2 in % of Sbase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Angle for stage 2
TripDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 1.000 s Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 0.060 s Drop delay for stage 2

Table 189: Advanced parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
k 0.00 - 0.99 0.01 0.00 - Low pass filter
coefficient for power
measurement, P and
Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 pu Absolute hysteresis of
stage 1 in % of Sbase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 pu Absolute hysteresis of
stage 2 in % of Sbase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 339

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 100% of Ir

6.11.6 Technical data

Table 190: Directional overpower protection (PDOP)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of Sbase ± 1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
± 1.0% of S at S > Sr
At low setting:
(0.5-2.0)% of Sbase < ± 50% of set value
(2.0-10)% of Sbase < ± 20% of set value

Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees 2 degrees

Timers (0.00-6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

6.12 Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)

Function block name: BRC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 46
IEC 61850 logical node name:
BRCPTOC

6.12.1 Introduction
Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition. The
broken conductor monitoring function (BRC), consisting of continuous current
unsymmetry check on the line where the terminal is connected will give alarm or trip
at detecting broken conductors.

6.12.2 Principle of operation

The BRCPTOC function detects a broken conductor condition by detecting the
unsymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring elements
continuously measure the three-phase currents.

The current unsymmetry signal output START is set on if :

340 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

• The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the
phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the highest
phase current
• The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.

• The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>

The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines.
If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line the parallel line will experience an
increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first two conditions
being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set
time tOper the TRIP output is activated.

The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 180

The function is disabled (blocked) if:

• The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the HMI test
menu (BlockBRC=Yes).
• The input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions.

The output trip signal TRIP is a three phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to
the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 341

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 6
Current protection

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockBRC = Yes
BRC--START

Function Enable
BRC--BLOCK >1
t
BRC--TRIP
& t
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
STI

IL1<50%IP>

IL2<50%IP> ³1

IL3<50%IP>

en07000122.vsd

Figure 180: Simplified logic diagram for broken conductor check function.

6.12.3 Function block

BRC1-
BRCPTOC_46
I3P TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

en07000034.vsd

Figure 181: BRC function block

6.12.4 Input and output signals

Table 191: Input signals for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Blocks the operate output

342 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 6
Current protection

Table 192: Output signals for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Operate signal of the protection logic
START Start signal of the protection logic

6.12.5 Setting parameters

Table 193: Basic parameter group settings for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 0 - 99999 1 3000 A IBase
Iub> 50 - 90 1 50 %IM Unbalance current
operation value in
percent of max
current
IP> 5 - 100 1 20 %IB Minimum phase
current for operation
of Iub> in % of Ibase
tOper 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Operate time delay

Table 194: Advanced parameter group settings for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tReset 0.010 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Time delay in reset

6.12.6 Technical data

Table 195: Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum phase current for (5–100)% of Ibase ± 0.1% of Ir
operation
Unbalance current operation (0–100)% of maximum current ± 0.1% of Ir

Timers (0.00-6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

REL 670 Technical reference manual 343

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
344
 Section 7
Voltage protection

Section 7 Voltage protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes voltage related protection functions. The way the functions
work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical
data are included for each function.

7.1 Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Function block name: TUVx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 27
IEC 61850 logical node name:
UV2PTUV 3U<

7.1.1 Introduction
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
The function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at
power outages or as long-time delayed back-up to primary protection.

The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

7.1.2 Principle of operation

The two-step undervoltage protection function (TUV) is used to detect low power
system voltage. The function has two voltage measuring steps with separate time
delays. If one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a
corresponding start signal is issued. TUV can be set to start/trip based on "one out of
three", "two out of three", or "three out of three" of the measured voltages, being
below the set point. If the voltage remains below the set value for a time period
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To
avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment,
a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower
than the set blocking level the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either
definite time delay or inverse time delay.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 345

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

The undervoltage protection function can be set to measure phase to earth

fundamental value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to earth RMS value or
phase to phase RMS value. The choise of the measuring is done by the parameter
ConnType in PST or LHMI under Generall Settings/Voltage protection. The voltage
related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set i kV phase-phase
voltage This means operation for phase to earth voltage under:

U < (%) × UBase( kV )

3 (Equation 106)

and operation for phase to phase voltage under:

U < (%) × UBase(kV)

(Equation 107)

7.1.2.1 Measurement principle

All the three phase to earth voltages are measured continuously, and compared with
the set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the
requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out
of 3" phases have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding start signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.1.2.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available; inverse
curve A, inverse curve B, and a programmable inverse curve.

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
æ U < -U ö
ç ÷
è U< ø (Equation 108)

The type B curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
æ U < -U ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U< ø (Equation 109)

The programmable curve can be created as:

346 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

é ù
ê ú
ê k×A ú+D
t=
êæ U < -U ö ú
p

êç B × -C÷ ú
ëè U< ø û (Equation 110)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0 –
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 – CrvSatn/100). If the programmable
curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100 (Equation 111)

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details
of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse
time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time
(tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the
inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it should be noted that after
leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not
sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the
undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the
voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset
the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during
the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See
figure 182 and figure 183.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 347

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

tReset
tReset 1
Voltage 1 Measured
START Voltage
Hysteresis
TRIP

U1<

Time

START t1

TRIP

Time
Integrator Froozen Timer

t1

Time
Instantaneous
Linear Decrease
Reset en05000010.vsd

Figure 182: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

348 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

tReset1
Voltage
tReset1
START
START
Hysteresis Measured Voltage
TRIP

U1<

Time

START t1

TRIP

Time Integrator
Froozen Timer

t1

Time
Instantaneous
Linear Decrease
Reset en05000011.vsd

Figure 183: Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

7.1.2.3 Blocking

The undervoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals
or by parameter settings, where:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 349

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the
trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the start outputs of step 1, are blocked. The
characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking
can also be set to "off" resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings
and functionality are valid also for step 2.

In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get
very low. The event will start both the under voltage function and the blocking
function, as seen in figure 184. The delay of the blocking function must be set less
than the time delay of under voltage function.

U Disconnection

Normal voltage

U1<

U2<

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2

Time

Block step 1

Block step 2
en05000466.vsd

Figure 184: Blocking function.

350 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

7.1.2.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral

voltages or the three phase to phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or RMS filters
based on one fundamental cycle filter the input voltage signals. The voltages are
individually compared to the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse
time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3",
"2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to fulfill the start condition. The design of the
TimeUnderVoltage function is schematically described in figure 185.

UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 < U1< Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
UL2 < U1< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 ST1L3
Phase 3 Start
UL3 Comparator 3 out of 3
&
UL3 < U1< Trip ST1
OR
Output
START Logic TR1L1

Step 1
Time integrator TR1L2
MinVoltSelect t1 TRIP
or tReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3

TR1
OR

Comparator ST2L1
UL1 < U2< Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 < U2< 1 out of 3
2 outof 3 ST2L3
Phase 3 Start
Comparator 3 out of 3
&
UL3 < U2< Trip ST2
Output OR

START Logic TR2L1

Step 2
Time integrator TR2L2
MinVoltSelect t2 TRIP
or tReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3

TR2
OR

OR START

TRIP
OR

en05000012.vsd

Figure 185: Schematic design of the TUV function

REL 670 Technical reference manual 351

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

7.1.3 Function block

TUV1-
UV2PTUV_27
U3P TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3

en06000276.vsd

Figure 186: TUV function block

7.1.4 Input and output signals

Table 196: Input signals for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Three phase voltages
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR1 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 Block of step 2

Table 197: Output signals for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
TR1 Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START General start signal
Table continued on next page

352 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

Signal Description
ST1 Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 Start signal from step2 phase L3

7.1.5 Setting parameters

Table 198: Basic general settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ConnType PhN DFT - PhN DFT - Group selector for
PhPh RMS connection type
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT

Table 199: Basic parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
OperationStep1 Off - On - Enable execution of
On step 1
Characterist1 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B step 1
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - 1 out of 3 - Number of phases
2 out of 3 required for op (1 of 3,
3 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from
step 1
U1< 1 - 100 1 70 %UB Voltage setting/start
val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 5.00 s Definitive time delay
of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
k1 0.05 0.01 0.05 - 1.10 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 1
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 353

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

IntBlkSel1 Off - Off - Internal (low level)
Block of trip blocking mode, step 1
Block all
IntBlkStVal1 1 - 100 1 20 %UB Voltage setting for
internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of internal
(low level) blocking for
step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.5 %UB Absolute hysteresis in
% of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - On - Enable execution of
On step 2
Characterist2 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B step 2
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - 1 out of 3 - Number of phases
2 out of 3 required for op (1 of 3,
3 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from
step 2
U2< 1 - 100 1 50 %UB Voltage setting/start
val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Definitive time delay
of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 2
k2 0.05 0.01 0.05 - 1.10 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 2
IntBlkSel2 Off - Off - Internal (low level)
Block of trip blocking mode, step 2
Block all
IntBlkStVal2 1 - 100 1 20 %UB Voltage setting for
internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 2
tBlkUV2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of internal
(low level) blocking for
step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.5 %UB Absolute hysteresis in
% of UBase, step 2

354 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

Table 200: Advanced parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for step 1
Linearly
decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in IDMT
reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 1.000 0.001 0.005 - 200.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
BCrv1 1.00 0.01 0.50 - 100.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 0.1 0.0 - 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 0.001 0.000 - 60.000 - Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
PCrv1 1.000 0.001 0.000 - 3.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 1 0 % Tuning param for
prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for step 2
Linearly
decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in IDMT
reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 1.000 0.001 0.005 - 200.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
BCrv2 1.00 0.01 0.50 - 100.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 0.1 0.0 - 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 355

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

DCrv2 0.000 0.001 0.000 - 60.000 - Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
PCrv2 1.000 0.001 0.000 - 3.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 1 0 % Tuning param for
prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

7.1.6 Technical data

Table 201: Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low and high (1–100)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
step
Absolute hysteresis (0–100)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur

Internal blocking level, low and (1–100)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur

high step
Inverse time characteristics for - See table 590
low and high step, see table 590
Definite time delays (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±10 ms
Minimum operate time, inverse (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
characteristics
Operate time, start function 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset -

Reset time, start function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.2 Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Function block name: TOVx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 59
IEC 61850 logical node name:
OV2PTOV 3U>

356 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

7.2.1 Introduction
Overvoltages will occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines.

The function can be used as open line end detector, normally then combined with
directional reactive over-power function or as system voltage supervision, normally
then giving alarm only or switching in reactors or switch out capacitor banks to control
the voltage.

The function has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.

The overvoltage function has an extremely high reset ratio to allow setting close to
system service voltage.

7.2.2 Principle of operation

The two-step overvoltage protection function (TOV) is used to detect high power
system voltage. The function has two steps with separate time delays. If one, two or
three phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding start signal is
issued. TOV can be set to start/trip based on "one out of three", "two out of three",
or "three out of three" of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the
voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen
time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is
individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse
time delay.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in
kV, phase-phase.

The overvoltage protection function can be set to measure phase to earth fundamental
value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to earth RMS value or phase to phase
RMS value. The choise of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType in PST or
LHMI under Generall Settings/Voltage protection. The setting of the analog inputs
are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage.
The function will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set
base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase to earth voltage over:

U > (%) × UBase( kV )

3 (Equation 112)

and operation for phase for phase voltage over:

U > (%) × UBase(kV)

Vpickup > (%) × VBase(kV)
(Equation 113)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 357

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

7.2.2.1 Measurement principle

All the three phase voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set
values, U1> and U2>. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the
requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out
of 3" phases have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding start signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.2.2.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse
curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve.

The type A curve is described as:

TD
t=
æ V - Vpickup ö
ç ÷
è Vpickup ø (Equation 114)

The type B curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 2.0
æ U -U > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è U> ø (Equation 115)

The type C curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 3.0
æ U -U > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è U> ø
TD × 480
t= 3.0
æ V - Vpickup ö
ç 32 × Vpickup - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è ø (Equation 116)

The programmable curve can be created as:

k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -U > ö
çB× -C÷
è U> ø (Equation 117)

358 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0 –
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 – CrvSatn/100). If the programmable
curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100 (Equation 118)

The highest phase (or phase to phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time
delay integration, see figure 187. The details of the different inverse time
characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics"

Voltage
IDMT Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

Time

en05000016.vsd

Figure 187: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time
mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time
(tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse
time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has
elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return
back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable (HystAbs2)
to allow an high and accurate reset of the function. It is also remarkable that for the
overvoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the

REL 670 Technical reference manual 359

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset
the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during
the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time..

7.2.2.3 Blocking

The overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals
where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

7.2.2.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth

voltages or the three phase to phasel voltages. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input
voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and
the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special
logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to
fulfill the start condition. The design of the TimeOverVoltage function is
schematically described in figure 188.

360 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 > U1> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
UL2 > U1> 1 out of 3
2 outof 3 ST1L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start
UL3 Comparator &
UL3 > U1> Trip ST1
OR
Output
START Logic TR1L1
Step 1
Time integrator TR1L2
MaxVoltSelect t1 TRIP
or tReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3

OR TR1

Comparator ST2L1
UL1 > U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 > U2> 1 out of 3
2 outof 3 ST2L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start
Comparator &
UL3 > U2> Trip ST2
OR
Output
START Logic TR2L1
Step 2
Time integrator TR2L2
MaxVoltSelect t2 TRIP
or tReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3

TR2
OR

START
OR

TRIP
OR

en05000013.vsd

Figure 188: Schematic design of the TimeOverVoltage function

REL 670 Technical reference manual 361

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

7.2.3 Function block

TOV1-
OV2PTOV_59
U3P TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3

en06000277.vsd

Figure 189: TOV function block

7.2.4 Input and output signals

Table 202: Input signals for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Group signal for three phase voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR1 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 Block of step 2

Table 203: Output signals for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
TR1 Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START General start signal
Table continued on next page

362 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

Signal Description
ST1 Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 Start signal from step2 phase L3

7.2.5 Setting parameters

Table 204: Basic general settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ConnType PhG - PhG - TBD
PhPh
PhG RMS
PhPh RMS

Table 205: Basic parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
OperationStep1 Off - On - Enable execution of
On step 1
Characterist1 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B step 1
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - 1 out of 3 - Number of phases
2 out of 3 required for op (1 of 3,
3 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from
step 1
U1> 1 - 200 1 120 %UB Voltage setting/start
val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 5.00 s Definitive time delay
of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 1
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 363

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

HystAbs1 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.5 %UB Absolute hysteresis in
% of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - On - Enable execution of
On step 2
Characterist2 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B step 2
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - 1 out of 3 - Number of phases
2 out of 3 required for op (1 of 3,
3 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from
step 2
U2> 1 - 200 1 150 %UB Voltage setting/start
val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Definitive time delay
of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.5 %UB Absolute hysteresis in
% of UBase, step 2

Table 206: Advanced parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for step 1
Linearly
decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in IDMT
reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 0.01 1.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 0.1 0.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
Table continued on next page

364 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 - Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 1 0 % Tuning param for
prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for step 2
Linearly
decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in IDMT
reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 0.01 1.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 0.1 0.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 - Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 1 0 % Tuning param for
prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

7.2.6 Technical data

REL 670 Technical reference manual 365

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

Table 207: Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low and high (1-200)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur
step ± 1.0% of U at U > Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0–100)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur

± 1.0% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time characteristics for - See table 591

low and high step, see table 591
Definite time delays (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Minimum operate time, Inverse (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
characteristics
Operate time, start function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Reset time, start function 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection

(PTOV, 59N)

Function block name: TRVx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 59N
IEC 61850 logical node name: 3U0
ROV2PTOV

7.3.1 Introduction
Residual voltages will occur in the power system during earth faults.

The function can be configured to calculate the residual voltage from the three phase
voltage input transformers or from a single phase voltage input transformer fed from
an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer.

The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delayed.

7.3.2 Principle of operation

The two-step residual overvoltage protection function (TRV) is used to detect high
single-phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual
voltage can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power
transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings
are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three phase

366 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

voltages and internally in the protection terminal calculate the corresponding residual
voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to the TRV function block. The
function has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage
remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay,
the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually
chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in
kV, phase-phase.

7.3.2.1 Measurement principle

The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> and U2>.

To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.3.2.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse
curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve.

The type A curve is described as:

TD
t=
æ V - Vpickup ö
ç ÷
è Vpickup ø (Equation 119)

The type B curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 2.0
æ U -U > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è U> ø (Equation 120)

The type C curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 3.0
æ U -U > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è U> ø (Equation 121)

The programmable curve can be created as:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 367

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -U > ö
çB× -C÷
è U> ø
TD × A
t= P
+D
æ V - Vpickup ö
çB× -C÷
è Vpickup ø (Equation 122)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U> *(1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U> *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable
curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100 (Equation 123)

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in chapter "Inverse
characteristics".

Trip signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured
voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined
reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the
inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time
has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return
back to the hysteresis area. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the
IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during
the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer
is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 190 and figure 191.

368 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

tReset
1
tReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP

U1>

Hysteresis
Measured
Voltage

Time

START t1

TRIP

Time
Integrator Linear Decrease
Froozen Timer
t1

Instantaneous Time
Reset en05000019.vsd

Figure 190: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

REL 670 Technical reference manual 369

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

tReset1
Voltage tReset1
START TRIP
START
Hysteresis

U1>

Measured Voltage

Time

START t1

TRIP

Time Integrator
Froozen Timer

t1

Time
Instantaneous
Linear Decrease en05000020.vsd
Reset

Figure 191: Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

7.3.2.3 Blocking

The residual overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input
signals where:

370 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all startrip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip inputs related to step 2

7.3.2.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage.

Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is
compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. The design of the TRV function is schematically described in
figure 192.

UN Comparator Phase 1 ST1

UN > U1>
TR1
START Start
&
Trip
Time integrator Output
t1 Logic
TRIP
tReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 Step 1

ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2

Start
START &
Trip START
Output OR
Time integrator
Logic
t2 TRIP
tReset2
Step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRIP
OR

en05000748.vsd

Figure 192: Schematic design of the TRV function

REL 670 Technical reference manual 371

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

7.3.3 Function block

TRV1-
ROV2PTOV_59N
U3P TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR2
BLKST1 START
BLKTR2 ST1
BLKST2 ST2

en06000278.vsd

Figure 193: TRV function block

7.3.4 Input and output signals

Table 208: Input signals for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Three phase voltages
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR1 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 Block of step 2

Table 209: Output signals for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
TR1 Common trip signal from step1
TR2 Common trip signal from step2
START General start signal
ST1 Common start signal from step1
ST2 Common start signal from step2

7.3.5 Setting parameters

372 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

Table 210: Basic parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
OperationStep1 Off - On - Enable execution of
On step 1
Characterist1 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B step 1
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U1> 1 - 200 1 30 %UB Voltage setting/start
val (DT & IDMT), step
1 in % of UBase
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 5.00 s Definitive time delay
of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.5 %UB Absolute hysteresis in
% of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - On - Enable execution of
On step 2
Characterist2 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B step 2
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U2> 1 - 100 1 45 %UB Voltage setting/start
val (DT & IDMT), step
2 in % of UBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Definitive time delay
of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.5 %UB Absolute hysteresis in
% of UBase, step 2

REL 670 Technical reference manual 373

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

Table 211: Advanced parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for step 1
Linearly
decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in IDMT
reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 0.01 1.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 0.1 0.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 - Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 1 0 % Tuning param for
prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in DT
reset (s), step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for step 2
Linearly
decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in IDMT
reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 0.01 1.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 0.1 0.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
Table continued on next page

374 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 - Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 1 0 % Tuning param for
prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

7.3.6 Technical data

Table 212: Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low and high (1-200)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur
step ± 1.0% of U at U > Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0–100)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur

± 1.0% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time characteristics for - See table 592

low and high step, see table 592
Definite time setting (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Operate time, start function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Reset time, start function 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.4 Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Function block name: OEXx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 24
IEC 61850 logical node name:
OEXPVPH U/f >

REL 670 Technical reference manual 375

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

7.4.1 Introduction
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a
magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated
components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy
currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent
parts in a relatively short time. Function has settable inverse operating curve and
independent alarm stage.

7.4.2 Principle of operation

The importance of overexcitation protection is growing as the power transformers as
well as other power system elements today operate most of the time near their
designated limits.

Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types.
This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the
improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if
emergency that includes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged
unless corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend
an overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.

Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with

below-normal frequency. Such condition may occur when a unit is on load, but are
more likely to arise when it is on open circuit, or at a loss of load occurrence.
Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to experience
overexcitation condition. It follows from the fundamental transformer equation, see
equation 124, that peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to induced voltage
E, and inversely proportional to frequency f, and turns n.

E = 4.44 × f × n × B max × A
(Equation 124)

The relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is therefore according to equation 125.

V E¤f
M = relative æè -------öø = ------------------------
Hz ( Ur ) ¤ ( fr )
(Equation 125)

Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If

the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9
Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core only but will extend into
other (non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to Eddy current
circulations. Overexcitation will result in:

• overheating of the non-laminated metal parts,

• a large increase in magnetizing currents,
• an increase in core and winding temperature,
• an increase in transformer vibration and noise.

376 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative Volts per

Hertz (V / Hz) ratio. The action of the protection is usually to initiate a reduction of
excitation and, if this should fail, or is not possible, to trip the transformer after a
delay which can be from seconds to minutes, typically 5 - 10 seconds.

Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected

generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected
to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine.
In such cases, the overexcitation protection may trip the field breaker during a start-
up of a machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal from the transformer
terminal. If this is not possible, the power transformer can be disconnected from the
source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal.

The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers shall be capable of operating
continuously at 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load,
the ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not
exceed 1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a
sustained basis, see equation 126.

---- £ 1.1 × Ur
E ------
f fr
(Equation 126)

or equivalently, with 1.1 · Ur = V/Hz> according to equation 127.

E V/Hz>
---- £ ---------------------
f fr (Equation 127)

where:
V/Hz> is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.

V/Hz> is an OEX setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 150%. If the user
does not know exactly what to set, then the standard IEC 60076 - 1, section 4.4, the
default value V/Hz> = 1.10 pu shall be used.

In OEX protection function the relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is expressed

according to equation 128.

V E¤f
M = relative æè -------öø = --------------
Hz Ur ¤ fr
(Equation 128)

It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for
any E and f, where the ratio E / f is equal to Ur / fr. A power transformer is not
overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M ≤ V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in %.
The relative overexcitation is thus defined as shown in equation 129.

overexcitation = M – V/Hz> (Equation 129)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 377

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in

general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no
load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer
the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage U which is
measured and fed to OEX, depending on the direction of the power flow through the
power transformer, the power transformer side where OEX is applied, and the power
transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important to specify on the OEX
function block in CAP 531 configuration tool worksheet on which side of the power
transformer OEX is placed

As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load,
0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer
core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated
frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided
between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 = Xleak2 = Xsc /
2 = 0.075 pu..

OEX calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage
reactance of the winding where OEX is connected) is known to the user. The
assumption taken for 2-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is
unfortunately most often not true. For a 2-winding power transformer the leakage
reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core
with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the
situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance,
then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to Xc/2. The
OEX protection will then take the given measured terminal voltage U, as the induced
voltage E.

It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such

as loss of load, etc. It will be observed that a high phase-to-earth voltage does not
mean overexcitation. For example, in an unearthed power system, a single-phase-to-
earth fault means high voltages of the “healthy” two phases to earth, but no
overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially
unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each
winding.

7.4.2.1 Measured voltage

If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where OEX protection is
applied, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure this voltage,
MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines the two currents that
must be used.This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.

It is extremely important that MeasuredU and MeasuredI is set to

same value!

If, for example, voltage Uab is fed to OEX, then currents Ia, and Ib must be applied,
etc. From these two input currents, current Iab = Ia - Ib is calculated internally by the

378 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

OEX protection algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher than 70% of
the rated value, otherwise the OEX protection algorithm is exited without calculating
the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation
V / Hz shows 0.000.

If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where OEX is connected,
then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage.
In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current are used
by OEX protection. A check is made within OEX protection if the positive sequence
voltage is higher than 70% rated phase-to-earth voltage; below this value, OEX is
exited immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and
the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000.

The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function is in
operation for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 and
60 Hz respectively.

• OEX protection function can be connected to any power transformer side,

independent from the power flow.
• The side with a possible On-Load-Tap-Changer (OLTC) must not be used.

7.4.2.2 Operate time of the overexcitation protection.

The operate time of the overexcitation protection is a function of the relative

overexcitation. Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose
between:

• the so called IEEE law, and

• a tailor-made law.

The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on
analysis of the various transformers’ overexcitation capability characteristics. They
can match well a transformer core capability.

The square law is according to equation 130.

0.18 × k 0.18 × k
t o p = --------------------------------------------- = ----------------------------------------
2 2
( M – V/Hz> ) overexcitation (Equation 130)

where:
M is excitation, mean value in the interval from t = 0 to t = top

V/Hz> is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and
k is time multiplier setting for inverse time functions, see figure 195.
Parameter k (“time multiplier setting”) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 379

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral

expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to
equation 131.

t op
2
ò ( M(t) – V/Hz> ) dt ³ 0.18 × k
0 (Equation 131)

A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (i.e. j = n) where it becomes
true that:

n
2
Dt × å ( M(j) – V/Hz> ) ³ 0.18 × k
j=k (Equation 132)

where:
Dt is the time interval between two successive executions of overexcitation function and
M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given
as Ur/fr.

As long as M > V/Hz> (i.e. overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be
larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be
tripped at j = n.

Inverse delays as per figure 195, can be modified (limited) by two special definite
delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 194.
delay in s

tMax

under - inverse delay law

excitation

overexcitation
tMin
0 Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz>

M=V/Hz> Mmax Excitation M

V/Hz> Emax E (only if f = fr = const)

99001067.vsd

Figure 194: Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by tMax, and tMin

A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low degrees
of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In case the
inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEX trips after tMaxt_MaxTripDelay seconds.

380 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high degrees
of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin, OEX function trips
after tMint_MinTripDelay seconds. Also, the inverse delay law is no more valid
beyond excitation Mmax. Beyond Mmax (beyond overexcitation Mmax - V/Hz>),
the delay will always be tMin, no matter what overexcitation.

Time (s) IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES

1000

100

k = 60

k = 20

k = 10
10 k=9
k=8
k=7
k=6
k=5
k=4
k=3

k=2

k=1
1
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40

OVEREXCITATION IN % (M-Emaxcont)*100)

en01000373.vsd

Figure 195: Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation.

The critical value of excitation Mmax is determined indirectly via OEX protection
function setting V/Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load-rated-frequency
voltage, where the inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If,
for example, V/Hz>> = 140 %, then Mmax is according to equation 133.

(V/Hz>>) ¤ f
Mmax = -------------------------
- = 1.40
Ur ¤ fr
(Equation 133)

The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this
case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into

REL 670 Technical reference manual 381

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5, and t6) as shown in
the figure 196. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.

delay in s

tMax

under- tMin
excitation Overexcitation M-Emaxcont
0 Mmax - Emaxcont Excitation M

Emaxcont Mmax
99001068.vsd

Figure 196: An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic

Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear
interpolation.

Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual
delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.

7.4.2.3 Cooling

The overexcitation protection OEX is basically a thermal protection; therefore a

cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied.
Parameter Tcool is an OEX setting, with a default time constant tCooling of 20
minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous normal
values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be reached
not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes. If an overexcitation condition
would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be otherwise.

7.4.2.4 OEX protection function measurands

A service value data item called Time to trip, and designated on the display by tTRIP
is available in seconds on the local HMI, or monitoring tool. This value is an
estimation of the remaining time to trip if the overexcitation remained on the level it
had when the estimation was done. This information can be useful with small or
moderate overexcitations. If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is
tMax, then the estimation of the remaining time to trip is done against tMax.

The displayed relative excitation M, designated on the display by V/Hz is calculated

from the expression:

V E¤f
M = relative æ -------ö = --------------
è Hzø Uf ¤ fr
(Equation 134)

382 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

If less than V / Hz = V/Hz> (in pu) is shown on the HMI display (or read via SM/
RET521), the power transformer is underexcited. If the value of V/Hz is shown which
is equal to V/Hz> (in pu), it means that the excitation is exactly equal to the power
transformer continuous capability. If a value higher than the value of V/Hz> is shown,
the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if V/Hz = 1.100 is
shown, while V/Hz> = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum
continuous excitation limit.

The third item of the OEX protection service report is the thermal status of the
protected power transformer iron core, designated on the display by ThermalStatus.
This gives the thermal status in % of the trip value which corresponds to 100%.
Thermal Status should reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds.
If the protected power transformer is then for some reason not switched off, the
ThermalStaus shall go over 100%.

If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or TMin,
then the Thermal Status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP
reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long
delay is limited by tMax, then the OEX TRIP output signal will be set to 1 before the
Thermal status reaches 100%.

7.4.2.5 Overexcitation alarm

A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. The voltages are
normally set 2% lower and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the
operator an early abnormal voltages warning.

OVEX: FS = 1 = 2*SI + SU

BLOCK
AlarmLevel
ALARM
SIDE t>tAlarm &
t

Prepool I tAlarm
M>V/Hz>
SI1 t>tMin TRIP
t &
V/Hz> tMin
SI2 Calculation
Ei k
of internal M= M
induced (Ei / f) M IEEE law
SU1 voltage Ei (Ur / fr)
Prepool O ³1
2 M t
Tailor-made law
M>V/Hz>> tMax
Xleak
ERROR
V/Hz>>

M = relative V/Hz as service value

en05000162.vsd

Figure 197: A logic diagram over Overexcitation protection function.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 383

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

7.4.2.6 Logic diagram

Figure 198: A simplified diagram of the OEX protection function

Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are
calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and
frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.

7.4.3 Function block

OEX1-
OEXPVPH_24
I3P TRIP
U3P START
BLOCK ALARM
RESET

en05000329.vs
d

Figure 199: OEX function block

7.4.4 Input and output signals

Table 213: Input signals for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current connection
U3P Voltage connection
BLOCK Block of function
RESET Reset operation

384 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

Table 214: Output signals for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip from overexcitation function
START Overexcitation above set operate level (instantaneous)
ALARM Overexcitation above set alarm level (delayed)

7.4.5 Setting parameters

Table 215: Basic general settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
MeasuredU PosSeq - L1L2 - Selection of
L1L2 measured voltage
L2L3
L3L1
MeasuredI L1L2 - L1L2 - Selection of
L2L3 measured current
L3L1
PosSeq

Table 216: Basic parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current (rated
phase current) in A
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage (main
voltage) in kV
V/Hz> 100.0 - 180.0 0.1 110.0 %UB/f Operate level of V/Hz
at no load and rated
freq in % of (Ubase/
frated)
V/Hz>> 100.0 - 200.0 0.1 140.0 %UB/f High level of V/Hz
above which tMin is
used, in % of (Ubase/
frated)
XLeak 0.000 - 200.000 0.001 0.000 ohm Winding leakage
reactance in primary
ohms
TrPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Length of the pulse for
trip signal (in sec)
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 7.000 s Minimum trip delay for
V/Hz inverse curve, in
sec
tMax 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 1800.00 s Maximum trip delay
for V/Hz inverse
curve, in sec
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 385

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tCooling 0.10 - 9000.00 0.01 1200.00 s Transformer
magnetic core cooling
time constant, in sec
CurveType IEEE - IEEE - Inverse time curve
Tailor made selection, IEEE/Tailor
made
kForIEEE 1 - 60 1 1 - Time multiplier for
IEEE inverse type
curve
AlarmLevel 50.0 - 120.0 0.1 100.0 % Alarm operate level
as % of operate level
tAlarm 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 5.00 s Alarm time delay, in
sec

Table 217: Advanced parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
t1Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 7200.00 s Time delay t1
(longest) for tailor
made curve, in sec
t2Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 3600.00 s Time delay t2 for tailor
made curve, in sec
t3Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 1800.00 s Time delay t3 for tailor
made curve, in sec
t4Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 900.00 s Time delay t4 for tailor
made curve, in sec
t5Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 450.00 s Time delay t5 for tailor
made curve, in sec
t6Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 225.00 s Time delay t6
(shortest) for tailor
made curve, in sec

7.4.6 Technical data

Table 218: Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start (100–180)% of (Ubase/frated) ± 1.0% of U

Operate value, alarm (50–120)% of start level ± 1.0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

± 1.0% of U at U > Ur

Operate value, high level (100–200)% of (Ubase/frated) ± 1.0% of U

Table continued on next page

386 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Curve type IEEE or customer defined Class 5 + 40 ms

(0.18 × k )
IEEE : t =
( M - 1) 2
where M = relative (V/Hz) = (E/f)/
(Ur/fr)
Minimum time delay for inverse (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
function
Maximum time delay for inverse (0.00–9000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
function
Alarm time delay (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

7.5 Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)

Function block name: VDC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 60
IEC 61850 logical node name:
VDCPTOV

7.5.1 Introduction
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from
two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one
trip step. It can be used to supervise the voltage from two fuse groups or two different
voltage transformers fuses as a fuse/MCB supervision function.

7.5.2 Principle of operation

The function is based on comparison of the amplitudes of the two voltages connected
in each phase. Possible differences between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive
voltage transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx The
voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip level
UDTrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given after
definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage supplies
are also supervised with undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The outputs for
loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage is supervised
for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for loss of all three
phases.

Loss of one U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This
blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow=No.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 387

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

The function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary BLOCK input.
It can e.g. be activated from a fuse failure supervision function block.

To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service

value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance
in normal service.

The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 200.

UDTripL1>
AND

UDTripL1> O tReset tTrip

AND
R t t
AND TRIP

UDTripL1>
AND
AND START

UDAlarmL1>
AND

UDAlarmL1> O tAlarm
AND
R t AND ALARM

UDAlarmL1>
AND

U1<L1
tAlarm
U1<L2 OR t U1LOW
AND
AND
U1<L3

OR
BlkDiffAtULow

U2<L1
t1
U2<L2 AND t U2LOW
AND

U2<L3

BLOCK

en06000382.vsd

Figure 200: Principle logic for voltage differential function

7.5.3 Function block

VDC1-
VDCPTOV_60
U3P1 TRIP
U3P2 START
BLOCK ALARM
U1LOW
U2LOW
UL1DIFF
UL2DIFF
UL3DIFF

en06000528.vsd

Figure 201: VDC function block

388 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

7.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 219: Input signals for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P1 Bus voltage
U3P2 Capacitor voltage
BLOCK Block of function

Table 220: Output signals for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Voltage differential protection operated
START Start of voltage differential protection
ALARM Voltage differential protection alarm
U1LOW Loss of U1 voltage
U2LOW Loss of U2 voltage
UL1DIFF Differential Voltage phase L1
UL2DIFF Differential Voltage phase L2
UL3DIFF Differential Voltage phase L3

7.5.5 Setting parameters

Table 221: Basic parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
UBase 0.50 - 2000.00 0.01 400.00 kV Base Voltage
BlkDiffAtULow No - Yes - Block operation at low
Yes voltage
UDTrip 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 5.0 %UB Operate level, in % of
UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Time delay for voltage
differential operate, in
milliseconds
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for voltage
differential reset, in
seconds
U1Low 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 70.0 %UB Input 1 undervoltage
level, in % of UBase
U2Low 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 70.0 %UB Input 2 undervoltage
level, in % of UBase
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 389

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Reset time for
undervoltage block
UDAlarm 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 2.0 %UB Alarm level, in % of
UBase
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Time delay for voltage
differential alarm, in
seconds

Table 222: Advanced parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
RFL1 0.000 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Ratio compensation
factor phase L1
UCap*RFL1=UL1Bus
RFL2 0.000 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Ratio compensation
factor phase L2
UCap*RFL2=UL2Bus
RFL3 0.000 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Ratio compensation
factor phase L3
UCap*RFL3=UL3Bus

7.5.6 Technical data

Table 223: Voltage differential protection (PTOV)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage difference for alarm and (0.0–100.0) % of Ubase ± 0.5 % of Ur
trip
Under voltage level (0.0–100.0) % of Ubase ± 0.5% of Ur

Timers (0.000–60.000)s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

7.6 Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)

Function block name: LOV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 27
IEC 61850 logical node name:
LOVPTUV

7.6.1 Introduction
The loss of voltage detection, (PTUV, 27), is suitable for use in networks with an
automatic System restoration function. The function issues a three-pole trip command

390 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

to the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time
longer the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.

7.6.2 Principle of operation

The operation of LOVPTUV function is based on line voltage measurement. The
function is provided with a logic, which automatically recognises if the line was
restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three phases are
required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. Start is available on output
START.

Additionally, the function is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages
have been detected low for more than tBlock.

The LOVPTUV function operates again only if the line has been restored to full
voltage for at least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure
and open circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs
of the function block.

Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length
set by setting tPulse.

The operation of the function is supervised by the fuse-failure function (VTSU input)
and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit
breaker.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. The function is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and
the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (BlockLOV=Yes).

REL 670 Technical reference manual 391

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

LOV - LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockLOV = Yes

LOV-START
LOV--BLOCK >1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse LOV–TRIP
STUL1N & t

STUL2N &
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
STUL3N
Enable
&

tBlock
>1 t

LOV--CBOPEN Reset Enable

>1
&
LOV--VTSU

tRestore
>1 Set Enable
t
>1
Line restored for
at least 3 s

en07000089.vsd

Figure 202: Simplified diagram of loss of voltage check protection function

7.6.3 Function block

LOV1-
LOVPTUV_27
U3P TRIP
BLOCK START
CBOPEN
VTSU

en07000039.vsd

Figure 203: LOV function block

7.6.4 Input and output signals

392 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 7
Voltage protection

Table 224: Input signals for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Voltage connection
BLOCK Block the all outputs
CBOPEN Circuit breaker open
VTSU Block from voltage circuit supervision

Table 225: Output signals for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip signal
START Start signal

7.6.5 Setting parameters

Table 226: Basic parameter group settings for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
UBase 0.1 - 9999.9 0.1 400.0 kV Base voltage
UPE 1 - 100 1 70 %UB Operate voltagein%
of base voltage
Ubase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 7.000 s Operate time delay

Table 227: Advanced parameter group settings for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tPulse 0.050 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Duration of TRIP
pulse
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Time delay to block
when all 3ph voltages
are not low
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 3.000 s Time delay for enable
the function after
restoration

7.6.6 Technical data

REL 670 Technical reference manual 393

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 7
Voltage protection

Table 228: Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (0–100)% of Ubase ± 0.5% of Ur

Pulse timer (0.050–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

Timer (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

394 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 8
Frequency protection

Section 8 Frequency protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes the frequency protection functions. The way the functions
work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical
data are included for each function.

8.1 Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Function block name: TUFx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 81
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SAPTUF f<

8.1.1 Introduction
Underfrequency occurs as a result of lack of generation in the network.

The function can be used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas
turbine start-up etc.

The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based
on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement.

Up to two independent under frequency steps are available.

8.1.2 Principle of operation

The underfrequency (TUF) function is used to detect low power system frequency.
The function can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent
time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied the time delay
will be longer if the voltage is higher and shorter if the voltage is lower. If the
frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen
time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to
uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled
blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking
voltage the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 395

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 8
Frequency protection

8.1.2.1 Measurement principle

The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously,

and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is also
dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases the setting
IntBlkStVal, the underfrequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is
issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should
be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV.

To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.1.2.2 Time delay

The time delay for the underfrequency function can be either a settable definite time
delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay depends on
the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low voltage
level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tTrip sets the
time delay

For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings
UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 204
and equation 136. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time
delay to apply. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the
start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST.

Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency
ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset
time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here
it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis
area.

On the output of the underfrequency function a 100 ms pulse is issued, after a time
delay corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency
returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.

8.1.2.3 Voltage dependent time delay

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system,
except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to
decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the
voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas
with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to
make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At
constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to
equation 136. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar

396 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 8
Frequency protection

way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage
functions.
Exponent
é U - UMin ù
t=ê × ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
ë UNom - UMin úû (Equation 136)

where:
t is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
U is the measured voltage
Exponent is a setting,
UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to
tMax, tMin are time settings.

The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 204, for:

UMin = 90%
UNom = 100%
tMax = 1.0 s
tMin = 0.0 s
Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4

1
0
1
Exponenent
TimeDlyOperate [s]

2
3
0.5 4

0
90 95 100

U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd

Figure 204: Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for the

underfrequency function. The time delay to operate is plotted as a
function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
respectively.

8.1.2.4 Blocking

The underfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input

signals or by parameter settings, where:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 397

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 8
Frequency protection

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the
start and the trip outputs, are blocked.

8.1.2.5 Design

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time
integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage
dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of
RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay TimeDlyRestore.
The design of the underfrequency function is schematically described in figure 205.

Block

BLOCK BLKDMAGN
OR
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel

Voltage Time integrator

Start
TimerOperation Mode & START
Selector START
Frequency Comparator Trip
f < StartFrequency Output
TimeDlyOperate TRIP Logic

TimeDlyReset TRIP

100 ms

Comparator RESTORE
TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq

en05000726.vsd

Figure 205: Schematic design of the underfrequency function

398 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 8
Frequency protection

8.1.3 Function block

TUF1-
SAPTUF_81
U3P TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN
Frequency

en06000279.vsd

Figure 206: TUF function block

8.1.4 Input and output signals

Table 229: Input signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Voltage connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTRIP Blocking operate output.
BLKREST Blocking restore output.

Table 230: Output signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Operate/trip signal for frequency.
START Start/pick-up signal for frequency.
RESTORE Restore signal for load restoring purposes.
BLKDMAGN Blocking indication due to low amplitude.
Frequency Measured frequency

8.1.5 Setting parameters

Table 231: Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 0.01 48.80 Hz Frequency setting/
start value.
IntBlockLevel 0 - 100 1 50 %UB Internal blocking level
in % of UBase.
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 399

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 8
Frequency protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

TimeDlyOperate 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Operate time delay in
over/under-frequency
mode.
TimeDlyReset 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for reset.
TimeDlyRestore 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Restore time delay.
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 0.01 50.10 Hz Restore frequency if
frequency is above
frequency value.
TimerOperation Definite timer - Definite timer - Setting for choosing
Volt based timer timer mode.
UNom 50 - 150 1 100 %UB Nominal voltage in %
of UBase for voltage
based timer.
UMin 50 - 150 1 90 %UB Lower operation limit
in % of UBase for
voltage based timer.
Exponent 1.0 0.1 0.0 - 5.0 - For calculation of the
curve form for voltage
based timer.
tMax 0.010 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Maximum time
operation limit for
voltage based timer.
tMin 0.010 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Minimum time
operation limit for
voltage based timer.

8.1.6 Technical data

Table 232: Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (35.00-75.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
Operate time, start function 100 ms typically -
Reset time, start function 100 ms typically -
Operate time, definite time function (0.000-60.000)s ± 0.5% + 10
ms
Reset time, definite time function (0.000-60.000)s ± 0.5% + 10
ms
Voltage dependent time delay Settings: Class 5 +
UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase 200 ms
é U - UMin ù
Exponent
UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase
t=ê × ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
ë UNom - UMin úû Exponent=0.0-5.0
tMax=(0.000-60.000)s
U=Umeasured tMin=(0.000-60.000)s

8.2 Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)

400 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 8
Frequency protection

Function block name: TOFx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 81
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SAPTOF f>

8.2.1 Introduction
Overfrequency will occur at sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network.
In some cases close to generating part governor problems can also cause
overfrequency.

The function can be used for generation shedding, remedial action schemes etc. It can
also be used as a sub-nominal frequency stage initiating load restoring.

The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based
on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement.

8.2.2 Principle of operation

The Overfrequency (TOF) function is used to detect high power system frequency.
The function has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the
set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency
measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function
is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage the function is
blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.

8.2.2.1 Measurement principle

The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency
function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude
decreases below the setting IntBlkStVal, the overfrequency function is blocked, and
the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the
UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of
the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.2.2.2 Time delay

The time delay for the overfrequency function is a settable definite time delay,
specified by the setting tTrip. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from
the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 401

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 8
Frequency protection

Trip signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency
ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset
time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here
it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis
area.

8.2.2.3 Blocking

The overfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals
or by parameter settings, where:

TOF-BLOCK: blocks all outputs

TOF-BLKTRIP: blocks the TOF-TRIP output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the start
and the trip outputs, are blocked.

8.2.2.4 Design

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the
power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design
of the overfrequency function is schematically described in figure 207.

402 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 8
Frequency protection

BLOCK
BLKTRIP BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel

Start
&
Trip
Voltage Time integrator Output
Logic
Definite Time Delay START START
Frequency Comparator
f > StartFrequency TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP

en05000735.vsd

Figure 207: Schematic design of the overfrequency function

8.2.3 Function block

TOF1-
SAPTOF_81
U3P TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
Frequency

en06000280.vsd

Figure 208: TOF function block

8.2.4 Input and output signals

Table 233: Input signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Voltage connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTRIP Blocking operate output.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 403

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 8
Frequency protection

Table 234: Output signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Operate/trip signal for frequency.
START Start/pick-up signal for frequency.
BLKDMAGN Blocking indication due to low amplitude.
Frequency Measured frequency

8.2.5 Setting parameters

Table 235: Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 0.01 51.20 Hz Frequency setting/
start value.
IntBlockLevel 0 - 100 1 50 %UB Internal blocking level
in % of UBase.
TimeDlyOperate 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Operate time delay in
over/under-frequency
mode.
TimeDlyReset 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for reset.

8.2.6 Technical data

Table 236: Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (35.00-75.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
Operate time, start function 100 ms typically -
Reset time, start function 100 ms typically -
Operate time, definite time (0.000-60.000)s ± 0.5% + 10 ms
function
Reset time, definite time function (0.000-60.000)s ± 0.5% + 10 ms

8.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC,

81)

404 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 8
Frequency protection

Function block name: RCFx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 81
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SAPFRC df/dt >
<

8.3.1 Introduction
Rate of change of frequency function gives an early indication of a main disturbance
in the system.

The function can be used for generation shedding, load shedding, remedial action
schemes etc.

The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based
on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement.

Each step can discriminate between positive or negative change of frequency.

8.3.2 Principle of operation

The rate-of-change of frequency (RCF) function is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes, increase as well as decrease, at an early stage. The function has
a settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the
set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay,
the trip signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the set value,
for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the trip
signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement
at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available,
i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage, the function is blocked and
no start or trip signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease,
a restore signal is issued.

8.3.2.1 Measurement principle

The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. The rate-of-change
of frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage
magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, the rate-of-change of frequency
function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting
StartFreqGrad, controls if the rate-of-change of frequency function reacts on a
positive or on a negative change in frequency. If the rate-of-change of frequency
function is used for decreasing frequency, i.e. the setting StartFreqGrad has been
given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued
on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the

REL 670 Technical reference manual 405

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 8
Frequency protection

setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of StartFreqGrad, sets the rate-of-change of

frequency function to start and trip for frequency increases.

To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.3.2.2 Time delay

The rate-of-change of frequency function has a settable definite time delay, tTrip.
The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in
percent of the total operation time.

Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues
for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the start condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset
time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the
start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only
return back into the hysteresis area.

The RESTORE output of the rate-of-change of frequency function is set, after a time
delay equal to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to
the level corresponding to RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If
tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be
given. The restore functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and
the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected
during the restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.

8.3.2.3 Blocking

The rate-of-change of frequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary

input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
start and the trip outputs, are blocked.

8.3.2.4 Design

The rate-of-change of frequency measuring element continuously measures the

frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting StartFreqGrad. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system switchings and
faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When the frequency
has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after
the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign of the

406 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 8
Frequency protection

setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or
lowering frequency conditions. The design of the rate-of-change of frequency
function is schematically described in figure 209.

BLOCK
BLKTRIP

BLKRESET BLOCK
OR

Voltage Comparator BLKDMAGN

U < IntBlockLevel

Start
Rate-of-Change Time integrator &
Comparator
of Frequency Trip
If
Definite Time Delay Output
[StartFreqGrad<0 START START
Logic
AND
TimeDlyOperate
df/dt < StartFreqGrad]
OR
TimeDlyReset
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
TRIP
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START
100 ms

Frequency Comparator RESTORE

TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq

en05000835.vsd

Figure 209: Schematic design of the rate-of-change of frequency function

8.3.3 Function block

RCF1-
SAPFRC_81
U3P TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN

en06000281.vsd

Figure 210: RCF function block

8.3.4 Input and output signals

REL 670 Technical reference manual 407

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 8
Frequency protection

Table 237: Input signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTRIP Blocking operate output.
BLKREST Blocking restore output.

Table 238: Output signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Operate/trip signal for frequencyGradient
START Start/pick-up signal for frequencyGradient
RESTORE Restore signal for load restoring purposes.
BLKDMAGN Blocking indication due to low amplitude.

8.3.5 Setting parameters

Table 239: Basic parameter group settings for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for the
phase-phase voltage
in kV
StartFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 0.01 0.50 Hz/s Frequency gradient
start value. Sign
defines direction.
IntBlockLevel 0 - 100 1 50 %UB Internal blocking level
in % of UBase.
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Operate time delay in
pos./neg. frequency
gradient mode.
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 0.01 49.90 Hz Restore frequency if
frequency is above
frequency value (Hz)
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Restore time delay.
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for reset.

8.3.6 Technical data

408 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 8
Frequency protection

Table 240: Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ± 10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, internal blocking (0-100)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
level
Operate time, start function 100 ms typically -

REL 670 Technical reference manual 409

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
410
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes Multipurpose protection and includes the General current and
voltage function. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function
blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

9.1 General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Function block name: GFxx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 46, 51, 67, 51N, 67N, 27, 59, 21,
40

I< I>

IEC 61850 logical node name: CVGAPC

U< U>

9.1.1 Introduction
The function can be utilized as a negative sequence current protection detecting
unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or unsymmetrical faults.

The function can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth faults,
outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are
used which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This
will give an independence from load currents and this phase selection will be used in
conjunction with the detection of the earth fault from the directional earth fault
protection function.

9.1.1.1 Inadvertent generator energization

When the generator is taken out of service, and non-rotating, there is a risk that the
generator circuit breaker flashes over or is closed by mistake.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 411

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

To prevent damages on the generator or turbine, it is essential that high speed tripping
is provided in case of inadvertent energization of the generator. This tripping should
be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms).

There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be
limited so that the “normal” overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect
the dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long.
For big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should,
therefore, be included in the protective scheme.

9.1.2 Principle of operation

9.1.2.1 Measured quantities within the function

The function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input
in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one voltage
quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool.

The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 241.

Table 241: Current selection for the GF function

Set value for the
parameter CurrentInput Comment
1 Phase1 GF function will measure the phase L1 current phasor
2 Phase2 GF function will measure the phase L2 current phasor
3 Phase3 GF function will measure the phase L3 current phasor
4 PosSeq GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current
phasor
5 NegSeq GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current
phasor
6 3ZeroSeq GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current
phasor multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude
8 MinPh GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude
9 UnbalancePh GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor
of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all
the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase L2
current phasor (i.e. IL1-IL2)

11 Phase2-Phase3 GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase L3
current phasor (i.e. IL2-IL3)

Table continued on next page

412 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the

parameter CurrentInput Comment
12 Phase3-Phase1 GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and phase L1
current phasor (i.e. IL3-IL1)

13 MaxPh-Ph GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor
with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 242:

Table 242: Voltage selection for the GF function

Set value for the
parameter Comment
VoltageInput
1 Phase1 GF function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor
2 Phase2 GF function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor
3 Phase3 GF function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor
4 PosSeq GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage
phasor
5 -NegSeq GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage
phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180° in order
to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
6 -3ZeroSeq GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage
phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally
rotated for 180° in order to enable easier settings for the directional
feature when used.
7 MaxPh GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude
8 MinPh GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude
9 UnbalancePh GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0° all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase L2
voltage phasor (i.e. UL1-UL2)

11 Phase2-Phase3 GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L2 voltage phasor and phase L3
voltage phasor (i.e. UL2-UL3)

12 Phase3-Phase1 GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L3 voltage phasor and phase L1
voltage phasor (i.e. UL3-UL1)

Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 413

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the

parameter Comment
VoltageInput
13 MaxPh-Ph GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 242 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be
connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three
phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information about actual VT
connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will
then take automatic care about it.

The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 243 for built-in current
restraint feature:

Table 243: Restraint current selection for the GF function

Set value for the
parameter RestrCurr Comment
1 PosSeq GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current
phasor
2 NegSeq GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current
phasor
3 3ZeroSeq GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current
phasor multiplied by factor 3
4 MaxPh GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude

9.1.2.2 Base quantities for GF function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (i.e. 100%)
for pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for
every GF function.

Base current shall be entered as:

1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the
measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 241.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by √3
(i.e. 1,732 x Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to
15, as shown in table 241.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

414 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

1. rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 242.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 242.

9.1.2.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
(see table 241) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup
if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset
ratio is settable, with default value of 0.96. However depending on other enabled
built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start
signal. Start signal will only come if all of the enabled built-in features in the
overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.

Second harmonic feature

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component
in the measured current quantity (see table 241). However it shall be noted that this
feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:

• PosSeq (i.e. positive sequence current)

• NegSeq (i.e. negative sequence current)
• UnbalancePh (i.e. unbalance phase current)
• UnbalancePh-Ph (i.e. unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first harmonic
ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.

Directional feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent on the
relevant phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 241) and measured
voltage phasor (see table 242). In protection terminology it means that the PGPF
function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case
overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current flow is in accordance with
the set direction (i.e. Forward, which means towards the protected object, or
Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost
importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 242) and
measured current phasor (see table 241) will be used for directional decision.
Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current
and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. The PGPF function
will NOT do this automatically. It will just simply use the current and voltage phasors
selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria.

Table 244 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones)
for these two quantities for traditional directional relays.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 415

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Table 244: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the Set value for the
parameter CurrentInput parameter Comment
VoltageInput
PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45° to -90°
depending on the power
NegSeq -NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45° to -90°
depending on the power system voltage level (i.e. X/R
ratio)
3ZeroSeq -3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0° to -90°
depending on the power system earthing (i.e. solidly
earthed, earthed via resistor, etc.)
Phase1 Phase2-Phase3 Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Phase2 Phase3-Phase1 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase
is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Phase3 Phase1-Phase2 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional
feature is enabled.

Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and

IcosPhi&U. The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool,
checks that:

• the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
• the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the
relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 211).

U=-3U0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000252.vsd

Figure 211: I & U directional operating principle for the GF function

where:
RCADir is -75°

416 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

ROADir is 50°

The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool, checks
that:

• that the product I·cos(Φ) is bigger than the set pick-up level, where Φ is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
• that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined
by the I·cos(Φ) straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter
setting; see figure 211).

U=-3U0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir F I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000253.vsd

Figure 212: GF, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle

where:
RCADir is -75°
ROADir is 50°

Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature
shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-
set value. User can select one of the following three options:

• Non-directional (i.e. operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference

voltage)
• Block (i.e. operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
• Memory (i.e. memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms.
After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during
memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage
goes above set voltage memory limit.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 417

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a
measured voltage quantity (see table 242). Practically then the pickup level of the
overcurrent step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are
available:

• Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter

VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

ULowLimit_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd

Figure 213: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

418 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

• Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter

VDepMode_OC1=Step has value = step)

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323.vsd

Figure 214: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

This feature will simple change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will
as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT
curves (i.e. overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage
conditions).

Current restraint feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a
restraining current quantity (see table 243). Practically then the pickup level of the
overcurrent step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the
magnitude of the restraining current.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 419

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

IMeasured
ea ain
ar tr
te es
ra *I r
pe eff
O t rCo
es
I>R
IsetHigh

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff)

Restraint
en05000255.vsd

Figure 215: Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for
calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve
operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.

When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time
delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for
longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.

9.1.2.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 241) with the set pickup level.
The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the magnitude of
the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start signal will start
definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset
of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the
setting.

9.1.2.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

420 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 242) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio
is settable, with default value of 0.99.

The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end
user setting.

9.1.2.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 242 with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level. Reset ratio
is settable, with default value of 1.01.

The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of
the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end
user setting.

9.1.2.7 Inadvertent generator energization

The inadvertent energization function is realized by means of the general current and
voltage protection function (CAGVPC). The function is configured as shown in
figure 216.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 421

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

CVGAPC
3IP
3UP TROC1

TROV1
³1
TRUV1

BLKOC1

en06000497.vsd

Figure 216: Configuration of the inadvertent energization function

The setting of the general current and voltage function (typical values) is done as
shown in table 245.

Table 245: The setting of the general current and voltage function
Measured Quantity Pickup in % of generator Time delay in seconds
rating
Undervoltage U< Maximum generator < 70% 10.0 s
Phase to Phase voltage
Overvoltage U> Maximum generator > 85% 1.0 s
Phase to Phase voltage
Overcurrent I> Maximum generator > 50% 0.05 s
Phase current

In normal operation the overvoltage trip signal is activated and the undervotage trip
signal is deactivated. This means that the overcurrent function is blocked.

When the generator is taken out of service the generator voltage gets low. The
overvoltage trip signal will be deactivated and the undervoltage trip signal will be
activated after the set delay. At this moment the block signal to the overcurrent
function will be deactivated.

422 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

It the generator is energized at stand still conditions, i.e. when the voltage is zero, the
overcurrent function will operate after the short set delay if the generator current is
larger than the set value.

When the generator is started the overvoltage trip signal will be activared the set time
delay after the moment when the voltage has reached the set value. At this moment
the blocking of the overcurrent function is activated.

The delay of the undervoltage function will prevent false operation at short circuits
in the external power grid.

9.1.2.8 Logic diagram

The simplified internal logics, for the PGPF function are shown in the following
figures.

REx670
ADM PGPF function

Current and voltage selection

settings
Phasor calculation of
scaling with CT ratio

individual currents
A/D conversion

Selection of which current Selected current

and voltage shall be given to
Phasors &
samples

the built-in protection Selected voltage

elements

Restraint current selection

Selected restraint current

A/D conversion scaling

Selection of restraint current

Phasor calculation of
individual voltages
with CT ratio

Phasors &
samples

en05000169.vsd

Figure 217: Treatment of measured currents within IED for PGPF function

Figure 217 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for
multipurpose protection function

The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and
kilovolts.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 423

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

1. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase

current and one three-phase voltage input.
2. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-
phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
3. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.

The multipurpose protection function:

1. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally
measured current.
2. Selects one voltage from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally
measured voltage.
3. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally
measured restraint current.

424 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

CURRENT

UC1
nd TRUC1
2 Harmonic
Selected current restraint
STUC2
UC2
TRUC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint

STOC1
OC1 TROC1

2nd Harmonic BLK2ND

restraint ³1
Selected restraint current
Current restraint
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint

STOC2
OC2 TROC2

2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint ³1
UDIRLOW

Directionality DIROC2

Voltage control /
restraint

STOV1
OV1 TROV1

STOV2
OV2 TROV2

STUV1
Selected voltage
UV1 TRUV1

STUV2
UV2 TRUV2

VOLTAGE

en05000170.vsd

Figure 218: PGPF function main logic diagram for built in protection elements

REL 670 Technical reference manual 425

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Logic in figure 218 can be summarized as follows:

1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each
protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its
START and TRIP output signals.
2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following
four figures
3. Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps
(internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

Enable
second
harmonic Second
harmonic check
1 DEF time BLKTROC
selected DEF 1 TROC1
AND
OR
Selected current a
a>b
b
OC1=On STOC1
AND
StartCurr_OC1 BLKOC1
X
Inverse

Voltage Directionality DIR_OK Inverse

control or time
check selected
restraint
feature

Selected voltage
Current
Restraint
Feature
Selected restrain current Imeasured > k Irestraint

en05000831.vsd

Figure 219: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step i.e. OC1 (step OC2 has the same
internal logic)

426 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current a TRUC1

b>a
DEF AND
b
StartCurr_UC1
AND

Operation_UC1=On
STUC1

Bin input: BLKUC1

en05000750.vsd

Figure 220: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step i.e. UC1 (step UC2 has the same
internal logic)

DEF time BLKTROV1

selected DEF TROV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
a>b
b STOV1
StartVolt_OV1
AND

Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
Inverse time
BLKOV1 selected

en05000751.vsd

Figure 221: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step i.e.OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 427

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

DEF time BLKTRUV

selected DEF 1 TRUV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
b>a
b STUV1
AND
StartVolt_UV1

Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
BLKUV1 selected

en05000752.vsd

Figure 222: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step i.e.UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)

9.1.3 Function block

GF01-
CVGAPC
I3P TRIP
U3P TROC1
BLOCK TROC2
BLKOC1 TRUC1
BLKOC1TR TRUC2
ENMLTOC1 TROV1
BLKOC2 TROV2
BLKOC2TR TRUV1
ENMLTOC2 TRUV2
BLKUC1 START
BLKUC1TR STOC1
BLKUC2 STOC2
BLKUC2TR STUC1
BLKOV1 STUC2
BLKOV1TR STOV1
BLKOV2 STOV2
BLKOV2TR STUV1
BLKUV1 STUV2
BLKUV1TR BLK2ND
BLKUV2 DIROC1
BLKUV2TR DIROC2
UDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
UIANGLE

en05000372.vsd

Figure 223: GF function block

9.1.4 Input and output signals

428 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Table 246: Input signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKOC1 Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1
BLKOC2 Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2
BLKUC1 Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2 Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1 Block of over voltage function OV1
BLKOV1TR Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2 Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1 Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2 Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

Table 247: Output signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP General trip signal
TROC1 Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2 Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
TRUV1 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
START General start signal
STOC1 Start signal from overcurrent function OC1
STOC2 Start signal from overcurrent function OC2
STUC1 Start signal from undercurrent function UC1
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 429

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Signal Description
STUC2 Start signal from undercurrent function UC2
STOV1 Start signal from overvoltage function OV1
STOV2 Start signal from overvoltage function OV2
STUV1 Start signal from undervoltage function UV1
STUV2 Start signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND Block from second harmonic detection
DIROC1 Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2 Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
UDIRLOW Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT Measured current value
ICOSFI Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE Measured voltage value
UIANGLE Angle between voltage and current

9.1.5 Setting parameters

Table 248: Basic parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
CurrentInput phase1 - MaxPh - Select current signal
phase2 which will be
phase3 measured inside
PosSeq function
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base Current
Table continued on next page

430 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

VoltageInput phase1 - MaxPh - Select voltage signal
phase2 which will be
phase3 measured inside
PosSeq function
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base Voltage
OperHarmRestr Off - Off - Operation of 2nd
On harmonic restrain Off /
On
l_2nd/l_fund 10.0 - 50.0 1.0 20.0 % Ratio of second to
fundamental current
harmonic in %
BlkLevel2nd 10 - 5000 1 5000 %IB Harm analyse
disabled above this
current level in % of
Ibase
EnRestrainCurr Off - Off - Enable current
On restrain function On /
Off
RestrCurrInput PosSeq - PosSeq - Select current signal
NegSeq which will be used for
3*ZeroSeq curr restrain
Max
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00 0.01 0.00 - 5.00 - Restraining current
coefficient
RCADir -180 - 180 1 -75 Deg Relay Characteristic
Angle
ROADir 1 - 90 1 75 Deg Relay Operate Angle
LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 %UB Below this level in %
of Ubase setting
ActLowVolt takes
over
Operation_OC1 Off - Off - Operation OC1 Off /
On On
StartCurr_OC1 2.0 - 5000.0 1.0 120.0 %IB Operate current level
for OC1 in % of Ibase
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 431

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

CurveType_OC1 ANSI Ext. inv. - ANSI Def. Time - Selection of time
ANSI Very inv. delay curve type for
ANSI Norm. inv. OC1
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.50 s Independent
(definitive) time delay
of OC1
k_OC1 0.30 0.01 0.05 - 999.00 - Time multiplier for the
dependent time delay
for OC1
tMin_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.05 s Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control - Off - Control mode for
Input control voltage controlled
Volt/Input control OC1 function
Off
VDepMode_OC1 Step - Step - Voltage dependent
Slope mode OC1 (step,
slope)
VDepFact_OC1 1.00 0.01 0.02 - 5.00 - Multiplying factor for I
pickup when OC1 is U
dependent
ULowLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 0.1 50.0 %UB Voltage low limit
setting OC1 in % of
Ubase
UHighLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 0.1 100.0 %UB Voltage high limit
setting OC1 in % of
Ubase
HarmRestr_OC1 Off - Off - Enable block of OC1
On by 2nd harmonic
restrain
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional - Non-directional - Directional mode of
Forward OC1 (nondir,
Reverse forward,reverse)
DirPrinc_OC1 I&U - I&U - Measuring on IandU
IcosPhi&U or IcosPhiandU for
OC1
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional - Non-directional - Low voltage level
Block action for Dir_OC1
Memory (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Table continued on next page

432 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation_OC2 Off - Off - Operation OC2 Off /
On On
StartCurr_OC2 2.0 - 5000.0 1.0 120.0 %IB Operate current level
for OC2 in % of Ibase
CurveType_OC2 ANSI Ext. inv. - ANSI Def. Time - Selection of time
ANSI Very inv. delay curve type for
ANSI Norm. inv. OC2
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.50 s Independent
(definitive) time delay
of OC2
k_OC2 0.30 0.01 0.05 - 999.00 - Time multiplier for the
dependent time delay
for OC2
tMin_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.05 s Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2 Voltage control - Off - Control mode for
Input control voltage controlled
Volt/Input control OC2 function
Off
VDepMode_OC2 Step - Step - Voltage dependent
Slope mode OC2 (step,
slope)
VDepFact_OC2 1.00 0.01 0.02 - 5.00 - Multiplying factor for I
pickup when OC2 is U
dependent
ULowLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 0.1 50.0 %UB Voltage low limit
setting OC2 in % of
Ubase
UHighLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 0.1 100.0 %UB Voltage high limit
setting OC2 in % of
Ubase
HarmRestr_OC2 Off - Off - Enable block of OC2
On by 2nd harmonic
restrain
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional - Non-directional - Directional mode of
Forward OC2 (nondir,
Reverse forward,reverse)
DirPrinc_OC2 I&U - I&U - Measuring on IandU
IcosPhi&U or IcosPhiandU for
OC2
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 433

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional - Non-directional - Low voltage level
Block action for Dir_OC2
Memory (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Operation_UC1 Off - Off - Operation UC1 Off /
On On
EnBlkLowI_UC1 Off - Off - Enable internal low
On current level blocking
for UC1
BlkLowCurr_UC1 0 - 150 1 20 %IB Internal low current
blocking level for UC1
in % of Ibase
StartCurr_UC1 2.0 - 150.0 1.0 70.0 %IB Operate undercurrent
level for UC1 in % of
Ibase
tDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.50 s Independent
(definitive) time delay
of UC1
tResetDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve UC1
HarmRestr_UC1 Off - Off - Enable block of UC1
On by 2nd harmonic
restrain
Operation_UC2 Off - Off - Operation UC2 Off /
On On
EnBlkLowI_UC2 Off - Off - Enable internal low
On current level blocking
for UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2 0 - 150 1 20 %IB Internal low current
blocking level for UC2
in % of Ibase
StartCurr_UC2 2.0 - 150.0 1.0 70.0 %IB Operate undercurrent
level for UC2 in % of
Ibase
tDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.50 s Independent
(definitive) time delay
of UC2
HarmRestr_UC2 Off - Off - Enable block of UC2
On by 2nd harmonic
restrain
Operation_OV1 Off - Off - Operation OV1 Off /
On On
StartVolt_OV1 2.0 - 200.0 0.1 150.0 %UB Operate voltage level
for OV1 in % of Ubase
CurveType_OV1 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B OV1
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 1.00 s Operate time delay in
sec for definite time
use of OV1
Table continued on next page

434 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tMin_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.05 s Minimum operate
time for IDMT curves
for OV1
k_OV1 0.30 0.01 0.05 - 999.00 - Time multiplier for the
dependent time delay
for OV1
Operation_OV2 Off - Off - Operation OV2 Off /
On On
StartVolt_OV2 2.0 - 200.0 0.1 150.0 %UB Operate voltage level
for OV2 in % of Ubase
CurveType_OV2 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B OV2
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 1.00 s Operate time delay in
sec for definite time
use of OV2
tMin_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.05 s Minimum operate
time for IDMT curves
for OV2
k_OV2 0.30 0.01 0.05 - 999.00 - Time multiplier for the
dependent time delay
for OV2
Operation_UV1 Off - Off - Operation UV1 Off /
On On
StartVolt_UV1 2.0 - 150.0 0.1 50.0 %UB Operate undervoltage
level for UV1 in % of
Ubase
CurveType_UV1 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B UV1
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 1.00 s Operate time delay in
sec for definite time
use of UV1
tMin_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.05 s Minimum operate
time for IDMT curves
for UV1
k_UV1 0.30 0.01 0.05 - 999.00 - Time multiplier for the
dependent time delay
for UV1
EnBlkLowV_UV1 Off - On - Enable internal low
On voltage level blocking
for UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1 0.0 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 %UB Internal low voltage
blocking level for UV1
in % of Ubase
Operation_UV2 Off - Off - Operation UV2 Off /
On On
StartVolt_UV2 2.0 - 150.0 0.1 50.0 %UB Operate undervoltage
level for UV2 in % of
Ubase
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 435

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

CurveType_UV2 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B UV2
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 1.00 s Operate time delay in
sec for definite time
use of UV2
tMin_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.05 s Minimum operate
time for IDMT curves
for UV2
k_UV2 0.30 0.01 0.05 - 999.00 - Time multiplier for the
dependent time delay
for UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2 Off - On - Enable internal low
On voltage level blocking
for UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2 0.0 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 %UB Internal low voltage
blocking level for UV2
in % of Ubase

Table 249: Advanced parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CurrMult_OC1 2.0 0.1 1.0 - 10.0 - Multiplier for scaling
the current setting
value for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
IEC Reset curve type for OC1
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve OC1
P_OC1 0.020 0.001 0.001 - 10.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
A_OC1 0.140 0.001 0.000 - 999.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
B_OC1 0.000 0.001 0.000 - 99.000 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
C_OC1 1.000 0.001 0.000 - 1.000 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
PR_OC1 0.500 0.001 0.005 - 3.000 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
Table continued on next page

436 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

TR_OC1 13.500 0.001 0.005 - 600.000 - Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
CR_OC1 1.0 0.1 0.1 - 10.0 - Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
CurrMult_OC2 2.0 0.1 1.0 - 10.0 - Multiplier for scaling
the current setting
value for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
IEC Reset curve type for OC2
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve OC2
P_OC2 0.020 0.001 0.001 - 10.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
A_OC2 0.140 0.001 0.000 - 999.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
B_OC2 0.000 0.001 0.000 - 99.000 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
C_OC2 1.000 0.001 0.000 - 1.000 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
PR_OC2 0.500 0.001 0.005 - 3.000 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
TR_OC2 13.500 0.001 0.005 - 600.000 - Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
CR_OC2 1.0 0.1 0.1 - 10.0 - Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC2
tResetDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve UC2
ResCrvType_OV1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for OV1
Linearly
decreased
tResetDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay in
sec for definite time
use of OV1
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 437

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tResetIDMT_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay in
sec for IDMT curves
for OV1
A_OV1 0.140 0.001 0.005 - 999.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for OV1
B_OV1 1.000 0.001 0.500 - 99.000 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for OV1
C_OV1 1.000 0.001 0.000 - 1.000 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for OV1
D_OV1 0.000 0.001 0.000 - 10.000 - Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for OV1
P_OV1 0.020 0.001 0.001 - 10.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for OV1
ResCrvType_OV2 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for OV2
Linearly
decreased
tResetDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay in
sec for definite time
use of OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay in
sec for IDMT curves
for OV2
A_OV2 0.140 0.001 0.005 - 999.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for OV2
B_OV2 1.000 0.001 0.500 - 99.000 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for OV2
C_OV2 1.000 0.001 0.000 - 1.000 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for OV2
D_OV2 0.000 0.001 0.000 - 10.000 - Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for OV2
P_OV2 0.020 0.001 0.001 - 10.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for OV2
Table continued on next page

438 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

ResCrvType_UV1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for UV1
Linearly
decreased
tResetDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay in
sec for definite time
use of UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay in
sec for IDMT curves
for UV1
A_UV1 0.140 0.001 0.005 - 999.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for UV1
B_UV1 1.000 0.001 0.500 - 99.000 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for UV1
C_UV1 1.000 0.001 0.000 - 1.000 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for UV1
D_UV1 0.000 0.001 0.000 - 10.000 - Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for UV1
P_UV1 0.020 0.001 0.001 - 10.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for UV1
ResCrvType_UV2 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for UV2
Linearly
decreased
tResetDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay in
sec for definite time
use of UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay in
sec for IDMT curves
for UV2
A_UV2 0.140 0.001 0.005 - 999.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for UV2
B_UV2 1.000 0.001 0.500 - 99.000 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for UV2
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 439

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

C_UV2 1.000 0.001 0.000 - 1.000 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for UV2
D_UV2 0.000 0.001 0.000 - 10.000 - Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for UV2
P_UV2 0.020 0.001 0.001 - 10.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for UV2

9.1.6 Technical data

Table 250: General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Function
Measuring current input
Base current
Measuring voltage input
Base voltage
Start overcurrent, step 1 and 2
Range or value Accuracy
phase1, phase2, phase3, -
PosSeq, NegSeq, 3*ZeroSeq,
MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh,
phase1-phase2, phase2-
phase3, phase3-phase1,
MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph,
UnbalancePh-Ph
(1 - 99999) A -
phase1, phase2, phase3, -
PosSeq, -NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq,
MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh,
phase1-phase2, phase2-
phase3, phase3-phase1,
MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph,
UnbalancePh-Ph
(0.05 - 2000.00) kV -
(2 - 5000)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir for I<Ir
± 1.0% of I for I>Ir

Start undercurrent, step 1 and 2 (2 - 150)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir for I<Ir

± 1.0% of I for I>Ir

Definite time delay (0.00 - 6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

Operate time start overcurrent 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time start overcurrent 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Operate time start undercurrent 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Reset time start undercurrent 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Table continued on next page

440 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 9
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

See table 588 and table 589
Voltage level where voltage
memory takes over
Start overvoltage, step 1 and 2
Parameter ranges for customer See table 588 and table 589
defined characteristic no 17:
k: 0.05 - 999.00
A: 0.0000 - 999.0000
B: 0.0000 - 99.0000
C: 0.0000 - 1.0000
P: 0.0001 - 10.0000
PR: 0.005 - 3.000
TR: 0.005 - 600.000
CR: 0.1 - 10.0
(0.0 - 5.0)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
(2.0 - 200.0)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur
± 1.0% of U for U>Ur

Start undervoltage, step 1 and 2 (2.0 - 150.0)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur
± 1.0% of U for U>Ur

Operate time, start overvoltage 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Reset time, start overvoltage 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset -

Operate time start undervoltage 25 ms typically 2 to 0 x Uset -

Reset time start undervoltage 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

High and low voltage limit, (1.0 - 200.0)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur
voltage dependent operation ± 1.0% of U for U>Ur

Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and -

reverse
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to +180) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -
Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% -
Reset ratio, overvoltage > 95% -
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Overcurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undercurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

REL 670 Technical reference manual 441

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
442
 Section 10
Secondary system supervision

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

About this chapter

This chapter describes functions like Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure
supervision. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,
input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

10.1 Current circuit supervision (RDIF)

Function block name: CCSx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name: CCSRDIF

10.1.1 Introduction
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, earth fault current and negative
sequence current functions.

It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurring open

CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will
stress the secondary circuit.

The current circuit supervision function compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate
input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.

A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to

block protection functions expected to give unwanted tripping.

10.1.2 Principle of operation

The supervision function compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the three
phase currents |ΣIphase| and the numerical value of the residual current |Iref| from
another current transformer set, see figure 224.

The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 443

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 10
Secondary system supervision

• The numerical value of the difference |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is higher than 80% of the
numerical value of the sum |ΣIphase| + |Iref|.
• The numerical value of the current |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is equal to or higher than the
set operate value IMinOp.
• No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
• The current circuit supervision is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms a ALARM will
be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-
gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase
current supervision element(s) operate, e.g. during a fault.

Figure 224: Simplified logic diagram for the current circuit supervision

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 225.

| åI phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp

| åI phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd

Figure 225: Operate characteristics

444 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 10
Secondary system supervision

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S
I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

10.1.3 Function block

CCS1-
CCSRDIF
I3P FAIL
IREF ALARM
BLOCK

en05000389.vsd

Figure 226: CCS function block

10.1.4 Input and output signals

Table 251: Input signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for three phase current input
IREF TBD
BLOCK Block of function

Table 252: Output signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block
Signal Description
FAIL Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM Alarm for current circuit failure

10.1.5 Setting parameters

Table 253: Parameter group settings for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A IBase value for
current level
detectors
Ip>Block 5 - 500 1 150 %IB Block of the function
at high phase current,
in % of IBase
IMinOp 5 - 200 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
current differential
level in % of IBase

REL 670 Technical reference manual 445

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 10
Secondary system supervision

10.1.6 Technical data

Table 254: Current circuit supervision (RDIF)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-200)% of Ir ± 10.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
± 10.0% of I at I > Ir

Block current (5-500)% of Ir ± 5.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

± 5.0% of I at I > Ir

10.2 Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Function block name: FSDx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name: SDDRFUF

10.2.1 Introduction
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FSD) is to block voltage measuring
functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and
the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise might occur.

The fuse failure supervision function basically has two different algorithms, negative
sequence and zero sequence based algorithm and an additional delta voltage and delta
current algorithm.

The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated
or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of voltage 3·U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence
current 3·I2.

The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly or
low impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of voltage 3·U0 without the presence of the residual current
3·I0.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to
the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which
in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station
operations.

For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been
introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative
sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation

446 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 10
Secondary system supervision

modes makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the

negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm.

10.2.2 Principle of operation

10.2.2.1 Zero sequence

The function can be set in five different modes by setting the parameter OpMode.
The zero sequence function continuously measure the internal currents and voltages
in all three phases and calculate:

• the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

• the zero-sequence current 3I0.

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0< and
3I0>.

The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured zero
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0>, the measured zero sequence
current is below the set value 3I0< and the operation mode selector (OpMode is set
to 2 (zero sequence mode). This will activate the output signal BLKU, intended to
block voltage related protection functions in the IED. The output signal BLKZ will
be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activaded at the same
time.

If the fuseFailDetected signal is present for more than 5 seconds at the same time as
all phase voltages are below the set value UPh> and the setting parameter ISealIn is
set to On, the function will activate the output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ. The
same signals will aslo be activated if all phase voltages are below the value UPh>,
SealIn=On and any of the phase voltages below the setting value for more than 5
seconds.

It is recommended to always set SealIn to On since this will secure that no unwanted
operation of fuse failure will occur at closing command of breaker when the line is
already energized from the other end. The system voltages shall be normal before
fuse failure is allowed to be activated and initiate block of different protection
functions.

The output signal BLKU can also be activated if no phase voltages is below the setting
UPh> for more than 60 seconds at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is
above the set value 3U0> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the
setting IDLD< (operate level for dead line detection) and the circuit breaker is closed
(input CBCLOSED is activated). This condition covers for fuse failure at open
breaker position.

Fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 447

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 10
Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in the IED. In the new
start-up procedure the IED checks the stored value in its non volatile memory and
establishes the corresponding starting conditions.

TEST

TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes

BLOCK
OR
BLKTRIP
fufailStarted AND

OR

All UL less
than Uph>

3PH
AND
SealIn = On AND

5s
Any UL less AND
OR t
than Uph>

Fuse fail detected fuseFaildetected

(3U0 high and 3I0 low AND
for t>3 ms)
BLKU
AND
OR
OpMode = 2

setLatch U I
BLKZ
200 ms AND
AND OR
deadLineCondition t

150 ms
MCBOP
t

60 sec
All UL> UPh> t
AND
UN > 3U0> for
t>5 s AND

All IL < IDLD<

CBCLOSED
DISCPOS

en06000394.vsd

Figure 227: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, zero sequence based

448 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 10
Secondary system supervision

Input and output signals

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ can be blocked in the following conditions:

• The input BLOCK is activated

• The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as the internal signal
fufailStarted is not present
• The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off.
• The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs.

The input BLKSP is intended to be connected to the trip output at any of the protection
functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of
the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the
security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might
cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate.

The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The block signal has a 200 ms drop-off time delay.

The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to
the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary
circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block
all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of
OpMode selector. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of
MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due
to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the
position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause
maloperation of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is
connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is
disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.

The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, synchro-check etc.) except for the impedance protection.

The function output BLKZ can be used for blocking the impedance protection
function.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 449

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 10
Secondary system supervision

The BLKZ will only be activated if not the internal dead line detection is activated
at the same time.

The fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are
restored.

When the output 3PH is activated, all three voltage are low.

10.2.2.2 Negative sequence

The negative sequence operates in the same way as the zero sequence, but it calculates
the negative sequence component of current and voltage.

• the negative sequence current 3I2

• the negative sequence voltage 3U2

The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured negative
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2>, the measured negative sequence
current is below the value 3I2< and the operation mode selector (OpMode) is set to
1 (negative sequence mode).

10.2.2.3 du/dt and di/dt

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OperationDUDI to On.
When it is selected On it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithm.

The current and voltage is continuously measured in all three phases and the following
quantities are calculated:

• The change of voltage DU/Dt

• The change of current DI/Dt

The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and
DU>.

The delta current and delta voltage algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient
negative change in voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in current amplitude
is detected in each phase separately. This check is performed if the circuit breaker is
closed. Information about the circuit breaker position is brought to the function input
CBCLOSED through a binary input of the IED.

There are two conditions for activating the internal STDU signal and set the latch:

450 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 10
Secondary system supervision

• The magnitude of ΔU is higher than the corresponding setting DU> and ΔI is

below the setting DI> in any phase at the same time as the circuit breaker is
closed (CBCLOSED = 1)
• The magnitude ΔU is higher than the setting DU> and the magnitude of ΔI is
below the setting DI> in any phase at the same time as the magnitude of the phase
current in the same phase is higher than the setting IPh>.

The first criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase at
the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and
energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse
failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to bee an
important disadvantage, connect the CBCLOSED input to FALSE. In this way only
the second criterion can activate the delta function.

The second criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high
current for the same phase will set the latch. The measured phase current is used to
reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is
low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain followed
by current change and a false fuse failure might occur. To prevent that the phase
current criterion is introduced.

If the signal setLatchΔUΔI is set (see figure 227) and if all measured voltages are low
(lower than the setting UPh>) the output 3PH will be activated indicating fuse failure
in all three phases. The output BLKU and BLKZ will be activated as well.

If the signal setLatchΔUΔI is activated but not all three phases are below the setting
UPh> only BLKU will be activated.

The BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activated.

10.2.2.4 Operation modes

The fuse failure supervision function can be switched on or off by the setting
parameter Operation to On or Off.

Negative and zero sequence algorithm

For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode
selector, OperationMode has been introduced to make it possible to select different
operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithm. The different
operation modes are:

• OpMode = 0, the negative and zero sequence function is switched off

• OpMode = 1; Negative sequence is selected
• OpMode = 2; Zero sequence is selected

REL 670 Technical reference manual 451

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 10
Secondary system supervision

• OMode = 3; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in parallel
in an OR-condition
• OpMode = 4; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in series
(AND-condition for operation)
• OpMode = 5; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the
highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be
activated).

du/dt and di/dt algorithm

The DU and DI function can be switched on or off by the setting parameter
OpDUDI to On or Off.

10.2.2.5 Dead line detection

The function input signal deadLineCondition (see figure 227) is related to the internal
dead line detection function. This signal is activated from the dead line condition
function when the voltage and the current in at least one phase is below their respective
setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. It prevents the blocking of the impedance
protection by a fuse failure detection during dead line condition (that occurs also
during single pole auto-reclosing). The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead line
condition after the line-energization in order to prevent the blocking of the impedance
protection for unequal pole closing.

10.2.3 Function block

FSD1-
SDDRFUF
I3P BLKZ
U3P BLKU
BLOCK 3PH
CBCLOSED DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
DISCPOS
BLKTRIP

en05000700.vsd

Figure 228: FSD function block

10.2.4 Input and output signals

Table 255: Input signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current connection
U3P Voltage connection
BLOCK Block of function
CBCLOSED Active when circuit breaker is closed
Table continued on next page

452 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 10
Secondary system supervision

Signal Description
MCBOP Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit
DISCPOS Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP Blocks operation of function when active

Table 256: Output signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block
Signal Description
BLKZ Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU General start of function
3PH Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH Dead line condition in all three phases

10.2.5 Setting parameters

Table 257: Basic parameter group settings for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
OpMode Off - UZsIZs - Operating mode
UNsINs selection
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR
UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 1 30 %UB Operate level of
residual overvoltage
element in % of
UBase
3I0< 1 - 100 1 10 %IB Operate level of
residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 1 30 %UB Operate level of neg
seq overvoltage
element in % of
UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 1 10 %IB Operate level of neg
seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - Off - Operation of change
On based function Off/On
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 453

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 10
Secondary system supervision

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

DU> 1 - 100 1 60 %UB Operate level of
change in phase
voltage in % of UBase
DI< 1 - 100 1 15 %IB Operate level of
change in phase
current in % of IBase
UPh> 1 - 100 1 70 %UB Operate level of
phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh> 1 - 100 1 10 %IB Operate level of
phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn Off - On - Seal in functionality
On Off/On
USealln< 1 - 100 1 70 %UB Operate level of seal-
in phase voltage in %
of UBase
IDLD< 1 - 100 1 5 %IB Operate level for open
phase current
detection in % of
IBase
UDLD< 1 - 100 1 60 %UB Operate level for open
phase voltage
detection in % of
UBase

10.2.6 Technical data

Table 258: Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur

Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir

Operate voltage, negative sequence (1–100)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur

Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir

Operate voltage change level (1–100)% of Ubase ± 5.0% of Ur

Operate current change level (1–100)% of Ibase ± 5.0% of Ir

454 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Section 11 Control

About this chapter

This chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their setting
parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included
for each function.

11.1 Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing

check (RSYN, 25)

Function block name: SYNx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 25
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SESRSYN
sc/vc

11.1.1 Introduction
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time. The systems can thus be reconnected
after an auto-reclose or manual closing which improves the network stability.

The synchrocheck function checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker
are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done
safely.

The function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and one- and
a half or ring busbar arrangements.

Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and
can have different settings.

For systems which are running asynchronous a synchronizing function is provided.

The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of
circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. It is used
for slip frequencies that are larger than those for synchrocheck and lower than a set
maximum level for the synchronizing function.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 455

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.1.2 Principle of operation

11.1.2.1 Basic functionality

The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker
and compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities
are simultaneously within their set limits.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is only given when the actual
measured quantities match the set conditions.

The synchronizing measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and it also
determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker,
from the measured slip frequency. The output is only given when all measured
conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed
to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the
closing circuit.

For single circuit breaker and 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, the SYN function
blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For single circuit
breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts
of the bus disconnectors. For 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage
selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the
circuit breakers

The internal logic for each function block as well as the Input and Outputs and the
setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this
document. For application related information, please refer to the “Application
manual”.

11.1.2.2 Logic diagrams

The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the Synchrocheck
function components such as Synchronism check, Energizing check and Voltage
selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.

Synchronism check
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the Synchrocheck function for
evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as
phase-neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a
setting, which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage.

When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.

The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.

456 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are compared with
the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiff,
PhaseDiff and UDiff. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different voltages
on the Bus and Line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison
of the phase angle values.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency
difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may
not exceed the set value.

Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available
and used for the Manual closing and Auto-Reclose functions respectively as required.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
Synchrocheck function and block of the Synchronism check function respectively.
TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected
to a separate test output

Two outputs MANSYOK resp. AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can
be delayed independently for MANSYOK conditions and for AUTOSYOK.

A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions.

UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFM/A, PHDIFFM/A
shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference
conditions are met.

Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch=On the measuring will be performed.

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values
for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch which is a supervision that the voltages
are both live. If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are
compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, rate of change of frequency,
phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiffMax, FreqDiffMin and UDiffSynch.

Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency
will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation
to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle
release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK
output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function reset. The function
will also reset if the syncronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set
tMaxSynch time. This will then prevent that the functions is by mistake maintained
in operation a long time waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
function resp. of the Synchronizing part.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 457

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH
OFF
ON
TEST MODE
OFF
ON
STARTSYN SYNPROGR
AND
AND
S
BLKSYNCH
OR R

UDiffSynch
50 ms SYNOK
AND
UHighBusSynch AND t

UHighLineSynch OR

FreqDiffMax
AND
TSTSYNOK
FreqDiffMin OR

tClose
FreqRateChange Pulse
AND

fBus&fLine ± 5 Hz tMax
AND
Synch
PhaseDiff < 15 deg SYNFAIL

PhaseDiff=closing angle

en06000636.vsd

Figure 229: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation by
the Synchrocheck function. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the
line voltage as phase-neutral, (or the opposite) this needs to be compensated. This is
done with a setting, which scales the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage.

The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are
live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and
ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighBusEnergand ULowBusEnerg for line
energizing.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency
difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and shall
not exceed a set value.

The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision
conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for
MANENOK conditions and for AUTOENOK. The Energizing direction can also be

458 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

selected by an integer input AENMODE resp MENMODE, which e.g. can be

connected to a Binary to Integer function block BI 16 (BAxx or BBxx). Integers
supplied shall be 1=off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input with
connection of INTZERO output from Fixed Signals function block will mean that the
setting is done from PST tool. The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN
resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
Synchrocheck function resp. block of the Energizing check function. TSTENOK will
allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate
test output.

Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.

OperationSC = On
AND TSTAUTOSY
AND

TSTSC

BLKSC AND
BLOCK OR
AUTOSYOK
AND
0-60 s
AND t
tSCA

UDiffSC 50 ms
AND t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
UDIFFSC
1
FRDIFFA
FreqDiffA 1

PHDIFFA
PhaseDiffA 1

UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue

en07000114.vsd

Figure 230: Simplified logic diagram for the Synchrocheck function

Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformer
fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the Synchrocheck function and
determines the parameters fed to the Synchronism check and Energizing check
functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and
fuse supervision.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 459

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig. The
different alternatives are described below.

If NoVoltageSel is set the default voltages used will be ULine1 and UBus1. This is
also the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for
the used inputs must also be connected.

The voltage selection function selected voltages and fuse conditions are the
Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.

For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts
to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but it is of course also possible to
use an inverter for one of the positions.

Fuse failure supervision

External fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected
to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of the Synchrocheck functions in the
terminal. Alternatively the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used
when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK
must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy.
Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage
circuit is faulty.

The SYN1(2)-UB1/2OK and SYN1(2)-UB1/2FF inputs are related to the busbar

voltage and the SYN1(2)-ULN1/2OK and SYN1(2)-ULN1/2FF inputs are related to
the line voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs or function outputs that indicate
the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of
a fuse failure, the energizing check functions are blocked. The synchronism check
requires full voltage on both sides and will be blocked automatically in the event of
fuse failures.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts
B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select
between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 2 is closed
and the disconnector connected to bus 1 is opened the bus 2 voltage is used. All other
combinations use the bus 1 voltage. The Outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively
indicate the selected Bus voltage.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the fuse for Bus 1. UB2OK-UB2FF
supervises the fuse for Bus 2 and ULNOK-ULNFF supervises the fuse for the Line
voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used
dependent on the available signal. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage
source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected
bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be
blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure
231.

460 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

B1QOPEN
B1SEL
B1QCLD AND

B2QOPEN B2SEL
1
B2QCLD AND

AND invalidSelection

bus1Voltage
busVoltage
bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR
AND selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
UB2FF OR USELFAIL
AND

ULN1OK
ULN1FF OR

BLOCK

en05000779.vsd

Figure 231: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit
breaker with double busbars

Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with 1½ breaker schemes two Synchrocheck functions must be used in the
IED (three for two IEDs in a complete bay). Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker
and the Tie breakers is described.

This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the Synchrocheck
(Synchronism and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side
of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either
to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the arrangement.

Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD,

LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors
respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The Outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL
will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1
voltage.

The fuse supervision is connected to ULNOK-ULNFF etc. and with alternative

Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available for each of fuse (MCB).

The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 on one side and the other
side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2. Four different output combinations are
possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 461

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

• The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

• The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1
circuit breaker is closed.
• The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
• The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2
Circuit breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If
a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set.
This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This
output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.The
function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in
232 and for the tie circuit breaker in 233

462 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD

B1QOPEN
LN2SEL
B1QCLD AND AND

OR
B2SEL
LN2QOPEN
LN2QCLD AND
AND invalidSelection
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD AND

line1Voltage
lineVoltage
line2Voltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK
UB1FF OR

OR
UB2OK AND
AND selectedFuseOK
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000780.vsd

Figure 232: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 463

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

LN1QOPEN
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD AND
B1SEL
1

B1QOPEN AND
AND
B1QCLD AND

line1Voltage
busVoltage
bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2SEL
LN2QCLD AND
B2SEL
1
OR invalidSelection
B2QOPEN AND
AND
B2QCLD AND

line2Voltage
lineVoltage
bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR

OR
UB2OK AND selectedFuseOK
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000781.vsd

Figure 233: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.

11.1.3 Function block

The Synchrocheck function block is shown in 234. Tables describing the inputs,
outputs and setting parameters of this function are presented in the following sections
of this document. Refer to the “Application manual” for the use of inputs and outputs
in your particular application.

464 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

SYN1-
SESRSYN_25
U3PBB1 SYNOK
U3PBB2 AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1 AUTOENOK
U3PLN2 MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN TSTENOK
B1QCLD USELFAIL
B2QOPEN B1SEL
B2QCLD B2SEL
LN1QOPEN LN1SEL
LN1QCLD LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD SYNFAIL
UB1OK UOKSYN
UB1FF UDIFFSYN
UB2OK FRDIFSYN
UB2FF FRDIFFOK
ULN1OK FRDERIVA
ULN1FF UOKSC
ULN2OK UDIFFSC
ULN2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG UDIFFME
AENMODE FRDIFFME
MENMODE PHDIFFME
MODEAEN
MODEMEN

en06000534.vsd

Figure 234: SYN function block

11.1.4 Input and output signals

Table 259: Input signals for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block
Signal Description
U3PBB1 Group signal for voltage input busbar 1
U3PBB2 Group signal for voltage input busbar 2
U3PLN1 Group signal for voltage input line 1
U3PLN2 Group signal for voltage input line 2
BLOCK General block
BLKSYNCH Block synchronizing
BLKSC Block synchro check
BLKENERG Block energizing check
B1QOPEN Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
B1QCLD Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
B2QOPEN Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
B2QCLD Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
LN1QOPEN Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 465

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
LN1QCLD Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LN2QOPEN Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
LN2QCLD Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
UB1OK Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE Input for setting of manual energizing mode

Table 260: Output signals for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block
Signal Description
SYNOK Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY Manual synchro check OK test output
TSTENOK Energizing check OK test output
USELFAIL Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL Bus1 selected
B2SEL Bus2 selected
LN1SEL Line1 selected
LN2SEL Line2 selected
SYNPROGR Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL Synchronizing failed
UOKSYN Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits
UDIFFSYN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
Table continued on next page

466 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Signal Description
FRDIFSYN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation
FRDIFFM Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation
PHDIFFM Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation
UDIFFME Calculated difference in voltage
FRDIFFME Calculated difference in frequency
PHDIFFME Calculated difference of phase angle
MODEAEN Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN Selected mode for manual energizing

11.1.5 Setting parameters

Table 261: Basic parameter group settings for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
SelPhaseBus1 phase1 - phase2 - Select phase for bus1
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
SelPhaseBus2 phase1 - phase2 - Select phase for bus2
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
SelPhaseLine1 phase1 - phase2 - Select phase for line1
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
SelPhaseLine2 phase1 - phase2 - Select phase for line2
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 467

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

CBConfig No voltage sel. - No voltage sel. - Select CB
Double bus configuration
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB
UBase 0.001 - 9999.999 0.001 400.000 kV Base voltage in kV
PhaseShift -180 - 180 5 0 Deg Phase shift
URatio 1.000 0.001 0.040 - 25.000 - Voltage ratio
OperationSynch Off - Off - Operation for
On synchronizing
function Off/On
UHighBusSynch 50.0 - 120.0 1.0 80.0 %UB Voltage high limit bus
for synchronizing in %
of UBase
UHighLineSynch 50.0 - 120.0 1.0 80.0 %UB Voltage high limit line
for synchronizing in %
of UBase
UDiffSynch 2.0 - 50.0 1.0 10.0 %UB Voltage difference
limit for synchronizing
in % of UBase
FreqDiffMin 0.003 - 0.250 0.001 0.010 Hz Minimum frequency
difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 - 0.250 0.001 0.200 Hz Maximum frequency
difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 - 0.500 0.001 0.300 Hz/s Maximum allowed
frequency rate of
change
tBreaker 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.080 s Closing time of the
breaker
tClosePulse 0.050 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Breaker closing pulse
duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 600.00 s Resets synch if no
close has been made
before set time
tMinSynch 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Minimum time to
accept synchronizing
conditions
OperationSC Off - On - Operation for
On synchronism check
function Off/On
UHighBusSC 50.0 - 120.0 1.0 80.0 %UB Voltage high limit bus
for synchrocheck in %
of UBase
UHighLineSC 50.0 - 120.0 1.0 80.0 %UB Voltage high limit line
for synchrocheck in %
of UBase
UDiffSC 2.0 - 50.0 1.0 15.0 %UB Voltage difference
limit in % of UBase
Table continued on next page

468 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

FreqDiffA 0.003 - 1.000 0.001 0.010 Hz Frequency difference
limit between bus and
line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 - 1.000 0.001 0.010 Hz Frequency difference
limit between bus and
line Manual
PhaseDiffA 5.0 - 90.0 1.0 25.0 Deg Phase angle
difference limit
between bus and line
Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 - 90.0 1.0 25.0 Deg Phase angle
difference limit
between bus and line
Manual
tSCA 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Time delay output for
synchrocheck Auto
tSCM 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Time delay output for
synchrocheck Manual
AutoEnerg Off - DBLL - Automatic energizing
DLLB check mode
DBLL
Both
ManEnerg Off - Both - Manual energizing
DLLB check mode
DBLL
Both
ManEnergDBDL Off - Off - Manual dead bus,
On dead line energizing
UHighBusEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 1.0 80.0 %UB Voltage high limit bus
for energizing check
in % of UBase
UHighLineEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 1.0 80.0 %UB Voltage high limit line
for energizing check
in % of UBase
ULowBusEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 1.0 40.0 %UB Voltage low limit bus
for energizing check
in % of UBase
ULowLineEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 1.0 40.0 %UB Voltage low limit line
for energizing check
in % of UBase
UMaxEnerg 50.0 - 180.0 1.0 115.0 %UB Maximum voltage for
energizing in % of
UBase
tAutoEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Time delay for
automatic energizing
check
tManEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Time delay for manual
energizing check

11.1.6 Technical data

REL 670 Technical reference manual 469

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Table 262: Synchronizing, synchrocheck check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -

Voltage ratio, Ubus/Uline (0.20-5.00)% of Ubase -

Voltage high limit for (50.0-120.0)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

synchrocheck ± 1.0% of U at U >Ur

Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -

Frequency difference limit (0.003-1.000) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
between bus and line
Phase angle difference limit (5.0-90.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
between bus and line
Voltage difference limit between (2.0-50.0)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
bus and line
Time delay output for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
synchrocheck
Voltage high limit for energizing (50.0-120.0)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
check ± 1.0% of U at U >Ur

Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -

Voltage low limit for energizing
check
Reset ratio, voltage low limit
Maximum voltage for energizing
(10.0-80.0)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
< 105% -
(80.0-140.0)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
± 1.0% of U at U >Ur

Time delay for energizing check (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

Operate time for synchrocheck 160 ms typically -
function
Operate time for energizing 80 ms typically -
function

11.2 Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Function block name: ARx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 79
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SMBRREC O->I

11.2.1 Introduction
The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing for
single or multi-breaker applications.

470 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Up to five reclosing attempts can be programmed. The first attempt can be single-,
two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase faults respectively.

Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A

priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close
if the fault proved to be transient.

Each autoreclosing function can be configured to co-operate with a synchrocheck

function.

11.2.2 Principle of operation

11.2.2.1 Logic Diagrams

The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of
the functionality.

11.2.2.2 Auto-reclosing operation Off and On

Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters
and through external control. With the setting Operation=ON, the function is
activated while with the setting Operation=OFF the function is deactivated. With the
setting Operation=External ctrl, the activation/deactivation is made by input signal
pulses, for example from a control system.

When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high).
Other input conditions such as CBPOS and CBREADY must also be fulfilled. At this
point the automatic recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output
signal READY on the AR function block is activated (high).

11.2.2.3 Auto-reclosing mode selection

The Auto-reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode=3phase(0),1/2/3ph(1),

1/2ph(2),1ph+1*2ph(3),1/2ph+1*3ph(4)1ph+1*2+3ph(5) The selected mode can be
read as integer as per above list on output MODE.

As an alternative to setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, e.g.

from function block B16I (BAxx respBBxx) to input MODEINT

Following integers shall be used. 1=3phase,2=1/2/3ph,3=1/2ph,4=1ph+1*2ph,

5=1/2ph+1*3ph or 5=1ph+1*2/3ph.

When INTZERO from Fixed signal function block is connected to the input
MODEINT the parameter setting selected will be valid.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 471

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.2.2.4 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle

The usual way in which to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when a
line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. Should
it be necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for
different power system configurations or during tripping at different protection
stages, the input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing) can also be used.

For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be met.

They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are: a) CBREADY, CB ready for a
reclosing cycle, e.g. charged operating gear, b) CBPOS to ensure that the CB was
closed when the line fault occurred and start was applied, c) No blocking or inhibit
signal shall be present. After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal
signal “Started” is set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal.

To start auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals,

one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs CBPOS and START and
set a parameter StartByCBOpen = ON and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally
closed, 52b). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip
commands to input INHIBIT.

The logic for switching the auto-recloser ON/OFF and the starting of the reclosing is
shown in figure 235. The following should be considered.

• Setting Operation can be set to Off, External ctrl or ON. External ctrl offers the
possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF,
communication commands to the same inputs etc.
• Autoreclose AR is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and
Communication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function
must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both
alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function.
START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes its first
attempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
• Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time
before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to
perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS and
CBREADY.

472 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Operation:On

Operation:Off

Operation:External Ctrl
OR
ON AND SETON
AND S
OR
OFF AND R

START
STARTHS OR
OR initiate
autoInitiate

Additional conditions
TRSOTF AND

start
120 ms
CBREADY AND
t AND
AND S
tCBClosedMin
CBPOS CB Closed
t R

AND
Blocking conditions READY
AND
OR
Inhibit condistions

count 0

en05000782.vsd

Figure 235: Auto-reclosing Off/On and start

11.2.2.5 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1

It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one
extension time. There are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase auto-
reclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied,
and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto-
reclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated
in connection with the start, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three-phase
reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-
speed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is activated by
input STARTHS.

An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal
shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for
permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time
difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time
can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended
t1 = On and the input PLCLOST.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 473

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.2.2.6 Long trip signal

In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The
user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the
auto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off. A long
trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input
INHIBIT.

Extended t1

PLCLOST Extend t1
initiate AND OR AND
AND
tTrip
t
AND
start

long duration
AND
(block AR)

en05000783.vsd

Figure 236: Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection

Reclosing checks and the reclaimreset timer

When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions
must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals
are exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In
three-phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is
possible to use a synchronism check function in the same physical device or an
external one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing
function input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can
be set to TRUE (set high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchro-
check function to a permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchro-
check, or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on.
At single-phase, two-phase reclosing and at three-phase high-speed reclosing started
by STARTHS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input is
disregarded.

By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the

readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing
command. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready
for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be complied with after the

474 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

tripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was

however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is
prepared for a Close-Open sequence.

The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time
interval, tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted
and blocked.

The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which
the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as
a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing
command is given.

A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in
the reclosing sequence.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 475

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

t1 1Ph
"AR Open time" timers
t

From logic for OR 1P2PTO

t1 2Ph
reclosing t
programs
1P2PTO t1 3Ph HS
t
3PHSTO
3PHSTO
3PT1TO
t1 3Ph
3PT2TO t
3PT1TO
3PT3TO OR
AND
3PT4TO OR Pulse AR
3PT5TO AND

SYNC
initiate AND Blocking X
CBREADY AND OR

AR State
tSync Control
AND t
COUNTER
0 Shot 0
CL Shot 1
1
2 Shot 2
3 Shot 3
tReclaim
Pulse AR (above) AND t R 4 Shot 4
OR Shot 5
5
TR2P LOGIC Reclaim Timer On
TR3P reclosing
1PT1
programs
start 2PT1
initiate 3PHS INPROGR
Shot 0 3PT1 OR
Shot 1 3PT2
Shot 2
Shot 3 3PT3
Shot 4
Shot 5 3PT4
PERMIT1P
3PT5
PREP3P
1
Y Blocking tInhibit
OR Inhibit Y
INHIBIT t

en05000784.vsd

Figure 237: Reclosing Reclaim and Inhibit timers

Pulsing of the CB closing command

The CB closing command, CLOSECB is a pulse with a duration set by parameter
tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting
described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter

476 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

CutPulse=On. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut
(interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 238

When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is

incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number
of reclosing commands issued.

tPulse
pulse
**) AND CLOSECB
OR
initiate
50 ms

1PT1 AND COUNT1P

counter

2PT1 AND
counter
COUNT2P

3PT1 AND COUNT3P1

counter

3PT2 AND COUNT3P2

counter

3PT3 AND COUNT3P3

counter

3PT4 AND COUNT3P4

counter

3PT5 AND COUNT3P5

counter

counter COUNTAR
RSTCOUNT

**) Only if "CutPulse" = On

en05000785.vsd

Figure 238: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters

Transient fault
After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set
time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.

Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal

If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal START
or TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The
timers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the
number of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will

REL 670 Technical reference manual 477

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

be ended. After the reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but
the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing.
Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.

Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after
the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The
signal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The “unsuccessful“ signal can also
be made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should
then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not
respond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output
UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.

initiate
block start AND
OR UNSUCCL
AND S

shot 0
R

UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck

Pulse AR (Closing) OR tUnsucCl

AND
AND t
CBPOS CBclosed

eno5000786.vsd

Figure 239: Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing

Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence

The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing
shots (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the protection
functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter
AutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceed
without a new start.

478 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

tAutoContWait
t

AND

CLOSECB
AND
S Q

AND

CBPOS CBClosed
OR

initiate
START OR

en05000787.vsd

Figure 240: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5

StartInitiation of reclosing from CB open information

If a user wants to apply starting auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of from
protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is
selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to block
reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically one also set CBAuxContType =
NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed, 52b)
to inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open
an auto-reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and latched in the function,
subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs
to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent
reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 479

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

StartByCBOpen = On

START AND

STARTHS AND
start
³1
100 ms
AND

100 ms
AND

en05000788.vsd

Figure 241: Pulsing of the start inputs at "StartByCBOpen=On"

11.2.2.7 Time sequence diagrams

Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and
permanent faults are shown below in figures 242 to 245.

Fault
CB POS
Closed Open Closed
CB READY

START (Trip)
SYNC
tReclaim
READY

INPROG

1PT1

ACTIVE

CLOSE CB t1 1Ph tPulse

PREP3P

SUCCL
Time

en04000196.vsd

Figure 242: Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing

480 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Fault
CB POS Open
Closed Open C C
CB READY

START (Trip)

TR3P
SYNC

READY

INPROGR

3PT1 t1 3Ph

3PT2 t2 3Ph

ACTIVE tReclaim

CLOSE CB tPulse tPulse

PREP3P

UNSUCCL
Time

en04000197.vsd

Figure 243: Permanent fault. Three-phase trip. Two-shot reclosing

REL 670 Technical reference manual 481

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED
AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-START

AR01-TR3P

AR01-SYNC

AR01-READY

AR01-INPROGR

AR01-1PT1

AR01-T1

AR01-T2

AR01-CLOSECB t1s

AR01-P3P

AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim

en04000198.vsd

Figure 244: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase

single-shot reclosing

Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED
AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-START

AR01-TR3P

AR01-SYNC

AR01-READY

AR01-INPROGR

AR01-1PT1

AR01-T1

AR01-T2
t2
AR01-CLOSECB t1s

AR01-P3P

AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim

en04000199.vsd

Figure 245: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph,
two-shot reclosing

482 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.2.3 Function block

AR01-
SMBRREC_79
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON READY
BLKOFF ACTIVE
RESET SUCCL
INHIBIT UNSUCCL
START INPROGR
STARTHS 1PT1
TRSOTF 2PT1
SKIPHS 3PT1
ZONESTEP 3PT2
TR2P 3PT3
TR3P 3PT4
THOLHOLD 3PT5
CBREADY PERMIT1P
CBPOS PREP3P
PLCLOST CLOSECB
SYNC WFMASTER
WAIT COUNT1P
RSTCOUNT COUNT2P
MODEINT COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
MODE

en06000189.vsd

Figure 246: AR function block

11.2.4 Input and output signals

Table 263: Input signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block
Signal Description
ON Switches the AR On (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)
OFF Switches the AR Off (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)
BLKON Sets the AR in blocked state
BLKOFF Releases the AR from the blocked state
RESET Resets the AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
START Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal
STARTHS Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS
TRSOTF Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF
SKIPHS Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed shots
ZONESTEP Coordination between local AR and down stream devices
TR2P Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred
TR3P Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping occurred
THOLHOLD Hold the AR in wait state
CBREADY CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start / close
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 483

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
CBPOS Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open
PLCLOST Power line carrier or other form of permissive sigÂnal lost
SYNC Synchronizing check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts)
WAIT Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements)
RSTCOUNT Resets all counters
MODEINT Integer input used to set the reclosingMode, alternative to
setting

Table 264: Output signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCKED The AR is in blocked state
SETON The AR operation is switched on, operative
READY Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl
UNSUCCL Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim time
INPROGR Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open time
1PT1 Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
2PT1 Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
3PT1 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1
3PT2 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2
3PT3 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3
3PT4 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4
3PT5 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5
PERMIT1P Permit single-phase trip, inverse signal to PREP3P
PREP3P Prepare three-phase trip, control of the next trip operation
CLOSECB Closing command for CB
WFMASTER Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential reclosing
COUNT1P Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots
COUNT2P Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots
COUNT3P1 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1
COUNT3P2 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 2
COUNT3P3 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 3
COUNT3P4 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 4
COUNT3P5 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 5
COUNTAR Counting total number of reclosing shots
MODE Integer output for reclosing mode

484 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.2.5 Setting parameters

Table 265: Basic parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - External ctrl - Off, ExternalCtrl, On
External ctrl
On
ARMode 3 phase - 1/2/3ph - The AR mode
1/2/3ph selection e.g. 3ph,
1/2ph 1/3ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph
t1 1Ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Open time for shot 1,
single-phase
t1 3Ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 6.000 s Open time for shot 1,
delayed reclosing 3ph
t1 3PhHS 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Open time for shot 1,
high speed reclosing
3ph
tReclaim 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 60.00 s Duration of the
reclaim time
tSync 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Maximum wait time
for synchrocheck OK
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Maximum trip pulse
duration
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Duration of the circuit
breaker closing pulse
tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 5.00 s Min time that CB must
be closed before new
sequence allows
tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Wait time for CB
before indicating
Unsuccessful/
Successful
Priority None - None - Priority selection
Low between adjacent
High terminals None/Low/
High
tWaitForMaster 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 60.00 s Maximum wait time
for release from
Master

REL 670 Technical reference manual 485

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Table 266: Advanced parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
NoOfShots 1 - 1 - Max number of
2 reclosing shots 1-5
3
4
5
StartByCBOpen Off - Off - To be set ON if AR is
On to be started by CB
open position
CBAuxContType NormClosed - NormOpen - Select the CB aux
NormOpen contact type NC/NO
for CBPOS input
CBReadyType CO - CO - Select type of circuit
OCO breaker ready signal
CO/OCO
t1 2Ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Open time for shot 1,
two-phase
t2 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 2,
three-phase
t3 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 3,
three-phase
t4 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 4,
three-phase
t5 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 5,
three-phase
Extended t1 Off - Off - Extended open time
On at loss of permissive
channel Off/On
tExtended t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.500 s 3Ph Dead time is
extended with this
value at loss of perm
ch
tInhibit 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Inhibit reclosing reset
time
CutPulse Off - Off - Shorten closing pulse
On at a new trip Off/On
Follow CB Off - Off - Advance to next shot
On if CB has been closed
during dead time
AutoCont Off - Off - Continue with next
On reclosing-shot if
breaker did not close
tAutoContWait 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Wait time after close
command before
proceeding to next
shot
Table continued on next page

486 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

UnsucClByCBChk NoCBCheck - NoCBCheck - Unsuccessful closing
CB check signal obtained by
checking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl Off - Off - Block AR at
On unsuccessful
reclosing
ZoneSeqCoord Off - Off - Coordination of down
On stream devices to
local prot unit's AR

11.2.6 Technical data

Table 267: Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of autoreclosing shots 1-5 -
Number of autoreclosing programs 8 -
Autoreclosing open time:
shot 1 - t1 1Ph (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
shot 1 - t1 2Ph
shot 1 - t1 3PhHS
shot 1 - t1 3PhDld
shot 2 - t2 (0.00-6000.00) s
shot 3 - t3
shot 4 - t4
shot 5 - t5
Extended autorecloser open time (0.000-60.000) s
Autorecloser maximum wait time for (0.00-6000.00) s
sync
Maximum trip pulse duration (0.000-60.000) s
Inhibit reset time (0.000-60.000) s
Reclaim time (0.00-6000.00) s
Minimum time CB must be closed (0.00-6000.00) s
before AR becomes ready for
autoreclosing cycle
Circuit breaker closing pulse length (0.000-60.000) s
CB check time before unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s
Wait for master release (0.00-6000.00) s
Wait time after close command before (0.000-60.000) s
proceeding to next shot

REL 670 Technical reference manual 487

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.3 Apparatus control (APC)

11.3.1 Introduction
The apparatus control is a function for control and supervision of circuit breakers,
disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after
evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck,
operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

11.3.2 Principle of operation

A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor
bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the
apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic
sequences.

Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation

Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function module that handles
the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process
information used by higher-level control functions.

Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised
by one software module (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals
connected to a breaker and a disconnector are almost the same, the same software is
used to handle these two types of apparatuses.

The software module is connected to the physical process in the switchyard via an
interface module by means of a number of digital inputs and outputs. One type of
interface module is intended for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and another type is
intended for a disconnector or earthing switch (SXSWI). Four types of function blocks
are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the bay. These
function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the switchyard
configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration. These
four types are:

• Bay control QCBAY

• Switch controller SCSWI
• Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Circuit switch SXSWI

The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The function
blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl, to handle the local/remote switch, and the
function blocks QCRSV and RESIN, for the reservation function, also belong to the
apparatus control function. The principles of operation, function block, input and
output signals and setting parameters for all these functions are described below.

488 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.3.3 Bay control (QCBAY)

11.3.3.1 Introduction

This function is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. The bay
control function also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different
apparatuses within the bay.

11.3.3.2 Principle of operation

The functionality of the bay control function is not defined in the IEC 61850–8–1
standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node.

The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and
blocking conditions to other functions within the bay e.g. switch control functions,
voltage control functions and measurement functions.

Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions
are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote
level and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is normally situated on
the control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its
validity information are connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch
is mounted separately on the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O
boards.

When the local panel switch is in Off position all commands from remote and local
level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO
output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.

To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl are needed and connected to
QCBAY. For more information, see section "Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote,
LocRemControl)".

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source
To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch
position according to table 268. In addition, there is one configuration parameter that
affects the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-
switch position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), i.e. it is
permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the
external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of
switch, i.e. 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 489

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Table 268: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel switch PSTO value AllPSTOValid Possible locations that shall be able to
positions (configuration operate
parameter)
0 = Off 0 -- Not possible to operate
1 = Local 1 FALSE Local Panel
1 = Local 5 TRUE Local or Remote level without any priority
2 = Remote 2 FALSE Remote level
2 = Remote 5 TRUE Local or Remote level without any priority
3 = Faulty 3 -- Not possible to operate

Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide
the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured
within a complete bay.

The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

• Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs
related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC
61850–8–1). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected
and functional and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the UMT.

11.3.3.3 Function block

CB01-
QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID
BL_UPD
BL_CMD

en05000796.vsd

Figure 247: CB function block

490 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.3.3.4 Input and output signals

Table 269: Input signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block
Signal Description
LR_OFF External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position
LR_VALID Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD Steady signal to block the command

Table 270: Output signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block
Signal Description
PSTO The value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD The update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD The function is blocked for commands

11.3.3.5 Setting parameters

Table 271: General settings for the QCBAY (CB01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
AllPSTOValid Priority - Priority - The priority of
No priority originators

11.3.4 Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)

11.3.4.1 Introduction

The signals from the local LCD HMI or from an external local/remote switch are
applied via function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl to the Bay control
QCBAY function block. A parameter in function block LocalRemote is set to choose
if the switch signals are coming from the local LCD HMI or from an external hardware
switch connected via binary inputs.

11.3.4.2 Principle of operation

The function block LocalRemote handles the signals coming from the local/remote
switch. The connections are seen in figure 248, where the inputs on function block
LocalRemote are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When a
local LCD HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the

REL 670 Technical reference manual 491

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

configuration. The outputs from the LocalRemote function block control the output
PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on QCBAY.
LR01- CB01-
LocalRemote QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_VALID
BL_UPD
BL_CMD
LR02- CB02-
LocalRemote QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_VALID
BL_UPD
BL_CMD

LRC1-
LocRemControl
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12

en05000250.vsd

Figure 248: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local LCD HMI with
two bays and two screen pages

If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can
be different for the included bays. When the local LCD HMI is used the position of
the local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram
screen page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block LocRemControl
controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay
and screen page.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the UMT.

11.3.4.3 Function block

492 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

LR01-
LocalRemote
CT RLOFF OFF
LOCCT RL LOCAL
REMCT RL REMOT E
LHMICT RL VALID

en05000360.vsd

Figure 249: LR function block

LRC1-
LocRemControl
PST O1 HMICT R1
PST O2 HMICT R2
PST O3 HMICT R3
PST O4 HMICT R4
PST O5 HMICT R5
PST O6 HMICT R6
PST O7 HMICT R7
PST O8 HMICT R8
PST O9 HMICT R9
PST O10 HMICT R10
PST O11 HMICT R11
PST O12 HMICT R12

en05000361.vsd

Figure 250: LRC function block

11.3.4.4 Input and output signals

Table 272: Input signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block
Signal Description
CTRLOFF Disable control
LOCCTRL Local in control
REMCTRL Remote in control
LHMICTRL LHMI control

Table 273: Output signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block
Signal Description
OFF Control is disabled
LOCAL Local control is activated
REMOTE Remote control is activated
VALID Outputs are valid

REL 670 Technical reference manual 493

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Table 274: Input signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block
Signal Description
PSTO1 PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2 PSTO input channel 2
PSTO3 PSTO input channel 3
PSTO4 PSTO input channel 4
PSTO5 PSTO input channel 5
PSTO6 PSTO input channel 6
PSTO7 PSTO input channel 7
PSTO8 PSTO input channel 8
PSTO9 PSTO input channel 9
PSTO10 PSTO input channel 10
PSTO11 PSTO input channel 11
PSTO12 PSTO input channel 12

Table 275: Output signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block
Signal Description
HMICTR1 Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2 Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR3 Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR4 Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR5 Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR6 Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR7 Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR8 Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR9 Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR10 Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR11 Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR12 Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

11.3.4.5 Setting parameters

Table 276: Basic general settings for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - Internal LR-switch - Control mode for
External LR- internal/external LR-
switch switch

494 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.3.5 Switch controller (SCSWI)

11.3.5.1 Introduction

The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle
and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase switching devices.

11.3.5.2 Principle of operation

The function is provided with verification checks for the select - execute sequence,
i.e. checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The involved functions for
these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and
synchrocheck.

Command handling
Two types of command models can be used. The two command models are "direct
with enhanced security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security".
Which one of these two command models that are used is defined by the parameter
CtlModel. The meaning with "direct with enhanced security" model is that no select
is required. The meaning with "SBO with enhanced security" model is that a select
is required before execute.

In this function only commands with enhanced security is supported regarding

changing of the position. With enhanced security means that the command sequence
is supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision
of position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step
in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the
command sequence, the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the
enumerated variable "cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the
IEC61850 communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function
block and used for example at commissioning. The meaning of the cause signals can
be found in table 2.

There is not any relation between the command direction and the
actual position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is
possible to execute a close command.

Before an executing command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter

PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no
executing command is send. If the parameter is false the execution command is send
independent of the position value.

Evaluation of position
In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the

REL 670 Technical reference manual 495

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one-
phase switches, following principles will be applied:

All switches in open position: switch control position = open

All switches in close position:
One switch =open, two switches= close (or
inversely):
Any switch in intermediate position:
Any switch in bad state:
switch control position = close
switch control position = intermediate
switch control position = intermediate
switch control position = bad state

The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the
time stamp of the last changed phase when it goes to end position. When it goes to
intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.

In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change
position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and
is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance situation, i.e. the position
of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than the setting
tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.

In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values
from the switch modules XCBR/XSWI. At error the "cause" value with highest
priority is shown.

Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC61850 communication from the operator place.

The different blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of

position.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior
(IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected
and functional and configuration data is visible.

The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, i.e. no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.

Interaction with synchrochecksynchronism-check and synchronizing

functions
The switch controller works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the
synchronizing function SECRSYN. It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is

496 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

continuously in operation and gives the result to the SCSWI. The result from the
synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator
performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state
is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function,
the switch controller SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function
SXCBR.

When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, the SCSWI
will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send
the closing command to the SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled,
see figure 251. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of
the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function. The SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-
synchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 255.

SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE

SYNC_OK

START_SY

SY_INPRO
SECRSYN

CLOSE. CB
Synchro Synchronizing
Check function

en05000091.vsd

Figure 251: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SECRSYN (synchrocheck

and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams
The SCSWI function has timers for evaluating different time supervision conditions.
These timers are explained here.

The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, i.e. the time the operator has to perform the command execution
after the selection of the object to operate.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 497

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set

en05000092.vsd

Figure 252: tSelect

The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, i.e. the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation
granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.

select

reservation request RES_RQ

reservation granted RES_GRT

command termination
tResResponse t1>tResResponse, then
timer 1-of-n-control in 'cause'
t1 is set
en05000093.vsd

Figure 253: tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see figure 254.

498 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

execute command

position L1 open

close

position L2 open

close

position L3 open

close

cmd termination L1

cmd termination L2

cmd termination L3

cmd termination *

position open

close

tExecutionFB t1>tExecutionFB, then

timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set

* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample.

en05000094.vsd

Figure 254: tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true
at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will
not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck
conditions are not fulfilled.

execute command

SYNC_OK

tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY

SY_INPRO

tSynchronizing t2>tSynchronizing, then

t2 blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set

en05000095.vsd

Figure 255: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

REL 670 Technical reference manual 499

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Error handling
Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal
will be set with a value. Table 277 describes vendor specific cause values in addition
to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the “cause” are in
order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE
on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.

Table 277: Values for "cause" signal in priority order

Apparatus control Description
function
–22 wrongCTLModel
–23 blockedForCommand
–24 blocked-for-open-command
–25 blocked-for-close-command
–30 longOperationTime
–31 switch-not-start-moving
–32 persistent-intermediate-state
–33 switch-returned-to-initial-position
–34 switch-in-bad-state
–35 not-expected-final-position

11.3.5.3 Function block

CS01-
SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SELECTED
L_OPEN RES_RQ
L_CLOSE START_SY
AU_OPEN POSITION
AU_CLOSE OPENPOS
BL_CMD CLOSEPOS
RES_GRT POLEDISC
RES_EXT CMD_BLK
SY_INPRO L_CAUSE
SYNC_OK XOUT
EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE
XPOS1
XPOS2
XPOS3

en05000337.vsd

Figure 256: CS function block

11.3.5.4 Input and output signals

500 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Table 278: Input signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
PSTO Operator place selection
L_SEL Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE Used for local automation function
BL_CMD Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made
RES_EXT Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK Closing is permitted at set to true by the synchrocheck
EN_OPEN Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE Enables close operation
XPOS1 Group signal for XCBR input
XPOS2 Group signal for XCBR input
XPOS3 Group signal for XCBR input

Table 279: Output signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block
Signal Description
EXE_OP Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL Execute command for close direction
SELECTED The select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY Starts the synchronizing function
POSITION Position indication
OPENPOS Open position indication
CLOSEPOS Closed position indication
POLEDISC The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a set time
CMD_BLK Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE Latest value of the error indication during command
XOUT Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

11.3.5.5 Setting parameters

REL 670 Technical reference manual 501

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Table 280: Basic general settings for the SCSWI (CS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CtlModel Dir Norm - SBO Enh - Specifies the type for
SBO Enh (ABB) control model
Dir Norm (ABB) according to IEC
SBO Enh 61850
PosDependent Always permitted - Always permitted - Permission to operate
Not perm at 00/11 depending on the
position
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 30.000 s Max time between
select and execute
signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Allowed time from
reservation request to
reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 10.00 s Allowed time for
synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Supervision time to
get the signal
synchronizing in
progress
tExecutionFB 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 30.000 s Max time from
command execution
to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Allowed time to have
discrepancy between
the poles

11.3.6 Circuit breaker (SXCBR)

11.3.6.1 Introduction

The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform
the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form
of circuit breakers via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and
position.

11.3.6.2 Principle of operation

The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller,
protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another
IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block
conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions
indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution
command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate
"cause" value.

502 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The
counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from
a binary input or remotely from the operator place.

Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/
remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is
set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level.
If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is
permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position)
from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions
are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 257.

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd

Figure 257: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles
The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place,
protection functions, autoreclosure etc.

The blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate
command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate
command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior
(IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected
and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 503

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Substitution
The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will
then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by
the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When
substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating
and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted
values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 258 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

Figure 258: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 259 shows the principle of
the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute
output pulses.

504 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd

Figure 259: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has
elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has
elapsed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position
and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that
the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always
activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse
duration timer has elapsed.

An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in figure 260 .

REL 670 Technical reference manual 505

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd

Figure 260: Open command with open position indication

Error handling
Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal
will be set with a value. Table 281 describes vendor specific cause values in addition
to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the “cause” are in
order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE
on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.

Table 281: Vendor specific cause values for Apparatus control in priority order
Apparatus control Description
function
–22 wrongCTLModel
–23 blockedForCommand
–24 blocked-for-open-command
–25 blocked-for-close-command
–30 longOperationTime
–31 switch-not-start-moving
–32 persistent-intermediate-state
–33 switch-returned-to-initial-position
–34 switch-in-bad-state
–35 not-expected-final-position

506 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.3.6.3 Function block

XC01-
SXCBR
BLOCK GRPConABS1
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN GRPConABS2
CLOSE EXE_CL
BL_OPEN SUBSTED
BL_CLOSE OP_BLKD
BL_UPD CL_BLKD
POSOPEN UPD_BLKD
POSCLOSE POSITION
TR_OPEN OPENPOS
TR_CLOSE CLOSEPOS
RS_CNT TR_POS
XIN CNT_VAL
TERVALUE L_CAUSE
OSEVALUE
PENVALUE

en05000338.vsd

Figure 261: XC function block

11.3.6.4 Input and output signals

Table 282: Input signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
LR_SWI Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
TR_OPEN Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT Resets the operation counter
XIN Execution information from CSWI

Table 283: Output signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block
Signal Description
XPOS Group signal for XCBR output
EXE_OP Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL Executes the command for close direction
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 507

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
SUBSTED Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD The update of position indication is blocked
POSITION Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS Apparatus closed position
TR_POS Truck position indication
CNT_VAL The value of the operation counter
L_CAUSE Latest value of the error indication during command

11.3.6.5 Setting parameters

Table 284: Basic general settings for the SXCBR (XC01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Supervision time for
the apparatus to
move after a
command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Allowed time for
intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - Not adaptive - The output resets
Adaptive when a new correct
end position is
reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Output pulse length
for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Output pulse length
for close command

11.3.7 Circuit switch (SXSWI)

11.3.7.1 Introduction

The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform
the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form
of disconnectors or earthing switches via output boards and to supervise the switching
operation and position.

11.3.7.2 Principle of operation

The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller,
protection functions, autorecloser function or a 61850 client residing in another IED

508 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block
conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions
indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution
command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate
"cause" value.

The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The
counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from
a binary input or remotely from the operator place.

Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/
remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is
set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level.
If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is
permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position)
from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions
are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 262.

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd

Figure 262: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles
The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place,
protection functions, autoreclosure etc.

The blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate
command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate
command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior
(IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected
and functional and configuration data is visible.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 509

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will
then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by
the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When
substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating
and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted
values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 263 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

Figure 263: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 264 shows the principle of

510 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute
output pulses.

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd

Figure 264: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has
elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has
elapsed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position
and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that
the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always
activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse
duration timer has elapsed.

An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in figure 265.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 511

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd

Figure 265: Open command with open position indication

Error handling
Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal
will be set with a value. Table 285 describes vendor specific cause values in addition
to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the “cause” are in
order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE
on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.

Table 285: Values for "cause" signal in priority order

Apparatus control Description
function
–22 wrongCTLModel
–23 blockedForCommand
–24 blocked-for-open-command
–25 blocked-for-close-command
–30 longOperationTime
–31 switch-not-start-moving
–32 persistent-intermediate-state
–33 switch-returned-to-initial-position
–34 switch-in-bad-state
–35 not-expected-final-position

512 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.3.7.3 Function block

XS01-
SXSWI
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOPEN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENPOS
RS_CNT CLOSEPOS
XIN CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE

en05000339.vsd

Figure 266: XS function block

11.3.7.4 Input and output signals

Table 286: Input signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
LR_SWI Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
RS_CNT Resets the operation counter
XIN Execution information from CSWI

Table 287: Output signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block
Signal Description
XPOS Group signal for XSWI output
EXE_OP Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL Executes the command for close direction
SUBSTED Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD The update of position indication is blocked
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 513

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
POSITION Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL The value of the operation counter
L_CAUSE Latest value of the error indication during command

11.3.7.5 Setting parameters

Table 288: Basic general settings for the SXSWI (XS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 3.000 s Supervision time for
the apparatus to
move after a
command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 15.000 s Allowed time for
intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - Not adaptive - The output resets
Adaptive when a new correct
end position is
reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Output pulse length
for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Output pulse length
for close command
SwitchType Load Break - Disconnector - Switch Type
Disconnector
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing
Switch

11.3.8 Bay reserve (QCRSV)

11.3.8.1 Introduction

The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking

information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.

11.3.8.2 Principle of operation

The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. The function starts to operate in
two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if there
is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the function
if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input
signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller SCWI. The signals for

514 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function
block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are
connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.

The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay
only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no
reservation request RES_BAYS is created.

Reservation request of own bay

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know
which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input
signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the
requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay
can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by
itself or another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED.

If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx
(where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch
controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset
and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation of other bays

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that
requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it
will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for
their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by
activating the output RES_BAYS.

When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the
output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-n-
control" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation request from another bay

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding
function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into
the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA
in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the
acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay
already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.

Blocking and overriding of reservation

If the function QCRSV is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is
blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This
can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent
operations from another operator place at the same time.

The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE
input signal, i.e. reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 515

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Bay with more than eight apparatuses

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay i.e. use of up to eight apparatuses,
the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.

If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional
QCRSV. The both functions QCRSV have to communicate and this is done through
the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to figure 10. If more then one
QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must
be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.

CR01-
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

CR02-
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_BAYS
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 ³1
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 ACK_TO_B
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 ³1
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B RESERVED
³1
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

en05000088.vsd

Figure 267: Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

516 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.3.8.3 Function block

CR01-
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT 1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT 2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT 3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT 4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT 5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT 6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT 7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT 8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_T O_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DAT A EXCH_OUT

en05000340.vsd

Figure 268: CR function block

11.3.8.4 Input and output signals

Table 289: Input signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block
Signal Description
EXCH_IN Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks
RES_RQ1 Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ2 Signal for app. 2 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ3 Signal for app. 3 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ4 Signal for app. 4 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ5 Signal for app. 5 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ6 Signal for app. 6 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ7 Signal for app. 7 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ8 Signal for app. 8 that requests to do a reservation
BLK_RES Reservation is not possible and the output signals are reset
OVERRIDE Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA Reservation data coming from function block ResIn

Table 290: Output signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block
Signal Description
RES_GRT1 Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT2 Reservation is made and the app. 2 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT3 Reservation is made and the app. 3 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT4 Reservation is made and the app. 4 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT5 Reservation is made and the app. 5 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT6 Reservation is made and the app. 6 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT7 Reservation is made and the app. 7 is allowed to operate
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 517

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
RES_GRT8 Reservation is made and the app. 8 is allowed to operate
RES_BAYS Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved
RESERVED Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks

11.3.8.5 Setting parameters

Table 291: General settings for the QCRSV (CR01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tCancelRes 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 10.000 s Supervision time for
canceling the
reservation
ParamRequest1 Other bays res. - Only own bay res. - Reservation of the
Only own bay res. own bay only, at
selection of apparatus
1
ParamRequest2 Other bays res. - Only own bay res. - Reservation of the
Only own bay res. own bay only, at
selection of apparatus
2
ParamRequest3 Other bays res. - Only own bay res. - Reservation of the
Only own bay res. own bay only, at
selection of apparatus
3
ParamRequest4 Other bays res. - Only own bay res. - Reservation of the
Only own bay res. own bay only, at
selection of apparatus
4
ParamRequest5 Other bays res. - Only own bay res. - Reservation of the
Only own bay res. own bay only, at
selection of apparatus
5
ParamRequest6 Other bays res. - Only own bay res. - Reservation of the
Only own bay res. own bay only, at
selection of apparatus
6
ParamRequest7 Other bays res. - Only own bay res. - Reservation of the
Only own bay res. own bay only, at
selection of apparatus
7
ParamRequest8 Other bays res. - Only own bay res. - Reservation of the
Only own bay res. own bay only, at
selection of apparatus
8

518 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.3.9 Reservation input (RESIN)

11.3.9.1 Introduction

The function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays. The
number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances
are available).

11.3.9.2 Principle of operation

The reservation input function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The logic
diagram in figure 269 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the
function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals
transferred over the station bus from another bay.

EXCH_IN INT

BIN

ACK_F_B
&
FutureUse
³1

ANY_ACK
BAY_ACK ³1

VALID_TX
&

BAY_VAL ³1

RE_RQ_B
³1

BAY_RES &
V _RE_RQ
³1

BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT

en05000089.vsd

Figure 269: Logic diagram for RESIN

Figure 270 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules
in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the
reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions
block are connected to the module QCRSV that handles the reservation function in
the own bay. The value to the input EXCH_IN on the first RESIN module in the chain

REL 670 Technical reference manual 519

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

has the integer value 5. This is provided by the use of instance number one of the
function block RESIN (RE01-), where the input EXCH_IN is set to #5, but is hidden
for the user.
RE01-
RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
Bay 1 BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

RE02-
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay 2 BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

REnn-
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
CR01-
Bay n BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B QCRSV
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT RES_DATA

en05000090.vsd

Figure 270: Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN

11.3.9.3 Function block

RE01-
RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

en05000341.vsd

Figure 271: RE function block

11.3.9.4 Input and output signals

Table 292: Input signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block
Signal Description
BAY_ACK Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from this bay
BAY_VAL The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay are valid
BAY_RES Request from other bay to reserve this bay

520 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Table 293: Output signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block
Signal Description
ACK_F_B All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay
ANY_ACK Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay
VALID_TX The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays are valid
RE_RQ_B Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks

11.3.9.5 Setting parameters

Table 294: Basic general settings for the RESIN (RE01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FutureUse Bay in use - Bay in use - The bay for this ResIn
Bay future use block is for future use

11.4 Interlocking

11.4.1 Introduction
The interlocking function blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching
devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material
damage and/or accidental human injury.

Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The function is distributed to each control
IED and not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the
IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.

The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the
installation at any given time.

11.4.2 Principle of operation

The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED.
The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function.
Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.

The reservation function (see section "Apparatus control (APC)") is used to ensure
that HV apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap,
which arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the
communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the

REL 670 Technical reference manual 521

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

interlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until

the operation is performed.

After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on
the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other
operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching
devices that may affect it.

The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay.
The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and
the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard
interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking
signals can include the following kind of information:

• Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

• Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
• External release (to add special conditions for release)
• Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
• Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as

shown in figure 272.

Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI

Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR
module

Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

Figure 272: Interlocking module on bay level.

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:

• Unearthed busbars
• Busbars connected together
• Other bays connected to a busbar
• Received data from other bays is valid

522 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Figure 273 illustrates the data exchange principle.

Station bus

Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler

Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Disc QB1 and QB2 closed WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn

...
WA1 not earthed WA1 not earthed
WA2 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

..
WA1

WA2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QC1 QC2

QA1 QA1 QA1

QB9 QB9

en05000494.vsd

Figure 273: Data exchange between interlocking modules.

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control terminal, or input
board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release
for execution of the function will not be given.

On the station HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.

For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:

• The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and

earthing switches are always identical.
• Earthing switches on the line feeder end, e.g. rapid earthing switches, are
normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they
are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line
voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no
line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set
to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
• Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections e.g. without load/
voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, i.e. the status
of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing switch operation is
concerned.
• Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems.
Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit
breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed
connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely
isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections,
or if they are earthed on both sides.
• Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its
bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing

REL 670 Technical reference manual 523

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between

CB and transformer.
• Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar
transfer is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of

standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the
interlocking conditions are available:

• Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

• Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC
• Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO
• Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS
• Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC
• Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES
• Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B
• 1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customers specific

requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration
tool PCM 600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these
specific conditions.

The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the
transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending
in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.

11.4.3 Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)

11.4.3.1 Introduction

The function SCILO is used to enable a switching operation if the interlocking

conditions permit. The function itself does not provide any interlocking functionality.
The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing the
interlocking logic.

11.4.3.2 Principle of operation

The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if
the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined
end position e.g. open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is
false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time
only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the
interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit
breaker/switch SXCBR/SXSWI and the enable signals come from the interlocking
logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller SCSWI. One
instance per switching device is needed.

524 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&

OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd

Figure 274: SCILO function logic diagram

11.4.3.3 Function block

CI01-
SCILO
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN

en05000359.vsd

Figure 275: CI function block

11.4.3.4 Input and output signals

Table 295: Input signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block
Signal Description
POSOPEN Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Table 296: Output signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block
Signal Description
EN_OPEN Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is enabled
EN_CLOSE Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is enabled

REL 670 Technical reference manual 525

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.4.4 Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE)

11.4.4.1 Introduction

The interlocking module ABC_LINE is used for a line connected to a double busbar
arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 276. The module can also be
used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar
arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

QB9
QC9

en04000478.vsd

Figure 276: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

526 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.4.4.2 Function block

IF01-
ABC_LINE
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLIT L
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9IT L
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1IT L
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2IT L
QB7_OP QB7REL
QB7_CL QB7IT L
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1IT L
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2IT L
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9IT L
QC11_OP QB1OPT R
QC11_CL QB1CLT R
QC21_OP QB2OPT R
QC21_CL QB2CLT R
QC71_OP QB7OPT R
QC71_CL QB7CLT R
BB7_D_OP QB12OPT R
BC_12_CL QB12CLT R
BC_17_OP VPQB1T R
BC_17_CL VPQB2T R
BC_27_OP VPQB7T R
BC_27_CL VPQB12T R
VOLT _OFF
VOLT _ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4

en05000357.vsd

Figure 277: IF function block

REL 670 Technical reference manual 527

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.4.4.3 Logic diagram

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QA1CLREL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1 QA1CLITL
& 1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB9REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
&
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2

en04000527.vsd

528 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

VPQA1 QB1REL
& ³1
VPQB2
VPQC1 1 QB1ITL
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES

QB1_EX1

VPQB2 &
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB1_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES

QB1EX3

en04000528.vsd

REL 670 Technical reference manual 529

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

VPQA1 QB2REL
& ³1
VPQB1
VPQC1 1 QB2ITL
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX1

VPQB1 &
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB2_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX3

en04000529.vsd

530 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

VPQC9 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D 1 QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB

BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1

VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
&
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL

EXDU_BC

QB7_EX2

REL 670 Technical reference manual 531

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

VPQA1
VPQB2
& >1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
VPQB9 & 1
QC2REL
QB1_OP
QB2_OP QC2ITL
1
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT &
QC9ITL
QB7_OP 1
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531.vsd

532 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000532.vsd

11.4.4.4 Input and output signals

Table 297: Input signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB9_OP QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL QB9 is in closed position
QB1_OP QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL QB7 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QC9_OP QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL QC9 is in closed position
QC11_OP Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
QC71_OP Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 533

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
QC71_CL Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position
BB7_D_OP Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are
open
BC_12_CL A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA2
BC_17_OP No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA7
BC_17_CL A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA7
BC_27_OP No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and
WA7
BC_27_CL A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and
WA7
VOLT_OFF There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
VP_BB7_D Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid
VP_BC_12 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
VP_BC_17 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are
valid
VP_BC_27 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are
valid
EXDU_ES No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches
EXDU_BPB No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QB9_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB7_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX4 External condition for apparatus QB7

534 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Table 298: Output signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB9REL Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QB1REL Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC9REL Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR QB2 is in closed position
QB7OPTR QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)

11.4.5 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)

11.4.5.1 Introduction

The interlocking module ABC_BC is used for a bus-coupler bay connected to a double
busbar arrangement according to figure 278. The module can also be used for a single
busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without
transfer busbar.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 535

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB20 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

en04000514.vsd

Figure 278: Switchyard layout ABC_BC

11.4.5.2 Function block

IG01-
ABC_BC
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPIT L
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLIT L
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1IT L
QB7_OP QB2REL
QB7_CL QB2IT L
QB20_OP QB7REL
QB20_CL QB7IT L
QC1_OP QB20REL
QC1_CL QB20IT L
QC2_OP QC1REL
QC2_CL QC1IT L
QC11_OP QC2REL
QC11_CL QC2IT L
QC21_OP QB1OPT R
QC21_CL QB1CLT R
QC71_OP QB220OT R
QC71_CL QB220CT R
BBT R_OP QB7OPT R
BC_12_CL QB7CLT R
VP_BBT R QB12OPT R
VP_BC_12 QB12CLT R
EXDU_ES BC12OPT R
EXDU_12 BC12CLT R
EXDU_BC BC17OPT R
QA1O_EX1 BC17CLT R
QA1O_EX2 BC27OPT R
QA1O_EX3 BC27CLT R
QB1_EX1 VPQB1T R
QB1_EX2 VQB220T R
QB1_EX3 VPQB7T R
QB2_EX1 VPQB12T R
QB2_EX2 VPBC12T R
QB2_EX3 VPBC17T R
QB20_EX1 VPBC27T R
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2

en05000350.vsd

Figure 279: IG function block

536 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.4.5.3 Logic diagram

ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB20_CL =1 VPQB20
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1 QA1OPITL
QA1O_EX1 1
VPQB20
QB20_OP &
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP &
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQB7 & 1
VPQB20
en04000533.vsd

REL 670 Technical reference manual 537

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
&
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000534.vsd

538 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
&
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000535.vsd

REL 670 Technical reference manual 539

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

VPQA1
VPQB20 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB7ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
&
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7 QB20REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB20ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
&
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2

en04000536.vsd

540 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB20 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB7
QC2REL
VPQB2
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB20_OP QB220OTR
QB2_OP & QB220CTR
VPQB20 1
VQB220TR
VPQB2 &
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
QA1_OP BC12OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC12CLTR
QB20_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC12TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB20
QA1_OP BC17OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC17CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC17TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB7
QA1_OP BC27OPTR
QB2_OP >1 BC27CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC27TR
VPQB2 &
VPQB7
en04000537.vsd

11.4.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 299: Input signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL QB1 is in closed position
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 541

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
QB2_OP QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL QB7 is in closed position
QB20_OP QB20 is in open position
QB20_CL QB20 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QC11_OP Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
QC71_OP Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position
QC71_CL Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position
BBTR_OP No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA2
VP_BBTR Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer
VP_BC_12 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
EXDU_ES No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches
EXDU_12 No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2
busbars
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay
QA1O_EX1 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB20_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB20_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB7_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB7

542 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Table 300: Output signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1OPREL Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QB20REL Switching of QB20 is allowed
QB20ITL Switching of QB20 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR QB1 is in closed position
QB220OTR QB2 and QB20 are in open position
QB220CTR QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position
QB7OPTR QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
BC12OPTR No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and
WA2
BC12CLTR Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2
BC17OPTR No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and
WA7
BC17CLTR Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7
BC27OPTR No connection via the own bus coupler between WA2 and
WA7
BC27CLTR Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7
VPQB1TR Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VQB220TR Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 543

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
VPBC12TR Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
VPBC17TR Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are
valid
VPBC27TR Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are
valid

11.4.6 Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)

11.4.6.1 Introduction

The interlocking module AB_TRAFO is used for a transformer bay connected to a

double busbar arrangement according to figure 280. The module is used when there
is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the module
ABC_LINE can be used. This module can also be used in single busbar arrangements.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1

QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2

QC3

QA2
QA2 and QC4 are not
QC4 used in this interlocking

QB3 QB4

en04000515.vsd

Figure 280: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

544 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.4.6.2 Function block

IE01-
AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLIT L
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1IT L
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2IT L
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1IT L
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2IT L
QB3_OP QB1OPT R
QB3_CL QB1CLT R
QB4_OP QB2OPT R
QB4_CL QB2CLT R
QC3_OP QB12OPT R
QC3_CL QB12CLT R
QC11_OP VPQB1T R
QC11_CL VPQB2T R
QC21_OP VPQB12T R
QC21_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
QA1_EX1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3

en05000358.vsd

Figure 281: IE function block

REL 670 Technical reference manual 545

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.4.6.3 Logic diagram

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB3_OP
QB3_CL =1 VPQB3
QB4_OP
QB4_CL =1 VPQB4
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQC1 & 1

VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL >1
QC2_CL
QC3_CL &
QA1_EX1

en04000538.vsd

546 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000539.vsd

REL 670 Technical reference manual 547

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000540.vsd

548 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB3
QC2REL
VPQB4
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000541.vsd

11.4.6.4 Input and output signals

Table 301: Input signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QB3_OP QB3 is in open position
QB3_CL QB3 is in closed position
QB4_OP QB4 is in open position
QB4_CL QB4 is in closed position
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 549

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
BC_12_CL A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA2
VP_BC_12 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
EXDU_ES No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QA1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX3 External condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 302: Output signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR QB2 is in closed position
QB12OPTR QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)

550 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.4.7 Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)

11.4.7.1 Introduction

The interlocking module A1A2_BS is used for one bus-section circuit breaker
between section 1 and 2 according to figure 282. The module can be used for different
busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QB1 QB2 QC2

QA1

QC3 QC4

en04000516.vsd
A1A2_BS

Figure 282: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

11.4.7.2 Function block

IH01-
A1A2_BS
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPIT L
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLIT L
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1IT L
QC3_OP QB2REL
QC3_CL QB2IT L
QC4_OP QC3REL
QC4_CL QC3IT L
S1QC1_OP QC4REL
S1QC1_CL QC4IT L
S2QC2_OP S1S2OPT R
S2QC2_CL S1S2CLT R
BBT R_OP QB1OPT R
VP_BBT R QB1CLT R
EXDU_12 QB2OPT R
EXDU_ES QB2CLT R
QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2T R
QA1O_EX2 VPQB1T R
QA1O_EX3 VPQB2T R
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

en05000348.vsd

Figure 283: IH function block

REL 670 Technical reference manual 551

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.4.7.3 Logic diagram

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL =1 VPS1QC1
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL =1 VPS2QC2
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1
QA1O_EX1 QA1OPITL
1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
&
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
&
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3

VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC4 QB1ITL
1
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC3
VPS1QC1
&
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000542.vsd

552 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

VPQA1
VPQC3 QB2REL
VPQC4 & >1
QB2ITL
VPS2QC2 1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
&
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB1 QC3REL
VPQB2 QC3ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC4REL
QB2_OP
QC4ITL
1

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR

QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP S1S2OPTR
QB2_OP >1 S1S2CLTR
QA1_OP 1
VPQB1
VPS1S2TR
VPQB2 &
VPQA1
en04000543.vsd

11.4.7.4 Input and output signals

Table 303: Input signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL QB2 is in closed position
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 553

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QC4_OP QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL QC4 is in closed position
S1QC1_OP QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
BBTR_OP No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer
EXDU_12 No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2
EXDU_ES No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2
QA1O_EX1 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 304: Output signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1OPREL Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC3REL Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC4REL Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL Switching of QC4 is forbidden
S1S2OPTR No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2
S1S2CLTR Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2 exists
QB1OPTR QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR QB1 is in closed position
Table continued on next page

554 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Signal Description
QB2OPTR QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR QB2 is in closed position
VPS1S2TR Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2 are valid
VPQB1TR Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

11.4.8 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)

11.4.8.1 Introduction

The interlocking module A1A2_DC is used for one bus-section disconnector between
section 1 and 2 according to figure 284. The module can be used for different busbars,
which includes a bus-section disconnector.

QB
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QC2

A1A2_DC en04000492.vsd

Figure 284: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

11.4.8.2 Function block

II01-
A1A2_DC
QB_OP QBOPREL
QB_CL QBOPIT L
S1QC1_OP QBCLREL
S1QC1_CL QBCLIT L
S2QC2_OP DCOPT R
S2QC2_CL DCCLT R
S1DC_OP VPDCT R
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBCL_EX1
QBCL_EX2
QBOP_EX1
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3

en05000349.vsd

Figure 285: II function block

REL 670 Technical reference manual 555

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.4.8.3 Logic diagram

556 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

A1A2_DC
QB_OP
VPQB VPDCTR
QB_CL =1
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1QC1_OP
VPS1QC1
S1QC1_CL =1
S2QC2_OP
VPS2QC2
S2QC2_CL =1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC & >1 QBOPREL
S1QC1_OP QBOPITL
1
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC &
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL &
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3

en04000544.vsd

REL 670 Technical reference manual 557

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.4.8.4 Input and output signals

Table 305: Input signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block
Signal Description
QB_OP QB is in open position
QB_CL QB is in closed position
S1QC1_OP QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position
VPS1_DC Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid
VPS2_DC Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid
EXDU_ES No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1 and 2
QBCL_EX1 External close condition for section disconnector QB
QBCL_EX2 External close condition for section disconnector QB
QBOP_EX1 External open condition for section disconnector QB
QBOP_EX2 External open condition for section disconnector QB
QBOP_EX3 External open condition for section disconnector QB

558 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Table 306: Output signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block
Signal Description
QBOPREL Opening of QB is allowed
QBOPITL Opening of QB is forbidden
QBCLREL Closing of QB is allowed
QBCLITL Closing of QB is forbidden
DCOPTR The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)

11.4.9 Interlocking for busbar earthinggrounding switch (BB_ES)

11.4.9.1 Introduction

The interlocking module BB_ES is used for one busbar earthing switch on any busbar
parts according to figure 286.

QC

en04000504.vsd

Figure 286: Switchyard layout BB_ES

11.4.9.2 Function block

IJ01-
BB_ES
QC_OP QCREL
QC_CL QCITL
BB_DC_OP BBESOPTR
VP_BB_DC BBESCLTR
EXDU_BB

en05000347.vsd

Figure 287: IJ function block

REL 670 Technical reference manual 559

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.4.9.3 Logic diagram

BB_ES
VP_BB_DC QCREL
BB_DC_OP QCITL
EXDU_BB & 1

QC_OP BBESOPTR
QC_CL BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd

11.4.9.4 Input and output signals

Table 307: Input signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block
Signal Description
QC_OP Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid
EXDU_BB No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part

Table 308: Output signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block
Signal Description
QCREL Switching of QC is allowed
QCITL Switching of QC is forbidden
BBESOPTR QC on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR QC on this busbar part is in closed position

11.4.10 Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)

11.4.10.1 Introduction

The interlocking modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and DB_BUS_B are used for a
line connected to a double circuit breaker arrangement according to figure 288.

560 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC4

QA1 QA2

DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B
QC2 QC5

QB61 QB62

QC3

QB9
DB_LINE

QC9

en04000518.vsd

Figure 288: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker.

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are connected
to the busbars. DB_BUS_A and DB_BUS_B are the connections from the line to the
busbars.

11.4.10.2 Function block

IB01-
DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB61REL
QB1_CL QB61ITL
QB61_OP QB1REL
QB61_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QB1OPTR
QC3_CL QB1CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2

en05000354.vsd

Figure 289: IB function block

REL 670 Technical reference manual 561

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

IA01-
DB_LINE
QA1_OP QB9REL
QA1_CL QB9ITL
QA2_OP QC3REL
QA2_CL QC3ITL
QB61_OP QC9REL
QB61_CL QC9ITL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5

en05000356.vsd

Figure 290: IA function block

IC01-
DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP QA2CLREL
QA2_CL QA2CLITL
QB2_OP QB62REL
QB2_CL QB62ITL
QB62_OP QB2REL
QB62_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC4REL
QC4_CL QC4ITL
QC5_OP QC5REL
QC5_CL QC5ITL
QC3_OP QB2OPTR
QC3_CL QB2CLTR
QC21_OP VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

en05000355.vsd

Figure 291: IC function block

11.4.10.3 Logic diagrams

562 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB1 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000547.vsd

REL 670 Technical reference manual 563

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB1 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd

564 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQA2 QB9REL
VPQC1 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1

& en04000549.vsd

REL 670 Technical reference manual 565

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2 & >1
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
&
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
en04000550.vsd

566 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

VPQB61
VPQB62 QC3REL
VPQB9 &
QC3ITL
1
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT QC9REL
QB9_OP &
QC9ITL
1
VOLT_OFF
en04000551.vsd

REL 670 Technical reference manual 567

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB62 QA2CLREL
VPQB2 & QA2CLITL
1
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB62ITL
1
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
&
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC4
VPQC21
&
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

en04000552.vsd

568 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

VPQB62 QC4REL
VPQB2 QC4ITL
& 1
QB62_OP QC5REL
QB2_OP QC5ITL
1
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd

11.4.10.4 Input and output signals

Table 309: Input signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL QB1 is in closed position
QB61_OP QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
EXDU_ES No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11
QB61_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB1

Table 310: Output signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL Switching of QB61 is allowed
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 569

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
QB61ITL Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB1REL Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 311: Input signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QA2_OP QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL QA2 is in closed position
QB61_OP QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QB62_OP QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL QC5 is in closed position
QB9_OP QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL QB9 is in closed position
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QC9_OP QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL QC9 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
QB9_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table continued on next page

570 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Signal Description
QB9_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 312: Output signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block
Signal Description
QB9REL Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC3REL Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC9REL Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL Switching of QC9 is forbidden

Table 313: Input signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block
Signal Description
QA2_OP QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL QA2 is in closed position
QB2_OP QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL QB2 is in closed position
QB62_OP QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL QC5 is in closed position
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QC21_OP Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
EXDU_ES No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21
QB62_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB2_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB2

REL 670 Technical reference manual 571

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Table 314: Output signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block
Signal Description
QA2CLREL Closing of QA2 is allowed
QA2CLITL Closing of QA2 is forbidden
QB62REL Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QB2REL Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC4REL Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL Switching of QC4 is forbidden
QC5REL Switching of QC5 is allowed
QC5ITL Switching of QC5 is forbidden
QB2OPTR QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

11.4.11 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB (BH)

11.4.11.1 Introduction

The interlocking modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and BH_LINE_B are used for
lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter according to figure 292.

572 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC1

QA1 QA1

QC2 QC2

QB6 QB6

QC3 QC3
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

QB61 QA1 QB62

QB9 QB9
QC1 QC2
QC9 QC9

BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd

Figure 292: Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and
BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker and a half switchyard
layout.

11.4.11.2 Function blocks

REL 670 Technical reference manual 573

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

IL01-
BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

en05000352.vsd

Figure 293: IL function block

574 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

IM01-
BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLIT L
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6IT L
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2IT L
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1IT L
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2IT L
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3IT L
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9IT L
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9IT L
CQA1_OP QB2OPT R
CQA1_CL QB2CLT R
CQB62_OP VPQB2T R
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT _OFF
VOLT _ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

en05000353.vsd

Figure 294: IM function block

IK01-
BH_CONN
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB61_OP QB61REL
QB61_CL QB61ITL
QB62_OP QB62REL
QB62_CL QB62ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2

en05000351.vsd

Figure 295: IK function block

11.4.11.3 Logic diagrams

REL 670 Technical reference manual 575

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL =1 VPCQB61
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000554.vsd

576 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB61 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000555.vsd

REL 670 Technical reference manual 577

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd

578 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL =1 VPCQB62
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB2 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000557.vsd

REL 670 Technical reference manual 579

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB2REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB2 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB2_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB62 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000558.vsd

580 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd

REL 670 Technical reference manual 581

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

BH_CONN
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL =1 VP1QC3
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL =1 VP2QC3
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB62 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
&
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB62ITL
1
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
&
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB62 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB62_OP QC2ITL
1
en04000560.vsd

11.4.11.4 Input and output signals

582 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Table 315: Input signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL QB6 is in close position
QB1_OP QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL QB1 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC11_OP Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_ES No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11
QB6_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB9_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 583

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
QB9_EX5 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 316: Output signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB1REL Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 317: Input signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL QB6 is in close position
QB2_OP QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
Table continued on next page

584 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Signal Description
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB62_OP QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC21_OP Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_ES No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21
QB6_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB2_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB9_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 318: Output signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL Switching of QB6 is forbidden
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 585

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
QB2REL Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB2OPTR QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

Table 319: Input signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB61_OP QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL QB61 is in closed position
QB62_OP QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL QB62 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
1QC3_OP QC3 on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL QC3 on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP QC3 on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL QC3 on line 2 is in closed position
QB61_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB62_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB62

586 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Table 320: Output signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB62REL Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden

REL 670 Technical reference manual 587

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.4.12 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

11.4.12.1 Function block

GR01-
IntlReceive
BLOCK RESREQ
INSTNAME RESGRANT
RESRENAM APP1_OP
RESGRNAM APP1_CL
APP1NAME APP1VAL
APP2NAME APP2_OP
APP3NAME APP2_CL
APP4NAME APP2VAL
APP5NAME APP3_OP
APP6NAME APP3_CL
APP7NAME APP3VAL
APP8NAME APP4_OP
APP9NAME APP4_CL
APP10NAM APP4VAL
APP11NAM APP5_OP
APP12NAM APP5_CL
APP13NAM APP5VAL
APP14NAM APP6_OP
APP15NAM APP6_CL
APP6VAL
APP7_OP
APP7_CL
APP7VAL
APP8_OP
APP8_CL
APP8VAL
APP9_OP
APP9_CL
APP9VAL
APP10_OP
APP10_CL
APP10VAL
APP11_OP
APP11_CL
APP11VAL
APP12_OP
APP12_CL
APP12VAL
APP13_OP
APP13_CL
APP13VAL
APP14_OP
APP14_CL
APP14VAL
APP15_OP
APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL

en07000048.vsd

Figure 296: GR function block

11.4.12.2 Input and output signals

588 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Table 321: Input signals for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of output signals

Table 322: Output signals for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function block
Signal Description
RESREQ Reservation request
RESGRANT Reservation granted
APP1_OP Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP Apparatus 5 position is open
APP5_CL Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL Apparatus 9 position is valid
APP10_OP Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL Apparatus 10 position is valid
APP11_OP Apparatus 11 position is open
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 589

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
APP11_CL Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL Apparatus 11 position is valid
APP12_OP Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL Apparatus 12 position is closed
APP12VAL Apparatus 12 position is valid
APP13_OP Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL Apparatus 13 position is closed
APP13VAL Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL Apparatus 15 position is valid
COM_VAL Receive communication status is valid

11.4.12.3 Setting parameters

Table 323: Basic general settings for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On

11.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and

LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)

Function block name: SLxx IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SLGGIO

11.5.1 Introduction
The SLGGIO function block (or the selector switch function block) is used within
the CAP tool in order to get a selector switch functionality similar with the one
provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used
extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set

590 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system
reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate
all these problems.

11.5.2 Principle of operation

The SLGGIO has two operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received
on the UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output,
in ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 – for example and one operates
the UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the
DOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output,
in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 – for example and one operates
the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output
settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case
of UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also,
depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN
activation signal positive front and the output activation.

Besides the inputs visible in “CAP configuration tool”, there are other executable
inputs that will allow an user to set the desired position directly (without activating
the intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a “select before execute”
dialog. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this
case, the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The
operator place (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation
is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected.
The SLGGIO function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual
position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user.
These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names instead
of a number.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 591

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.5.2.1 Functionality and behaviour

From the menu:

REC 670 1.1 REC 670/Control

Control Single Line Diagram REC 670/Ctrl/Com
Measurements Commands Single Command
Events Selector Switch (GGIO)
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Reset
Authorization
Language

1 2 3
../Ctrl/Com/Sel Sw ../Com/Sel Sw/SL03 ../Com/Sel Sw/SL03
SL01 Damage ctrl Damage ctrl
4 4
SL02
..
..
SL15

P:Disc All N: Disc Fe

OK Cancel
4

5
The dialog window that appears
../Com/Sel Sw/ shows the present position (P:)
DmgCtrl 7
and the new position (N:), both
Damage ctrl: in clear names, given by the
user (max. 13 characters).

E
Modify the position with arrows.
The pos will not be modified (outputs
will not be activated) until you press
the E-button for O.K. en06000420.vsd

Figure 297: Example 1 on handling the switch from the local HMI.

1 The SLGGIO instances in CAP configuration tool

2 Switch name given by the user (max 13 characters)
3 Position number, up to 32 positions
4 Change position
5 New position

11.5.2.2 Graphical display

There are two possibilities for the SLGGIO:

592 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

• if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual
position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters);
• if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but
only the first three letters of the name will be used;

In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when
building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control,
the following sequence of commands will ensue:

From the graphical display:

REC 670 1.1 REC 670 1.1/Control

Control Single Line Diagram
Measurements Commands
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Change to the "Switches" page Reset
of the SLD by left-right arrows. Authorization
Select switch by up-down Language
arrows

../Control/SLD/Switch
O I ../Control/SLD/Switch
AR control AR control
WFM Select switch. Press the
WFM
I or O key. A dialog box
Pilot setup appears.
Pilot setup
OFF OFF
Damage control E P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not be modified
(outputs will not be activated) until OK Cancel
you press the E-button for O.K.

../Control/SLD/Switch

AR control
WFM

Pilot setup
OFF

Damage control
DFW

en06000421.vsd

Figure 298: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 593

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.5.3 Function block

SL01-
SLGGIO
BLOCK SWPOS01
PSTO SWPOS02
UP SWPOS03
DOWN SWPOS04
SWPOS05
SWPOS06
SWPOS07
SWPOS08
SWPOS09
SWPOS10
SWPOS11
SWPOS12
SWPOS13
SWPOS14
SWPOS15
SWPOS16
SWPOS17
SWPOS18
SWPOS19
SWPOS20
SWPOS21
SWPOS22
SWPOS23
SWPOS24
SWPOS25
SWPOS26
SWPOS27
SWPOS28
SWPOS29
SWPOS30
SWPOS31
SWPOS32
SWPOSN
INSTNAME
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11
NAME12
NAME13
NAME14
NAME15
NAME16
NAME17
NAME18
NAME19
NAME20
NAME21
NAME22
NAME23
NAME24
NAME25
NAME26
NAME27
NAME28
NAME29
NAME30
NAME31
NAME32

en05000658.vsd

Figure 299: SL function block, example for SL01–SL15

594 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 324: Input signals for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
PSTO Operator place selection
UP Binary "UP" command
DOWN Binary "DOWN" command

Table 325: Output signals for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function block
Signal Description
SWPOS01 Selector switch position 1
SWPOS02 Selector switch position 2
SWPOS03 Selector switch position 3
SWPOS04 Selector switch position 4
SWPOS05 Selector switch position 5
SWPOS06 Selector switch position 6
SWPOS07 Selector switch position 7
SWPOS08 Selector switch position 8
SWPOS09 Selector switch position 9
SWPOS10 Selector switch position 10
SWPOS11 Selector switch position 11
SWPOS12 Selector switch position 12
SWPOS13 Selector switch position 13
SWPOS14 Selector switch position 14
SWPOS15 Selector switch position 15
SWPOS16 Selector switch position 16
SWPOS17 Selector switch position 17
SWPOS18 Selector switch position 18
SWPOS19 Selector switch position 19
SWPOS20 Selector switch position 20
SWPOS21 Selector switch position 21
SWPOS22 Selector switch position 22
SWPOS23 Selector switch position 23
SWPOS24 Selector switch position 24
SWPOS25 Selector switch position 25
SWPOS26 Selector switch position 26
SWPOS27 Selector switch position 27
SWPOS28 Selector switch position 28
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 595

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Signal Description
SWPOS29 Selector switch position 29
SWPOS30 Selector switch position 30
SWPOS31 Selector switch position 31
SWPOS32 Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN Switch position (integer)

11.5.5 Setting parameters

Table 326: Basic general settings for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
NrPos 32 1 2 - 32 - Number of positions
in the switch
OutType Pulsed - Steady - Output type, steady or
Steady pulse
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Operate pulse
duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 0.010 0.000 s Time delay on the
output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes Disabled - Disabled - Stop when min or max
Enabled position is reached

11.6 Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)

Function block name: VS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
VSGGIO

11.6.1 Introduction
The VSGGIO function block (or the versatile switch function block) is a multipurpose
function used within the CAP tool for a variety of applications, as a general – purpose
switch.

The switch can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the SLD of the
LHMI.

596 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.6.2 Principle of operation

This function can be used for double purpose, in the same way as the switch controller
(SCSWI) functions are used:

• for indication, receiving position through the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and
distributing it in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs or to
IEC61850 through reporting or GOOSE

• for command, receiving commands via the HMI. HMI symbols Select button or
Indication button from menu (Control / Commands / Versatile Switch) or
IEC61850 and sending them in the configuration and especially to the outputs
(through a SMBO function block)

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place , operation from local HMI (Local pos) or through IEC 61850 (Remote
pos). An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block will allow operation
from Local HMI.

As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit

representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the
desired result:

POS2 POS1 RESULT POS (integer output)

0 0 intermediate 0
0 1 POS1 1
1 0 POS2 2
1 1 bad state 3

11.6.3 Function block

VS01-
VSGGIO
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
NAME_UND CMDPOS12
NAM_POS1 CMDPOS21
NAM_POS2
NAME_BAD

en06000508.vsd

Figure 300: VS function block

11.6.4 Input and output signals

REL 670 Technical reference manual 597

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Table 327: Input signals for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
PSTO Operator place selection
IPOS1 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 Position 2 indicating input

Table 328: Output signals for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCKED The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION Position indication, integer
POS1 Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 Execute command from position 2 to position 1

11.6.5 Setting parameters

Table 329: Basic general settings for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
CtlModel Dir Norm - Dir Norm - Specifies the type for
SBO Enh control model
according to IEC
61850
Mode Steady - Pulsed - Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 30.000 s Max time between
select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Command pulse
lenght

11.7 Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)

Function block name: DPx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
DPGGIO

598 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

11.7.1 Introduction
The DPGGIO function block is used to send three logical signals to other systems or
equipment in the substation. It is especially conceived to be used in the interlocking
and reservation station-wide logics.

11.7.2 Principle of operation

Upon receiving the input signals, the DPGGIO function block will send the signals
over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests these signals. To be
able to get the signals, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual,
Chapter 2: “Engineering of the IED” and define which function block in which
equipment or system should receive this information.

11.7.3 Function block

DP01-
DPGGIO
OPEN POSITION
CLOSE
VALID

en07000200.vsd

Figure 301: DP function block

11.7.4 Input and output signals

Table 330: Input signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block
Signal Description
OPEN Open indication
CLOSE Close indication
VALID Valid indication

Table 331: Output signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block
Signal Description
POSITION Double point indication

11.7.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 599

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

11.8 Single point generic control 8 signals

(SPC8GGIO)

Function block name: SCx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SPC8GGIO

11.8.1 Introduction
The SC function block is a collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring
in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) or LOCAL (HMI) to those parts of the logic
configuration that do not need complicated function blocks that have the capability
to receive commands (for example SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be
sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the
result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary
inputs and SPGGIO function blocks.

11.8.2 Principle of operation

The PSTO input will determine which the allowed position for the operator (LOCAL,
REMOTE, ALL) is. Upon sending a command from an allowed operator position,
one of the 8 outputs will be activated. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is
the respective output) will determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the
pulse is) or latched (“steady”). BLOCK will block the operation of the function – in
case a command is sent, no output will be activated.

11.8.3 Function block

SC01-
SPC8GGIO
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8

en07000143.vsd

Figure 302: SPC function block

11.8.4 Input and output signals

600 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 11
Control

Table 332: Input signals for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Blocks the function operation
PSTO Operator place selection

Table 333: Output signals for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT1 Output 1
OUT2 Output2
OUT3 Output3
OUT4 Output4
OUT5 Output5
OUT6 Output6
OUT7 Output7
OUT8 Output8

11.8.5 Setting parameters

Table 334: Basic general settings for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
Latched1 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output1 Pulse Time
Latched2 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 2
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output2 Pulse Time
Latched3 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 3
tPulse3 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output3 Pulse Time
Latched4 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 4
tPulse4 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output4 Pulse Time
Latched5 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 5
tPulse5 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output5 Pulse Time
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 601

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 11
Control

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Latched6 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 6
tPulse6 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output6 Pulse Time
Latched7 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 7
tPulse7 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output7 Pulse Time
Latched8 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 8
tPulse8 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output8 pulse time

602 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

Section 12 Scheme communication

About this chapter

This chapter describes the scheme communication logic that is used in distance and
earth fault protection function to obtain almost instantaneous fault clearance for faults
on the protected line. The chapter considers scheme communication logic (ZCOM),
current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (ZCAL) for the distance protection
function and scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC)
and current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (EFC) for the residual overcurrent
function.

Also Local acceleration logic (ZCLC) is discussed which is a function that can
generate instantaneous tripping as a result of remote end faults without any
telecommunication.

The chapter contains a short description of the design, simplified logical block
diagrams, figure of the function block, input and output signals and setting
parameters.

12.1 Scheme communication logic for distance

protection (PSCH, 85)

Function block name: ZCOM- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 85
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZCPSCH

12.1.1 Introduction
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, a scheme communication
logic is provided. All types of communication schemes e.g. permissive underreach,
permissive overreach, blocking, intertrip etc. are available. The built-in
communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme communication signalling
when included.

Phase segregated communication is also available for correct operation at

simultaneous faults when three distance protection communication channels are
available between the line ends

REL 670 Technical reference manual 603

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

12.1.2 Principle of operation

Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue
the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive
schemes, respectively.

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping
than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a
received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking
scheme.

12.1.2.1 Blocking scheme

The principal of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is

allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has
elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote terminal.

The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone
to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The
overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see
figure 303.

In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable
timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 303.

The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by
activating the input BLKTR, Block of carrier send by activating the input BLKCS.

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000512.vsd

Figure 303: Basic logic for trip carrier in blocking scheme

Channels for communication in each direction must be available.

12.1.2.2 Permissive underreach scheme

In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element

(normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected
in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone
to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive underreach
schemes is normally set to zero.

The logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 304.

604 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000513.vsd

Figure 304: Logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme

The permissive underreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme above.

12.1.2.3 Permissive overreach scheme

In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element

(normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected
in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone
to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive overreach
schemes is normally set to zero.

The logic for trip carrier is the same as for permissive underreach, i.e. figure 304.

The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme above.

12.1.2.4 Unblocking scheme

In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by

using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a
carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.

The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CRG, which must always be
present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a
time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 305. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.

The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after
the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated
for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 605

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG

en05000746.vsd

Figure 305: Carrier guard logic with unblocking scheme

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):

Off: The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart: Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CRG disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signalling

12.1.2.5 Intertrip scheme

In the direct inter-trip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.

The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local
criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic. In case of single-pole
tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.

12.1.2.6 Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 306.

606 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

Unblock =
Off

CR

Unblock =
OR CRL
NoRestart AND
CRL
Unblock =
tSecurit
Restart
y
CRG 1 t AND

200 ms 150 ms LCG

AND
t OR AND t

SchemeType =
Intertrip

CSUR
tSendMi
n AND
OR

BLOCK AND
CSBLK OR
CRL

Schemetype =
Permissive UR AND CS
OR

tCoord
AND 25 ms
OR t TRIP
CACC t

Schemetype =
Permissive OR

CSOR OR AND

AND
tSendMin
OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking

BLKCS

AND

en05000515.vsd

Figure 306: Scheme communication logic for distance protection, simplified logic
diagram

REL 670 Technical reference manual 607

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

12.1.3 Function block

ZCOM-
ZCPSCH_85
BLOCK TRIP
BLKTR CS
BLKCS CRL
CSBLK LCG
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG

en06000286.vsd

Figure 307: ZCOM function block

12.1.4 Input and output signals

Table 335: Input signals for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Signal for block of trip output from communication logic
BLKCS Block of carrier send in permissive OR and blocking schemes
CSBLK Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
CACC Permissive distance protection zone signal
CSOR Overreaching distance protection zone signal
CSUR Underreaching distance protection zone signal
CR Carrier Signal Received
CRG Carrier guard signal received

Table 336: Output signals for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip output
CS Carrier Send signal
CRL Carrier signal received or missing carrier guard signal
LCG Loss of carrier guard signal

12.1.5 Setting parameters

608 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

Table 337: Basic parameter group settings for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Off - Permissive UR - Scheme type
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.035 s Co-ordination time for
blocking
communication
scheme
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Minimum duration of a
carrier send signal

Table 338: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Unblock Off - Off - Operation mode of
NoRestart unblocking logic
Restart
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.035 s Security timer for loss
of carrier guard
detection

12.1.6 Technical data

Table 339: Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Intertrip -
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
communication scheme
Minimum duration of a carrier send (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
signal
Security timer for loss of carrier guard (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
detection
Operation mode of unblocking logic Off -
NoRestart
Restart

12.2 Phase segregated scheme communication

logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 609

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

Function block name: ZCIP- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 85
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZC1PPSCH

12.2.1 Introduction
Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault clearance for all faults on
a power line. All possible types of communication schemes e.g. permissive
underreach, permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available. To manage
problems with simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase segregated
communication is needed. This will then replace the standard scheme communication
module (ZCOM) on important lines where three communication channels (in each
subsystem) are available for the distance protection communication.

The main purpose of the ZC1P scheme communication logic is to supplement the
distance protection function such that:

• fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for which the faults are on
the part of the line not covered by its underreaching zone.
• correct phase selection can be maintained to support single-pole tripping for
faults occurring anywhere on the entire length of a double circuit line.

To accomplish this, three separate communication channels, i.e. one per phase, each
capable of transmitting a signal in each direction are required.

The Phase segregated communication logic can be completed with the current
reversal and WEI logic for phase segregated communication, when found necessary
in Blocking and Permissive overreaching schemes.

12.2.2 Principle of operation

Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue
the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive
schemes, respectively.

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping
than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a
received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking
scheme.

The ZC1P function is a logical function built-up from logical elements. It is a

supplementary function to the distance protection, requiring for its operation inputs
from the distance protection and the communication equipment.

The type of communication-aided scheme to be used can be selected by way of the

settings.

610 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

The ability to select which distance protection zone is assigned to which input of the
scheme communication logic makes this logic able to support practically any scheme
communication requirements regardless of their basic operating principle. The
outputs to initiate tripping and sending of the teleprotection signal are given in
accordance with the type of communication-aided scheme selected and the zone(s)
and phase(s) of the distance protection which have operated.

When power line carrier communication channels are used for permissive schemes
communication, unblocking logic which uses the loss of guard signal as a receive
criteria is provided. This logic compensates for the lack of dependability due to the
transmission of the command signal over the faulted line.

12.2.2.1 Blocking scheme

The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is

allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has
elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote terminal. The received signal
(sent by a reverse looking element in the remote IED), which shall be connected to
CRLx, is used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault
instantaneously (after time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be accelerated is
connected to the input CACCLx, see figure 308. In case of external faults, the
blocking signal (CRLx) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to
prevent an unneccesary trip, see figure 308.

The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip is
achieved by activating the input BLKTRLx, Block of carrier send is done by
activating the input BLKCSLx.

tCoord 25 ms
CACCLx
t t TRLx
CRLx AND

en06000310.vsd

Figure 308: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a blocking scheme

12.2.2.2 Permissive underreach scheme

In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element

(normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is
detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an
overreaching zone (connected to CACCLx) to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed.
The tCoord is in permissive underreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for
trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 309. Three channels for
communication in each direction must be available.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 611

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

tCoord 25 ms
CACCLx
t t TRLx
CRLx AND

en07000088.vsd

Figure 309: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a permissive underreach
scheme

12.2.2.3 Permissive overreach scheme

In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element

(normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is
detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an
overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is
in permissive overreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is the
same as for permissive underreach, see figure 308.

The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme above. The blocking inputs are activated from the current
reversal logic when this function is included.

Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.

12.2.2.4 Unblocking scheme

In an unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome

by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create
a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. As phase segregated
communication schemes uses phases individually and the PLC is typically connected
single phase or phase to phase it is not possible to evaluate which of the phases to
release and the unblocking scheme has thus not been supported.

12.2.2.5 Intertrip scheme

In the direct intertrip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.

The received signal per phase is directly transferred to the trip function block for
tripping without local criteria. The signal is not further processed in the phase
segregated communication logic. In case of single-pole tripping the phase selection
and logic for tripping the three phases is performed in the trip function block.

12.2.2.6 Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for one phase (Lx) is shown in figure 310.

612 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

SchemeType =
Intertrip

CSURLx

tSendMin AND
OR

BLOCK
AND
CSBLKLx OR
CRLx

Schemetype =
Permissive UR AND CSLx
OR

tCoord 25 ms
AND t TRLx
OR t
CACCLx

Schemetype =
Permissive OR

CSORLx OR AND

AND

tSendMin
OR

AND
SchemeType =
Blocking
BLKCSx

AND

CSL1
CSL2 AND

CSL2
OR CSMPH
CSL3 AND

CSL3
CSL1 AND

CSL1
CSL2 GENERAL
OR
CSL3

en06000311.vsd

Figure 310: Simplified logic diagram for one phase (Lx)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 613

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

12.2.3 Function block

ZC1P-
ZC1PPSCH_85
BLOCK TRIP
BLKTR TRL1
BLKTRL1 TRL2
BLKTRL2 TRL3
BLKTRL3 CSL1
CACCL1 CSL2
CACCL2 CSL3
CACCL3 CSMPH
CSURL1 CRLL1
CSURL2 CRLL2
CSURL3 CRLL3
CSORL1
CSORL2
CSORL3
CSBLKL1
CSBLKL2
CSBLKL3
BLKCSL1
BLKCSL2
BLKCSL3
CRL1
CRL2
CRL3
CRMPH

en06000427.vsd

Figure 311: ZC1P function block

12.2.4 Input and output signals

Table 340: Input signals for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Common signal for block of trip output from communication
logic in all phases
BLKTRL1 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in
Phase L1
BLKTRL2 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in
Phase L2
BLKTRL3 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in
Phase L3
CACCL1 Accelerated Distance protection zone start in Phase L1
CACCL2 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CACCL3 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
CSURL1 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSURL2 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CSURL3 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
CSORL1 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSORL2 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CSORL3 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
Table continued on next page

614 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

Signal Description
CSBLKL1 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSBLKL2 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CSBLKL3 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
BLKCSL1 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase
L1
BLKCSL2 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase
L2
BLKCSL3 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase
L3
CRL1 Carrier signal received in Phase L1
CRL2 Carrier signal received in Phase L2
CRL3 Carrier signal received in Phase L3
CRMPH Carrier Signal received for multiphase fault

Table 341: Output signals for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Common trip output in any of the phase
TRL1 Trip output in Phase L1
TRL2 Trip output in Phase L2
TRL3 Trip output in Phase L3
CSL1 Carrier Send in phase L1
CSL2 Carrier Send in phase L2
CSL3 Carrier Send in phase L3
CSMPH carrier Send for mulitphase fault
CRLL1 Carrier signal received in Phase L1
CRLL2 Carrier signal received in Phase L2
CRLL3 Carrier signal received in Phase L3

12.2.5 Setting parameters

Table 342: Parameter group settings for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation On / Off
On
Scheme Type Off - Permissive UR - Scheme type
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Trip coordinate time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Minimum duration of
Carrier Send signal

REL 670 Technical reference manual 615

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

12.2.6 Technical data

Table 343: Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Intertrip -
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
communication scheme
Minimum duration of a carrier send (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
signal
Security timer for loss of carrier guard (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
detection
Operation mode of unblocking logic Off -
NoRestart
Restart

12.3 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Function block name: ZCAL- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 85
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZCRWPSCH

12.3.1 Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with
parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line.

The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated,
received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone
operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to
accelerate the sending end.

Three phase or phase segregated scheme logic is available.

616 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

12.3.2 Principle of operation

12.3.2.1 Current reversal logic

The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRLVLx to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been
activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided
trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see
figure 312.

Figure 312: Current reversal logic

The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLx and activating of the TRIPLx in
the scheme communication block ZCOM is carried out by connecting the IRVL signal
to input BLOCK in the ZCOM function.

The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current
reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set
to zero.

12.3.2.2 Weak end infeed logic

The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition
that no fault has been detected on the weak end by different fault detection elements
(distance protection in forward and reverse direction).

The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 313, when:

• No active signal present on the input BLOCK.

• The functional input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRL
output on the scheme communication logic ZCOM.
• The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
WEIBLKL1 functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is usually
configured to the BLOCK functional output of the fuse-failure function.
• No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional
input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as
present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 617

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

Figure 313: Echo of a received carrier signal by the WEI function

When an echo function is used in both terminals (should generally be avoided), a

spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-
up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.

An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping

of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip, together with the WEI
function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 314.

Figure 314: Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram

618 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

12.3.3 Function block

ZCAL-
ZCRWPSCH_85
U3P IRVL
BLOCK TRWEI
IRVBLK TRWEIL1
IRV TRWEIL2
WEIBLK1 TRWEIL3
WEIBLK2 ECHO
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL

en06000287.vsd

Figure 315: ZCAL function block

12.3.4 Input and output signals

Table 344: Input signals for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
IRVBLK Block of current reversal function
IRV Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLK2 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections
VTSZ Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function
CBOPEN Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

Table 345: Output signals for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function block
Signal Description
IRVL Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI Trip of WEI logic
TRWEIL1 Trip of WEI logic in phase L1
TRWEIL2 Trip of WEI logic in phase L2
TRWEIL3 Trip of WEI logic in phase L3
ECHO Carrier send by WEI logic

12.3.5 Setting parameters

REL 670 Technical reference manual 619

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

Table 346: Basic parameter group settings for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CurrRev Off - Off - Operating mode of
On Current Reversal
Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Pickup time for
current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.060 s Time Delay to prevent
Carrier send and local
trip
WEI Off - Off - Operating mode of
Echo WEI logic
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.010 s Coordination time for
the WEI logic
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
voltage level
UPP< 10 - 90 1 70 %UB Phase to Phase
voltage for detection
of fault condition
UPN< 10 - 90 1 70 %UB Phase to Neutral
voltage for detection
of fault condition

12.3.6 Technical data

Table 347: Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase to neutral (10-90)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
voltage
Detection level phase to phase (10-90)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
voltage
Reset ratio <105% -
Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
infeed logic

12.4 Local acceleration logic (PLAL)

Function block name: ZCLC- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZPLAL

620 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

12.4.1 Introduction
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel
is available, local acceleration logic (ZCLC) can be used. This logic enables fast fault
clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a
communication channel.

The logic can be controlled either by the auto re-closer (zone extension) or by the
loss of load current (loss-of-load acceleration).

12.4.2 Principle of operation

12.4.2.1 Zone extension

The overreaching zone is connected to the input -EXACC. For this reason, configure
the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used auto-
reclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing device,
see figure 316.

This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.

Figure 316: Simplified logic diagram for local acceleration logic

After the auto-recloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state,
there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step
distance time functions. In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching
zone range, an unwanted auto-reclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function
at the reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed.

On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous
zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous".

The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss of
load acceleration).

REL 670 Technical reference manual 621

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

12.4.2.2 Loss-of-load acceleration

When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss of load, the overreaching zone used
for "acceleration" connected to LLACC is not allowed to trip "instantaneously" during
normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been above
the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone will be
allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault condition when one or two of the
phase currents will become low due to a three phase trip at the opposite terminal, see
figure 317. The current measurement is performed internally and the STILL signal
becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a healthy
phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite terminal. Note that
this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase
currents will be low when the opposite terminal is tripped.

Figure 317: Loss of load acceleration - simplified logic diagram

Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during
normal closing.

12.4.3 Function block

ZCLC-
ZCLCPLAL
I3P TRZE
BLOCK TRLL
ARREADY
NDST
EXACC
BC
LLACC

en05000333.vsd

Figure 318: ZCLC function block

12.4.4 Input and output signals

622 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

Table 348: Input signals for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
BLOCK Block of function
ARREADY Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for fast trip
NDST Non directional criteria used to prevent instantaneous trip
EXACC Connected to function used for tripping at zone xtension
BC Breaker Close
LLACC Connected to function used for tripping at loss of load

Table 349: Output signals for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function block
Signal Description
TRZE Trip by zone extension
TRLL Trip by loss of load

12.4.5 Setting parameters

Table 350: Basic parameter group settings for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting for
current values
LoadCurr 1 - 100 1 10 %IB Load current before
disturbance in % of
IBase
LossOfLoad Off - Off - Enable/Disable
On operation of Loss of
load.
ZoneExtension Off - Off - Enable/Disable
On operation of Zone
extension
MinCurr 1 - 100 1 5 %IB Lev taken as curr loss
due to remote CB trip
in % of IBase
tLowCurr 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Time delay on pick-up
for MINCURR value
tLoadOn 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay on pick-up
for load current
release
tLoadOff 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.300 s Time delay on drop off
for load current
release

REL 670 Technical reference manual 623

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

12.5 Scheme communication logic for residual

overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Function block name: EFC-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 85
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ECPSCH

12.5.1 Introduction
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual
overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication
channels.

In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be

transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, an operate time of the
protection of 50 – 60 ms including a channel transmission time of 20 ms, can be
achieved. This short operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault
clearance.

The communication logic module for directional residual current protection for the
REx670 IEDs enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreach schemes. The
logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end-infeed and current
reversal, included in the EFCA function.

12.5.2 Principle of operation

The directional residual overcurrent protection (TEF) is configured to give input
information, i.e. directional fault detection signals, to the EFC logic:

• CACC: Signal to be used for tripping of the communication scheme, normally

the start signal of a forward overreach step of STFW.
• CSBLK: Signal to be used for sending block signal in the blocking
communication scheme, normally the startpickup signal of a reverse overreach
step of STRV.
• CSUR: Signal to be used for sending permissive signal in the underreach
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
underreach step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underacting step.
• CSOR: Signal to be used for sending permissive signal in the overreach
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
overreach step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreach step.

624 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to

the BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.

12.5.2.1 Blocking scheme

In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element
detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element
operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the
other line end. The time delay, normally 30 – 40 ms, depends on the communication
transmission time and a chosen safety margin.

One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is
needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero
and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the
impedance-measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The
power line carrier communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal
attenuation will occur due to the fault.

Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is

no zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to
current reversals because the received carrier signal is maintained long enough to
avoid unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-
end-infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking
signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally
longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme.

If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no
blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (carrier receive)
the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.

Figure 319: Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 625

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

12.5.2.2 Permissive under/overreach scheme

In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth fault measuring element sends a
permissive signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward direction.
The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive signal before
activating an operation signal. Independent channels must be available for the
communication in each direction.

An impedance measuring relay which works in the same type of permissive mode,
with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication
scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring relay works
in the permissive overreach mode, common channels can be used in single-line
applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use
common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance
measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may detect
a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.

Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end-infeed function is used in the
distance or earth fault protection.

In case of an internal earth fault, the forward directed measuring element operates
and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (carrier send). Local
tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates and a
permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (carrier receive).

The permissive scheme can of either underreach or overreach type. In the underreach
alternative an underreach directional residual overcurrent measurement element will
be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal CSUR.

In the overreach alternative an overreach directional residual overcurrent

measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal
CSOR. Also the underreach signal CSUR can initiate sending.

626 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

12.5.2.3 Unblocking scheme

In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by

using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a
carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.

The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CRG, which must always be
present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a
time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 320. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.

The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after
the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated
for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.

CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG

en05000746.vsd

Figure 320: Carrier guard logic with unblocking scheme

REL 670 Technical reference manual 627

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):

Off: The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart: Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CRG disappeares a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecure will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signalling

12.5.3 Function block

EFC1-
ECPSCH_85
BLOCK TRIP
BLKTR CS
BLKCS CRL
CSBLK LCG
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG

en06000288.vsd

Figure 321: EFC function block

12.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 351: Input signals for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic
BLKCS Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking schemes
CSBLK Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send
CACC Signal to be used for tripping by Communication Scheme
CSOR Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send
CSUR Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send
CR Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic
CRG Carrier guard signal received

628 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

Table 352: Output signals for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip by Communication Scheme Logic
CS Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic
CRL Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme Logic
LCG loss of carrier guard signal

12.5.5 Setting parameters

Table 353: Basic parameter group settings for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Off - Permissive UR - Scheme type, Mode
Intertrip of Operation
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.035 s Communication
scheme coordination
time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Minimum duration of a
carrier send signal

Table 354: Advanced parameter group settings for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Unblock Off - Off - Operation mode of
NoRestart unblocking logic
Restart
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.035 s Security timer for loss
of carrier guard
detection

12.5.6 Technical data

Table 355: Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Communication scheme (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
coordination time
Scheme type Permissive UR -
Permissive OR
Blocking

REL 670 Technical reference manual 629

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

12.6 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Function block name: EFCA- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 85
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ECRWPSCH

12.6.1 Introduction
The EFCA additional communication logic is a supplement to the EFC scheme
communication logic for the residual overcurrent protection.

To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth-fault
protection function can be supported with logic, that uses communication channels.
REx670 terminals have for this reason available additions to scheme communication
logic.

If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching

permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current
reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on
the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection between
the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current-reversal logic
(transient blocking logic) can be used.

Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection, can basically

operate only when the protection in the remote terminal can detect the fault. The
detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this terminal.
The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high positive and/or zero
sequence source impedance behind this terminal. To overcome these conditions, weak
end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used.

12.6.2 Principle of operation

12.6.2.1 Directional comparison logic function

The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreach and
permissive overreach schemes.

The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for current reversal
and weak end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking
overreach scheme.

630 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault protection
module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions
and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.

Figure 322 and figure 323 show the logic circuits.

Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of the directional
comparison scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle, to the BLOCK input
of the directional comparison module.

12.6.2.2 Fault current reversal logic

The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to IRV,
which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the reverse direction
element is activated during the tPickUp time, the IRVL signal is activated, see
figure 322. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without tripping. IRVL
will be connected to the block input on the permissive overreach scheme.

When the fault current is reversed on the non faulty line, IRV is deactivated and
IRVBLK is activated. The reset of IRVL is delayed by the tDelay time, see
figure 322. This ensures the reset of the carrier receive CR signal.

Figure 322: Simplified logic diagram, current reversal

12.6.2.3 Weak and infeed logic

The weak end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or
an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Trip). See figure 323 and figure 324.

The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element,
connected to WEIBLK via an OR-gate. See figure 323. If neither the forward nor the
reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms. The weak-
end-infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal. See figure 323.

If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the
last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the
earth-fault function that is in operation.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 631

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

Figure 323: Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - echo.

With the Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further, it activates
the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral
point voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0>

The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the
earth-fault function that is in operation.

Figure 324: Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - Trip.

The weak end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200
ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to
be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the
weak end echo is selected for both line ends.

632 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

12.6.3 Function block

EFCA-
ECRWPSCH_85
U3P IRVL
BLOCK TRWEI
IRVBLK ECHO
IRV CR
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL

en06000289.vsd

Figure 325: EFCA function block

12.6.4 Input and output signals

Table 356: Input signals for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
IRVBLK Block of current reversal function
IRV Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 Block of WEI Logic
WEIBLK2 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections
VTSZ Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function
CBOPEN Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

Table 357: Output signals for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function block
Signal Description
IRVL Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI Trip of WEI logic
ECHO Carrier send by WEI logic
CR POR Carrier signal received from remote end

12.6.5 Setting parameters

REL 670 Technical reference manual 633

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

Table 358: Basic parameter group settings for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CurrRev Off - Off - Operating mode of
On Current Reversal
Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Pickup time for
current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.060 s Time Delay to prevent
Carrier send and local
trip
WEI Off - Off - Operating mode of
Echo WEI logic
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Coordination time for
the WEI logic
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
voltage level
3U0> 5 - 70 1 25 %UB Neutral voltage
setting for fault
conditions
measurement

12.6.6 Technical data

Table 359: Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH,
85)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage 3Uo for WEI trip (5-70)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur

Reset ratio >95% -

Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
infeed logic

12.7 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

phase segregated communication (PSCH)

Function block name: ZC1W- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ZC1WPSCH

634 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

12.7.1 Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with
parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line.

The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated,
received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone
operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to
accelerate the sending end.

12.7.2 Principle of operation

12.7.2.1 Current reversal logic

The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRVLx to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been
activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided
trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see
figure 326.

tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev
IRVLn t t t
tDelayRev
IRVOPLn
IRVBLKLn & t

en06000474.vsd

Figure 326: Current reversal logic

The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLn and activating of the TRIPLn in
the scheme communication block ZCOM is carried out by connecting the IRVOPLn
signal to input BLOCKLn in the ZCOM function.

The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current
reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set
to zero.

Weak end infeed logic

The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition
that no fault has been detected at the weak end by different fault detection elements
(distance protection in forward and reverse direction).

REL 670 Technical reference manual 635

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

VTSZ
BLOCK >1

tWEI 50 ms 200 ms ECHOLn - cont.

CRLLn
t & t t ECHOLn
&
200 ms
WEIBLK1
t

200 ms
WEIBLK2
t

en07000085.vsd

Figure 327: Weak end infeed logic

The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 327, when:

• The functional input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRLx
output on the scheme communication logic ZCOM.
• The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
WEIBLKLx functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is usually
configured to the STGEN functional output of the fuse-failure function.
• No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional
input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as
present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.

When an echo function is used in both terminals (should generally be avoided), a

spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-
up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms. An
undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of
the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo &Trip, together with the WEI
function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 328.

636 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

WEI = Echo&Trip
ECHOLn - cont.
CBOPEN

STUL1N
100 ms TRWEI
OR OR
STUL2N AND t

STUL3N 15 ms
TRWEIL1
AND t

15 ms
TRWEIL2
AND t

15 ms
TRWEIL3
AND t

en00000551.vsd

Figure 328: Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram

12.7.3 Function block

ZC1W-
ZC1WPSCH_85
U3P TRPWEI
BLOCK TRPWEIL1
BLKZ TRPWEIL2
CBOPEN TRPWEIL3
CRL1 IRVOP
CRL2 IRVOPL1
CRL3 IRVOPL2
IRVL1 IRVOPL3
IRVL2 ECHO
IRVL3 ECHOL1
IRVBLKL1 ECHOL2
IRVBLKL2 ECHOL3
IRVBLKL3
WEIBLK
WEIBLKL1
WEIBLKL2
WEIBLKL3
WEIBLKOP
WEIBLKO1
WEIBLKO2
WEIBLKO3

en06000477.vsd

Figure 329: ZC1W function block

12.7.4 Input and output signals

REL 670 Technical reference manual 637

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 12
Scheme communication

Table 360: Input signals for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Voltage
BLOCK Block of function
BLKZ Block of trip from WEI logic by the fuse-failure function
CBOPEN Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL1 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L1
CRL2 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L2
CRL3 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L3
IRVL1 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVL2 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVL3 Activation of current reversal logic in phase L3
IRVBLKL1 Block of current reversal function in Phase L1
IRVBLKL2 Block of current reversal function in Phase L2
IRVBLKL3 Block of current reversal function in Phase L3
WEIBLK Block of WEI logic
WEIBLKL1 Block of WEI logic in Phase L1
WEIBLKL2 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2
WEIBLKL3 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3
WEIBLKOP Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protection
WEIBLKO1 Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 due to operation of other
protection
WEIBLKO2 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2 due to operation of other
protections
WEIBLKO3 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3 due to operation of other
protections

Table 361: Output signals for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function block
Signal Description
TRPWEI Trip of WEI logic
TRPWEIL1 Trip of WEI logic in Phase L1
TRPWEIL2 Trip of WEI logic in Phase L2
TRPWEIL3 Trip of WEI logic in Phase L3
IRVOP Operation of current reversal logic
IRVOPL1 Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVOPL2 Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVOPL3 Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L3
ECHO Carrier Send by WEI logic
ECHOL1 Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L1
ECHOL2 Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L2
ECHOL3 Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L3

638 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 12
Scheme communication

12.7.5 Setting parameters

Table 362: Basic parameter group settings for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
Voltage level
OperCurrRev Off - Off - Operating mode of
On Current Reversal
Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Pickup time for
current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.060 s Time Delay to prevent
Carrier send and local
trip
OperationWEI Off - Off - Operating mode of
Echo WEI logic
Echo & Trip
UPE< 10 - 90 1 70 %UB Phase to Earth
voltage for detection
of fault condition
UPP< 10 - 90 1 70 %UB Phase to Phase
voltage for detection
of fault condition
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.010 s Coordination time for
the WEI logic

12.7.6 Technical data

Table 363: Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
(PSCH, 85)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase to neutral (10-90)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
voltage
Detection level phase to phase (10-90)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
voltage
Reset ratio <105% -
Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
infeed logic

REL 670 Technical reference manual 639

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
640
 Section 13
Logic

Section 13 Logic

About this chapter

This chapter describes primarily tripping and trip logic functions. The way the
functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals
and technical data are included for each function.

13.1 Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Function block name: TRPx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number: 94
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SMPPTRC I->O

13.1.1 Introduction
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved
in the tripping of the fault. It provides the pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse of
sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with
autoreclosing functions.

The trip function block includes functionality for evolving faults and breaker lock-
out.

13.1.2 Principle of operation

The duration of a trip output signal from the TRPx function is settable (tTripMin).
The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening.

For three-pole tripping, TRPx function has a single input (TRIN) through which all
trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from external
protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a
single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs,
as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 641

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

BLOCK
tTripMin TRIP
TRIN OR
AND t

Operation Mode = On

Program = 3Ph

en05000789.vsd

Figure 330: Simplified logic diagram for three phasetrip

The TRPx function for single- and two-pole tripping has additional phase segregated
inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs enable
single- and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase
selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase
segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of the
expanded TRPx function. Examples of such protection functions are the residual
overcurrent protections. The expanded TRPx function has two inputs for these
functions, one for impedance tripping (e.g. carrier-aided tripping commands from the
scheme communication logic), and one for earth fault tripping (e.g. tripping output
from a residual overcurrent protection). Additional logic secures a three-pole final
trip command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase
selection signals.

The expanded TRPx function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides the
trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary
outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There
are also separate output signals indicating single pole, two pole or three pole trip.
These signals are important for cooperation with the auto-reclosing function.

The expanded TRPx function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation
for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input is
also provided which disables single- and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to be
three-pole.

In multi-breaker arrangements, one TRPx function block is used for each breaker.
This can be the case if single pole tripping and auto-reclosing is used.

The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from
another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three pole trip,
if desired.

It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing
only the choice is by setting TripLockout.

642 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

13.1.2.1 Logic diagram

TRINL1

TRINL2
OR
TRINL3

1PTRZ OR
1PTREF
OR
TRIN RSTTRIP - cont.
AND
Program = 3ph

en05000517.vsd

Figure 331: Three-phase front logic — simplified logic diagram

TRIN

TRINL1

PSL1 L1TRIP
OR
AND

TRINL2

PSL2 L2TRIP
OR
AND

TRINL3

PSL3 L3TRIP
OR
AND

OR

OR OR

-loop
-loop
OR
AND AND
AND
1PTREF AND 50 ms
1PTRZ OR t

en05000518.vsd

Figure 332: Phase segregated front logic

REL 670 Technical reference manual 643

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

150 ms
L1TRIP OR
t RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND

150 ms
L2TRIP OR
t STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND

150 ms
L3TRIP OR
t TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
OR

OR AND
P3PTR
OR

-loop

en05000519.vsd

Figure 333: Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

644 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

150 ms
L1TRIP - cont.
t OR RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t

AND

150 ms
L2TRIP
t OR STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t AND

AND

150 ms
L3TRIP
t OR TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t

AND
OR

AND
TRIP OR
OR

-loop

en05000520.vsd

Figure 334: Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

REL 670 Technical reference manual 645

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

BLOCK

RTRIP TRL1
AND
OR

STRIP TRL2
AND
OR

TTRIP TRL3
AND
OR
RSTTRIP
TRIP
OR

TR3P
AND AND
OR

-loop

AND 10 ms
TR1P
AND t

AND 5 ms
TR2P
AND t
OR
AND

-loop

en05000521.vsd

Figure 335: Final tripping circuits

13.1.3 Function block

TRP1-
SMPPTRC_94
BLOCK TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRL1
TRIN TRL2
TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL2 TR1P
TRINL3 TR2P
PSL1 TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTREF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

en05000707.vsd

Figure 336: TRP function block

13.1.4 Input and output signals

646 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

Table 364: Input signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
BLKLKOUT Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRIN Trip all phases
TRINL1 Trip phase 1
TRINL2 Trip phase 2
TRINL3 Trip phase 3
PSL1 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
PSL2 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2
PSL3 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3
1PTRZ Zone Trip with a separate phase selection
1PTREF Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase selection
P3PTR Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function

Table 365: Output signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP General trip output signal
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3
TR1P Tripping single-pole
TR2P Tripping two-pole
TR3P Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

13.1.5 Setting parameters

Table 366: Basic parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
Program 3 phase - 1ph/3ph - Three ph; single or
1ph/3ph three ph; single, two
1Ph/2Ph/3Ph or three ph trip
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Minimum duration of
trip output signal

REL 670 Technical reference manual 647

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

Table 367: Advanced parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
TripLockout Off - Off - On: activate output
On (CLLKOUT) and trip
latch, Off: only outp
AutoLock Off - Off - On: lockout from input
On (SETLKOUT) and
trip, Off: only inp

13.1.6 Technical data

Table 368: Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph -
Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

13.2 Trip matrix logic (GGIO)

Function block name: TRxx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
TRMGGIO

13.2.1 Application
Twelve trip matrix logic blocks are included in the IED. The function blocks are used
in the configuration of the IED to route trip signals and/or other logical output signals
to the different output relays.

The matrix and the physical outputs will be seen in the PCM 600 engineering tool
and this allows the user to adapt the signals to the physical tripping outputs according
to the specific application needs.

13.2.2 Principle of operation

Tripping matrix logic block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals.
The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide the
necessary grouping of connected input signals (e.g. for tripping and alarming
purposes) to the three output signals from the function block.

648 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:

1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical
value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the first output signal (i.e. OUTPUT1) will get logical value
1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT1 via
setting parameters "PulseTime1", "OnDelayTime1" & "OffDelayTime1".
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the second output signal (i.e. OUTPUT2) will get logical
value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT2
via setting parameters "PulseTime2", "OnDelayTime2" & "OffDelayTime2"
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value
1 (i.e. TRUE) the third output signal (i.e. OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1
(i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT3 via setting
parameters "PulseTime3", "OnDelayTime3" & "OffDelayTime3".

Detailed logical diagram is shown in see figure 337

Pulse Time 1

&
Pulse t pulse

Input 1 Output 1
On Delay Time 1
&
³1
Input 2
Input 16
³1
t on t off
Off Delay Time 1

Pulse Time 2

&
t pulse
Pulse

Input 17 Output 2
Input 18
On Delay Time 2
&
³1
Input 32
³1
t on t off
Off Delay Time 2

Pulse Time 3

&
Pulse t pulse

Output 3
On Delay Time 3
&
³1
³1
t on t off
Off Delay Time 3

en06000514.vsd

Figure 337: Tripping Matrix Internal Logic.

Output signals from this function block are typically connected to other logic blocks
or directly to output contacts from the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time delay on that output signal shall be set to approximately
0,150s in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit
breaker trip coils.

Twelve such function blocks are available in the IED.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 649

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

13.2.3 Function block

T R01-
TRMGGIO
INPUT 1 OUT PUT 1
INPUT 2 OUT PUT 2
INPUT 3 OUT PUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
INPUT 17
INPUT 18
INPUT 19
INPUT 20
INPUT 21
INPUT 22
INPUT 23
INPUT 24
INPUT 25
INPUT 26
INPUT 27
INPUT 28
INPUT 29
INPUT 30
INPUT 31
INPUT 32

en05000370.vsd

Figure 338: TR function block

13.2.4 Input and output signals

Table 369: Input signals for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT1 Binary input 1
INPUT2 Binary input 2
INPUT3 Binary input 3
INPUT4 Binary input 4
INPUT5 Binary input 5
INPUT6 Binary input 6
INPUT7 Binary input 7
INPUT8 Binary input 8
INPUT9 Binary input 9
INPUT10 Binary input 10
INPUT11 Binary input 11
INPUT12 Binary input 12
INPUT13 Binary input 13
Table continued on next page

650 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

Signal Description
INPUT14 Binary input 14
INPUT15 Binary input 15
INPUT16 Binary input 16
INPUT17 Binary input 17
INPUT18 Binary input 18
INPUT19 Binary input 19
INPUT20 Binary input 20
INPUT21 Binary input 21
INPUT22 Binary input 22
INPUT23 Binary input 23
INPUT24 Binary input 24
INPUT25 Binary input 25
INPUT26 Binary input 26
INPUT27 Binary input 27
INPUT28 Binary input 28
INPUT29 Binary input 29
INPUT30 Binary input 30
INPUT31 Binary input 31
INPUT32 Binary input 32

Table 370: Output signals for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function block
Signal Description
OUTPUT1 OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 OR function between inputs 1 to 32

13.2.5 Setting parameters

Table 371: Basic parameter group settings for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - ON - Operation Off / On
ON
PulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Output off delay time
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 651

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

ModeOutput1 Steady - Steady - Mode for output ,1
Pulsed steady or pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - Steady - Mode for output 2,
Pulsed steady or pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - Steady - Mode for output 3,
Pulsed steady or pulsed

13.3 Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

13.3.1 Introduction
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for user to adapt the configuration
to the specific application needs.

13.3.2 Inverter function block (INV)

I001-
INV
INPUT OUT

en04000404.vsd

Figure 339: INV function block

Table 372: Input signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT Input

Table 373: Output signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output

13.3.3 OR function block (OR)

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs
is inverted.

652 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

O001-
OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

en04000405.vsd

Figure 340: OR function block

Table 374: Input signals for the OR (O001-) function block

Signal Description
INPUT1 Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2 Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3 Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4 Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5 Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6 Input 6 to OR gate

Table 375: Output signals for the OR (O001-) function block

Signal Description
OUT Output from OR gate
NOUT Inverted output from OR gate

13.3.4 AND function block (AND)

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables.The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the inputs
and one of the outputs are inverted.

A001-
AND
INPUT 1 OUT
INPUT 2 NOUT
INPUT 3
INPUT 4N

en04000406.vsd

Figure 341: AND function block

REL 670 Technical reference manual 653

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

Table 376: Input signals for the AND (A001-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT1 Input 1
INPUT2 Input 2
INPUT3 Input 3
INPUT4N Input 4 inverted

Table 377: Output signals for the AND (A001-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output
NOUT Output inverted

13.3.5 Timer function block (Timer)

The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (parameter T).

T M01-
Timer
INPUT ON
T OFF

en04000378.vsd

Figure 342: TM function block

Table 378: Input signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT Input to timer

Table 379: Output signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Signal Description
ON Output from timer , pick-up delayed
OFF Output from timer, drop-out delayed

Table 380: General settings for the Timer (TM01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
T 0.000 - 90000.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of function

654 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

13.3.6 Pulse timer function block (PULSE)

The pulse function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of
operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.

TP01-
Pulse
INPUT OUT

en04000407.vsd

Figure 343: PULSE function block

Table 381: Input signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT Input to pulse timer

Table 382: Output signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output from pulse timer

Table 383: General settings for the Pulse (TP01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
T 0.000 - 90000.000 0.001 0.010 s Time delay of function

13.3.7 Exclusive OR function block (XOR)

The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. The function block XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of
the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0
if they are equal.

XO01-
XOR
INPUT 1 OUT
INPUT 2 NOUT

en04000409.vsd

Figure 344: XOR function block

Table 384: Input signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT1 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 Input 2 to XOR gate

REL 670 Technical reference manual 655

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

Table 385: Output signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output from XOR gate
NOUT Inverted output from XOR gate

13.3.8 Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)

The Set-Reset function SRM is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output
from two inputs respectively. Each SRM function block has two outputs, where one
is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption
will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.

Table 386: Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRM) function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1
1 1 0 1
0 0 0 1

SM01-
SRM
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

en04000408.vsd

Figure 345: SM function block

Table 387: Input signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Signal Description
SET Set input
RESET Reset input

Table 388: Output signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output
NOUT Output inverted

656 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

Table 389: Parameter group settings for the SRM (SM01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Memory Off - Off - Operating mode of
On the memory function

13.3.9 Controllable gate function block (GT)

The GT function block is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass from
the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

GT 01-
GT
INPUT OUT

en04000410.vsd

Figure 346: GT function block

Table 390: Input signals for the GT (GT01-) function block

Signal Description
INPUT Input to gate

Table 391: Output signals for the GT (GT01-) function block

Signal Description
OUT Output from gate

Table 392: Parameter group settings for the GT (GT01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On

13.3.10 Settable timer function block (TS)

The function block TS timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at
pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation setting On, Off
that controls the operation of the timer.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 657

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

TS01-
TimerSet
INPUT ON
OFF

en04000411.vsd

Figure 347: TS function block

Table 393: Input signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT Input to timer

Table 394: Output signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Signal Description
ON Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF Output from timer, drop-out delayed

Table 395: Parameter group settings for the TimerSet (TS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 0.001 0.000 s Delay for settable
timer n

13.3.11 Technical data

Table 396: Configurable logic blocks

Logic block Quantity with update rate Range or value Accuracy
fast medium normal
LogicAND 60 60 160 - -
LogicOR 60 60 160 - -
LogicXOR 10 10 20 - -
LogicInverter 30 30 80 - -
LogicSRMemory 10 10 20 - -
LogicGate 10 10 20 - -
LogicTimer 10 10 20 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 10
90000.000) s ms
LogicPulseTimer 10 10 20 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 10
90000.000) s ms
LogicTimerSet 10 10 20 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 10
90000.000) s ms
LogicLoopDelay 10 10 20 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 10
90000.000) s ms

658 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

13.4 Fixed signal function block (FIXD)

Function block name: FIXD- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
FixedSignals

13.4.1 Introduction
The fixed signals function block generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that
can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in the
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating a certain logic.

13.4.2 Principle of operation

There are eight outputs from the FIXD function block: OFF is a boolean signal, fixed
to OFF (boolean 0) value; ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value;
INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0; INTONE is an integer
number, fixed to integer value 1; REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed
to 0.0 value; STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value; ZEROSMPL
is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; GRP_OFF is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value;
The function does not allow any settings and therefore it’s not present in PCM 600.
For examples on how to use each type of output in the configuration, please read the
Application Manual.

13.4.3 Function block

FIXD-
FixedSignals
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF

en05000445.vsd

Figure 348: FIXD function block

13.4.4 Input and output signals

REL 670 Technical reference manual 659

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

Table 397: Output signals for the FixedSignals (FIXD-) function block
Signal Description
OFF Boolean signal fixed off
ON Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE Integer signal fixed one
REALZERO Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF Group signal fixed off

13.4.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

13.5 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

Function block name: BB-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
–

13.5.1 Introduction
The B16I function block (or the Boolean 16 to Integer conversion function block) is
used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an
integer.

13.5.1.1 Principle of operation

The B16I function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B1I6 function block is designed for receiving
the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last
value.

660 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

13.5.1.2 Function block

BB01-
B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

en07000128.vsd

Figure 349: The B16I function block.

13.5.1.3 Input and output signals

Table 398: Input signals for the B16I (BB01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
IN1 Input 1
IN2 Input 2
IN3 Input 3
IN4 Input 4
IN5 Input 5
IN6 Input 6
IN7 Input 7
IN8 Input 8
IN9 Input 9
IN10 Input 10
IN11 Input 11
IN12 Input 12
IN13 Input 13
IN14 Input 14
IN15 Input 15
IN16 Input 16

REL 670 Technical reference manual 661

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

Table 399: Output signals for the B16I (BB01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output value

13.5.1.4 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

13.6 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic

node representation (B16IGGIO)

Function block name: BA-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
B16IGGIO

13.6.1 Introduction
The B16IGGIO function block (or the Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic
node representation function block) is used within CAP tool to transform an integer
to 16 binary (logic) signals.

TheIB16IGGIO can receive it's value from remote like IEC61850 depending on the
PSTO input.

13.6.2 Principle of operation

The B16IGGIO function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer
into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B16IGGIO can receive an integer from
a station computer – for example, over IEC61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the
logical outputs at the last value.

The PSTO input determines the operator place. The integer number can be written to
the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in ”Off” or ”Local” then no change is applied
to the outputs.

662 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

13.6.3 Function block

BA01-
B16IGGIO
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
en07000129.vsd

Figure 350: The B16IGGIO function block.

13.6.4 Input and output signals

Table 400: Input signals for the B16IGGIO (BA01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
IN1 Input 1
IN2 Input 2
IN3 Input 3
IN4 Input 4
IN5 Input 5
IN6 Input 6
IN7 Input 7
IN8 Input 8
IN9 Input 9
IN10 Input 10
IN11 Input 11
IN12 Input 12
IN13 Input 13
IN14 Input 14
IN15 Input 15
IN16 Input 16

REL 670 Technical reference manual 663

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

Table 401: Output signals for the B16IGGIO (BA01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output value

13.6.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

13.7 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)

Function block name: IY- - IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
–

13.7.1 Introduction
The IB16 function block (or the integer to Boolean 16 conversion function block) is
used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an
integer.

13.7.2 Principle of operation

The IB16 function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The IB16 function block is designed for receiving
the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last
value.

664 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

13.7.3 Function block

IY01-
IB16
BLOCK OUT1
IN OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

en06000501.vsd

Figure 351: The BI16 function block.

13.7.4 Input and output signals

Table 402: Input signals for the IB16 (IY01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
IN input

Table 403: Output signals for the IB16 (IY01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT1 Output 1
OUT2 Output 2
OUT3 Output 3
OUT4 Output 4
OUT5 Output 5
OUT6 Output 6
OUT7 Output 7
OUT8 Output 8
OUT9 Output 9
OUT10 Output 10
OUT11 Output 11
OUT12 Output 12
OUT13 Output 13
OUT14 Output 14
OUT15 Output 15
OUT16 Output 16

REL 670 Technical reference manual 665

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

13.7.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

13.8 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic

node representation (IB16GGIO)

Function block name: IX-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
IB16GGIO

13.8.1 Introduction
The IB16GGIO function block (or the integer to Boolean conversion with logic node
representation function block) is used within CAP tool to transform an integer to 16
binary (logic) signals.

The IB16GGIO can receive it's value from remote like IEC61850 depending on the
PSTO input.

13.8.2 Principle of operation

The IB16GGIO function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer
into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The IB16GGIO can receive an integer from
a station computer – for example, over IEC61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the
logical outputs at the last value.

The PSTO input determines the operator place. The integer number can be written to
the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in ”Off” or ”Local” then no change is applied
to the outputs.

666 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 13
Logic

13.8.3 Function block

IX01-
IB16GGIO
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

en06000502.vsd

Figure 352: The BI16GGIO function block.

13.8.4 Input and output signals

Table 404: Input signals for the IB16GGIO (IX01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
PSTO Operator place selection

Table 405: Output signals for the IB16GGIO (IX01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT1 Output 1
OUT2 Output 2
OUT3 Output 3
OUT4 Output 4
OUT5 Output 5
OUT6 Output 6
OUT7 Output 7
OUT8 Output 8
OUT9 Output 9
OUT10 Output 10
OUT11 Output 11
OUT12 Output 12
OUT13 Output 13
OUT14 Output 14
OUT15 Output 15
OUT16 Output 16

REL 670 Technical reference manual 667

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 13
Logic

13.8.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

668 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Section 14 Monitoring

About this chapter

This chapter describes the functions that handle measurements, events and
disturbances. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,
input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

14.1 Measurements (MMXU)

Function block name: SVRx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
CVMMXU P, Q, S, I, U, f

Function block name: CPxx IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
CMMXU I

Function block name: VPx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
VMMXU U

REL 670 Technical reference manual 669

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Function block name: CSQx IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
CMSQI I1, I2, I0

Function block name: VSQx IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
VMSQI U1, U2, U0

14.1.1 Introduction
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level e.g.via
IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power,
reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient
production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the
system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and
control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument
transformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the
measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of
the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verify
proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection
function.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual

hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact
of noise in the inputs.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.

670 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

The measuring function, SVR (CVMMXU), provides the following power system
quantities:

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• U: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude
• I: phase current magnitude
• F: power system frequency

The measuring functions CP (CMMXU), VN (VNMMWU) and VP (VMMXU)

provides physical quantities:

• I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• U: voltages (phase and phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) (VMMXU,
VNMMXU)

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual

hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.

The measuring functions CSQ (CMSQI) and VSQ (VMSQI) provides sequential
quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)

• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and
angle).

The SVR function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (i.e. DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage
signals. The measured power quantities are available either as instantaneously
calculated quantities or averaged values over a period of time (i.e. low pass filtered)
depending on the selected settings.

14.1.2 Principle of operation

14.1.2.1 Measurement supervision

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-
processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends
on the type of IED and built-in options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 671

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM 600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report
function

Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General
setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog
inputs".

Zero point clamping

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1,
I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point
clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the service values
within SVR.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function
block by means of four built-in operating thresholds, see figure 353. The monitoring
has two different modes of operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 353.

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

en05000657.vsd

Figure 353: Presentation of operating limits

672 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).
The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded,
3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The
output may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to
get measurement supervision as binary signals.

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 353.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between
the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one
channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured separately, but the reporting of the
value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following
basic reporting modes are available:

• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 673

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5
en05000500.vsd
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt

Figure 354: Periodic reporting

AmplitudeMagnitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change
is larger than the ±ΔY predefined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then the
measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new
measured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary.
Figure 355 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture
is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time
interval of one execution cycle from each other.

674 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 DY
DY
Y2 DY
DY
DY
DY
Y1

99000529.vsd

Figure 355: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than
defined by the ±ΔY set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set
limit (XZeroDb), figure 356, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 356 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.
This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following
measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 675

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
(1st) Value
Value Reported Y5
A Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
99000530.vsd

Figure 356: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

14.1.2.2 Service values (MMXU, SVR)

Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase
voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure
and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the
available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a
parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used
within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when
* * *
S = U L1 × I L1 + U L 2 × I L 2 + U L 3 × I L 3 U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 three phase-
to-earth
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3 voltages are
available
2 Arone Used when
three two
S = U L1 L 2 × I L1 - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3
* *
U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2
phase-to-
phase
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2 voltages are
available
3 PosSeq Used when
only
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq
*
U = 3 × U PosSeq symmetrical
three phase
I = I PosSeq power shall
be measured
Table continued on next page

676 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
4 L1L2 Used when
only UL1L2
S = U L1 L 2 × ( I L1 - I L 2 )
* *
U = U L1 L 2
phase-to-
phase voltage
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2 is available

5 L2L3 Used when

only UL2L3
S = U L 2 L3 × ( I L 2 - I L3 )
* *
U = U L2 L3
phase-to-
phase voltage
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2 is available

6 L3L1 Used when

only UL3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3 - I L1 )
* *
U = U L 3 L1
phase-to-
phase voltage
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2 is available

7 L1 Used when
only UL1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1
*
U = 3 × U L1
phase-to-
earth voltage
I = I L1 is available

8 L2 Used when
only UL2
S = 3 ×U L2 × I L2
*
U = 3 × U L2
phase-to-
earth voltage
I = IL2 is available

9 L3 Used when
only UL3
S = 3 ×U L3 × I L3
*
U = 3 × U L3
phase-to-
earth voltage
I = I L3 is available

* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes (i.e. 1 & 3) the measurement
function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes (i.e. from 3 to
9) it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully
symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF
are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:

P = Re( S )
(Equation 154)

Q = Im( S )
(Equation 155)

S = S = P +Q
2 2

(Equation 156)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 677

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

PF = cosj = P
S (Equation 157)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function
are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage
phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging
behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor
is leading the voltage phasor.

Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the SVR function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation
at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and
above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 357.

Amplitude
% of Ir compensation

-10
IAmpComp5 Measured
IAmpComp30 current

IAmpComp100
5 30 100 % of Ir
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant

Degrees Angle
compensation

-10
IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of Ir

-10

en05000652.vsd

Figure 357: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

678 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I
& power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in
the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following
recursive formula:

X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
(Equation 158)

where:
X is a new measured value (i.e. P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When
k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be
determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitude IGenZeroDb level for
current and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current
or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power
(i.e. P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement
supervision functionality, included in the SVR function, is using these values the zero
clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero
point clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement
supervision").

Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (i.e. CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors etc.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved
by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to
multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude
(i.e. setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (i.e. setting
parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two
parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value
(i.e. complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific
operating range (e.g. around rated power) can be done at site. However to perform
this calibration it is necessary to have external power meter of the high accuracy class
available.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 679

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Directionality
In CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and
reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown
in the following figure 358.

Busbar

P Q

Protected
Object
en05000373.vsd

Figure 358: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

That practically means that active and reactive power will have positive values when
they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative
values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

In some application, like for example when power is measured on the secondary side
of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to
have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power
measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to
value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have
positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained
from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block
as an output.

14.1.2.3 Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)

The CP function must be connected to three-phase current input in the configuration

tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be calibrated to get better
then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850.
This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated
current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in
between, see figure 357 above.

680 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each
amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".

14.1.2.4 Voltage phasors (MMXU, VN and VP)

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the

configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents
when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.

The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on
the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".

14.1.2.5 Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ)

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CSQ) or

voltage (VSQ) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, but XRANG,
are calculated within the measuring block and it is not possible to calibrate the signals.
Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to
corresponding output.

Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the
outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer
in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

14.1.3 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 681

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

SVR1-
CVMMXU
I3P S
U3P S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE

en05000772.vsd

Figure 359: SVR function block

CP01-
CMMXU
I3P IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL

en05000699.vsd

Figure 360: CP function block

VP01-
VMMXU
U3P UL12
UL12RANG
UL23
UL23RANG
UL31
UL31RANG

en05000701.vsd

Figure 361: VP function block

CSQ1-
CMSQI
I3P 3I0
3I0RANG
I1
I1RANG
I2
I2RANG

en05000703.vsd

Figure 362: CS function block

682 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

VSQ1-
VMSQI
U3P 3U0
3U0RANG
U1
U1RANG
U2
U2RANG

en05000704.vsd

VSQ1-
VMSQI
V3P 3V0
3V0RANG
V1
V1RANG
V2
V2RANG
en05000704_ansi.vsd

Figure 363: VS function block

14.1.4 Input and output signals

Table 406: Input signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input

Table 407: Output signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block
Signal Description
S Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE Apparent Power range
P_INST Active Power
P Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE Active Power range
Q_INST Reactive Power
Q Active Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE Reactive Power range
PF Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE Power Factor range
ILAG Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD Current is leading voltage
U Calculate voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE Calcuate voltage range
I Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 683

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Signal Description
I_RANGE Calculated current range
F System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE System frequency range

Table 408: Input signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group connection abstract block 1

Table 409: Output signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block
Signal Description
IL1 IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL2 IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL2RANG IL2 Amplitude range
IL2ANGL IL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL3 IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL3RANG IL3 Amplitude range
IL3ANGL IL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 410: Input signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Group connection abstract block 2

Table 411: Output signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block
Signal Description
UL12 UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG UL12 Amplitude range
UL23 UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL23RANG UL23 Amplitude range
UL31 UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL31RANG UL31 Amplitude range

684 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Table 412: Input signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group connection abstract block 3

Table 413: Output signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block
Signal Description
3I0 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG 3I0 Amplitude range
I1 I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG I1 Amplitude range
I2 I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG I2 Amplitude range

Table 414: Input signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Group connection abstract block 4

Table 415: Output signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block
Signal Description
3U0 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG 3U0 Amplitude range
U1 U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG U1 Amplitude range
U2 U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG U2 Amplitude range

14.1.5 Setting parameters

The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM
600.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 685

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Table 416: Basic general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SLowLim 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 VA Low limit (physical
10000000000.000 value)
SLowLowLim 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 VA Low Low limit
10000000000.000 (physical value)
SMin 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 VA Minimum value
10000000000.000
SMax 0.000 - 0.001 1000000000.000 VA Maximum value
10000000000.000
SRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PMin -10000000000.00 0.001 -1000000000.000 W Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
PMax -10000000000.00 0.001 1000000000.000 W Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
PRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
QMin -10000000000.00 0.001 -1000000000.000 VAr Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting for
current level in A
QMax -10000000000.00 0.001 1000000000.000 VAr Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
QRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
voltage level in kV
Mode L1, L2, L3 - L1, L2, L3 - Selection of
Arone measured current and
Pos Seq voltage
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 0.001 1.000 - Amplitude factor to
scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Angle compensation
for phase shift
between measured I
&U
Table continued on next page

686 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

k 0.00 - 1.00 0.01 0.00 - Low pass filter
coefficient for power
measurement, U and
I
PFMin -1.000 - 0.000 0.001 -1.000 - Minimum value
PFMax 0.000 - 1.000 0.001 1.000 - Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UMin -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
UMax -10000000000.00 0.001 400000.000 V Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
URepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IMin -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
IMax -10000000000.00 0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
IRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
FrMin -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 Hz Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
FrMax -10000000000.00 0.001 70.000 Hz Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
FrRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 417: Advanced general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.000 - 0.001 900000000.000 VA High High limit
10000000000.000 (physical value)
SHiLim 0.000 - 0.001 800000000.000 VA High limit (physical
10000000000.000 value)
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 687

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

PDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
PHiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 900000000.000 W High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
PHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 800000000.000 W High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
PLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -800000000.000 W Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
PLowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -900000000.000 W Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
QDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
QHiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 900000000.000 VAr High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
QHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 800000000.000 VAr High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
QLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -800000000.000 VAr Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
QLowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -900000000.000 VAr Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 1 5 % Zero point clamping in
% of Ubase
PFHiHiLim -3.000 - 3.000 0.001 3.000 - High High limit
(physical value)
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 1 5 % Zero point clamping in
% of Ibase
Table continued on next page

688 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

PFHiLim -3.000 - 3.000 0.001 2.000 - High limit (physical
value)
PFLowLim -3.000 - 3.000 0.001 -2.000 - Low limit (physical
value)
PFLowLowLim -3.000 - 3.000 0.001 -3.000 - Low Low limit
(physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
UDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UHiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 460000.000 V High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
UHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
ULowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
ULowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
IDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IHiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 900.000 A High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
IHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 800.000 A High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
ILowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
ILowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 689

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
FrHiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 65.000 Hz High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
FrHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 63.000 Hz High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
FrLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 47.000 Hz Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
FrLowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 45.000 Hz Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 100% of Ir

690 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Table 418: Basic general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - Off - Operation Mode On /
On Off
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting for
current level in A
IL1Max 0.000 - 0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
10000000000.000
IL1RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
IL2DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
IL2Max 0.000 - 0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
10000000000.000
IL2RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IL2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
IL3DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
IL3Max 0.000 - 0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
10000000000.000
IL3RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IL3AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s

Table 419: Advanced general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IL1HiHiLim 0.000 - 0.001 900.000 A High High limit
10000000000.000 (physical value)
IL1HiLim 0.000 - 0.001 800.000 A High limit (physical
10000000000.000 value)
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
5% of Ir
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 691

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IL1LowLim 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 A Low limit (physical
10000000000.000 value)
IL1LowLowLim 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 A Low Low limit
10000000000.000 (physical value)
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 5% of Ir
IL1Min 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
10000000000.000
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 100% of Ir
IL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
IL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IL2HiHiLim 0.000 - 0.001 900.000 A High High limit
10000000000.000 (physical value)
IL2HiLim 0.000 - 0.001 800.000 A High limit (physical
10000000000.000 value)
IL2LowLim 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 A Low limit (physical
10000000000.000 value)
IL2LowLowLim 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 A Low Low limit
10000000000.000 (physical value)
IL2Min 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
10000000000.000
IL2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
IL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IL3HiHiLim 0.000 - 0.001 900.000 A High High limit
10000000000.000 (physical value)
IL3HiLim 0.000 - 0.001 800.000 A High limit (physical
10000000000.000 value)
IL3LowLim 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 A Low limit (physical
10000000000.000 value)
IL3LowLowLim 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 A Low Low limit
10000000000.000 (physical value)
IL3Min 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
10000000000.000
IL3LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits

692 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Table 420: Basic general settings for the VMMXU (VP01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
UL12DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - On - Operation Mode On /
On Off
UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/100 Zero point clamping in
0% 0,001% of range
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
voltage level in kV
UL12HiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 460000.000 V High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
UL12HiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UL12LowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
UL12LowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
UL12Min -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
UL12Max -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
UL12RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
UL12AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
UL12AngRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL23DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 693

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

UL23ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/100 Zero point clamping in
0% 0,001% of range
UL23HiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 460000.000 V High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
UL23HiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
UL23LowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
UL23LowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
UL23Min -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
UL23Max -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
UL23RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL23LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
UL23AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
UL23AngRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL31DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
UL31ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/100 Zero point clamping in
0% 0,001% of range
UL31HiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 460000.000 V High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
UL31HiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
UL31LowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
UL31LowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
UL31Min -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
Table continued on next page

694 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

UL31Max -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
UL31RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL31LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
UL31AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
UL31AngRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 421: Basic general settings for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/100 Zero point clamping in
0% 0,001% of range
3I0HiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 900.000 A High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
3I0HiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 800.000 A High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
3I0LowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
3I0LowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
3I0Min -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
3I0Max -10000000000.00 0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 695

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation Off - Off - Operation Mode On /
On Off
3I0AngRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/100 Zero point clamping in
0% 0,001% of range
I1HiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 900.000 A High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
I1HiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 800.000 A High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
I1LowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
I1LowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
I1Min -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
I1Max -10000000000.00 0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
I1RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
I1AngRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/100 Zero point clamping in
0% 0,001% of range
I2HiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 900.000 A High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
I2HiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 800.000 A High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
Table continued on next page

696 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

I2LowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
I2LowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
I2Min -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
I2Max -10000000000.00 0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
I2RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
I2AngRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 422: Basic general settings for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
3U0DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/100 Zero point clamping in
0% 0,001% of range
3U0HiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 460000.000 V High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
3U0HiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
3U0LowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
3U0LowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
3U0Min -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
3U0Max -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 697

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

3U0RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - Off - Operation Mode On /
On Off
3U0AngRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/100 Zero point clamping in
0% 0,001% of range
U1HiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 460000.000 V High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
U1HiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
U1LowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
U1LowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
U1Min -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
U1Max -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
U1RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
U1AngRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Table continued on next page

698 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/100 Zero point clamping in
0% 0,001% of range
U2HiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 460000.000 V High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
U2HiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
U2LowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
U2LowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
U2Min -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
U2Max -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
U2RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
U2AngRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

14.1.6 Technical data

Table 423: Measurements (MMXU)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Frequency (0.95-1.05) × fr ± 2.0 mHz

Voltage (0.1-1.5) ×Ur ± 0.5% of Ur at U£Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Connected current (0.2-4.0) × Ir ± 0.5% of Ir at I £ Ir

± 0.5% of I at I > Ir

Active power, P 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur ± 1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir ± 1.0% of S at S > Sr

Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 699

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reactive power, Q 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur ± 1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir ± 1.0% of S at S > Sr

Apparent power, S 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur ± 1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir ± 1.0% of S at S > Sr

Power factor, cos (φ) 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur ± 0.02

0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

14.2 Event counter (GGIO)

Function block name: CNTx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
CNTGGIO

14.2.1 Introduction
The function consists of six counters which are used for storing the number of times
each counter input has been activated.

14.2.2 Principle of operation

The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six
counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each
positive edge of the input respectively. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulses
per second. The maximum counter value is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 the
counter will stop at 10 000 and no restart will take place.

To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism
for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This
however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a
new value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored
before auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. The CNTGGIO stored values in
flash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked. The input can for example be used for blocking the counters at
testing.

All inputs are configured via PCM 600, CAP531 Application configuration tool.

700 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

14.2.2.1 Reporting

The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI. Refer to “Operators
manual” for procedure.

Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input. Refer to
“Operators manual” for procedure.

Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from MicroSCADA.
The value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI graphical
display.

14.2.2.2 Design

The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six
counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each
positive edge of the input respectively.

The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked and are not updated. Valid number is held.

The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six counters
are set to 0.

14.2.3 Function block

CNT1-
CNTGGIO
BLOCK
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
RESET

en05000345.vsd

Figure 364: CNT function block

14.2.4 Input signals

Table 424: Input signals for the CNTGGIO (CNT1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
COUNTER1 Input for counter1
COUNTER2 Input for counter2
COUNTER3 Input for counter3
COUNTER4 Input for counter4
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 701

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Signal Description
COUNTER5 Input for counter5
COUNTER6 Input for counter6
RESET Reset of function

14.2.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

14.2.6 Technical data

Table 425: Event counter (GGIO)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-10000 -
Max. count up speed 10 pulses/s -

14.3 Event function (EV)

Function block name: EVxx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
Event

14.3.1 Introduction
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,
time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station
level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected
to the Event function block. The event function block is used for LON and SPA
communication.

Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the event block.

14.3.2 Principle of operation

The main purpose of the event function block is to generate events when the state or
value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state
transition, for which event generation is enabled.

702 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Each event function block has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given
a name from the CAP configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single
events, but are also intended for double indication events.

The function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.

The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals
and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing
module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module.
The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have
a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of the event function block. The
time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a
resolution of 1 ms.

The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading of status, events
and alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each
input is intended to be used by the station level.

All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to
1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the
oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The event mask can be set
individually for each input channel. These settings are available:

• NoEvents
• OnSet
• OnReset
• OnChange
• AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of the event function block that shall generate events.
This can be performed individually for the LON and SPA communication
respectively. For each communication type these settings are available:

• Off
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16

For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is
possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input
channel.

To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate
the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is
implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted
quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be
removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the

REL 670 Technical reference manual 703

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel equals 3 times
the configurable setting MaxEvPerSec.

14.3.3 Function block

EV01-
Event
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11
NAME12
NAME13
NAME14
NAME15
NAME16

en05000697.vsd

14.3.4 Input and output signals

Table 426: Input signals for the Event (EV01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
INPUT1 Input 1
INPUT2 Input 2
INPUT3 Input 3
INPUT4 Input 4
INPUT5 Input 5
INPUT6 Input 6
INPUT7 Input 7
INPUT8 Input 8
INPUT9 Input 9
INPUT10 Input 10
Table continued on next page

704 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Signal Description
INPUT11 Input 11
INPUT12 Input 12
INPUT13 Input 13
INPUT14 Input 14
INPUT15 Input 15
INPUT16 Input 16

14.3.5 Setting parameters

Table 427: Basic general settings for the Event (EV01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SPAChannelMask Off - Off - SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Off - Off - LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 1
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask2 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 2
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask3 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 3
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask4 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 4
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask5 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 5
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask6 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 6
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 705

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

EventMask7 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 7
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask8 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 8
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask9 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 9
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask10 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 10
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask11 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 11
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask12 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 12
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask13 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 13
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask14 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 14
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask15 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 15
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask16 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 16
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 2
MinRepIntVal3 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 3
Table continued on next page

706 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

MinRepIntVal4 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 4
MinRepIntVal5 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 5
MinRepIntVal6 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 6
MinRepIntVal7 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 7
MinRepIntVal8 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 8
MinRepIntVal9 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 9
MinRepIntVal10 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 10
MinRepIntVal11 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 11
MinRepIntVal12 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 12
MinRepIntVal13 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 13
MinRepIntVal14 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 14
MinRepIntVal15 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 15
MinRepIntVal16 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reporting
interval input 16

14.4 Fault locator (RFLO)

Function block name: FLO-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
LMBRFLO

14.4.1 Introduction
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a
persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.

The built-in fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to
the fault in percent, km or miles. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved
by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero sequence effect on double
circuit lines.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 707

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of
the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current,
together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault
position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to
further increase the accuracy.

Specially on heavily loaded long lines (where the fault locator is most important)
where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart the accuracy can
be still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault locator.

14.4.2 Principle of operation

The Fault Locator (FL) in the IED is an essential complement to other monitoring
functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with great accuracy.

When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages
are selected from the Trip Value Recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the
fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The
analog configuration (channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool
within PCM 600.

The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and
additional fault resistance.

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L

R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L en05000045.vsd
DRP
FL

Figure 365: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for
settings of the fault location-measuring function.

If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a
significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to
exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order
etc.), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the distance
to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. It’s also possible to
change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be achieved.

The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. The fault location is stored as a part
of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via
the LHMI or PCM 600.

708 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

14.4.2.1 Measuring Principle

For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end
infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the
distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done,
the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of
additional fault resistance.

The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of
double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.

14.4.2.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault

Figure 366 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from
both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume, that the fault occurs at a
distance F from terminal A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault
resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of the
algorithm.

A B
ZA IA pZL IB (1-p).ZL ZB

IF

UA RF

xx01000171.vsd

Figure 366: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends.

From figure 366 it is evident that:

U A = I A × p × Z L + IF × R F
(Equation 159)

Where:
IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,

IF is the fault current and

p is a relative distance to the fault

REL 670 Technical reference manual 709

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

IF A
IF = --------
DA
(Equation 160)

Where:
IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, terminal A and

DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and
the total fault current.

For a single line, the value is equal to:

( 1 – p ) × Z L + ZB
DA = -----------------------------------------
Z A + Z L + ZB
(Equation 161)

Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:

I FA
U A = I A × p × Z L + -------
- × RF
DA
(Equation 162)

Table 428: Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults

Fault type: UA IA IFA

L1-N UL1A IL1A + KN x INA
3
--- ´ D ( I L1A – I 0A )
2

L2-N UL2A IL2A + KN x INA

3
--- ´ D ( I L2A – I 0A )
2

L3-N UL3A IL3A + KN x INA

3
--- ´ D ( I L3A – I0A )
2
L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2- UL1A-UL2A IL1A - IL2A
N DIL 1 L 2 A

L2-L3, L2-L3-N UL2A-UL3A IL2A - IL3A

DIL2L3A

L3-L1, L3-L1-N UL3A-UL1A IL3A - IL1A

DIL3L1A

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal
to:

710 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Z0L – Z 1L
K N = ------------------------
3 × Z1L
(Equation 169)

DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before
the fault.

In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into
the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.

For double lines, the fault equation is:

I FA
U A = I A × p × Z 1L + -------- × RF + I 0P × Z 0M
DA
(Equation 170)

Where:
I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,

Z0M is a mutual zero sequence impedance and

DA is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

( 1 – p ) × ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 × ZA + Z L + 2 × Z B

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z0L – Z 1L Z 0M I 0P
K N = ----------------------- - × -------
- + ----------------
3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L I 0A
(Equation 172)

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location
equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two
cases.

Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 162 or 171 is a function of

p, the general equation 171 can be written in the form:
2
p – p × K1 + K2 – K3 × RF = 0
(Equation 173)

Where:

UA ZB
K 1 = ---------------
- + --------------------------
-+1
I A × ZL Z L + ZA DD
(Equation 174)

UA ZB
K2 = --------------- × æè --------------------------- + 1öø
IA × Z L Z L + Z A DD
(Equation 175)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 711

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

IF A æ ZA + ZB
- × --------------------------- + 1ö
K 3 = ---------------
I A × Z L è Z 1 + ZA DD ø
(Equation 176)

and:

• ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines.

• IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table.
• KN is calculated automatically according to equation 172.
• ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 173 applies to both single
and parallel lines.

Equation 173 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:

2
p – p × Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) – R F × Re ( K 3 ) = 0
(Equation 177)

– p × Im × ( K1 ) + Im × ( K 2 ) – R F × Im × ( K3 ) = 0
(Equation 178)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 178,
and then inserted to equation 177. According to equation 177, the relative distance
to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation.

Equation 177 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a
solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, that gives an unequivocal figure
for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be
selected.

If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable
solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the
relative distance to the fault.

14.4.2.3 The non-compensated impedance model

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault
current:

U A = p × Z 1 L × IA + R F × IA
(Equation 179)

Where:
IA is according to table 428.

712 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated

impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only
used if the load compensated models do not function.

14.4.2.4 IEC 60870-5-103

The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location
information from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). There are two outputs that
must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis,
FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and
CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX
output.

14.4.3 Function block

FLO1-
LMBRFLO
PHSELL1 FLTDISTX
PHSELL2 CALCMADE
PHSELL3 BCD_80
CALCDIST BCD_40
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1

en05000679.vsd

Figure 367: FLO function block

14.4.4 Input and output signals

Table 429: Input signals for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function block
Signal Description
PHSELL1 Phase selecton L1
PHSELL2 Phase selecton L2
PHSELL3 Phase selecton L3
CALCDIST Do calculate fault distance (release)

Table 430: Output signals for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function block
Signal Description
FLTDISTX Reactive distance to fault
CALCMADE Fault calculation made
BCD_80 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%
BCD_40 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 40%
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 713

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Signal Description
BCD_20 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 20%
BCD_10 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 10%
BCD_8 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 8%
BCD_4 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 4%
BCD_2 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 2%
BCD_1 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 1%

14.4.5 Setting parameters

Table 431: Basic general settings for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DrepChNoIL1 1 - 30 1 1 Ch Recorder input
number recording
phase current, IL1
DrepChNoIL2 1 - 30 1 2 Ch Recorder input
number recording
phase current, IL2
DrepChNoIL3 1 - 30 1 3 Ch Recorder input
number recording
phase current, IL3
DrepChNoIN 0 - 30 1 4 Ch Recorder input
number recording
residual current, IN
DrepChNoIP 0 - 30 1 0 Ch Recorder input
number recording 3I0
on parallel line
DrepChNoUL1 1 - 30 1 5 Ch Recorder input
number recording
phase voltage, UL1
DrepChNoUL2 1 - 30 1 6 Ch Recorder input
number recording
phase voltage, UL2
DrepChNoUL3 1 - 30 1 7 Ch Recorder input
number recording
phase voltage, UL3

Table 432: Basic parameter group settings for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
R1A 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 2.000 ohm/p Source resistance A
(near end)
X1A 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 12.000 ohm/p Source reactance A
(near end)
R1B 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 2.000 ohm/p Source resistance B
(far end)
X1B 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 12.000 ohm/p Source reactance B
(far end)
Table continued on next page

714 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

R1L 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 2.000 ohm/p Positive sequence
line resistance
X1L 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 12.500 ohm/p Positive sequence
line reactance
R0L 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 8.750 ohm/p Zero sequence line
resistance
X0L 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 50.000 ohm/p Zero sequence line
reactance
R0M 0.000 - 1500.000 0.001 0.000 ohm/p Zero sequence
mutual resistance
X0M 0.000 - 1500.000 0.001 0.000 ohm/p Zero sequence
mutual reactance
LineLength 0.0 - 10000.0 0.1 40.0 - Length of line

14.4.6 Technical data

Table 433: Fault locator (RFLO)

Function Value or range Accuracy
Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) Ω/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy
± 2.0% degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir

Phase selection According to input signals -

Maximum number of fault 100 -
locations

14.5 Measured value expander block

Function block name: XP IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
RANGE_XP

14.5.1 Introduction
The functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO
(MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values
can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit
and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced to
be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary

REL 670 Technical reference manual 715

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

signals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or
above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable
logic.

14.5.2 Principle of operation

The input signal must be connected to the RANGE-output of a measuring function
block (MMXU, MSQI or MVGGIO). The function block converts the input integer
value to five binary output signals according to table 434.

Table 434: Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervised below low-low between low‐ between low between high- above high-
value is: limit low and low and high limit high and high high limit
Output: limit limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High

14.5.3 Function block

XP01-
RANGE_XP
RANGE HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW

en05000346.vsd

Figure 368: XP function block

14.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 435: Input signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block
Signal Description
RANGE Measured value range

716 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Table 436: Output signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block
Signal Description
HIGHHIGH Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW Measured value is below low-low limit

14.6 Disturbance report (RDRE)

Function block name: DRP--, DRA1- – DRA4-, IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
DRB1- – DRB6-
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ABRDRE

14.6.1 Introduction
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.

The disturbance report, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all
selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block i.e. maximum
40 analog and 96 binary signals.

The disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

• Event List (EL)

• Indications (IND)
• Event recorder (ER)
• Trip Value recorder (TVR)
• Disturbance recorder (DR)
• Fault Locator (FL)

The function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, starting

conditions, recording times and large storage capacity.

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input in the DRAx or DRBy function

blocks which is set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start of pre-
fault time to the end of post-fault time, will be included in the recording.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 717

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

The Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to get information about the
recordings, but the disturbance report files may be uploaded to the PCM 600
(Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysis using the disturbance
handling tool.

14.6.2 Principle of operation

The disturbance report (DRP) is a common name for several facilities to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, etc. with sufficient information about events in the
system.

The facilities included in the disturbance report are:

• General disturbance information

• Indications (IND)
• Event recorder (ER)
• Event list (EL)
• Trip values (phase values) (TVR)
• Disturbance recorder (DR)
• Fault locator (FL)

Figure 369Figure "" shows the relations among Disturbance Report, included
functions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binary
input function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog input
function blocks (DRA1-3) which is used by FL after estimation by TVR. The DR
function acquires information from both DRAx and DRBx.

718 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

DRA1-- 4- Disturbance Report

DRP- - FL01
A4RADR RDRE FL
Analog signals
Trip Value Rec Fault Locator

DRB1-- 6- Disturbance
Recorder

Binary signals B6RBDR

Event List

Event Recorder

Indications

en05000124.vsd

Figure 369: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function
is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time etc.
All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories.
This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report
will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist. Trip Event Disturbance

Indications Fault locator Event list
information values recordings recording

en05000125.vsd

Figure 370: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is over-written by the new one.
The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling
frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. The figure
371 shows number of recordings vs total recording time tested for a typical
configuration, i.e. in a 50 Hz system it’s possible to record 100 where the average
recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the
disturbance report (IND, ER, EL and TVR).

REL 670 Technical reference manual 719

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Number of recordings
100
3,4 s

80 3,4 s 20 analog
96 binary
40 analog
96 binary
60 6,3 s
6,3 s

6,3 s 50 Hz
40
60 Hz
Total recording time

250 300 350 400 s

en05000488.vsd

Figure 371: Number of recordings.

Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local human-machine interface (LHMI). To acquire a
complete disturbance report the use of a PC and PCM600 is required. The PC may
be connected to the IED-front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of
the disturbance (not time-tagged). (See section "Indications (RDRE)" for more
detailed information.)

Event recorder (ER)

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the LHMI or PCM
600. (See section "Event recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)

Event list (EL)

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via LHMI or PCM
600. (See section "Event list (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)

720 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Trip value recorder (TVR)

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault
and during the fault. (See section "Trip value recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed
information.)

Disturbance recorder (DR)

The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and
after the fault. (See section "Disturbance recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed
information.)

Fault locator (FL)

The fault location function calculates the distance to fault. (See section "Fault locator
(RFLO)" for more detailed information)

Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report

Recording times
The disturbance report (DRP) records information about a disturbance during a
settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
The disturbance recorder (DR), the event recorder (ER) and indication function
register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which

criterion stops the current disturbance recording

Trig point
TimeLimit

PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

1 2 3

en05000487.vsd

Figure 372: The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate
time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any
valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the
limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 721

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does
not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of
a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored
disturbances.Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.

Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for
external analog signals, i.e. signals from the analog input modules (TRM) and line
differential communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks
(SMAI) and summation block (Sum3Ph). The last 10 channels may be connected to
internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA
input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents etc.).

PRxx- DRA1-
SMAI A1RADR DRA2-
GRPNAME AI3P A2RADR DRA3-
External analog AI1NAME AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
signals
AI2NAME AI2 INPUT2
TRM, LDCM AI3NAME AI3 INPUT3
SUxx
AI4NAME AI4 INPUT4
AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...

A4RADR

INPUT31
Internal analog signals
T2Dx, T3Dx, INPUT32
REFx, HZDx, INPUT33
L3D, L6D,
LT3D, LT6D INPUT34
INPUT35
SVRx, CPxx, VP0x,
CSQx, VSQx, MVxx INPUT36

...

INPUT40

en05000653.vsd

Figure 373: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the DRAx- function block via the PRxx
function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate
(1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle
time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base
sampling rate, the Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new
updated sample is available.

722 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration).
In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the
Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.

The preprocessor function block (PRxx) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). PRxx makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual
output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as a input signal the
corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the
PRxx-block. Connect the signals to the DRAx accordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used
as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect
the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by the disturbance report.The
signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal
is selected to be recorded when:

• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report

(operationON/OFF). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the
local HMI (setLED=On/Off).

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance
recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers.
The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with the LHMI
IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which
runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete
disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled,
there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance
of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 723

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, from PCM600
or via station bus (IEC61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal
is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to “Operators
manual” for procedure.

Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger
from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded
in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average
value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger
is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the
range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.

All under/over trig signal information is available on the LHMI and PCM600, see
table 437.

Post Retrigger
The disturbance report function does not respond to any new trig condition, during a
recording. Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the
post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig

= On)during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and,
during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not
start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new
trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording
a new complete recording will be fetched.

The disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance

recordings.

724 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

14.6.3 Function block

DRP--
RDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED

en05000406.vsd

Figure 374: DRP function block

DRA1-
A1RADR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10

en05000430.vsd

Figure 375: DRA1 function block, analog inputs, example for DRA1–DRA3

DRA4-
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
NAME31
NAME32
NAME33
NAME34
NAME35
NAME36
NAME37
NAME38
NAME39
NAME40

en05000431.vsd

Figure 376: DRA4 function block, derived analog inputs

REL 670 Technical reference manual 725

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

DRB1-
B1RBDR
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11
NAME12
NAME13
NAME14
NAME15
NAME16

en05000432.vsd

Figure 377: DRB1 function block, binary inputs, example for DRB1–DRB6

14.6.4 Input and output signals

Table 437: Output signals for the RDRE (DRP--) function block
Signal Description
DRPOFF Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART Disturbance recording started
RECMADE Disturbance recording made
CLEARED All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED More than 80% of memory used

Table 438: Input signals for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT1 Group signal for input 1
INPUT2 Group signal for input 2
INPUT3 Group signal for input 3
INPUT4 Group signal for input 4
INPUT5 Group signal for input 5
Table continued on next page

726 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Signal Description
INPUT6 Group signal for input 6
INPUT7 Group signal for input 7
INPUT8 Group signal for input 8
INPUT9 Group signal for input 9
INPUT10 Group signal for input 10

Table 439: Input signals for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT31 Analogue channel 31
INPUT32 Analogue channel 32
INPUT33 Analogue channel 33
INPUT34 Analogue channel 34
INPUT35 Analogue channel 35
INPUT36 Analogue channel 36
INPUT37 Analogue channel 37
INPUT38 Analogue channel 38
INPUT39 Analogue channel 39
INPUT40 Analogue channel 40

Table 440: Input signals for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT1 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 Binary channel 5
INPUT6 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 Binary channel 13
INPUT14 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 Binary channel 16

REL 670 Technical reference manual 727

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

14.6.5 Setting parameters

Table 441: Basic general settings for the RDRE (DRP--) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 1.00 0.01 0.10 s Pre-fault recording
time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 0.5 s Post-fault recording
time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 s Fault recording time
limit
PostRetrig Off - Off - Post-fault retrig
On enabled (On) or not
(Off)
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 1 1 Ch Trip value recorder,
phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - Off - Operation mode
On during test mode

Table 442: Basic general settings for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation01 Off - Off - Operation On/Off
On
NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 1
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 1 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp01 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 1 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 1 in %
of signal
Operation02 Off - Off - Operation On/Off
On
NomValue02 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 2
UnderTrigOp02 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 2
(on) or not (off)
Table continued on next page

728 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

UnderTrigLe02 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 2 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp02 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 2 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe02 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 2 in %
of signal
Operation03 Off - Off - Operation On/Off
On
NomValue03 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 3
UnderTrigOp03 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 3
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 3 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp03 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 3 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 1 200 % Overtrigger level for
analogue cha 3 in %
of signal
Operation04 Off - Off - Operation On/Off
On
NomValue04 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 4
UnderTrigOp04 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 4
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 4 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp04 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 4 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe04 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 4 in %
of signal
Operation05 Off - Off - Operation On/Off
On
NomValue05 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 5
UnderTrigOp05 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 5
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 5 in %
of signal
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 729

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

OverTrigOp05 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 5 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe05 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 5 in %
of signal
Operation06 Off - Off - Operation On/Off
On
NomValue06 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 6
UnderTrigOp06 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 6
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 6 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp06 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 6 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe06 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 6 in %
of signal
Operation07 Off - Off - Operation On/Off
On
NomValue07 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 7
UnderTrigOp07 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 7
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 7 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp07 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 7 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe07 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 7 in %
of signal
Operation08 Off - Off - Operation On/Off
On
NomValue08 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 8
UnderTrigOp08 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 8
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 8 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp08 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 8 (on)
or not (off)
Table continued on next page

730 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

OverTrigLe08 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 8 in %
of signal
Operation09 Off - Off - Operation On/Off
On
NomValue09 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 9
UnderTrigOp09 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 9
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 9 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp09 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 9 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe09 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 9 in %
of signal
Operation10 Off - Off - Operation On/Off
On
NomValue10 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 10
UnderTrigOp10 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 10
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 10 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp10 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 10 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 10 in %
of signal

Table 443: Basic general settings for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation31 Off - Off - Operation On/off
On
NomValue31 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 31
UnderTrigOp31 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 31
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe31 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 31 in %
of signal
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 731

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

OverTrigOp31 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 31 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe31 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 31 in %
of signal
Operation32 Off - Off - Operation On/off
On
NomValue32 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 32
UnderTrigOp32 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 32
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe32 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 32 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp32 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 32 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe32 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 32 in %
of signal
Operation33 Off - Off - Operation On/off
On
NomValue33 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 33
UnderTrigOp33 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 33
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe33 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 33 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp33 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 33 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe33 0 - 5000 1 200 % Overtrigger level for
analogue cha 33 in %
of signal
Operation34 Off - Off - Operation On/off
On
NomValue34 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 34
UnderTrigOp34 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 34
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe34 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 34 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp34 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 34 (on)
or not (off)
Table continued on next page

732 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

OverTrigLe34 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 34 in %
of signal
Operation35 Off - Off - Operation On/off
On
NomValue35 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 35
UnderTrigOp35 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 35
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe35 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 35 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp35 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 35 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe35 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 35 in %
of signal
Operation36 Off - Off - Operation On/off
On
NomValue36 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 36
UnderTrigOp36 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 36
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe36 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 36 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp36 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 36 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe36 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 36 in %
of signal
Operation37 Off - Off - Operation On/off
On
NomValue37 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 37
UnderTrigOp37 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 37
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe37 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 37 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp37 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 37 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe37 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 37 in %
of signal
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 733

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation38 Off - Off - Operation On/off
On
NomValue38 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 38
UnderTrigOp38 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 38
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe38 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 38 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp38 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 38 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe38 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 38 in %
of signal
Operation39 Off - Off - Operation On/off
On
NomValue39 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 39
UnderTrigOp39 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 39
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe39 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 39 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp39 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 39 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe39 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 39 in %
of signal
Operation40 Off - Off - Operation On/off
On
NomValue40 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 40
UnderTrigOp40 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 40
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe40 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 40 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp40 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 40 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe40 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 40 in %
of signal

734 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Table 444: Basic general settings for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation01 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 1
SetLED01 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 1
Operation02 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 2
IndicationMa02 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 2
SetLED02 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 2
Operation03 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 3
IndicationMa03 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 3
SetLED03 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 3
Operation04 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 4
IndicationMa04 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 4
SetLED04 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 4
Operation05 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 5
IndicationMa05 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 5
SetLED05 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 5
Operation06 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 735

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

TrigLevel06 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 6
IndicationMa06 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 6
SetLED06 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 6
Operation07 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel07 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 7
IndicationMa07 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 7
SetLED07 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 7
Operation08 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel08 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 8
IndicationMa08 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 8
SetLED08 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 8
Operation09 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel09 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 9
IndicationMa09 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 9
SetLED09 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 9
Operation10 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel10 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 10
IndicationMa10 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 10
SetLED10 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 10
Operation11 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 11
IndicationMa11 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 11
Table continued on next page

736 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

SetLED11 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 11
Operation12 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 12
IndicationMa12 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 12
SetLED12 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary input 12
Operation13 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 13
IndicationMa13 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 13
SetLED13 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 13
Operation14 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel14 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 14
IndicationMa14 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 14
SetLED14 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 14
Operation15 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel15 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 15
IndicationMa15 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 15
SetLED15 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 15
Operation16 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 16
IndicationMa16 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 16
SetLED16 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 16
FUNT1 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 737

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

FUNT2 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 2 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FUNT3 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 3 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FUNT4 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 4 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FUNT5 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 5 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FUNT6 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 6 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FUNT7 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 7 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FUNT8 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 8 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FUNT9 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 9 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FUNT10 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 10
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT11 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 11
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT12 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 12
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT13 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 13
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT14 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 14
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT15 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 15
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT16 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for
binary channel 16
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO1 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 1
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO2 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 2
(IEC -60870-5-103)
Table continued on next page

738 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

INFNO3 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 3
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO4 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 4
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO5 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 5
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO6 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 6
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO7 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 7
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO8 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 8
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO9 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 9
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO10 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 10
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO11 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 11
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO12 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 12
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO13 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 13
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO14 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 14
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO15 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 15
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO16 0 - 255 1 0 INFN Information number
O for binary channel 16
(IEC -60870-5-103)

14.6.6 Technical data

REL 670 Technical reference manual 739

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Table 445: Disturbance report (RDRE)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Pre-fault time (0.05–0.30) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–5.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–6.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100 -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table26
Maximum number of analog 30 + 10 (external + internally -
inputs derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -
Maximum number of phasors in 30 -
the Trip Value recorder per
recording
Maximum number of indications in 96 -
a disturbance report
Maximum number of events in the 150 -
Event recording per recording
Maximum number of events in the 1000, first in - first out -
Event list
Maximum total recording time (3.4 340 seconds (100 recordings) at -
s recording time and maximum 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
number of channels, typical value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

14.7 Event list (RDRE)

14.7.1 Introduction
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring of the system from an overview
perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.

The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report
function. The list may contain of up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.

The event list information is available in the IED and is reported to higher control
systems via the station bus together with other logged events in the IED. In absence
of any software tool the information seeker may use the local HMI to view the event
list.

14.7.2 Principle of operation

When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status,
the event list function stores input name, status and time in the event list in

740 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic
signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten
when a new event arrives.

The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the
LHMI.

The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function,
which is only active during a disturbance.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-
defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and the event recorder function
(ER).

The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information
(ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).

14.7.3 Function block

The object has no function block of it’s own. It is included in the DRP- block and
uses information from the DRBx- block.

14.7.4 Input signals

The event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance
Report function.

14.7.5 Technical data

Table 446: Event list (RDRE)

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time
synchronizing

14.8 Indications (RDRE)

14.8.1 Introduction
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary
and/or in the secondary system it is important to know e.g. binary signals that have

REL 670 Technical reference manual 741

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspective
to get information via the LHMI in a straightforward way.

There are three LEDs on the LHMI (green, yellow and red), which will display status
information about the IED and the Disturbance Report function (trigged).

The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance Report function that have changed status during a disturbance.

The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the
IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the
information.

14.8.2 Principle of operation

The LED indications display this information:

Green LED:

Steady light In Service

Flashing light Internal fail
Dark No power supply

Yellow LED:

Steady light A disturbance report is triggered

Flashing light The IED is in test mode or in configuration mode

Red LED:

Steady light Trigged on binary signal N with SetLEDN=On

Indication list:

The possible indicated signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance
report function and disturbance recorder

The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording
period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic
one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of
indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of
indications the:

742 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

• the signal must be connected to binary input (DRB1-6) function block

• the DRP parameter Operation must be set On
• the DRP must be trigged (binary or analog)
• the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.

Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when configuring
the binary inputs.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-
defined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function
(ER).

14.8.3 Function block

The object has no function block of it’s own. It is included in the DRP- block and
uses information from the DRBx- block.

14.8.4 Input signals

The indication function may log the same binary input signals as the Disturbance
Report function.

14.8.5 Technical data

Table 447: Indications

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications 96
presented for single disturbance
Maximum number of recorded 100
disturbances

14.9 Event recorder (RDRE)

14.9.1 Introduction
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is vital e.g. time tagged events logged during disturbances. This
information is used for different purposes in the short term (e.g. corrective actions)
and in the long term (e.g. Functional Analysis).

The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
Report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 743

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.

The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED
Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.

The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record

(Comtrade file).

14.9.2 Principle of operation

When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event
recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be
generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal
signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels
are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total
recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance report
flash memory at the end of each recording.

In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = On and a new trig signal

appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-
defined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function
(ER).

The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR,
IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600.

14.9.3 Function block

The object has no function block of it’s own. It is included in the DRP- block and
uses information from the DRBx- block.

14.9.4 Input signals

The event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance
Report function.

14.9.5 Technical data

744 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

Table 448: Event recorder (RDRE)

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on
time
synchronizing

14.10 Trip value recorder (RDRE)

14.10.1 Introduction
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for
the disturbance evaluation.

The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals
connected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase angle
before and during the fault for each analog input signal.

The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the
IED.

The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED
Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.

The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).

14.10.2 Principle of operation

The trip value recorder (TVR) calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault
amplitudes as well as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The
parameter ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference.
The calculated data is input information to the fault locator (FL).

When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception
is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The
channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest
number.

When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the
complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The
estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using
the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after

REL 670 Technical reference manual 745

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the
signals.

If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used
as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one
cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-
fault and fault values.

The name of the analog input signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function
is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is
used in the Disturbance recorder function (DR).

The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER,
DR, IND, TVR and FLOC) and managed in via the LHMI or PCM 600.

14.10.3 Function block

The object has no function block of it’s own. It is included in the DRP- block and
uses information from the DRBx- block.

14.10.4 Input signals

The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to DRA1-3 (not
DRA4).

14.10.5 Technical data

Table 449: Trip value recorder (RDRE)

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 30
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

14.11 Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

14.11.1 Introduction
The Disturbance Recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information
about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior
and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance.
Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (e.g.
corrective actions) and long perspective (e.g. Functional Analysis).

The Disturbance Recorder acquires sampled data from all selected analog input and
binary signals connected to the Disturbance Report function (maximum 40 analog

746 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

and 96 binary signals). The binary signals are the same signals as available under the
event recorder function.

The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation
of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection
functions.

The disturbance recorder information for the last 100 disturbances are saved in the
IED and the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to view the list of
recordings.

The disturbance recording information can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection
and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.

14.11.2 Principle of operation

Disturbance recording (DR) is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals.
The binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals
generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input
channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM), Line Differential
communication Module (LDCM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI)
and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally derived
analog signals. For details, refer to section "Disturbance report (RDRE)".

DR collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer. The
pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuously
be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is
determined by the set pre-fault recording time.

Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and
the data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long
as the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-
fault time and it can be set in the disturbance report.

The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory,
intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the
oldest recording is overwritten. The last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.

The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance
recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from
analog inputs (over-/underlevel trig).

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for
all functions within the disturbance report functionality.

14.11.2.1 Memory and storage

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.

This post-recording processing comprises:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 747

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

• Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
• Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance Handling tool (part of PCM 600)
• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.

The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided
into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).

The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the
disturbance i.e. information from the Disturbance Report functions (ER, TVR and
FL). The Disturbance Handling tool use this information and present the recording
in a user-friendly way.

General:

• Station name, object name and unit name

• Date and time for the trig of the disturbance
• Record number
• Sampling rate
• Time synchronization source
• Recording times
• Activated trig signal
• Active setting group

Analog:

• Signal names for selected analog channels

• Information e.g. trig on analog inputs
• Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating
• Over- or Undertrig: level and operation
• Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig
• CT direction

Binary:

• Signal names
• Status of binary input signals

The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret

the data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency,
channel info etc.

The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for
each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence
number and time stamp for each set of samples.

748 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 14
Monitoring

14.11.2.2 IEC 60870-5-103

The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll disturbance

recordings from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). The standard describes how
to handle 8 disturbance recordings, 8 analog channels (4 currents and 4 voltages)
using the public range and binary signals.

The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master.
When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED will
appear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED).

To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the first
8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the private
range. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according to
table 450.

Table 450: Configuration of analog channels

Signal Disturbance recorder
IL1 DRA1 INPUT1
IL2 DRA1 INPUT2
IL3 DRA1 INPUT3
IN DRA1 INPUT4
UL1 DRA1 INPUT5
UL2 DRA1 INPUT6
UL3 DRA1 INPUT7
UN DRA1 INPUT8

The binary signals connected to DRB1-DRB6 are reported by polling. The function
blocks include function type and information number.

14.11.3 Function block

The object has no function block of it’s own. It is included in the DRP-, DRAx and
DRBx- block.

14.11.4 Input and output signals

For signals see section, in Disturbance report, "Input and output signals".

14.11.5 Setting parameters

For Setting parameters see table 441 - table 444.

14.11.6 Technical data

REL 670 Technical reference manual 749

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 14
Monitoring

Table 451: Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 40
Maximum number of binary inputs 96
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of 340 seconds (100
channels, typical value) recordings) at 50 Hz
280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz

750 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 15
Metering

Section 15 Metering

About this chapter

This chapter describes among others, Pulse counter logic which is a function used to
meter externally generated binary pulses. The way the functions work, their setting
parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included
for each function.

15.1 Pulse counter logic (GGIO)

Function block name: PCx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
PCGGIO

15.1.1 Introduction
The pulse counter logic function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then
read by the pulse counter function. A scaled service value is available over the station
bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must
be ordered to achieve this functionality.

15.1.2 Principle of operation

The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary
input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are
sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.

The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60 minutes
and is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse
counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single
counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation
command (GI) or IEC 61850.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 751

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 15
Metering

The pulse counter in REx670 supports unidirectional incremental counters. That

means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the
reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter
is reset at initialization of the IED.

The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Value, Time,
and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of:

• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is,
the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the
database. The pulse counter function updates the value in the database when an
integration cycle is finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block.
This signal can be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and
transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was
frozen by the function.

The pulse counter function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that
is specially adapted to the pulse counter function.

Figure 378 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs and
outputs.

SingleCmdFunc PulseCounter EVENT

OUTx BLOCK
INVALID INPUT1
SingleCmdFunc Pulse RESTART INPUT2
OUTx INPUT OUT READ_VAL
Pulse length >1s BLOCKED INPUT3
I/O-module NEW_VAL INPUT4
BI_PULSE
”Reset counter” RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL IEC EVENT

SMS settings Database

1.Operation = Off/On Pulse counter value:
2.tReporting = 0s...60min 0...2147483647
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
en05000744.vsd

Figure 378: Overview of the pulse counter function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command blocks,
which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI.
As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected

752 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 15
Metering

to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must
be a pulse with a length >1 second.

The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
Binary Input Module (BIM).

The NAME input is used for a user-defined name with up to 13 characters.

The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.

Each pulse counter function block has four binary output signals that can be connected
to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED
and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function
block.

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where
the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-
up, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around
during last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There
are two reasons why the counter is blocked:

• The BLOCK input is set, or

• The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of value, time and status information.

15.1.3 Function block

PC01-
PCGGIO
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
NAME SCAL_VAL

en05000709.vsd

Figure 379: PC function block

15.1.4 Input and output signals

REL 670 Technical reference manual 753

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 15
Metering

Table 452: Input signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
READ_VAL Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT Resets pulse counter value

Table 453: Output signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block
Signal Description
INVALID The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART The reported value does not comprise a complete integration
cycle
BLOCKED The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL Scaled value with time and status information

15.1.5 Setting parameters

Table 454: Basic general settings for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
EventMask NoEvents - NoEvents - Report mask for
ReportEvents analog events from
pulse counter
CountCriteria Off - RisingEdge - Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 0.001 1.000 - Scaling value for
SCAL_VAL output to
unit per counted value
Quantity Count - Count - Measured quantity for
ActivePower SCAL_VAL output
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 1 60 s Cycle time for
reporting of counter
value

15.1.6 Technical data

754 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 15
Metering

Table 455: Pulse counter logic (GGIO)

Function Setting range Accuracy
Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of counter (0–3600) s -
value

15.2 Energy metering and demand handling

(MMTR)

Function block name: ETPx IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ETPMMTR

15.2.1 Introduction
Outputs from measurement function (MMXU) can be used to calculate energy. Active
as well as reactive values are calculated in import respectively export direction.
Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also
calculated by the function.

15.2.2 Principle of operation

The instantaneous values outputs of active and reactive power from the Measurements
(CVMMXU) function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to
measure the integrated energy. The energy values are presented as communication
outputs but also as pulsed output which can be connected to a pulse counter. Values
are in Ws resp Vars. Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction.
The accumulated energy values can be reset from the HMI reset menu or with input
RSTACC.

The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set
time tEnergy and the maximum value is stored in a register available over
communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXRAFD,
MAXRARD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction until
reset with input RSTDMD or from the LHMI reset menu.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 755

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 15
Metering

SVR1 ETP1
CVMMXU ETPMMTR
PINST P
QINST Q

STACC
TRUE
RSTACC
FALSE
RSTDMD
FALSE

en07000121.vsd

Figure 380: Connection of the energy metering function to the outputs of the
measuring function

15.2.3 Function block

ETP1-
ETPMMTR
P ACCST
Q EAFPULSE
STACC EARPULSE
RSTACC ERFPULSE
RSTDMD ERRPULSE
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD

en07000120.vsd

Figure 381: ETP function block

15.2.4 Input and output signals

Table 456: Input signals for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function block
Signal Description
P Measured active power
Q Measured reactive power
STACC Start to accumulate energy values
RSTACC Reset accumulated energy values. Level sensitive
RSTDMD used by ch: reset maximum demand

756 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 15
Metering

Table 457: Output signals for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function block
Signal Description
ACCST Start of accumulating energy values.
EAFPULSE Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval
EARALM Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
ERFALM Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval
ERRALM Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
EAFACC Accumulated forward active energy value in KWh
EARACC Accumulated reverse active energy value in kWh
ERFACC Accumulated forward reactive energy value in kVArh
ERRACC Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in kVArh
MAXPAFD Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval
MAXPARD Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval
MAXPRFD Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set
interval
MAXPRRD Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse direction

15.2.5 Setting parameters

Table 458: Basic general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
StartAcc Off - Off - Activate the
On accumulation of
energy values
tEnergy 1 Minute - 1 Minute - Time interval for
5 Minutes energy calculation
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Energy accumulated
pulse ON time in secs
tEnergyOffPls 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.500 s Energy accumulated
pulse OFF time in
secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 100.000 MWh Pulse quantity for
active forward
accumulated energy
value
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 757

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 15
Metering

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 100.000 MWh Pulse quantity for
active reverse
accumulated energy
value
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 100.000 MVAr Pulse quantity for
h reactive forward
accumulated energy
value
ERVAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 100.000 MVAr Pulse quantity for
h reactive reverse
accumulated energy
value

Table 459: Advanced general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
EALim 0.001 - 0.001 1000000.000 MWh Active energy limit
10000000000.000
ERLim 0.001 - 0.001 1000.000 MVAr Reactive energy limit
10000000000.000 h
DirEnergyAct Forward - Forward - Direction of active
Reverse energy flow Forward/
Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - Forward - Direction of reactive
Reverse energy flow Forward/
Reverse
EnZeroClamp Off - On - Enable of zero point
On clamping detection
function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 10.000 MW Zero point clamping
level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 10.000 MVAr Zero point clamping
level at reactive
Power
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - 10000.000 0.001 0.000 MWh Preset Initial value for
forward active energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - 10000.000 0.001 0.000 MWh Preset Initial value for
reverse active energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - 10000.000 0.001 0.000 MVAr Preset Initial value for
h forward reactive
energy
ERVPresetVal 0.000 - 10000.000 0.001 0.000 MVAr Preset Initial value for
h reverse reactive
energy

758 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Section 16 Station communication

About this chapter

This chapter describes the functions and protocols used on the interfaces to the
substation automation and substation monitoring buses. The way these work, their
setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are
included for each function.

16.1 Overview

Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one

or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation
(SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.

Following communication protocols are available:

• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

• LON communication protocol
• SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
• DNP3.0 communication protocol

Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

16.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

16.2.1 Introduction
Single or double optical Ethernet ports for the new substation communication
standard IEC61850-8-1 for the station bus are provided. IEC61850-8-1 allows
intelligent devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and
simplifies SA engineering. Peer- to peer communication according to GOOSE is part
of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.

When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two ports
are connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address
138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IP-
address 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0

REL 670 Technical reference manual 759

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

16.2.2 Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)

16.2.2.1 Introduction

The SPGGIO function block is used to send one single logical signal to other systems
or equipment in the substation.

16.2.2.2 Principle of operation

Upon receiving a signal at its input, the SPGGIO function block will send the signal
over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests this signal. To be able
to get the signal, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual,
Chapter 2: “Engineering of the IED” and define which function block in which
equipment or system should receive this information.

16.2.2.3 Function block

SP01-
SPGGIO
BLOCK
IN
NAME
en07000124.vsd

Figure 382: SP function block

760 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

MP01-
SP16GGIO
BLOCK NAMEOR
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11
NAME12
NAME13
NAME14
NAME15
NAME16
en07000125.vsd

Figure 383: MP function block

16.2.2.4 Input and output signals

Table 460: Input signals for the SPGGIO (SP01-) function block
Signal Description
IN Input status

16.2.2.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

16.2.3 Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)

16.2.3.1 Introduction

The MVGGIO function block is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog
output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the

REL 670 Technical reference manual 761

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

same IED, to attach a “RANGE” aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement
supervision on that value.

16.2.3.2 Principle of operation

Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, the MVGGIO block will give the
instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the same time, it
will send over IEC61850-8-1 the value and the deadband, to other equipment or
systems in the substation.

16.2.3.3 Function block

MV01-
MVGGIO
IN VALUE
RANGE

en05000408.vsd

Figure 384: MV function block

16.2.3.4 Input and output signals

Table 461: Input signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
IN Analogue input value

Table 462: Output signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block
Signal Description
VALUE Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE Range

16.2.3.5 Setting parameters

762 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Table 463: Basic general settings for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
MV db 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
MV hhLim -10000000000.00 0.001 90.000 - High High limit
0-
10000000000.000
MV hLim -10000000000.00 0.001 80.000 - High limit
0-
10000000000.000
MV lLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -80.000 - Low limit
0-
10000000000.000
MV llLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -90.000 - Low Low limit
0-
10000000000.000
MV min -10000000000.00 0.001 -100.000 - Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
MV max -10000000000.00 0.001 100.000 - Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
MV dbType Cyclic - Dead band - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)

16.2.4 Setting parameters

Table 464: Basic general settings for the IEC61850-8-1 (IEC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
ON
GOOSE Front - OEM311_AB - Port for GOOSE
OEM311_AB communication
OEM311_CD

16.2.5 Technical data

Table 465: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX

REL 670 Technical reference manual 763

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

16.3 LON communication protocol

16.3.1 Introduction
An optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. This
enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operator’s
workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals.

The LON protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from

Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These
networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few
bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low
maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the
needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the
reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International
Standardization Organization (ISO).

In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related
documents".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the LON communication protocol in
general.

16.3.2 Principle of operation

The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With
protection and control devices, fiber optic media is used, which enables the use of the
maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all
the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own
subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per
one subnet).

The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The
measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent
to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized
values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also
enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example,
interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master.

The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network
variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages,
such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals.
Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events
and explicit read and write messages to access device data.

The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems
include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for

764 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the
terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of network
variables.

Introduction of LON protocol

For more information see ‘LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control,
User’s manual and Technical description, 1MRS 750035-MTD EN’.

LON protocol

Configuration of LON
Lon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network
configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks
network is easily accessible on a single tool program. For details see the “Operators
manual”.

Activate LONCommunication
Activate LON communication in the PST Parameter Setting Tool under Settings ->
General settings – > Communication – > SLM configuration – > Rear optical LON,
where ADE should be set to ON.

Add LON Device Types LNT

A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing
the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with the SLDT
IED 670 package version 1p2 r03.

LON net address

To be able to establish a LON connection with the 670IEDs, the IED has to be given
a unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This is
accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.

Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices
and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed
process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter
data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using
explicit messages.

Events and indications

Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code 44H)
with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is
changed in the 670IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted
from terminal.

Binary events
Binary events are generated in event function blocks EV01 to EV20 in the 670IEDs.
The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. table 466 shows the LON
addresses to the first input on the event function blocks. The addresses to the other
inputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example,
input 15 on event block EV17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 765

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

For double indications only the first eight inputs 1–8 must be used. Inputs 9–16 can
be used for other type of events at the same event block.

As basic, 3 event function blocks EV01-EV03 running with a fast loop time (3 ms)
is available in the 670IEDS. The remaining event function blocks EV04-EV09 runs
with a loop time on 8 ms and EV10-EV20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event
blocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data
from measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.

16 pulse counter value function blocks PC01 to PC16 and 24 mA input service values
function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 – SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the 670IEDs.

The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 466

Table 466: LON adresses for Event functions

Function block First LON address in
function block
EV01 1024
EV02 1040
EV03 1056
EV04 1072
EV05 1088
EV06 1104
EV07 1120
EV08 1136
EV09 1152
EV10 1168
EV11 1184
EV12 1200
EV13 1216
EV14 1232
EV15 1248
EV16 1264
EV17 1280
EV18 1296
EV19 1312
EV20 1328

Event masks
The event mask for each input can be set individually from the Parameter Setting
Tool (PST) Under: Settings – > General Settings –> Monitoring –> Event function
as.

766 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event
function block.

Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always
reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other
Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event
masked in the event function block.

Double indications
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the
event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is
done in the event function block.

Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not
possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for
the first 8 inputs on an event function block.

• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

• 01 generates an open event with the read status 1
• 10 generates a close event with the read status 2
• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from the
connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the
event function block.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 767

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Figure 385: Connection of protection signals for event handling.

Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent
SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character
message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent
using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport
service.

Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N)
are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only
one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending
the next message.

For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, i.e. the
function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18and SXSWI 1 to 28; the SPA
addresses are according to table 467

Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between REx 5xx and 670IEDs. The
supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used
to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.

The multiple command send function block (MTxx) is used to pack the information
to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the
application by a multiple command function block (CMxx). At horizontal

768 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

communication the input BOUND on the event function block (MTxx) must be set
to 1. There are 10 MT and 60 CM function blocks available. The MT and CM function
blocks are connected using Lon Network Tool (LNT 505). This tool also defines the
service and addressing on LON.

This is an overview description how to configure the network variables for 670IEDs.

Configuration of LON network variables

Configure the Network variables according to your application from the LON
network Tool. For more details see “LNT 505” in “Operators manual”. The following
is an example of how to configure network variables concerning e.g. interlocking
between two 670IEDs.

LON

BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4

MT07 CM09 CM09

en05000718.vsd

Figure 386: Examples connections between MT and CM function blocks in three

terminals.

The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From
LNT window select Connections -> NVConnections -> New

REL 670 Technical reference manual 769

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

en05000719.vsd

Figure 387: The network variables window in LNT.

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either you use the drag-and-
drop method where you select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the
Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there. Or the
traditional menu selection, Configuration -> Download...

770 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

en05000720.vsd

Figure 388: The download configuration window in LNT.

Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Main Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can have
connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,
bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available
depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver
input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic
cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling,
connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the
label on the module.

Table 467: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus
control
Name Function SPA Description
block address
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5139 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5161 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI04 1 I 5186 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI05 1 I 5210 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI06 1 I 5234 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI07 1 I 5258 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI08 1 I 5283 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI09 1 I 5307 SPA parameters for block command
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 771

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
BL_CMD SCSWI10 1 I 5331 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI11 1 I 5355 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI12 1 I 5379 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI13 1 I 5403 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI14 1 I 5427 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI15 1 I 5451 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI16 1 I 5475 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI17 1 I 5499 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI18 1 I 5523 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI19 1 I 5545 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI20 1 I 5571 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI21 1 I 5594 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI22 1 I 5619 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI23 1 I 5643 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI24 1 I 5667 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI25 1 I 5691 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI26 1 I 5715 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI27 1 I 5739 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI28 1 I 5763 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI29 1 I 5787 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI30 1 I 5811 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI31 1 I 5835 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI32 1 I 5859 SPA parameters for block command
CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI02 1 I 5131 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI03 1 I 5153 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI04 1 I 5178 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI05 1 I 5202 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI06 1 I 5226 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI07 1 I 5250 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI08 1 I 5275 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI09 1 I 5299 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI10 1 I 5323 SPA parameters for cancel
command
Table continued on next page

772 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
CANCEL SCSWI11 1 I 5347 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI12 1 I 5371 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI13 1 I 5395 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI14 1 I 5419 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI15 1 I 5443 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI16 1 I 5467 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI17 1 I 5491 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI18 1 I 5515 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI19 1 I 5537 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI20 1 I 5563 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI21 1 I 5586 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI22 1 I 5611 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI23 1 I 5635 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI24 1 I 5659 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI25 1 I 5683 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI26 1 I 5707 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI27 1 I 5731 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI28 1 I 5755 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI29 1 I 5779 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI30 1 I 5803 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI31 1 I 5827 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI32 1 I 5851 SPA parameters for cancel
command
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 773

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, Close) command
SELOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command before
SELClose+ILO=11, operate command
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5129 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI03 1 I 5151 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI04 1 I 5176 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI05 1 I 5200 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI06 1 I 5224 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI07 1 I 5248 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI08 1 I 5273 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI09 1 I 5297 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI10 1 I 5321 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI11 1 I 5345 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI12 1 I 5369 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI13 1 I 5393 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI14 1 I 5417 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI15 1 I 5441 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI16 1 I 5465 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI17 1 I 5489 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI18 1 I 5513 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI19 1 I 5535 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI20 1 I 5561 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI21 1 I 5584 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI22 1 I 5609 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
Table continued on next page

774 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI23 1 I 5633 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI24 1 I 5657 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI25 1 I 5681 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI26 1 I 5705 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI27 1 I 5729 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI28 1 I 5753 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI29 1 I 5777 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI30 1 I 5801 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI31 1 I 5825 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI32 1 I 5849 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, Close) command
ExcOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command before
ExcClose+ILO=11, operate command
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5130 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5152 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI04 1 I 5177 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI05 1 I 5201 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI06 1 I 5225 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI07 1 I 5249 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI08 1 I 5274 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI09 1 I 5298 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI10 1 I 5322 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI11 1 I 5346 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI12 1 I 5370 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 775

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI13 1 I 5394 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI14 1 I 5418 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI15 1 I 5442 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI16 1 I 5466 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI17 1 I 5490 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI18 1 I 5514 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI19 1 I 5536 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI20 1 I 5562 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI21 1 I 5585 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI22 1 I 5610 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI23 1 I 5634 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI24 1 I 5658 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI25 1 I 5682 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI26 1 I 5706 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI27 1 I 5730 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI28 1 I 5754 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI29 1 I 5778 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI30 1 I 5802 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI31 1 I 5826 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI32 1 I 5850 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, etc. Close) command
Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Note: Send the value before Enable
Sub Value SXCBR02 2 I 7866 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR03 2 I 7884 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR04 2 I 7904 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Table continued on next page

776 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Value SXCBR05 2 I 7923 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR06 2 I 7942 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR07 2 I 7961 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR08 2 I 7980 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR09 3I7 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR10 3 I 26 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR11 3 I 45 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR12 3 I 56 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR13 3 I 74 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR14 3 I 94 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR15 3 I 120 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR16 3 I 133 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR17 3 I 158 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR18 3 I 179 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI02 3 I 216 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI03 3 I 235 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI04 3 I 254 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI05 3 I 272 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI06 3 I 292 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI07 3 I 310 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI08 3 I 330 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI09 3 I 348 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI10 3 I 359 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 777

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Value SXSWI11 3 I 378 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI12 3 I 397 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI13 3 I 416 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI14 3 I 435 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI15 3 I 454 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI16 3 I 473 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI17 3 I 492 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI18 3 I 511 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI19 3 I 530 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI20 3 I 549 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI21 3 I 568 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI22 3 I 587 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI23 3 I 606 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI24 3 I 625 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI25 3 I 644 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI26 3 I 663 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI27 3 I 682 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI28 3 I 701 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Note: Send the Value before Enable
Sub Enable SXCBR02 2 I 7865 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR03 2 I 7885 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR04 2 I 7903 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR05 2 I 7924 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR06 2 I 7941 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Table continued on next page

778 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXCBR07 2 I 7962 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR08 2 I 7979 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR09 3I8 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR10 3 I 25 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR11 3 I 46 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR12 3 I 55 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR13 3 I 75 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR14 3 I 93 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR15 3 I 121 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR16 3 I 132 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR17 3 I 159 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXCBR18 3 I 178 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI02 3 I 215 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI03 3 I 234 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI04 3 I 252 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI05 3 I 271 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI06 3 I 290 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI07 3 I 309 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI08 3 I 328 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI09 3 I 347 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI10 3 I 360 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI12 3 I 398 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 779

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXSWI13 3 I 417 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI14 3 I 436 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI15 3 I 455 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI16 3 I 474 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI17 3 I 493 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI18 3 I 512 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI19 3 I 531 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI20 3 I 550 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI21 3 I 569 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI22 3 I 588 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI23 3 I 607 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI24 3 I 626 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI25 3 I 645 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI26 3 I 664 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI27 3 I 683 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Sub Enable SXSWI28 3 I 702 SPA parameter for substitute enable
command
Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR02 2 I 7864 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR03 2 I 7883 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR04 2 I 7905 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR05 2 I 7922 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR06 2 I 7943 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR07 2 I 7960 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR08 2 I 7981 SPA parameter for update block
command
Table continued on next page

780 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Update Block SXCBR09 3I6 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR10 3 I 27 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR11 3 I 44 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR12 3 I 57 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR13 3 I 73 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR14 3 I 92 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR15 3 I 122 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR16 3 I 131 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR17 3 I 160 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR18 3 I 177 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI02 3 I 214 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI03 3 I 236 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI04 3 I 253 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI05 3 I 273 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI06 3 I 291 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI07 3 I 311 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI08 3 I 329 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI09 3 I 349 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI10 3 I 358 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI11 3 I 377 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI12 3 I 396 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI13 3 I 415 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI14 3 I 434 SPA parameter for update block
command
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 781

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Update Block SXSWI15 3 I 453 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI16 3 I 472 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI17 3 I 491 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI18 3 I 510 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI19 3 I 529 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI20 3 I 548 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI21 3 I 567 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI22 3 I 586 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI23 3 I 605 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI24 3 I 624 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI25 3 I 643 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI26 3 I 662 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI27 3 I 681 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI28 3 I 700 SPA parameter for update block
command

16.3.3 Setting parameters

Table 468: General settings for the NVLON (NV---) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation
On

Table 469: General settings for the LON (ADE1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation
On
TimerClass Slow - Slow - Timer class
Normal
Fast

782 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

16.3.4 Technical data

Table 470: LON communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s

16.4 SPA communication protocol

16.4.1 Introduction
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related
documents".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in
general.

16.4.2 Principle of operation

The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data
bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. Recommended
baud rate for each type of terminal will be found in the “Technical reference
manual”. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.

Introduction of SPA protocol

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated
need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves
and, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to
the slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling
(e.g. for event information) or only on demand.

The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information
to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common
a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit
and receive lines is a logical "1".

SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data
to an IED 670 with the SPA communication protocol implemented.

The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MI03-MI16) are found in
table471

REL 670 Technical reference manual 783

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Table 471: SPA addresses for the MIM (MI03-MI16) function

Function block SPA address
MI03-CH1 4-O-6508
MI03-CH2 4-O-6511
MI03-CH3 4-O-6512
MI03-CH4 4-O-6515
MI03-CH5 4-O-6516
MI03-CH6 4-O-6519
MI04-CH1 4-O-6527
MI04-CH2 4-O-6530
MI04-CH3 4-O-6531
MI04-CH4 4-O-6534
MI04-CH5 4-O-6535
MI04-CH6 4-O-6538
MI05-CH1 4-O-6546
MI05-CH2 4-O-6549
MI05-CH3 4-O-6550
MI05-CH4 4-O-6553
MI05-CH5 4-O-6554
MI05-CH6 4-O-6557
MI06-CH1 4-O-6565
MI06-CH2 4-O-6568
MI06-CH3 4-O-6569
MI06-CH4 4-O-6572
MI06-CH5 4-O-6573
MI06-CH6 4-O-6576
MI07-CH1 4-O-6584
MI07-CH2 4-O-6587
MI07-CH3 4-O-6588
MI07-CH4 4-O-6591
MI07-CH5 4-O-6592
MI07-CH6 4-O-6595
MI08-CH1 4-O-6603
MI08-CH2 4-O-6606
MI08-CH3 4-O-6607
MI08-CH4 4-O-6610
MI08-CH5 4-O-6611
MI08-CH6 4-O-6614
MI09-CH1 4-O-6622
MI09-CH2 4-O-6625
Table continued on next page

784 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Function block SPA address

MI09-CH3 4-O-6626
MI09-CH4 4-O-6629
MI09-CH5 4-O-6630
MI09-CH6 4-O-6633
MI10-CH1 4-O-6641
MI10-CH2 4-O-6644
MI10-CH3 4-O-6645
MI10-CH4 4-O-6648
MI10-CH5 4-O-6649
MI10-CH6 4-O-6652
MI11-CH1 4-O-6660
MI11-CH2 4-O-6663
MI11-CH3 4-O-6664
MI11-CH4 4-O-6667
MI11-CH5 4-O-6668
MI11-CH6 4-O-6671
MI12-CH1 4-O-6679
MI12-CH2 4-O-6682
MI12-CH3 4-O-6683
MI12-CH4 4-O-6686
MI12-CH5 4-O-6687
MI12-CH6 4-O-6690
MI13-CH1 4-O-6698
MI13-CH2 4-O-6701
MI13-CH3 4-O-6702
MI13-CH4 4-O-6705
MI13-CH5 4-O-6706
MI13-CH6 4-O-6709
MI14-CH1 4-O-6717
MI14-CH2 4-O-6720
MI14-CH3 4-O-6721
MI14-CH4 4-O-6724
MI14-CH5 4-O-6725
MI14-CH6 4-O-6728
MI15-CH1 4-O-6736
MI15-CH2 4-O-6739
MI15-CH3 4-O-6740
MI15-CH4 4-O-6743
MI15-CH5 4-O-6744
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 785

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Function block SPA address

MI15-CH6 4-O-6747
MI16-CH1 4-O-6755
MI16-CH2 4-O-6758
MI16-CH3 4-O-6759
MI16-CH4 4-O-6762
MI16-CH5 4-O-6763
MI16-CH6 4-O-6766

The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PC01 – PC16 are found in table 472

Table 472: SPA addresses for the PCGGIO (PC01-PC16 function)

Function block SPA address CNT_VAL SPA address NEW_VAL
PC01 3-O-5834 3-O-5833
PC02 3-O-5840 3-O-5839
PC03 3-O-5846 3-O-5845
PC04 3-O-5852 3-O-5851
PC05 3-O-5858 3-O-5857
PC06 3-O-5864 3-O-5863
PC07 3-O-5870 3-O-5869
PC08 3-O-5876 3-O-5875
PC09 3-O-5882 3-O-5881
PC10 3-O-5888 3-O-5887
PC11 3-O-5894 3-O-5893
PC12 3-O-5900 3-O-5899
PC13 3-O-5906 3-O-5905
PC14 3-O-5912 3-O-5911
PC15 3-O-5918 3-O-5917
PC16 3-O-5924 3-O-5923

I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function
block are used, i.e. the addresses for BI1 – BI16. The SPA addresses are found in a
separate document, refer to section "Related documents".

Single command function

The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation
automation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That receiving
function block has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage
apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be
used.

786 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

The single command function consists of three function blocks; CD01 – CD03 for
16 binary output signals each.

The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. The SPA addresses for the single
command function (CD) are shown in Table 3. For the single command function
block, CD01 to CD03, the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow
consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the CD02 function block
has the 5O533 address.

The SPA addresses for the single command functions CD01 – CD03 are found in
table 473

Table 473: SPA addresses for the SingleCmd (CD01-CD03) function

Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
CD01-Cmd1 4-S-4639 5-O-511
CD01-Cmd2 4-S-4640 5-O-512
CD01-Cmd3 4-S-4641 5-O-513
CD01-Cmd4 4-S-4642 5-O-514
CD01-Cmd5 4-S-4643 5-O-515
CD01-Cmd6 4-S-4644 5-O-516
CD01-Cmd7 4-S-4645 5-O-517
CD01-Cmd8 4-S-4646 5-O-518
CD01-Cmd9 4-S-4647 5-O-519
CD01-Cmd10 4-S-4648 5-O-520
CD01-Cmd11 4-S-4649 5-O-521
CD01-Cmd12 4-S-4650 5-O-522
CD01-Cmdt13 4-S-4651 5-O-523
CD01-Cmd14 4-S-4652 5-O-524
CD01-Cmd15 4-S-4653 5-O-525
CD01-Cmd16 4-S-4654 5-O-526
CD02-Cmd1 4-S-4672 5-O-527
CD02-Cmd2 4-S-4673 5-O-528
CD02-Cmdt3 4-S-4674 5-O-529
CD02-Cmd4 4-S-4675 5-O-530
CD02-Cmd5 4-S-4676 5-O-531
CD02-Cmd6 4-S-4677 5-O-532
CD02-Cmd7 4-S-4678 5-O-533
CD02-Cmd8 4-S-4679 5-O-534
CD02-Cmd9 4-S-4680 5-O-535
CD02-Cmd10 4-S-4681 5-O-536
CD02-Cmd11 4-S-4682 5-O-537
CD02-Cmd12 4-S-4683 5-O-538
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 787

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
CD02-Cmd13 4-S-4684 5-O-539
CD02-Cmd14 4-S-4685 5-O-540
CD02-Cmd15 4-S-4686 5-O-541
CD02-Cmd16 4-S-4687 5-O-542
CD03-Cmd1 4-S-4705 5-O-543
CD03-Cmd2 4-S-4706 5-O-544
CD03-Cmd3 4-S-4707 5-O-545
CD03-Cmd4 4-S-4708 5-O-546
CD03-Cmd5 4-S-4709 5-O-547
CD03-Cmd6 4-S-4710 5-O-548
CD03-Cmd7 4-S-4711 5-O-549
CD03-Cmd8 4-S-4712 5-O-550
CD03-Cmd9 4-S-4713 5-O-551
CD03-Cmd10 4-S-4714 5-O-552
CD03-Cmd11 4-S-4715 5-O-553
CD03-Cmd12 4-S-4716 5-O-554
CD03-Cmd13 4-S-4717 5-O-555
CD03-Cmd14 4-S-4718 5-O-556
CD03-Cmd15 4-S-4719 5-O-557
CD03-Cmd16 4-S-4720 5-O-558

Table 473 SPA addresses for the signals on the single command functions

Figure 389 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,
connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection
terminal for control of a circuit breaker.

A pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal normally performs this type of command
control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 – OUT16 in CD01 are shown
in table 473

788 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Figure 389: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of
a circuit breaker.

The MODE input defines if the output signals from CD01 shall be off, steady or
pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting – > General
Settings – > Control – > Commands – > Single Command.

Event function
This event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (e.g.
operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event
list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input
channels. All must The internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module,
while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The
events are produced according to the set event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event
mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear
before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an
overflow alarm appears.

Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the terminal,
Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).

The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST)
under: Setting –> General Setting – > Monitoring – > Event Function as.

• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 474

REL 670 Technical reference manual 789

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Table 474: Status and event codes

Single indication1) Double indication

Event block Status Set event Reset event Intermedia Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined
te 00 11
EV01
Input 1 22O1 22E33 22E32 22E0 22E1 22E2 22E3
Input 2 22O2 22E35 22E34 22E4 22E5 22E6 22E7
Input 3 22O3 22E37 22E36 22E8 22E9 22E10 22E11
Input 4 22O4 22E39 22E38 22E12 22E13 22E14 22E15
Input 5 22O5 22E41 22E40 22E16 22E17 22E18 22E19
Input 6 22O6 22E43 22E42 22E20 22E21 22E22 22E23
Input 7 22O7 22E45 22E44 22E24 22E25 22E26 22E27
Input 8 22O8 22E47 22E46 22E28 22E29 22E30 22E31
Input 9 22O9 22E49 22E48 - - - -
Input 10 22O10 22E51 22E50 - - - -
Input 11 22O11 22E53 22E52 - - - -
Input 12 22O12 22E55 22E54 - - - -
Input 13 22O13 22E57 22E56 - - - -
Input 14 22O14 22E59 22E58 - - - -
Input 15 22O15 22E61 22E60 - - - -
Input 16 22O16 22E63 22E62 - - - -

EV02 230.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E..

EV03 240.. 24E.. 24E.. 24E.. 23E.. 24E.. 24E..
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
EV20 410.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E..

1) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked ≠ OFF.

Connection of signals as events

Signals coming from different protection and control functions and shall be sent as
events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Event
function block according to figure 390

790 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Figure 390: Connection of protection signals for event handling.

Note that corresponding Event mask must be set to an applicable value via the
Parameter Setting Tool (PST), under: Settings – > General Settings – > Monitoring
– > Event Function as.

• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

16.4.2.1 Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can
have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,
bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available
depending on type of fiber.

The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out,

REL 670 Technical reference manual 791

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of
the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

The procedure to set the transfer rate and slave number can be found in the Installation
and commissioning manual for respective IED.

16.4.3 Design
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the station, using the
rear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is:

• Optical fibres
• Opto/electrical converter for the PC
• PC

When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardware
is needed plus telephone modems.

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM 600.

When communicating between the LHMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a
front-connection cable.

16.4.4 Setting parameters

Table 475: General settings for the SPA (SPA1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 1 30 - Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd - 9600 Bd - Baudrate on
1200 Bd serial line
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
57600 Bd

Table 476: General settings for the SPAviaSLM (SPA1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 1 30 - Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd - 9600 Bd - Baudrate on
1200 Bd serial line
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd

792 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Table 477: General settings for the SPAviaLON (SPA4-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation
On
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 1 30 - Slave address

16.4.5 Technical data

Table 478: SPA communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or
38400 Bd
Slave number 1 to 899

16.5 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

16.5.1 Introduction
The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection
terminal communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system
must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

16.5.2 Principle of operation

16.5.2.1 General

The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial

communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data
transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and
a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point
principle. The master must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.

Introduction of IEC 60870–5–103 protocol

The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in IED 670 consists of these
functions:

• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurements)
• Fault location
• Command handling

REL 670 Technical reference manual 793

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

• Autorecloser ON/OFF
• Teleprotection ON/OFF
• Protection ON/OFF
• LED reset
• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part
5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment.

IEC 60870-5-103
The tables in the following sections specify the information types supported by the
IED 670 products with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.

To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the

protection and control IED.

Commands in control direction

Terminal commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD
Command block in control direction with defined terminal signals.

Number of instances: 1

Command block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.

Info. no Message Supported
19 LED Reset Yes
23 Activate setting group 1 Yes
24 Activate setting group 2 Yes
25 Activate setting group 3 Yes
26 Activate setting group 4 Yes

Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Number of instances: 1

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.

Info. no. Message Supported
16 Auto-recloser on/off Yes
17 Teleprotection on/off Yes
18 Protection on/off Yes

794 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.

Number of instances: 4

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are
defined in private range 1 - 4. One for each instance.

INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each output signal. Default values are 1
- 8.
Info. no. Message Supported
1 Output signal 01 Yes
2 Output signal 02 Yes
3 Output signal 03 Yes
4 Output signal 04 Yes
5 Output signal 05 Yes
6 Output signal 06 Yes
7 Output signal 07 Yes
8 Output signal 08 Yes

Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined terminal functions.

Number of instances: 1

Indication block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signals.

Info. no. Message Supported
19 LED reset Yes
23 Setting group 1 active Yes
24 Setting group 2 active Yes
25 Setting group 3 active Yes
26 Setting group 4 active Yes
21 Test mode active Yes

Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef

Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.

Number of instances: 20

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are
defined in private range 5 - 24. One for each instance.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 795

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each input signal. Default values are
defined in range 1 - 8
Info. no. Message Supported
1 Input signal 01 Yes
2 Input signal 02 Yes
3 Input signal 03 Yes
4 Input signal 04 Yes
5 Input signal 05 Yes
6 Input signal 06 Yes
7 Input signal 07 Yes
8 Input signal 08 Yes

Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103Superv

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for output signals.

Info. no. Message Supported
32 Measurand supervision I Yes
33 Measurand supervision U Yes
37 I>>back-up operation Yes
38 VT fuse failure Yes
46 Group warning Yes
47 Group alarm Yes

Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF

Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.

Info. no. Message Supported
51 Earth fault forward Yes
52 Earth fault reverse Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

796 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.

Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported
64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
78 Zone 1 Yes
79 Zone 2 Yes
80 Zone 3 Yes
81 Zone 4 Yes
82 Zone 5 Yes
76 Signal transmitted Yes
77 Signal received Yes
73 SCL, Fault location in ohm Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for linediff, transformerdiff, overcurrent and earthfault
protection functions.

FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.

Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported
64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 797

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Info. no. Message Supported

67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
85 Breaker failure Yes
86 Trip measuring system L1 Yes
87 Trip measuring system L2 Yes
88 Trip measuring system L3 Yes
89 Trip measuring system N Yes
90 Over current trip I> Yes
91 Over current trip I>> Yes
92 Earth fault trip IN> Yes
93 Earth fault trip IN>> Yes

Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.

Info. no. Message Supported
16 Autorecloser active Yes
128 CB on by Autorecloser Yes
130 Autorecloser blocked Yes

Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXU.

Measurands in public range, I103Meas

Number of instances: 1

The IED will report all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.

Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.

Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.

798 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Info. no. Message Supported

148 IL1 Yes
144, 145, IL2 Yes
148
148 IL3 Yes
147 IN, Neutral current Yes
148 UL1 Yes
148 UL2 Yes
148 UL3 Yes
145, 146 UL1-UL2 Yes
147 UN, Neutral voltage Yes
146, 148 P, active power Yes
146, 148 Q, reactive power Yes
148 f, frequency Yes

Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr

Number of instances: 3

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are
defined in private range 25 – 27. One for each instance.

INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each block. Default value 1.

Info. no. Message Supported
- Meas1 Yes
- Meas2 Yes
- Meas3 Yes
- Meas4 Yes
- Meas5 Yes
- Meas6 Yes
- Meas7 Yes
- Meas8 Yes
- Meas9 Yes

Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
defined in the standard.

Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified.
Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:

• IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block DRA1

• IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block DRA1
• IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block DRA1

REL 670 Technical reference manual 799

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

• IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block DRA1

• VL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block DRA1
• VL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block DRA1
• VL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block DRA1
• VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block DRA1

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private
range 64 to 95.

Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION
TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.

Disturbance Upload

All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder will be
reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for
transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the
master) will not be reported to the master again.

When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded

disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances will
be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. I.e. when a
disturbance is deleted (by other client e.g. SPA) or when a new disturbance has been
recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.

Deviations from the standard

Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however,

some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder
in Rex67x.

This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.

ASDU23

In ‘list of recorded disturbances’ (ASDU23) an information element named SOF

(status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates
whether:

• Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
• Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
• Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or
test mode.
• Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event
than start/pick-up

The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information
is always set (hard coded) to:

800 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to

the standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes
action. In Rex67x FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each
disturbance.

ASDU26

When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), the
protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information
element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number should indicate fault
number in the power system, i.e. a fault in the power system with several trip and
auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN should be incremented). NOF is in
Rex67x, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.

To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on the
disturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whatever
he connects to the corresponding input.

Interoperability, physical layer

Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485 No
number of loads No
Optical interface
glass fibre Yes
plastic fibre Yes
Transmission speed
96000 bit/s Yes
19200 bit/s Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA No
connector BFOC/2.5 Yes

REL 670 Technical reference manual 801

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Interoperability, application layer

Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU Yes
1 Time-tagged message Yes
2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
3 Measurands I Yes
4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
5 Identification Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
8 End of general interrogation Yes
9 Measurands II Yes
10 Generic data No
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
ASDU Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command No
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No

802 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

16.5.2.2 Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can
have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,
bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available
depending on type of fiber.

The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out,
pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of
the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

16.5.3 Function block

ICMA-
I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4

en05000689.vsd

ICMD-
I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT

en05000684.vsd

ICM1-
I103UserCMD
BLOCK OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8

en05000693.vsd

IEV1-
I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
21_TESTM

en05000688.vsd

REL 670 Technical reference manual 803

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

IS01-
I103UsrDef
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8

en05000694.vsd

ISU1-
I103Superv
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL

en05000692.vsd

ISEF-
I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV

en05000685.vsd

IZ01-
I103FltDis
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
84_STGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
68_TRGEN
74_FW
75_REV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
73_SCL
FLTLOC
ARINPROG

en05000686.vsd

804 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

IFL1-
I103FltStd
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
84_STGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
68_TRGEN
74_FW
75_REV
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG

en05000687.vsd

IAR1-
I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_UNSU

en05000683.vsd

IMM1-
I103Meas
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F

en05000690.vsd

IMU1-
I103MeasUsr
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9

en05000691.vsd

16.5.4 Input and output signals

REL 670 Technical reference manual 805

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Table 479: Input signals for the I103AR (IAR1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
16_ARACT Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-recloser
130_UNSU Information number 130, unsuccessful reclosing

Table 480: Input signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of commands

Table 481: Input signals for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of commands

Table 482: Input signals for the I103IED (IEV1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS Information number 19, reset LEDs
23_GRP1 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active
21_TESTM Information number 21, test mode is active

Table 483: Input signals for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of commands

Table 484: Input signals for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
INPUT1 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 Binary signal input 2
Table continued on next page

806 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Signal Description
INPUT3 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 Binary signal input 8

Table 485: Input signals for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
32_MEASI Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU Information number 33, measurand supervision of U
37_IBKUP Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL Information number 47, group alarm

Table 486: Input signals for the I103EF (ISEF-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
51_EFFW Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV Information number 52, earth-fault reverse

Table 487: Input signals for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
64_STL1 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN Information number 67, start residual current IN
84_STGEN Information number 84, start general
69_TRL1 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 Information number 71, trip phase L3
68_TRGEN Information number 68, trip general
74_FW Information number 74, forward/line
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 807

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Signal Description
75_REV Information number 75, reverse/bus
78_ZONE1 Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 Information number 79, zone 3
81_ZONE4 Information number 79, zone 4
82_ZONE5 Information number 79, zone 5
76_TRANS Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV Information number 77, signal recevied
73_SCL Information number 73, fault location in ohm
FLTLOC Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE)
ARINPROG Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

Table 488: Input signals for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
64_STL1 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN Information number 67, start residual curent IN
84_STGEN Information number 84, start general
69_TRL1 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 Information number 71, trip phase L3
68_TRGEN Information number 68, trip general
74_FW Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV Information number 75, reverse/bus
85_BFP Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1 Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1
87_MTRL2 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase L2
88_MTRL3 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase L3
89_MTRN Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

808 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Table 489: Input signals for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 Service value for measurement on input 9

Table 490: Input signals for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of service value reporting
IL1 Service value for current phase L1
IL2 Service value for current phase L2
IL3 Service value for current phase L3
IN Service value for residual current IN
UL1 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL2 Service value for voltage phase L2
UL3 Service value for voltage phase L3
UL1L2 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN Service value for residual voltage UN
P Service value for active power
Q Service value for reactive power
F Service value for system frequency

Table 491: Output signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block
Signal Description
19-LEDRS Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 Information number 26, activate setting group 4

REL 670 Technical reference manual 809

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Table 492: Output signals for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function block
Signal Description
16-AR Information number 16, block of autorecloser
17-DIFF Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT Information number 18, block of protection

Table 493: Output signals for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function block
Signal Description
OUTPUT1 Command output 1
OUTPUT2 Command output 2
OUTPUT3 Command output 3
OUTPUT4 Command output 4
OUTPUT5 Command output 5
OUTPUT6 Command output 6
OUTPUT7 Command output 7
OUTPUT8 Command output 8

16.5.5 Setting parameters

Table 494: General settings for the I103SLM (IECC-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SlaveAddress 0 - 255 1 30 - Slave address
BaudRate 9600 Bd - 9600 Bd - Baudrate on serial
19200 Bd line
RevPolarity Off - On - Invert polarity
On
CycMeasRepTim 1.0 - 3600.0 0.1 5.0 - Cyclic reporting time
e of measurments

Table 495: General settings for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 255 FunT Function type (1-255)

Table 496: General settings for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type (1-255)

810 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Table 497: General settings for the I103IED (IEV1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type (1-255)

Table 498: General settings for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
PULSEMOD 0-1 1 1 Mode Pulse mode
0=Steady, 1=Pulsed
T 0.200 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Pulse length
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type (1-255)
INFNO_1 1 - 255 1 1 InfNo Information number
for output 1 (1-255)
INFNO_2 1 - 255 1 2 InfNo Information number
for output 2 (1-255)
INFNO_3 1 - 255 1 3 InfNo Information number
for output 3 (1-255)
INFNO_4 1 - 255 1 4 InfNo Information number
for output 4 (1-255)
INFNO_5 1 - 255 1 5 InfNo Information number
for output 5 (1-255)
INFNO_6 1 - 255 1 6 InfNo Information number
for output 6 (1-255)
INFNO_7 1 - 255 1 7 InfNo Information number
for output 7 (1-255)
INFNO_8 1 - 255 1 8 InfNo Information number
for output 8 (1-255)

Table 499: General settings for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 5 FunT Function type (1-255)
INFNO_1 1 - 255 1 1 InfNo Information number
for binary input 1
(1-255)
INFNO_2 1 - 255 1 2 InfNo Information number
for binary input 2
(1-255)
INFNO_3 1 - 255 1 3 InfNo Information number
for binary input 3
(1-255)
INFNO_4 1 - 255 1 4 InfNo Information number
for binary input 4
(1-255)
INFNO_5 1 - 255 1 5 InfNo Information number
for binary input 5
(1-255)
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 811

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

INFNO_6 1 - 255 1 6 InfNo Information number
for binary input 6
(1-255)
INFNO_7 1 - 255 1 7 InfNo Information number
for binary input 7
(1-255)
INFNO_8 1 - 255 1 8 InfNo Information number
for binary input 8
(1-255)

Table 500: General settings for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type (1-255)

Table 501: General settings for the I103EF (ISEF-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 160 FunT Function type (1-255)

Table 502: General settings for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 128 FunT Function type (1-255)

Table 503: General settings for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type (1-255)

Table 504: General settings for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 25 FunT Function type (1-255)
INFNO 1 - 255 1 1 InfNo Information number
for measurands
(1-255)
RatedMeasur1 0.05 - 0.05 1000.00 - Rated value for
10000000000.00 measurement on
input 1
RatedMeasur2 0.05 - 0.05 1000.00 - Rated value for
10000000000.00 measurement on
input 2
Table continued on next page

812 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

RatedMeasur3 0.05 - 0.05 1000.00 - Rated value for
10000000000.00 measurement on
input 3
RatedMeasur4 0.05 - 0.05 1000.00 - Rated value for
10000000000.00 measurement on
input 4
RatedMeasur5 0.05 - 0.05 1000.00 - Rated value for
10000000000.00 measurement on
input 5
RatedMeasur6 0.05 - 0.05 1000.00 - Rated value for
10000000000.00 measurement on
input 6
RatedMeasur7 0.05 - 0.05 1000.00 - Rated value for
10000000000.00 measurement on
input 7
RatedMeasur8 0.05 - 0.05 1000.00 - Rated value for
10000000000.00 measurement on
input 8
RatedMeasur9 0.05 - 0.05 1000.00 - Rated value for
10000000000.00 measurement on
input 9

Table 505: Basic general settings for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
RatedIL1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated current phase
L1
RatedIL2 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated current phase
L2
RatedIL3 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated current phase
L3
RatedIN 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated residual
current IN
RatedUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated voltage for
phase L1
RatedUL2 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated voltage for
phase L2
RatedUL3 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated voltage for
phase L3
RatedUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated voltage for
phase-phase L1-L2
RatedUN 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated residual
voltage UN
RatedP 0.00 - 2000.00 0.05 1200.00 MW Rated value for active
power
RatedQ 0.00 - 2000.00 0.05 1200.00 MVA Rated value for
reactive power
RatedF 50.0 - 60.0 10.0 50.0 Hz Rated system
frequency
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type (1-255)

REL 670 Technical reference manual 813

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

16.5.6 Technical data

Table 506: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd

16.6 Automation bits (AUBI)

16.6.1 Introduction
The AUBI function block (or the automation bits function block) is used within the
CAP tool in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the
DNP3.0 protocol. In this respect, this function block plays the same role as the
BinGOOSEReceive (for IEC61850) or MultiCmdReceive (for LON).

16.6.2 Principle of operation

The AUBI function block have 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as
a Binary Output point in DNP. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP. This
object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate
a AUBI output point you send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-
Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex:
pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give you 5 positive 100 ms
pulses, 300 ms apart. There is a BLOCK inputs signal, which will disable the
operation of the function, in the same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That
means that – upon activation of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be
set on 0. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receiving data from
the DNP master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will
be set by the DNP master again, momentarily. For the AUBI, the PSTO input
determines the operator place. The command can be written to the block while in
“Remote”. If PSTO is in “Local” then no change is applied to the outputs.

814 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

16.6.3 Function block

ABI1-
AutoBits
BLOCK CMDBIT1
PSTO CMDBIT2
NAME1 CMDBIT3
NAME2 CMDBIT4
NAME3 CMDBIT5
NAME4 CMDBIT6
NAME5 CMDBIT7
NAME6 CMDBIT8
NAME7 CMDBIT9
NAME8 CMDBIT10
NAME9 CMDBIT11
NAME10 CMDBIT12
NAME11 CMDBIT13
NAME12 CMDBIT14
NAME13 CMDBIT15
NAME14 CMDBIT16
NAME15 CMDBIT17
NAME16 CMDBIT18
NAME17 CMDBIT19
NAME18 CMDBIT20
NAME19 CMDBIT21
NAME20 CMDBIT22
NAME21 CMDBIT23
NAME22 CMDBIT24
NAME23 CMDBIT25
NAME24 CMDBIT26
NAME25 CMDBIT27
NAME26 CMDBIT28
NAME27 CMDBIT29
NAME28 CMDBIT30
NAME29 CMDBIT31
NAME30 CMDBIT32
NAME31
NAME32

en06000504.vsd

Figure 391: AUBI function block

16.6.4 Input and output signals

Table 507: Input signals for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
PSTO Operator place selection

Table 508: Output signals for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function block
Signal Description
CMDBIT1 Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4 Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5 Command out bit 5
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 815

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Signal Description
CMDBIT6 Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8 Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11 Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15 Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 Command out bit 32

16.6.5 Setting parameters

Table 509: Basic general settings for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On

Table 510: Basic general settings for the DNP3 (DNP--) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode Off /
ON On

816 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Table 511: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode
Serial-Mode
BaudRate 300 Bd - 9600 Bd - Baud-rate for serial
600 Bd port
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
WireMode Four-wire - Two-wire - RS485 wire mode
Two-wire

Table 512: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DLinkConfirm Never - Never - Data-link confirm
Sometimes
Always
tDLinkTimeout 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Data-link confirm
timeout in s
DLinkRetries 0 - 255 1 3 - Data-link maximum
retries
tRxToTxMinDel 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Rx to Tx minimum
delay in s
DataBits 5-8 1 8 - Data bits
StopBits 1-2 1 1 - Stop bits
Parity No - Even - Parity
Even
Odd
RTSEnable No - No - RTS enable
Yes
tRTSWarmUp 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.050 s RS485 back-off delay
in s
tMaxRndDelBkOf 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s RS485 maximum
back-off random
delay in s

REL 670 Technical reference manual 817

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Table 513: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch2TCPIP (DNC2-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 1 20000 - TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port to accept
UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP portfor initial
NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 1 0 - UDP port to remote
client/master

Table 514: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch3TCPIP (DNC3-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 1 20000 - TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port to accept
UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port for initial
NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 1 0 - UDP port to remote
client/master

Table 515: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch4TCPIP (DNC4-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 1 20000 - TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port to accept
UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port for initial
NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 1 0 - UDP port to remote
client/master

818 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Table 516: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch5TCPIP (DNC5-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 1 20000 - TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port to accept
UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port for initial
NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 1 0 - UDP port to remote
client/master

Table 517: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
ON
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 1 1 - Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 1 1 - Master address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - 1:BISingleBit - Object 1, default
2:BIWithStatus variation
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - 3:BIChWithRelTi - Object 2, default
e me variation
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - 3:DIChWithRelTi - Object 4, default
e me variation
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - 2:BOStatus - Object 10, default
2:BOStatus variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - 5:BinCnt32WoutF - Object 20, default
2:BinCnt16 variation
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 819

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWou - 1:BinCnt32EvWou - Object 22, default
tT tT variation
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - 3:AI32IntWithoutF - Object 30, default
2:AI16Int variation
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - Object 32, default
2:AI16IntEvWoutF variation
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T

Table 518: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ValMasterAddr No - Yes - Validate source
Yes (master) address
AddrQueryEnbl No - Yes - Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 10.00 s Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - Yes - Enable application for
Yes multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag No - Yes - Confirm each multiple
Yes fragment
UREnable No - Yes - Unsolicited response
Yes enabled
URSendOnline No - No - Unsolicited response
Yes sends when on-line
UREvClassMask Off - Off - Unsolicited response,
Class 1 event class mask
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Table continued on next page

820 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 1 5 - Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 30.00 s Unsolicited response
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - No - Delete oldest event
Yes when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout 1 - 3600 1 1800 s Time synch timeout
before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - Yes - Time synchronization
Yes request after timeout
DNPToSetTime No - No - Allow DNP to set time
Yes in IED
Averag3TimeReq No - No - Use average of 3 time
Yes requests
PairedPoint No - Yes - Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 0.1 30.0 s Select timeout

Table 519: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
ON
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 1 1 - Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 1 1 - Master address
ValMasterAddr No - Yes - Validate source
Yes (master) address
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 821

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 1 0.0.0.0 - Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 1 255.255.255.255 - Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - 1:BISingleBit - Object 1, default
2:BIWithStatus variation
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - 3:BIChWithRelTi - Object 2, default
e me variation
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - 3:DIChWithRelTi - Object 4, default
e me variation
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - 2:BOStatus - Object 10, default
2:BOStatus variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - 5:BinCnt32WoutF - Object 20, default
2:BinCnt16 variation
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWou - 1:BinCnt32EvWou - Object 22, default
tT tT variation
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - 3:AI32IntWithoutF - Object 30, default
2:AI16Int variation
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - Object 32, default
2:AI16IntEvWoutF variation
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T

822 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Table 520: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - Yes - Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 10.00 s Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - Yes - Enable application for
Yes multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag No - Yes - Confirm each multiple
Yes fragment
UREnable No - Yes - Unsolicited response
Yes enabled
URSendOnline No - No - Unsolicited response
Yes sends when on-line
UREvClassMask Off - Off - Unsolicited response,
Class 1 event class mask
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 1 5 - Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 30.00 s Unsolicited response
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - No - Delete oldest event
Yes when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout 1 - 3600 1 1800 s Time synch timeout
before error status is
generated
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 823

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

TSyncReqAfTout No - Yes - Time synchronization
Yes request after timeout
DNPToSetTime No - No - Allow DNP to set time
Yes in IED
Averag3TimeReq No - No - Use average of 3 time
Yes requests
PairedPoint No - Yes - Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 0.1 30.0 s Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 1 0 s Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 1 10 s Keep-Alive timer

Table 521: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast3TCPIP (DNM3-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
ON
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 1 1 - Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 1 1 - Master address
ValMasterAddr No - Yes - Validate source
Yes (master) address
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 1 0.0.0.0 - Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 1 255.255.255.255 - Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - 1:BISingleBit - Object 1, default
2:BIWithStatus variation
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - 3:BIChWithRelTi - Object 2, default
e me variation
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - 3:DIChWithRelTi - Object 4, default
e me variation
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - 2:BOStatus - Object 10, default
2:BOStatus variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - 5:BinCnt32WoutF - Object 20, default
2:BinCnt16 variation
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Table continued on next page

824 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWou - 1:BinCnt32EvWou - Object 22, default
tT tT variation
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - 3:AI32IntWithoutF - Object 30, default
2:AI16Int variation
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - Object 32, default
2:AI16IntEvWoutF variation
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T

Table 522: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast3TCPIP (DNM3-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - Yes - Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 10.00 s Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - Yes - Enable application for
Yes multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag No - Yes - Confirm each multiple
Yes fragment
UREnable No - Yes - Unsolicited response
Yes enabled
URSendOnline No - No - Unsolicited response
Yes sends when on-line
UREvClassMask Off - Off - Unsolicited response,
Class 1 event class mask
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 1 5 - Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 825

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 30.00 s Unsolicited response
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - No - Delete oldest event
Yes when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout 1 - 3600 1 1800 s Time synch timeout
before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - Yes - Time synchronization
Yes request after timeout
DNPToSetTime No - No - Allow DNP to set time
Yes in IED
Averag3TimeReq No - No - Use average of 3 time
Yes requests
PairedPoint No - Yes - Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 0.1 30.0 s Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 1 0 s Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 1 10 s Keep-Alive timer

Table 523: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast4TCPIP (DNM4-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
ON
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 1 1 - Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 1 1 - Master address
ValMasterAddr No - Yes - Validate source
Yes (master) address
Table continued on next page

826 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 1 0.0.0.0 - Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 1 255.255.255.255 - Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - 1:BISingleBit - Object 1, default
2:BIWithStatus variation
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - 3:BIChWithRelTi - Object 2, default
e me variation
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - 3:DIChWithRelTi - Object 4, default
e me variation
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - 2:BOStatus - Object 10, default
2:BOStatus variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - 5:BinCnt32WoutF - Object 20, default
2:BinCnt16 variation
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWou - 1:BinCnt32EvWou - Object 22, default
tT tT variation
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - 3:AI32IntWithoutF - Object 30, default
2:AI16Int variation
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - Object 32, default
2:AI16IntEvWoutF variation
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T

REL 670 Technical reference manual 827

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Table 524: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast4TCPIP (DNM4-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - Yes - Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 10.00 s Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - Yes - Enable application for
Yes multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag No - Yes - Confirm each multiple
Yes fragment
UREnable No - Yes - Unsolicited response
Yes enabled
URSendOnline No - No - Unsolicited response
Yes sends when on-line
UREvClassMask Off - Off - Unsolicited response,
Class 1 event class mask
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 1 5 - Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 30.00 s Unsolicited response
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - No - Delete oldest event
Yes when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout 1 - 3600 1 1800 s Time synch timeout
before error status is
generated
Table continued on next page

828 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

TSyncReqAfTout No - Yes - Time synchronization
Yes request after timeout
DNPToSetTime No - No - Allow DNP to set time
Yes in IED
Averag3TimeReq No - No - Use average of 3 time
Yes requests
PairedPoint No - Yes - Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 0.1 30.0 s Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 1 0 s Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 1 10 s Keep-Alive timer

Table 525: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast5TCPIP (DNM5-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
ON
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 1 1 - Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 1 1 - Master address
ValMasterAddr No - Yes - Validate source
Yes (master) address
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 1 0.0.0.0 - Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 1 255.255.255.255 - Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - 1:BISingleBit - Object 1, default
2:BIWithStatus variation
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - 3:BIChWithRelTi - Object 2, default
e me variation
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - 3:DIChWithRelTi - Object 4, default
e me variation
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - 2:BOStatus - Object 10, default
2:BOStatus variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - 5:BinCnt32WoutF - Object 20, default
2:BinCnt16 variation
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 829

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWou - 1:BinCnt32EvWou - Object 22, default
tT tT variation
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - 3:AI32IntWithoutF - Object 30, default
2:AI16Int variation
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - Object 32, default
2:AI16IntEvWoutF variation
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T

Table 526: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast5TCPIP (DNM5-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - Yes - Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 10.00 s Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - Yes - Enable application for
Yes multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag No - Yes - Confirm each multiple
Yes fragment
UREnable No - Yes - Unsolicited response
Yes enabled
URSendOnline No - No - Unsolicited response
Yes sends when on-line
UREvClassMask Off - Off - Unsolicited response,
Class 1 event class mask
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 1 5 - Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
Table continued on next page

830 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 30.00 s Unsolicited response
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - No - Delete oldest event
Yes when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout 1 - 3600 1 1800 s Time synch timeout
before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - Yes - Time synchronization
Yes request after timeout
DNPToSetTime No - No - Allow DNP to set time
Yes in IED
Averag3TimeReq No - No - Use average of 3 time
Yes requests
PairedPoint No - Yes - Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 0.1 30.0 s Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 1 0 s Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 1 10 s Keep-Alive timer

16.7 Single command, 16 signals (CD)

16.7.1 Introduction
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from
the local human-machine interface, LHMI. The command function block has outputs
that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user
defined functionality.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 831

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

16.7.2 Principle of operation

The single command function consists of a function block CD for 16 binary output
signals. The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation
system or from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a
maximum of 13 characters from the CAP configuration tool.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting
is done via the LHMI or PCM 600 and is common for the whole function block. The
length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode the function block has a
memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a
BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs.

The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to
built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the
IED.

16.7.3 Function block

CD01-
SingleCmd
BLOCK OUT1
NAME1 OUT2
NAME2 OUT3
NAME3 OUT4
NAME4 OUT5
NAME5 OUT6
NAME6 OUT7
NAME7 OUT8
NAME8 OUT9
NAME9 OUT10
NAME10 OUT11
NAME11 OUT12
NAME12 OUT13
NAME13 OUT14
NAME14 OUT15
NAME15 OUT16
NAME16

en05000698.vsd

16.7.4 Input and output signals

Table 527: Input signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block single command function

832 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Table 528: Output signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT1 Single command output 1
OUT2 Single command output 2
OUT3 Single command output 3
OUT4 Single command output 4
OUT5 Single command output 5
OUT6 Single command output 6
OUT7 Single command output 7
OUT8 Single command output 8
OUT9 Single command output 9
OUT10 Single command output 10
OUT11 Single command output 11
OUT12 Single command output 12
OUT13 Single command output 13
OUT14 Single command output 14
OUT15 Single command output 15
OUT16 Single command output 16

16.7.5 Setting parameters

Table 529: Basic general settings for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Mode Off - Off - Operation mode
Steady
Pulsed

16.8 Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit

(MT)

16.8.1 Introduction
The IED may be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from
other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/
inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control
purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with
other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with
16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 833

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

16.8.2 Principle of operation

Two multiple transmit function blocks MT01-MT02 and 8 slow multiple transmit
function blocks MT03-MT10 are available in IED 670.

Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple command
block in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network Tool (LNT).

Twelve multiple command function block CM12 with fast execution time and 48
multiple command function blocks CM13-CM60 with slower execution time are
available in the IED 670s.

The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in one block, which
can be controlled from other IEDs.

The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to
built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the
terminal.

The command function also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID
to 0 if the block did not receive data within set maximum time.

16.8.3 Design

16.8.3.1 General

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on
the MODE settings, common for the whole block, from the PCM 600 setting tool.

• 0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level,
that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
• 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent
from the station level.
• 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from
the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic
connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer
than the execution cycle time for the command function block.

16.8.4 Function block

834 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

CM01-
MultiCmd
BLOCK ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID

en06000007.vsd

Figure 392: CM function block

MT01-
MultiTransm
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

en06000008.vsd

Figure 393: MT function block

16.8.5 Input and output signals

Table 530: Input signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function

REL 670 Technical reference manual 835

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 16
Station communication

Table 531: Input signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
INPUT1 Input 1
INPUT2 Input 2
INPUT3 Input 3
INPUT4 Input 4
INPUT5 Input 5
INPUT6 Input 6
INPUT7 Input 7
INPUT8 Input 8
INPUT9 Input 9
INPUT10 Input 10
INPUT11 Input 11
INPUT12 Input 12
INPUT13 Input 13
INPUT14 Input 14
INPUT15 Input 15
INPUT16 Input 16

Table 532: Output signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block
Signal Description
ERROR MultiReceive error
NEWDATA New data is received
OUTPUT1 Output 1
OUTPUT2 Output 2
OUTPUT3 Output 3
OUTPUT4 Output 4
OUTPUT5 Output 5
OUTPUT6 Output 6
OUTPUT7 Output 7
OUTPUT8 Output 8
OUTPUT9 Output 9
OUTPUT10 Output 10
OUTPUT11 Output 11
OUTPUT12 Output 12
OUTPUT13 Output 13
OUTPUT14 Output 14
Table continued on next page

836 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 16
Station communication

Signal Description
OUTPUT15 Output 15
OUTPUT16 Output 16
VALID Output data is valid

Table 533: Output signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block
Signal Description
ERROR MultiSend error

16.8.6 Setting parameters

Table 534: General settings for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 0.001 11.000 s Maximum cycle time
between receptions of
input data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum cycle time
between receptions of
input data
Mode Steady - Steady - Mode for output
Pulsed signals
tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Pulse length for multi
command outputs

Table 535: General settings for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 0.001 5.000 s Maximum time
interval between
transmission of output
data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum time interval
between transmission
of output data

REL 670 Technical reference manual 837

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
838
 Section 17
Remote communication

Section 17 Remote communication

About this chapter

This chapter describes the Binary signal transfer function and associated hardware
functionality. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,
input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

17.1 Binary signal transfer to remote end

Function block name: BSR--, BST-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
BSDGGIO

Function block name: BRx--;BTx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name: BSTGGIO

17.1.1 Introduction
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current
values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection in
RED670, or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other
600 series IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for
any purpose e.g. communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other
binary signals between IEDs.

Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an
LDCMs (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a
64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.

Each IED can be equipped with up to four LDCMs, thus enabling communication
with four remote IEDs.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 839

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 17
Remote communication

17.1.2 Principle of operation

The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s
channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same
in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is
C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be
transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated
with C37.94).

Start Stop
Information CRC
flag flag

8 bits n x 16 bits 16 bits 8 bits

en01000134.vsd

Figure 394: Data message structure

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the
HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition.
The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing
is included in the data field.

The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the
correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the
messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then
programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function
detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.

When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight
binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented
as sampled values.

When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity
of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the
capacity of 192 signals.

17.1.3 Function block

The function blocks are not represented in CAP 531 configuration

tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a LDCM is
included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the
SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMBI) of
the IED670 and used internally in the configuration.

840 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 17
Remote communication

CRM1-
LDCMRecBinStat
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL

en07000043.vsd

CRM2-
LDCMRecBinStat
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL

en07000044.vsd

Figure 395: CRM function blocks

CRB1-
LDCMRecBinStat
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGT HERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL

en05000451.vsd

Figure 396: CRB function block

17.1.4 Input and output signals

Table 536: Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function block
Signal Description
COMFAIL Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR Incoming message from a wrong terminal
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 841

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 17
Remote communication

Signal Description
LNGTHERR Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR Indicates when echo synchronication is used
REMCOMF Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
REMGPSER Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization
SUBSTITU Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL Low signal level on the receive link

Table 537: Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function block
Signal Description
COMFAIL Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR Incoming message from a wrong terminal
LNGTHERR Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR Indicates when echo synchronication is used
REMCOMF Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
REMGPSER Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization
SUBSTITU Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL Low signal level on the receive link

Table 538: Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function block
Signal Description
COMFAIL Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR Incoming message from a wrong terminal
LNGTHERR Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMCOMF Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
LOWLEVEL Low signal level on the receive link

842 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 17
Remote communication

17.1.5 Setting parameters

Table 539: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ChannelMode Off - On - Channel mode of
On LDCM, 0=OFF,
OutOfService 1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number on
remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - Echo - Diff Synchronization
GPS mode of LDCM,
0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - Block - Operation mode
Echo when GPS
synchroniation signal
is lost
CommSync Slave - Slave - Com Synchronization
Master mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - LowPower - Transmission power
HighPower for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - CT-GRP1 - Summation mode for
CT-GRP2 transmitted current
CT-SUM values
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay before
communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Reset delay before
communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 5 5 ms Time delay before
switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay before
switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 ms Asymmetric delay
when communication
use echo synch.
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 1 20 ms Max allowed
transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - 0-25kA - Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 843

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 17
Remote communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 1 600 us Maximum time diff for
ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 1 300 us Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Off - Off - Invert polarization for
On X21 communication

Table 540: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ChannelMode Off - On - Channel mode of
On LDCM, 0=OFF,
OutOfService 1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number on
remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - Echo - Diff Synchronization
GPS mode of LDCM,
0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - Block - Operation mode
Echo when GPS
synchroniation signal
is lost
CommSync Slave - Slave - Com Synchronization
Master mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - LowPower - Transmission power
HighPower for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - CT-GRP1 - Summation mode for
CT-GRP2 transmitted current
CT-SUM values
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChann
el
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay before
communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Reset delay before
communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 5 5 ms Time delay before
switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay before
switching back from
redundant channel
Table continued on next page

844 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 17
Remote communication

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 ms Asymmetric delay
when communication
use echo synch.
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 1 20 ms Max allowed
transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - 0-25kA - Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 1 600 us Maximum time diff for
ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 1 300 us Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Off - Off - Invert polarization for
On X21 communication

Table 541: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ChannelMode Off - On - Channel mode of
On LDCM, 0=OFF,
OutOfService 1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number on
remote terminal
CommSync Slave - Slave - Com Synchronization
Master mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - LowPower - Transmission power
HighPower for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay before
communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Reset delay before
communication error
signal is reset
InvertPolX21 Off - Off - Invert polarization for
On X21 communication

REL 670 Technical reference manual 845

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
846
 Section 18
Hardware

Section 18 Hardware

About this chapter

This chapter includes descriptions of the different hardware modules. It includes
diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection terminals
and modules.

18.1 Overview

18.1.1 Variants of case- and HMI display size

xx04000458.eps

Figure 397: 1/2 19” case with medium HMI display.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 847

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

xx04000459.eps

Figure 398: 1/2 19” case with small HMI display.

Figure 399: 3/4 19” case with medium HMI display.

xx05000763.eps

Figure 400: 3/4 19” case with small HMI display.

848 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

xx04000460.eps

Figure 401: 1/1 19” case with medium HMI display.

xx04000461.eps

Figure 402: 1/1 19” case with small HMI display.

18.1.2 Case from the rear side

REL 670 Technical reference manual 849

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Table 542: Designations for 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM or IOM X31 and X32 etc. to X51 and
X52
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X51, X52
GSM
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
IRIG-B 1) X302
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) X312
LDCM 2) X313
TRM X401

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2

2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2 or P31:3
3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2
Note!
1 One LDCM can be included depending of availability of
IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.

850 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

Table 543: Designations for 3/4 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to
MIM X101 and X102
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM, X101, X102
MIM or GSM
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
IRIG-B or LDCM 1) 2) X302
LDCM 2) X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) X312
LDCM 2) X313
TRM X401

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2

2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P30:2
and P30:3
3) RS482 installation, when included in seat P31:2
Note!
2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability
of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 851

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Table 544: Designations for 3/4 x 19” casing with 2 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and
MIM X72
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM, X71, X72
MIM or GSM
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
IRIG-B or LDCM 1,2) X302
LDCM 2) X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) X312
LDCM 2) X313
LDCM 2) X322
LDCM 2) X323
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2

2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P32:2, P32:3,
P30:2 and P30:3
3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2
Note!
2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-
B respective RS485 modules.

Table 545: Designations for 1/1 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot

852 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X161 and
IOM or MIM X162
BIM, BOM, SOM, X161, X162
IOM, MIM or GSM
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
IRIG-B or LDCM X302
1,2)
LDCM 2) X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
RS485 or LDCM 2) X312
3)
LDCM 2) X313
TRM X401

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2

2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P30:2
and P30:3
3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2
Note!
2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability
of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 853

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Table 546: Designations for 1/1 x 19” casing with 2 TRM slots

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X131 and
IOM or MIM X132
BIM, BOM, SOM, X131, X132
IOM, MIM or GSM
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
IRIG-B or LDCM X302
1,2)
LDCM 2) X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
RS485 or LDCM 2) X312
3)
LDCM 2) X313
LDCM 2) X322
LDCM 2) X323
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2

2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P32:2,
P32:3, P30:2 and P30:3
3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2
Note!
2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability
of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.

18.2 Hardware modules

18.2.1 Overview
Table 547: Basic modules, always included
Module Description
Combined backplane module (CBM) A backplane PCB that carries all internal signals
between modules in an IED. Only the TRM is not
connected directly to this board.
Universal backplane module (UBM) A backplane PCB that forms part of the IED
backplane with connectors for TRM, ADM etc.
Power supply module (PSM) Including a regulated DC/DC converter that
supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.

• An internal fail alarm output is available.

Table continued on next page

854 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B

Module
Numerical module (NUM)
Local Human machine interface (LHMI)
Transformer input module (TRM)
Analog digital conversion module (ADM)
Table 548: Application specific modules
Module
Binary input module (BIM)
Binary output module (BOM)
Binary I/O module (IOM)
Line data communication modules (LDCM), short
range, medium range, longrange, X21
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103
communication modules (SLM)
Optical ethernet module (OEM)
mA input module (MIM)
GPS time synchronization module (GSM)
Static output module (SOM)
IRIG-B Time synchronization module
18.2.2 Combined backplane module (CBM)
18.2.2.1 Introduction
The combined backplane module (CBM) carries signals between modules in an IED.
18.2.2.2 Functionality
The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The CBM
backplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible.
REL 670 Technical reference manual
1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware
Description
Module for overall application control. All
information is processed or passed through this
module, such as configuration, settings and
communication.
The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push
button keyboard and an ethernet connector used to
connect a PC to the IED.
Transformer module that galvanically separates the
internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has
12 analog inputs.
Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
Description
Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole
command outputs including supervision function
Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10
outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs.
Modules used for digital communication to remote
terminal.
Used for SPA/LON/IEC 60870–5–103
communication
PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.
Analog input module with 6 independent,
galvanically separated channels.
Used to provide the IED with GPS time
synchronization.
Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change over
output relays.
Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both
pulse-width modulated signals and amplitude
modulated signals and one is used for optical input
type ST for PPS time synchronization.
855
Section 18
Hardware

Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be able
to communicate with CAN based modules.

If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the Internal
Fail signal IRF.

18.2.2.3 Design

There are two basic versions of the CBM:

• with 3 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on

the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and two are
used by other PCI modules, for example two ADMs in IEDs with two TRMs.
See figure 404
• with 2 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on
the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and one is used
by for example an ADM in IEDs with one TRM. See figure 403

Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors are
connected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.

1 2
en05000516.vsd

Figure 403: CBM for 1 TRM.

Pos Description
1 CAN slots
2 CPCI slots

856 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

1 2

en05000755.vsd

Figure 404: CBM for 2 TRM.

Pos Description
1 CAN slots
2 CPCI slots

en05000756.vsd

Figure 405: CBM position, rear view.

Pos Description
1 CBM

REL 670 Technical reference manual 857

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

18.2.3 Universal backplane module (UBM)

18.2.3.1 Introduction

The Universal Backplane Module (UBM) is part of the IED backplane and is mounted
above the CBM. It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog
digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).

18.2.3.2 Functionality

The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analog signals from the
transformer input module to the analog digital converter module. The Numerical
processing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact on
the front panel as well as the internal ethernet contacts are connected to the UBM
which provides the signal path to the NUM board.

18.2.3.3 Design

It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion
module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).

The UBM exists in 2 versions.

• for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors and
one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 407
• for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors and
one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 408.

The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The
48 pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.

858 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

TRM ADM
NUM
AD Data

X1 X2
X3 X4

RS485

X10 X10
Front Ethernet

LHMI connection
port
Ethernet X5

en05000489.vsd

Figure 406: UBM block diagram.

en05000757.vsd

Figure 407: UBM for 1 TRM.

en05000758.vsd

Figure 408: UBM for 2 TRM.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 859

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

en05000759.vsd

Figure 409: UBM position, rear view.

Pos Description
1 UBM

18.2.4 Power supply module (PSM)

18.2.4.1 Introduction

The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full
isolation between the terminal and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output
is available.

18.2.4.2 Design

There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC
input voltage ranges see table 549. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-
regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the
external battery system.

860 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

Block diagram

Input connector
Power
Filter supply

Backplane connector
Supervision

99000516.vsd

Figure 410: PSM Block diagram.

18.2.4.3 Technical data

Table 549: PSM - Power supply module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) EL = (24 - 60) V EL ± 20%
EL = (90 - 250) V EL ± 20%
Power consumption 50 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 5 A during 0.1 s -

18.2.5 Numeric processing module (NUM)

18.2.5.1 Introduction

The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection
functions and logic.

For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high
speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is
the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and
receives interrupts.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 861

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

18.2.5.2 Functionality

The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, standard off-the-shelf

compact-PCI CPU module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the
backplane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.

The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots
onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.

To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one
internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI
accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.

The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash
file system.

The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of
the real time clock.

No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power
dissipation.

862 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

18.2.5.3 Block diagram

Compact
Flash Logic

PMC
connector
PC-MIP

connector
UBM
Memory Ethernet

North
bridge

Backplane
PCI-PCI-

connector
bridge

CPU

en04000473.vsd

Figure 411: Numeric processing module block diagram

18.2.6 Local human-machine interface (LHMI)

Refer to Chapter "Local human-machine interface" for information.

18.2.7 Transformer input module (TRM)

18.2.7.1 Introduction

The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the
secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The
module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 863

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.

18.2.7.2 Design

The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the
module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.

Basic versions:

• 6 current channels and 6 voltage channels

• 7 current channels and 5 voltage channels
• 9 current channels and 3 voltage channels
• 12 current channels
• 6 current channels

The rated values of the current inputs are selected at order.

The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM.

Configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix
for analog inputs (SMAI)".

18.2.7.3 Technical data

Table 550: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits

Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Current Ir = 1 or 5 A (0.2-40) × Ir

Operative range (0-100) x Ir

Permissive overload 4 × Ir cont.

100 × Ir for 1 s *)

Burden < 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

Ac voltage Ur = 110 V 0.5–288 V

Operative range (0–340) V

Permissive overload 420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz ± 5%
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

864 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

18.2.8 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization

(ADM)

18.2.8.1 Introduction

The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC
slot. The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards
according to table 551. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.
The UBM connects the ADM to the transformer input module (TRM).

Table 551: PC-MIP cards and PMC cards

PC-MIP cards PMC cards
LDCM SLM
LR-LDCM OEM 1 ch
MR-LDCM OEM 2 ch
X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485

18.2.8.2 Design

The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the
transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic
voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate
A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is
obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.

Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system

frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz
and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system
frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 865

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Channel 1
AD1 Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
AD2
Channel 5
1.2v Channel 6
AD3 Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
AD4 Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12

PMC

level shift

PC-MIP
2.5v

PCI to PCI

PC-MIP

en05000474.vsd

Figure 412: The ADM layout

866 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

18.2.9 Binary input module (BIM)

18.2.9.1 Introduction

The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two
versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs
to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable
and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also
be included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables
extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated
electrical circuits.

18.2.9.2 Design

The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level
of the binary input is selected at order.

For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
inputs (SMBI)".

A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a

hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it
possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.

Figure 413 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage
levels.

The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand

disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 867

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

[V]

300

176
144
88
72
38
32
19
18

24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V

xx06000391.vsd

Figure 413: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Guaranteed operation

Operation uncertain

No operation

This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via the
CAN-bus on the backplane.

The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is
shown in figure 414 and 415.

868 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

[mA]
30

1
35 70 [ms]

en07000104.vsd

Figure 414: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of
BIM.

[mA]
30

1
3.5 7.0 [ms]

en07000105.vsd

Figure 415: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 869

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Process connector Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Micro-
Opto isolated input controller

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Memory
Opto isolated input

Backplane connector
Process connector

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input CAN

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

99000503.vsd

Figure 416: Block diagram of the Binary input module.

18.2.9.3 Technical data

870 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

Table 552: BIM - Binary input module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/40 V RL ± 20%
48/60 V RL ± 20%
110/125 V RL ± 20%
220/250 V RL ± 20%
Power consumption
24/40 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz
Release settable 1–30 Hz

Table 553: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/40 V RL ± 20%
48/60 V RL ± 20%
110/125 V RL ± 20%
220/250 V RL ± 20%
Power consumption
24/40 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz
Release settable 1–30 Hz

18.2.10 Binary output modules (BOM)

18.2.10.1 Introduction

The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output
or any signalling purpose.

18.2.10.2 Design

The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each
pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 417. This
should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the
back of the IED.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 871

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker
trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker
auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is
required.

For configuration of the output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for
binary outputs (SMBO)".

Output module

xx00000299.vsd

Figure 417: Relay pair example

1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2

872 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay

Process connector
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay

Backplane connector
Process connector

Relay Micro-
controller
Relay
Relay

CAN
Relay
Relay Memory

Relay
Relay

99000505.vsd

Figure 418: Block diagram of the Binary Output Module

18.2.10.3 Technical data

Table 554: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity
Continuous 8A
1s 10 A
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 873

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays

Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

18.2.11 Static binary output module (SOM)

18.2.11.1 Introduction

The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output
relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.

18.2.11.2 Design

The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.

The SOM consists mainly of:

• An MCU
• A CAN-driver
• 6 static relays outputs
• 6 electromechanical relay outputs
• A DC/DC converter
• Connectors interfacing
• CAN-bus to backplane CBM
• IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)

The following parts are supervised:

• Interruption in relay coil

• Short circuit of relay coil
• Driver failure

874 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

Drive &
Read back

Drive &
Read back

Process connector
Drive &
Read back

Drive &
Read back

Drive & Code-

Read back flash

Drive &
Read back

MCU
CAN-
driver

Drive &
Read back

Drive &
Read back
Process connector

Backplane connector
DC/DC
Drive &
Read back

Internal_fail_n
Drive & AC_fail_n
Read back RCAN_ID
Sync
Drive &
Read back
Reset
Drive &
Read back

en07000115.vsd

Figure 419: Block diagram of the static output module

REL 670 Technical reference manual 875

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Figure 420: Connection diagram of the static output module

18.2.11.3 Technical data

Table 555: SOM - Static output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Static binary outputs 6
Electromechanical relay outputs 6
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity
Continuous 8A
1s 10 A
Static binary outputs:
Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum
capacitance of 0.2 mF
0.2 s 20 A
1.0 s 10 A
Electromechanical relay outputs:
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 20 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Operating time, Static outputs <1 ms

876 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

18.2.12 Binary input/output module (IOM)

18.2.12.1 Introduction

The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels
are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signalling
purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where
short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for
required binary input information.

18.2.12.2 Design

The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with
unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.

Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase
the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved
with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure
414. Inputs are debounced by software.

Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 413.

The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.

The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays.
One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are
connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other
group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see
figure 421.

The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay
is connected in parallel to the standard output relay.

For configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal
matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)" and section "Signal matrix for binary outputs
(SMBO)".

The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 877

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Figure 421: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds
to rear position X31, X41, etc. and output contacts named XB to rear
position X32, X42, etc.

The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for
example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause
excessive wear of the contacts.

The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the
binary input/output module.

878 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

xx04000069.vsd

Figure 422: IOM with MOV protection, relay example

18.2.12.3 Technical data

Table 556: IOM - Binary input/output module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Binary inputs 8 -
DC voltage, RL 24/40 V RL ± 20%
48/60 V RL ± 20%
110/125 V RL ± 20%
220/250 V RL ± 20%
Power consumption -
24/40 V max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input

Table 557: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1000 V rms 800 V DC
1 min
Current carrying capacity
Continuous 8A 8A
1s 10 A 10 A
Making capacity at inductive load
with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ > 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

REL 670 Technical reference manual 879

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Table 558: IOM with MOV - contact data (reference standard: IEC 60255-23)

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 250 V rms 250 V DC
1 min
Current carrying capacity
Continuous 8A 8A
1s 10 A 10 A
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
j>0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

18.2.13 Line data communication module (LDCM)

18.2.13.1 Introduction

The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between
the IEDs situated at distances <150 km or from the IED to optical to electrical
converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM
module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/
ANSI standard format is used.

The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module
has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 423.

The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. Each module
has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED communicates.

Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm
single mode) and Short range (900 nm multi mode) are available.

Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes.

Never look into the laser beam.

880 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

18.2.13.2 Design

The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be
mounted on:

• the ADM
• the NUM

ID

ST

16.000
IO-connector

MHz
32,768
MHz
ST

en07000087.vsd

Figure 423: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI
connectors and one I/O ST type connector

X1

C
ADN 2.5V
ID
2841

PCI9054
FPGA TQ176
DS DS
256 FBGA
3904 3904
MAX
3645

3
2

en06000393.vsd

Figure 424: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width
format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector

18.2.13.3 Technical data

REL 670 Technical reference manual 881

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Table 559: Line data communication modules (LDCM)

Characteristic Range or value
Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Type of fibre Graded-index Singlemode 8/125 Singlemode
multimode mm 8/125 mm
62.5/125 mm or
50/125 mm
Wave length 820 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
Optical budget 20 dB (typical 26 dB (typical
Graded-index multimode 62.5/125 mm, 11 dB (typical distance 80 km *) distance 120
distance about 3 km *)
km *)
Graded-index multimode 50/125 mm 7 dB (typical
distance about 2
km *)
Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC
Protocol C37.94 C37.94 C37.94
implementation **) implementatio
n **)
Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous
Transmission rate / Data rate 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64
kbit/s
Clock source Internal or derived Internal or derived Internal or
from received from received derived from
signal signal received
signal
*) depending on optical budget calculation
**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as
C37.94

18.2.14 Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)

18.2.14.1 Introduction

The galvanic X21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module
supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IED:s.

Examples of applications:
• Line differential protection
• Binary signal transfer

18.2.14.2 Design

The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP
Type II format.

882 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

C
en07000196.vsd

Figure 425: Overview of the X.21 LDCM module

1 3

2 en07000195.vsd

Figure 426: The X.21 LDCM module external connectors

1. Ground selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole

2. Ground pin
3. X.21: Micro D-sub 15 pole female connector according to the V11 (X.27)
balanced version

Soft ground

To avoid ground loops when the grounds are connected, a soft ground connection for
the IO-ground can be used. This is handled in the ground selection connector.

Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set:

1. No ground - leave the connector without any connection
2. Direct ground - connect the ground pin directly to earth
3. Soft ground - connect the two pins to each other

REL 670 Technical reference manual 883

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

X.21 connector

Table 560: Pinout for the X.21 communication connector

Pin number Signal

1 Shield (ground)
2 TXD A
3 Control A
4 RXD A
6 Signal timing A
8 Ground
9 TXD B
10 Control B
11 RXD B
13 Signal timing B
5,7,12,14,15 Not used

18.2.14.3 Functionality

The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is 64
kbit/s.

A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data
(deviation from X.21 standard cable length).

Synchronization

The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally
expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The transmission
is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a device is a
DTE. When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and when the signal
is low it will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be inverted in the control
register.

Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.

When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set
as a master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE Signal
Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.

The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.

884 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

18.2.14.4 Technical data

Table 561: Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)
Quantity Range or value
Connector, X.21 Micro D-sub, 15-pole female, 1.27 mm (0.050")
pitch
Connector, ground selection 2 pole screw terminal
Standard CCITT X21
Communication speed 64 kbit/s
Insulation 1 kV
Maximum cable length 100 m

18.2.15 Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication

module (SLM)

18.2.15.1 Introduction

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and
LON communication. The module has two communication ports, one for serial
communication and one dedicated for LON communication.

18.2.15.2 Design

The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations of optical
fiber connectors, see figure 427. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and
the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.

Figure 427: The SLM variants

A Snap in connector for plastic fiber

REL 670 Technical reference manual 885

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

B ST connector for glass fiber

1 LON port
2 SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port

Figure 428: The SLM layout overview

1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103

18.2.15.3 Technical data

Table 562: SLM – LON port

Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fibre: type ST
Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in
Fibre, optical budget Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *)
Plastic fibre: 7 dB (10 m typically *)
Fibre diameter Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fibre: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

886 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

Table 563: SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port

Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fibre: type ST
Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in
Fibre, optical budget Glass fibre: 11 dB (3000ft/1000 m typically *)
Plastic fibre: 7 dB (80ft/25 m typically *)
Fibre diameter Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fibre: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

18.2.16 Galvanic RS485 communication module

18.2.16.1 Introduction

The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0

communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a
balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire
connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a
multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires
however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX
and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves.
No special control signal is needed in this case.

18.2.16.2 Design

The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. The internal structure of the RS485 can be seen in figure 429:

FPGA
32 MHz
Wishbone interconnect switch

Tx
PCI-con

Isolation
6-pole-connector
Internal UART RS485
bus tranceiver
PCI-bus Rx
Local bus Isolation
PCI-
to
Controller
wishbone
PCI-con

Isolation
Status
Register Termination
connector

Info
2-pole

Register
Control
ID-chip
Register Isolated Soft
DC/DC ground

Figure 429: The internal structure of the RS485 card

RS485 connector pinouts

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 430) are presented in
table 564:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 887

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Table 564: The arrangement for the pins

Pin Name 2-wire Name 4-wire Description

1 RS485+ TX+ Receive/transmit high or transmit high
2 RS485– TX– Receive/transmit
3 Term T-Term Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver
in 2–wir case) (connect to TX+)
4 N.A. R-Term Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+)
5 N.A. RX– Receive low
6 N.A. RX+ Receive high

Angle
bracket

Screw
1
terminal
X3 2
1
2 RS485
3 PWB
Screw
4
terminal
5
X1
6

Backplane

Figure 430: RS485 connector

• 2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5

• Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3

• Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6

Soft ground connector pinouts

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be
used in two combinations like:

• Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part · .

• Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a
MOV

18.2.16.3 Technical data

888 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

Table 565: Galvanic RS485 communication module

Quantity Range or value

Communication speed 2400–19200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector
Soft ground 2-pole connector

18.2.17 Optical ethernet module (OEM)

18.2.17.1 Introduction

The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communication

buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. The module has one
or two optical ports with ST connectors.

18.2.17.2 Functionality

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according
to IEC61850–8–1 have been implemented.

18.2.17.3 Design

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card
on the ADM. The OEM is a 100base Fx module and available as a single channel or
double channel unit.
PCI - bus Connector
100Base-FX
EEPROM
Transmitter ST fiber optic
Ethernet Controller connectors
100Base-FX
Receiver

PCI - PCI Bridge

100Base-FX
Transmitter
ID chip ST fiber optic
Ethernet Controller
connectors
100Base-FX
EEPROM
IO - bus Connector Receiver

en04000472.vsd

Figure 431: OEM block diagram.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 889

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

ID chip

Receiver

IO bus
LED
Ethernet cont.
25MHz oscillator
Transmitter

Receiver
LED

PCI bus
Ethernet cont. PCI to PCI
bridge
25MHz oscillator
Transmitter

en05000472.vsd

Figure 432: OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels

18.2.17.4 Technical data

Table 566: OEM - Optical ethernet module

Quantity Rated value
Number of channels 1 or 2
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre
Wave length 1300 nm
Optical connector Type ST
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 MB

18.2.18 mA input module (MIM)

18.2.18.1 Introduction

The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the –20 to
+20 mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure
transducers.The module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.

18.2.18.2 Design

The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.

For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for mA
inputs (SMMI)".

890 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter
has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately
The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory
on the module.

The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range. The module
communicates, like the other I/O-modules on the serial CAN-bus.

A/D Converter Opto-

Protection isolation
& filter
Volt-ref DC/DC
Process connector

A/D Converter Opto-

Protection isolation
& filter
Volt-ref DC/DC

A/D Converter Opto-

Protection isolation
& filter
Volt-ref DC/DC

A/D Converter Opto-

Protection isolation
& filter
Volt-ref DC/DC

A/D Converter Opto-

Protection isolation
& filter
Volt-ref DC/DC
Backplane connector

A/D Converter Opto-

Protection isolation
& filter
Volt-ref DC/DC
CAN

Memory Micro-
controller

99000504.vsd

Figure 433: MIM block diagram

18.2.18.3 Technical data

REL 670 Technical reference manual 891

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Table 567: MIM - mA input module

Quantity: Rated value: Nominal range:
Input range ± 5, ± 10, ± 20mA -
0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA
Input resistance Rin = 194 Ohm -

Power consumption -
each mA-board £4W
each mA input £ 0.1 W

18.2.19 GPS time synchronization module (GSM)

18.2.19.1 Introduction

This module includes the GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has
one SMA contact for connection to an antenna.

18.2.19.2 Design

The GPS time synchronization module is 6U high and occupies one slot. The slot
closest to the NUM shall always be used.

The GSM consists of

• CAN carrier module (CCM)

• GPS clock module (GCM)
• GPS receiver unit

The CCM is a carrier board for the GCM mezzanine PMC card and GPS unit, see
figure 435. There is a cable between the external antenna input on the back of the
GCM and the GPS-receiver. This is a galvanic connection vulnerable to electro-
magnetic interference. The connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded
plate to reduce the risk. The second cable is a flat cable that connects the GPS and
the GCM. It is used for communication between the GCM and the GPS-receiver. All
communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the CAN-bus.

The CMPPS signal is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide
1µs accuracy at sampling level.

892 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

PMC
GPS GPS clock
GPS antenna
receiver module

CMPPS

Backplane CAN
CAN

connector
controller CAN

en05000675.vsd

Figure 434: GSM block diagram

en07000086.vsd

Figure 435: A CCM with the GCM and GPS mounted with cables

1 GPS receiver

REL 670 Technical reference manual 893

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

2 GPS Clock module (GCM)

3 CAN carrier module (CCM)
4 Antenna connector

18.2.19.3 Technical data

Table 568: GPS time synchronization module (GSM)

Function Range or value Accuracy
Receiver – ±1µs relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new <30 minutes –
position or after power loss longer than 1 month
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer <15 minutes –
than 48 hours
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter <5 minutes –
than 48 hours

18.2.20 GPS antenna

18.2.20.1 Introduction

In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna
with applicable cable must be used.

18.2.20.2 Design

The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on
an antenna mast. See figure 436

894 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

1 6

4 7

xx04000155.vsd

Figure 436: Antenna with console

where:
1 GPS antenna
2 TNC connector
3 Console, 78x150 mm
4 Mounting holes 5.5 mm
5 Tab for securing of antenna cable
6 Vertical mounting position
7 Horizontal mounting position

Always position the antenna and its console so that a continuous clear line-of-sight
visibility to all directions is obtained, preferably more than 75%. A minimum of 50%
clear line-of-sight visibility is required for un-interrupted operation.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 895

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

99001046.vsd

Figure 437: Antenna line-of-sight

Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male
SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GSM. Choose cable
type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.

Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to
the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna
cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna.
When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the
receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is
connected.

18.2.20.3 Technical data

Table 569: GPS – Antenna and cable

Function Value
Max antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm
Lightning protection Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end
TNC in antenna end

896 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

18.2.21 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B

18.2.21.1 Introduction

This module includes the IRIG-B time synchronization and the PPS time
synchronization.

18.2.21.2 Design

The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle
both a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude
modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type
ST for PPS to synchronize the time between several protections.

32 MHz FPGA

connector
PCI-con

OPTO_INPUT

ST-
PCI-bus
Registers
PCI-Controller
PCI-con

4 mm barrier

IRIG- IRIG_INPUT

connector
Amplitude
ID-chip Decoder

BNC-
modulator
Capture1 Isolated
ZXING
receiver
Zero-cross
Capture2 detector

MPPS
IO-con

PPS
TSU Isolated
DC/DC
CMPPS 5 to +- 12V

en06000303.vsd

Figure 438: IRIG-B block diagram

REL 670 Technical reference manual 897

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

A1
DC//DC
ST

C
Y2

C
C
A1

C
O
T
3
2

O
en06000304.vsd

Figure 439: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm
multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for
IRIG-B signal input

18.2.21.3 Technical data

Table 570: IRIG-B

Quantity Rated value
Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of channels PPS 1
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Optical connector PPS Type ST
Type of fibre 62.5/125 μm multimode fibre

18.3 Dimensions

18.3.1 Case without rear cover

898 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

E
K

D
A F

B C
G J
xx04000448.vsd
H

Figure 440: Case without rear cover xx04000464.vsd

Figure 441: Case without rear cover

with 19” rack mounting kit

Case size (mm) A B C D E F G H J K

6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 201.1 252.9 205.7 190.5 203.7 - 187.6 -
6U, 3/4 x 19” 265.9 336.0 201.1 252.9 318.0 190.5 316.0 - 187.6 -
6U, 1/1 x 19” 265.9 448.3 201.1 252.9 430.3 190.5 428.3 465.1 187.6 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit

18.3.2 Case with rear cover

REL 670 Technical reference manual 899

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

D F

J
B G
C H xx05000502.vsd
xx05000501.vsd

Figure 442: Case with rear cover.

Figure 443: Case with rear cover
and 19” rack mounting
kit.

xx05000503.vsd

Figure 444: Rear cover case with

details.

Case size (mm) A B C D E F G H J K

6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 242.1 255.8 205.7 190.5 203.7 - 228.6 -
6U, 3/4 x 19” 265.9 336.0 242.1 255.8 318.0 190.5 316.0 - 228.6 -
6U, 1/1 x 19” 265.9 448.3 242.1 255.8 430.3 190.5 428.3 465.1 228.6 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit.

900 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

Case size A B C D E F G H J K
(inches)
6U, 1/2 x 19” 10.47 8.81 9.53 10.07 8.10 7.50 8.02 - 9.00 -
6U, 3/4 x 19” 10.47 13.23 9.53 10.07 12.52 7.50 12.4 - 9.00 -
6U, 1/1 x 19” 10.47 17.65 9.53 10.07 16.86 7.50 16.86 18.31 9.00 19.00
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit.

18.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions

A C

E
D

xx04000465.vsd

Figure 445: Flush mounting

Cut-out dimensions (mm)

Case size
Tolerance A B C D
+/-1 +/-1
6U, 1/2 x 19" 210.1 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
6U, 3/4 x 19" 322.4 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
6U, 1/1 x 19" 434.7 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover

REL 670 Technical reference manual 901

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

18.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions

xx06000182.vsd

Figure 446: A 1/2 x 19” size IED 670 side-by-side with RHGS6.

G
D
B
E

F
C
xx05000505.vsd

Figure 447: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

902 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

18.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions

B
E

C
D

en04000471.vsd

Figure 448: Wall mounting

Case size (mm) A B C D E

6U, 1/2 x 19” 292.0 267.1 272.8 390.0 243.0
6U, 3/4 x 19” 404.3 379.4 272.8 390.0 243.0
6U, 1/1 x 19” 516.0 491.1 272.8 390.0 243.0

18.3.6 External resistor unit for high impedance differential

protection

WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high

voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate
with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object
protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by national
low/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover
or in a separate box!

REL 670 Technical reference manual 903

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

[1.48]
[6.97]

[4.02]

[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]

[18.98]

Dimension
mm [inches] xx06000232.eps

Figure 449: Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit

[1.50]
[10.47]

[7.50]

[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]

[18.98]

en06000234.eps
[inches]

Figure 450: Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit

18.4 Mounting alternatives

18.4.1 Flush mounting

18.4.1.1 Overview

All IED sizes, 1/2 x 19”, 3/4 x 19” and 1/1 x 19” and RHGS6 6U 1/4 x 19”, cases,
can be flush mounted. Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle
panel, for class IP54 protection.

The flush mounting kit are utilized for IEDs of sizes: 1/2 x 19”, 3/4 x 19” and 1/1 x
19” and are also suitable for mounting of RHGS6, 6U 1/4 x 19” cases.

904 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when

IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when
mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.

To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing

must be ordered when ordering the IED.

18.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting

1
7

2
6
5
3

xx06000246.vsd

Figure 451: Flush mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Sealing strip, used to - -
obtain IP54 class. The
sealing strip is factory
mounted between the
case and front plate.
2 Fastener 4 -
3 Groove - -
4 Screw, self tapping 4 2,9x9,5 mm
Table continued on next page

REL 670 Technical reference manual 905

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

5 Joining point of sealing - -

strip (rear view)
6 Panel - -
7 Screw 4 M5x25

18.4.2 19” panel rack mounting

18.4.2.1 Overview

All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19” cubicle rack by using the for each
size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening screws
for the angles. The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED
size 1/2 x 19” or 3/4 x 19” either to the left or right side of the cubicle.

Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-
side mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be
selected so that the total size equals 19”.

When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that

follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other
dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

906 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

18.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting

1a

1b

xx04000452.vs d

Figure 452: 19” panel rack mounting details

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1a, 1b Mounting angels, which can be mounted, either to the 2 -
left or right side of the case.
2 Screw 8 M4x6

18.4.3 Wall mounting

18.4.3.1 Overview

All case sizes, 1/2 x 19”, 3/4 x 19” and 1/1 x 19”, can be wall mounted. It is also
possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.

When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows the
recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than
the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 907

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for communication modules
with fiber connection; Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON
communication module (SLM), Optical Ethernet module (OEM) and
Line data communication module (LDCM).

18.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting

3
4
2

6
xx04000453.vs d

Figure 453: Wall mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Bushing
2 Screw
3 Screw
4 Mounting bar
5 Screw
6 Side plate
4 -
8 M4x10
4 M6x12 or
corresponding
2 -
6 M5x8
2 -

18.4.3.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover which is recommended to use
with this type of mounting. See figure 454.

908 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mmis required on the unhinged
side.

View from above

3
1

80 mm 2

en06000135.vsd

Figure 454: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.

PosNo Description Type

1 Screw M4x10
2 Screw M5x8
3 Rear protection cover -

18.4.4 Side-by-side 19” rack mounting

18.4.4.1 Overview

IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19” or 3/4 x 19” and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-side
up to a maximum size of 19”. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side
mounting kit together with the 19” rack panel mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately.

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with
other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the
IED.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 909

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

18.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting

2
1

xx04000456.vsd

Figure 455: Side-by-side rack mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -

18.4.4.3 IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case

An 1/2 x 19” or 3/4 x 19” size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending
on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type
RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of,
for example, a DC-switch or two trip relays.

910 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

1 2

1 2 1 2

1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5

6 6 6 6

7 7 7 7

8 8 8 8

xx06000180.vsd

Figure 456: IED 670 (1/2 x 19”) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test
switch module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal
base.

18.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting

18.4.5.1 Overview

It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required.
If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting
details kit and the 19” panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has
to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19”.

With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is

obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDs
separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see
section "Flush mounting".

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with
other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the
IED.

Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT

switches on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 911

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

18.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting

1 2

xx06000181.vsd

Figure 457: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x
19” IED).

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -

18.5 Technical data

18.5.1 Enclosure

Table 571: Case

Material Steel sheet

Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)

912 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

Table 572: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Rear, sides, top and IP20
bottom

Table 573: Weight

Case size Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19” £ 10 kg
6U, 3/4 x 19” £ 15 kg
6U, 1/1 x 19” £ 18 kg

18.5.2 Connection system

Table 574: CT and VT circuit connectors

Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Terminal blocks of feed through 250 V AC, 20 A 4mm2
type
Terminal blocks suitable for ring 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2
lug terminals

Table 575: Binary I/O connection system

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2
2 × 1 mm2
Terminal blocks suitable for ring 300 V AC 3 mm2
lug terminals

Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered for

Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two
adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.

18.5.3 Influencing factors

REL 670 Technical reference manual 913

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Table 576: Temperature and humidity influence

Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence
Ambient temperature, +20 °C -10 °C to +55 °C 0.02% /°C
operate value
Relative humidity 10%-90% 10%-90% -
Operative range 0%-95%
Storage temperature -40 °C to +70 °C - -

Table 577: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on Reference value Within nominal range Influence
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 12% of EL 0.01% /%
Operative range Full wave rectified
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate ± 20% of EL 0.01% /%
value
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC ± 20%
90-250 V DC ± 20%
Interruption interval
0–50 ms No restart
0–∞ s Correct
behaviour at
power down
Restart time <180 s

Table 578: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–6)

Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, operate fr ± 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ± 1.0% / Hz
value fr ± 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

Harmonic frequency dependence 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ± 1.0%

(20% content)
Harmonic frequency dependence 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ± 6.0%
for distance protection (10%
content)

18.5.4 Type tests according to standard

Table 579: Electromagnetic compatibility

Test Type test values Reference standards
1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-22-1, Class III
Ring wave immunity test 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class III
Surge withstand capability test 2.5 kV, oscillatory ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
4.0 kV, fast transient
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV
Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
Table continued on next page

914 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 18
Hardware

Test Type test values Reference standards

Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge
Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-22-4,Class A
Surge immunity test 1-2 kV, 1.2/50 ms IEC 60255-22-5
high energy
Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V, IEC 60255-22-7, Class A
50 Hz
Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
Damped oscillatory magnetic field test 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
Radiated electromagnetic field 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-22-3
disturbance
Radiated electromagnetic field 20 V/m, 80-2500 MHz EN 61000-4-3
disturbance
Radiated electromagnetic field 35 V/m IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
disturbance 26-1000 MHz
Conducted electromagnetic field 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-22-6
disturbance
Radiated emission 30-1000 MHz IEC 60255-25
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-25

Table 580: Insulation

Test Type test values Reference standard
Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
Insulation resistance >100 MW at 500 VDC

Table 581: Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1
Storage test Test Ad for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 4 days at +40 °C and IEC 60068-2-78
humidity 93%
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55 °C IEC 60068-2-30
and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24
hours)

Table 582: CE compliance

Test According to
Immunity EN 50263
Emissivity EN 50263
Low voltage directive EN 50178

REL 670 Technical reference manual 915

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 18
Hardware

Table 583: Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standards
Vibration Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock and bump Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic Class I IEC 60255-21-3

916 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 19
Labels

Section 19 Labels

About this chapter

This chapter includes descriptions of the different labels and where to find them on
the IED.

19.1 Different labels

2
3

6
6 5
7
xx06000574.eps

REL 670 Technical reference manual 917

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 19
Labels

1 Product type, description and serial number

2 Order number, dc supply voltage and rated
frequency
3 Optional, customer specific information
4 Manufacturer
5 Transformer input module, rated currents
and voltages
6 Transformer designations

7 Ordering and serial number

918 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 19
Labels

4
en06000573.eps

1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label

4 Warning label

REL 670 Technical reference manual 919

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
920
 Section 20
Connection diagrams

Section 20 Connection diagrams

This chapter includes diagrams of the IED with all slot, terminal block and optical
connector designations. It is a necessary guide when making electrical and optical
connections to the IED.

REL 670 Technical reference manual 921

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 20
Connection diagrams

922 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 20
Connection diagrams

REL 670 Technical reference manual 923

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 20
Connection diagrams

924 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 20
Connection diagrams

REL 670 Technical reference manual 925

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 20
Connection diagrams

926 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 20
Connection diagrams

REL 670 Technical reference manual 927

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 20
Connection diagrams

928 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 20
Connection diagrams

REL 670 Technical reference manual 929

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 20
Connection diagrams

930 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 20
Connection diagrams

REL 670 Technical reference manual 931

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 20
Connection diagrams

932 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 20
Connection diagrams

REL 670 Technical reference manual 933

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 20
Connection diagrams

934 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 20
Connection diagrams

REL 670 Technical reference manual 935

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 20
Connection diagrams

936 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

About this chapter

This chapter describes current dependant time delay functionality. Both ANSI and
IEC Inverse time curves and tables are included.

21.1 Application

In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections in

different points in the network different time delays for the different relays are
normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In more
sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both
alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections
connected in series.

I> I> I>

xx05000129.vsd

Figure 458: Three overcurrent protections connected in series

Stage 3

Time
Stage 2 Stage 2

Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1

Fault point
position

en05000130.vsd

Figure 459: Definite time overcurrent characteristics

REL 670 Technical reference manual 937

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

Time

Fault point
position

en05000131.vsd

Figure 460: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time
and still assure the selectivity between protections.

To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:

• Difference between pick-up time of the protections to be co-ordinated

• Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
• Reset time of the protection
• Margin dependent of the time-delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

A1 B1
Feeder

I> I>

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

en05000132.vsd

Figure 461: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips

t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens

938 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

t=t3 is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous).
When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time
t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts
its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences
between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is
sent to the B1 circuit breaker.

At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault
current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults.
The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at
t2 the timer of protection A1 is active.

At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped.

In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible
when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time
shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type
of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following
applications:

• If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults,
starts and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the
system.
• Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
• Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the
release function.

21.2 Principle of operation

21.2.1 Mode of operation

The function can operate in a definite time delay mode or in a current dependent
inverse time delay mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based
standard curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the
component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.

Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.

If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal
startValue), a timer, according to the selected operate mode, is started. The component

REL 670 Technical reference manual 939

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used
in timing calculations.

In case of definite time the timer will run constantly until the trip time is reached or
until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and the
reset time has elapsed.

For definite time delay curve index no 5 (ANSI/IEEE Definite time) or 15 (IEC
Definite time) are chosen.

The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 180.

æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø (Equation 180)

where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the
set start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be
seen:

ææ i öp ö
(top - B × k ) × ç ç ÷ - C ÷ = A×k
è è in > ø ø (Equation 181)

where:
top is the operation time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according
to equation 182, in addition to the constant time delay:

t
ææ i öp ö
ò ç çè in > ÷ø - C ÷ × dt ³ A × k
0 è ø (Equation 182)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

940 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

n æ æ i( j ) ö p ö
Dt × å ç ç ÷ - C ÷ ³ A× k
j =1 è è in > ø ø (Equation 183)

where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault
has been detected, i.e. when

i
>1
in >
Dt is the time interval between two consecutive
executions of the protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm
when the trip time equation is fulfilled, i.e. when a
trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse-time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC
and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time characteristics are supported. The list of
characteristics in table 584 matches the list in the IEC 61850-7-4 spec.

Table 584: Curve name and index no.

Curve name Curve index no.
Curve name 1
ANSI Extremely Inverse 2
ANSI Very Inverse 3
ANSI Normal Inverse 4
ANSI Moderately Inverse 6
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse 7
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse 8
IEC Normal Inverse 9
IEC Very Inverse 10
IEC Inverse 11
IEC Extremely. Inverse 12
IEC Short Time Inverse 13
IEC Long Time Inverse 14

For the ANSI/IEEE characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to
table 585:

REL 670 Technical reference manual 941

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

Table 585: Inverse time curves for ANSI/IEEE characteristics

Parameter/operationMode A B C p
1 = ANSI Extremely inverse 28.2 0.1217 1 2.0
2 = ANSI Very inverse 19.61 0.491 1 2.0
3 = ANSI Inverse 0.0086 0.0185 1 0.02
4 = ANSI Moderately inverse 0.0515 0.1140 1 0.02
6 = ANSI Long-time extremely inverse 64.07 0.250 1 2.0
7 = ANSI Long-time very inverse 28.55 0.712 1 2.0
8 = ANSI Long-time inverse 0.086 0.185 1 0.02

For the IEC characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to
table 586:

Table 586: Inverse time curves for IEC characteristics

Parameter/operationMode A(b) B C p (a)
9 = IEC Normal inverse 0.14 0 1 0.02
10 = IEC Very inverse 13.5 0 1 1.0
11 = IEC Inverse 0.14 0 1 0.02
12 = IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 0 1 2.0
13 = IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0 1 0.04
14 = IEC Long-time inverse 120 0 1 1.0

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time delay of operation, see
figure 462.

942 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

Operate
time

tnMin

Current

en05000133.vsd

Figure 462: Minimum time delay operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be
set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse curve
for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the
operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.

In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional curves available; the 18 = RI time inverse and the 19 = RD time inverse.

The 18 = RI time inverse curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical

ASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 185:

æ ö
ç k ÷
t[ s ] = ç
in > ÷
ç 0.339 - 0.235 × ÷
è i ø (Equation 185)

where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.

The 19 = RD time inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex
protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for

REL 670 Technical reference manual 943

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

sensitive residual earth fault current protection, with ability to detect high resistive
earth faults. The curve is described by equation 186:

æ i ö
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 × ln ç ÷
è k × in > ø (Equation 186)

where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current

If the curve type is chosen as 17 the user can make a tailor made inverse time curve
according to the general equation 187.

æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø (Equation 187)

Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. We have the possibility
to choose between three different reset type delays. Available alternatives are listed
in table 587.

Table 587: Reset type delays

Curve name Curve index no.
Instantaneous 1
IEC Reset 2
ANSI Reset 3

If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops
below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.

If IEC reset is chosen the timer is reset the timer will be reset after a set constant time
when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.

If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault
clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis).
The timer will reset according to equation 188.

944 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

æ ö
ç tr
÷
t[ s ] = ç ÷
ç æ i ö2 ÷
çç ÷ -1 ÷
è è in > ø ø (Equation 188)

where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.

The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the

choice of time delay characteristic.

For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time
settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1 - 4 and 6 - 8) all three types of
reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time
reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time).

For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9 - 14) the possible delay time settings
are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three
types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set
constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current
dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given, see equation 189:

æ ö
ç tr
÷
t[ s ] = ç ÷
ç æ i ö pr ÷
çç ÷ - cr ÷
è è in > ø ø (Equation 189)

For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics (type 18 and 19) the possible delay
time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

21.3 Inverse characteristics

REL 670 Technical reference manual 945

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

Table 588: Inverse time characteristics ANSI

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate characteristic: k = 0.05-999 in steps of -
0.01 unless otherwise
æ A ö stated
t = ç P + B÷ × k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
)
-1

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse no 1 A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0, ANSI/IEEE C37.112, class 5

tr=29.1 + 30 ms
ANSI Very inverse no 2 A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse no 3 A=0.0086, B=0.0185,
P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse no 4 A=0.0515, B=0.1140,
P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse no 6 A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse no 7 A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse no 8 k=(0.01-1.20) in steps of
0.01
A=0.086, B=0.185,
P=0.02, tr=4.6

Table 589: Inverse time characteristics IEC

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate characteristic: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of -
0.01
æ A ö
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø

I = Imeasured/Iset

Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% of set time ± 10 ms
IEC Normal Inverse no 9 A=0.14, P=0.02 IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms
IEC Very inverse no 10 A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse no 11 A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse no 12 A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short-time inverse no 13 A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long-time inverse no 14 A=120, P=1.0
Table continued on next page

946 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy

Customer defined characteristic no 17 k=0.5-999 in steps of 0.1 IEC 60255, class 5 + 40 ms
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
æ A ö B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of
t = ç P + B÷ × k 0.01
ç (I - C ) ÷ C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of
è ø
0.1
P=(0.005-3.000) in steps
Reset characteristic: of 0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in
TR steps of 0.001
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR ) CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of
0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps
I = Imeasured/Iset of 0.001

RI inverse characteristic no 18 k=(0.05-999) in steps of IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

0.01
1
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I

I = Imeasured/Iset

Logarithmic inverse characteristic no 19 k=(0.05-1.10) in steps of IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

0.01
æ Iö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è kø

I = Imeasured/Iset

REL 670 Technical reference manual 947

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

Table 590: Inverse time characteristics for Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of Class 5 +40 ms
0.01
k
t =
æ U < -U
ö
ç ÷
è U< ø
U< = Uset
U = UVmeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ 32 × U < -U - 0.5 ö
ç ÷
è U < ø

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
é ù A = (0.005-200.000) in
ê ú steps of 0.001
k×A B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
t =ê ú+D
ê æ U < -U P
ú of 0.01
ö
êçB × -C÷ ú C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
ëè U < ø û D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
U< = Uset P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
U = Umeasured of 0.001

948 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

Table 591: Inverse time characteristics for Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of Class 5 +40 ms
0.01
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k × 480
t =
2.0
æ 32 × U - U > - 0.5 ö
ç ÷ - 0.035
è U > ø
Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k × 480
t =
3.0
æ 32 × U - U > - 0.5 ö
ç ÷ - 0.035
è U > ø
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k×A A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
æB × U - U > ö B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
ç -C÷
of 0.01
è U > ø
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001

REL 670 Technical reference manual 949

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

Table 592: Inverse time characteristics for Two step residual overvoltage protection (POVM, 59N)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of Class 5 +40 ms
0.01
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k × 480
t =
2.0
æ 32 × U - U > - 0.5 ö
ç ÷ - 0.035
è U > ø
Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k × 480
t =
3.0
æ 32 × U - U > - 0.5 ö
ç ÷ - 0.035
è U > ø
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
k×A A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
æB × U - U > ö B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
ç -C÷
of 0.01
è U > ø
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001

950 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k=
15
10
7
1
5

3
2

1
0.1
0.5

0.01
1 10 100 I/I>
xx05000764.vsd

Figure 463: ANSI – Extremely inverse

REL 670 Technical reference manual 951

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k=
15

10
1 7
5

3
2

1
0.1
0.5

0.01
1 10 100 I/I>
xx05000765.vsd

Figure 464: ANSI – Very inverse

952 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k=
15

10
1 7
5

3
2

1
0.1
0.5

0.01
1 10 100 I/I>

xx05000766.vsd

Figure 465: ANSI – Inverse

REL 670 Technical reference manual 953

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

100

k=
15
10
10
7
5

1
1

0.5

0.1

0.01
1 10 100 I/I>
xx05000767.vsd

Figure 466: Moderately inverse

954 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k=
1.1
0.9
0.7
1 0.5

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.1 0.05

0.01
1 10 100 I/I>
xx05000768.vsd

Figure 467: IEC – Normal inverse

REL 670 Technical reference manual 955

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

100

10

1
k=
1.1
0.9
0.7
0.5

0.3
0.1 0.2

0.1

0.05

0.01
1 10 100 I/I>

xx05000769.vsd

Figure 468: Very inverse

956 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 21
Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k=

0.1 1.1
0.9
0.7
0.5

0.3
0.2

0.01 0.1
1 10 100 I/I>

0.05 xx05000770.vsd

Figure 469: Extremely inverse

REL 670 Technical reference manual 957

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
958
 Section 22
Glossary

Section 22 Glossary

About this chapter

This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB
technical documentation.

22.1 Glossary

AC Alternating current
A/D converter Analog to digital converter
ADBS Amplitude dead -band supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ArgNegRes Setting parameter/ZD/
ArgDir Setting parameter/ZD/
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFP Breaker failure protection
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BR External bi-stable relay
BS British standard
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals
between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication
CAP 531 Configuration and programming tool

REL 670 Technical reference manual 959

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 22
Glossary

CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined mega pulses per second
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Co-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two
twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both
directions
COMTRADE Standard format according to IEC 60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four
twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both
directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals
CPU Central processor unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed auto-reclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US
developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std.
1379-2000
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler

960 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 22
Glossary

DSP Digital signal processor

DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electro magnetic compatibility
EMF Electro motive force
EMI Electro magnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
ESD Electrostatic discharge
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,
data and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up
to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by
local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced
and unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver
module
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSM GPS time synchronization module
HDLC protocol High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC
standard
HFBR connector Plastic fiber connector
type
HMI Human machine interface
HSAR High speed auto reclosing
HV High voltage
HVDC High voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating dead band supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements
for protective current transformers for transient performance

REL 670 Technical reference manual 961

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 22
Glossary

IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial

master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation Automation communication standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on
twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.
References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
mezzanine card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for
the electrical EMF Electro Motive Force.
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available
in the IED they are referred to as instances of that function.
One instance of a function is identical to another of the same
kind but will have a different number in the IED user
interfaces. The word instance is sometimes defined as an item
of information that is representative of a type. In the same way
an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type
of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol
suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless,
best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packet
routing, fragmentation and re-assembly through the data link
layer.
2. Ingression protection according to IEC standard
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 40
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 54
IRF Internal fail signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,
standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line differential communication module
LDD Local detection device

962 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 22
Glossary

LED Light emitting diode

LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally
developed for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OEM Optical ethernet module
OLTC On load tap changer
OV Over voltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example a distance relay is over-reaching when
the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set
reach. The relay “sees” the fault but perhaps it should not have
seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM 600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PISA Process interface for sensors & actuators
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity
to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX

REL 670 Technical reference manual 963

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
Section 22
Glossary

RCA Relay characteristic angle

REVAL Evaluation software
RFPP Resistance for phase-to-phase faults
RFPE Resistance for phase-to-earth faults
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data
in point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SC Switch or push-button to close
SCS Station control system
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SLM Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC
communication.
SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant
impedance.
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize
computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.
SPA Strömberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave
protocol for point-to-point communication
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push-button to trip
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport
layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de
facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD

964 Technical reference manual REL 670

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
 Section 22
Glossary

Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for internet working

and encompasses both network layer and transport layer
protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific
protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US
Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these,
including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TNC connector Threaded Neill Concelman, A threaded constant impedance
version of a BNC connector
TPZ, TPY, TPX, Current transformer class according to IEC
TPS
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example a distance relay is under-reaching
when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set
reach. The relay does not “see” the fault but perhaps it should
have seen it. See also Overreach.
U/I-PISA Process interface components that deliver measured voltage
and current values
UTC Coordinated universal time. A coordinated time scale,
maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures
(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination
of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from
International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole
number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal
Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth"s
orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing
the Earth"s irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The
Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour
clock and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane
and ship navigation, where it also sometimes known by the
military name, "Zulu time". "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet
stands for "Z" which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom
equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the
residual or the earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the
residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

REL 670 Technical reference manual 965

1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
966